vol. 3 electrical and mechanical specifications

AEB-740-08 REV.00

AL SENDIAN TOWER (2B+G+27F+PENTHOUSE) AT

PLOT MIX-49, LUSAIL MARINA DISTRICT

AL SENDIAN TOWER (2B+G+27F+PENTHOUSE) FOR SENDIAN GROUP PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 3 – ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL

AEB-740-08 REV.00

0 DECEMBER 2013 ISSUE FOR TENDER

REV. DATE ISSUE PARTICULARS

AEB-740-08 REV.00

This specification document is part of overall “Tender Documentation” and is to be read in conjunction with the other parts, including the General Conditions of the Contract, The particular conditions of the Contract, the Drawings, and other Referred Documents of these Specifications. The Tenderer should ensure that they have been fully comprehended and

included in the Scope of Works under this Contract.

AEB-740-08 REV.00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 19 Plumbing, SNG & Irrigation Installations

1. General 2. Materials

Section 20 Drainage Installation

1. General 2. System Network

Section 21 Electrical Installation

1. General 2. Electrical Supply and Distribution

Section 22 Air Conditioning Installation

1. Commercial Specification 2. Technical Specifications

Section 23 Fire Fighting Installation

1. General 2. Products 3. Execution

SECTION – 19

PLUMBING, SNG &

IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS

AL SENDIAN TOWER (2B+G+27F+PENTHOUSE) ON PLOT COM-49 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

AEB-740-08-REV. 0 S-19-1/64 PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

19.1.00 PLUMBING GENERAL 19.1.01 Site 19.1.02 Site Conditions 19.1.03 Definitions 19.1.04 Scope of Works 19.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulations 19.1.06 Programme 19.1.07 Contract Drawings 19.1.08 Working Drawings 19.1.09 Co-ordination of Drawings 19.1.10 Material Submittals 19.1.11 Material Inspection 19.1.12 Alternative Materials 19.1.13 Setting Out of Works 19.1.14 Safety 19.1.15 Contractor‟s License 19.1.16 Service Connection and Permits 19.1.17 Damage to Plant and Materials 19.1.18 Protective Finishes 19.1.19 Works Test and Inspection 19.1.20 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 19.1.21 As Built Drawings 19.1.22 Period of Maintenance




19.2.00 PLUMBING MATERIALS

19.2.01 General Pipeworks and Fittings 19.2.02 Installation, Storage and Protection 19.2.03 Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers 19.2.04 Pipe Sleeves 19.2.05 Valves and Stop Cocks 19.2.06 Strainers, Automatic Air Vents and Drain Cocks 19.2.07 Float Ball Valves and Float Switches 19.2.08 Trench Excavation 19.2.09 Pipework Insulation 19.2.10 Water Media Filters 19.2.11 Sterilization of Water Services 19.2.12 Incoming Water Supply and Meter 19.2.13 Testing and Commissioning 19.2.14 Pre Commissioning Works 19.2.15 Labels and Indentification 19.2.16 Integrated Hot Water System-Solar with Heat Pump Back Up 19.2.17 Water Storage Tanks 19.2.18 Booster/Lift Pump Set for Cold Water Supply 19.2.19 Pressure Reducing Valve 19.2.20 SNG System 19.2.21 Irrigation System Specifications 19.2.22 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers




19.1.01 SITE Lusail, Doha, Qatar

19.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials and Equipments shall be

capable of withstanding the following site conditions:

1. Maximum Ambient : 50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in summer Temperature & 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in winter

2. Altitude : Sea Level

3. Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 %

4. Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Kms. per Hour

5. Prevailing Wind : North and NorthWesterly

6. Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular

7. Annual Rainfall : 50mm between January & April

19.1.03 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall

mean: Site : The Locations where the works are to be carried out. QCS : Qatar Construction Specifications BS : British Standard Specifications CP : British Standard Code of Practice Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and the

schedules therein. Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the

purpose of execution of work at site. As Built Drawings : This is the true record of the actual work carried out at site. Works : To include the provisions for all the materials and

works to be carried out by the contractor as per these




specifications and for the satisfactory completion of the installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the Consultant in writing.

Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing. Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing. Provide : Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission. Install : Shall mean install, test and commission. Furnish : Shall mean supply only. Concealed : Shall mean hidden from normal sight in the shafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions. Exposed : Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces, which may be reached without the use ladders or any other temporary means of access.

19.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, installation testing and commissioning of the Plumbing materials, fixtures and equipment as per specifications drafted in these sections and drawings. The contractor shall provide complete installation of the project and other associated works such as supporting structures, ancillary works etc. Brief descriptions of plumbing works are as follows:

1. Potable Cold water storage and distribution network. 2. Solar Hot water system 3. External services works as well as connection to infrastructure

19.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition. The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and unskilled labours under the supervision of competent Engineers to complete the works in accordance with the programme.

The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with this

specification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities in the state of Qatar Q.G.E.W.C (Water Division) and fire department and to the relevant B.S specification.

i. The equipment shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of practice (current editions including all amendments) and QCS.




ii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipment other than the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right for such approval/s.

iii. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract

drawings but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.

iv. Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such

cases at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the construction, the consultant‟s decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.

v. In case of any ambiguity or discrepancy in the project specification, the

government published specifications (QCS) shall be adapted. vi. It is contractor‟s responsibility to study the specification in detail and raise and

clear all doubts or issues that need clarification in order to execute the job.The tender drawings are a guide line and the contractor must prepare a detailed drawing, which after Engineers approval shall be issued for construction. All enquiries shall be raised through a RFI only (Request for information). No delay or any compromise on the specification or quality of work is accepted on any account.

19.1.06 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method

or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the Program:

1. Mobilization 2. Drawings and Material Submittals 3. Approvals 4. Equipment Deliveries 5. First Fix 6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works 7. Second Fix 8. Fixing of Accessories 9. Testing 10. Commissioning and Handing Over




19.1.07 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The Plumbing tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the

Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement required for the project.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor‟s

responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the consultant, in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of draw offs, valves, and other

accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders‟ work associated with these drawings.

19.1.08 WORKING DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:100 for plans, 1:10

for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant‟s approval. The contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:

i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and

other accessories and fittings. ii. Typical connection details of the various Plumbing requirements of

appliances, like Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc., iii. Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect

to the other services Installations like, Electrical, Air-conditioning & Ventilation and Drainage.

iv. Levels, Center Lines of the pipework installations and the details of supports.

19.1.09 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for

the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical, and Drainage systems.

The Main contractor shall ensure that all the working drawings are properly

coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be installed in such a manner to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.




19.1.10 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the

specifications and tender drawings. The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the

equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary review and approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted in

the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.

In case of items involving aesthetic, sink taps, Showers, Draw offs etc., samples

must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the

Materials submittals of the Plumbing Materials & Equipments in the following proforma to the consultant:

i. Submittal Number ii. Type of Material iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent iv. Date of Approval v. Date of Order / Order Number vi. Mode of Delivery (Air, Land or Sea) vii. ETA on Site viii. Status as on date of Report

a. Equipment Supply

All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local

agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. Above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,

then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from the consultant specifically.




b. Equipment Size and Delivery Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations

in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction program and the method of access.

c. Design References Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires

amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the change in the manufacturer‟s range of production or availability etc., The contractor shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Consultant‟s advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration shall be applicable, as the contractor is deemed

to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the execution.

19.1.11 MATERIAL INSPECTION

The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the

materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at site which is not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or

the sample submitted shall also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor‟s account.

The contractor shall have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace

with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do so, the client shall have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

Materials Storage The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials

at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be strictly as per QCS section 1-11, 1-12 & 1-13.




19.1.12 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule

of Manufacturer‟s. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the equipment or material for the Consultant‟s consideration. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives shall be considered by the Consultant, before the tender is accepted and the Consultant‟s decision shall be final regarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same shall be confirmed

in writing by the Consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment, materials or fittings shall be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time shall not permit, then such replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expenses etc.

19.1.13 SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The locations of Sink taps, showers, draw offs and their piping routes, etc., as

indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed architectural drawings and co-ordinated with furnishing and other services.

19.1.14 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower

and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipment at any point of time.

19.1.15 CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE

The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage

works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work. The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the

Mechanical Engineer, Foreman, and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience shall be rejected by the consultant.




19.1.16 SERVICE CONNECTION AND PERMITS The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work

and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any connected works to others.

All statutory permits from Fire, Water, and Sewerage Department are secured by the

Consultant. The plumbing contractor shall however coordinate all inspection works and liaise with the State departments regarding all pipework and payment of fees, etc., when connecting city water mains connections to the mains. The contractor is required to produce certificates of approval of all materials and equipment by the relevant authorities when requested by the Consultant

The plumbing contractor shall coordinate connection works of water/sewer and fire to

the city mains with relevant local authorities of works.

19.1.17 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS

Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used in

the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary instructions shall be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the Consultant, shall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” condition following

such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.

19.1.18 PROTECTIVE FINISHES

The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in

this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic conditions. All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.

19.1.19 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Consultant or Consultant‟s representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work executed by the contractor.

The Consultant shall advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the

contract the list of works that are to be inspected and the contractor shall give the




Consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which the plant or work shall be ready for testing.

The Consultant shall signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates in original to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.

19.1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents the

operating instructions and maintenance manuals along with the softcopy indicating the following:

a. Step by step operating procedures. b. Preventive maintenance schedule. c. Technical literature. d. Spare parts list e. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. Telephone no., and contact

person. - Local as well as overseas. f. Work test certificates, if any. g. Routine Test results carried out at site.

19.1.21 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall

be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shall be supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings, which are to be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.

Three sets of hard copies drawings along with the softcopy shall be submitted after approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.

19.1.22 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE

The contractor shall guarantee the entire Plumbing System installed against Faulty /

improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days (Four Hundred) from the date, the Completion Certificate is issued, also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states

that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of notification at no additional cost to the contract.

In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within

the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.




19.2.00 MATERIALS

DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

19.2.01 GENERAL PIPE WORKS AND FITTINGS

a) All pipe located at roof, shafts and risers, tanker filling pipes– hot and cold water pipes shall be Copper pipe to BS 2871 part 1-1971 Table “X”, fittings to BSEN 1254-3 : 1998. All tubes and fittings shall be stamped with the British Standard kitemark and copper alloy fittings shall carry a CR Mark.

b) Infrastruction tie-in connection – External cold water supply pipes/fittings from

infrastructure tie in connection of 63 diameter HDPE pipe with 40 diameter water meterage as indicated in infra for potable water and fire services dwg # GQ626/3001/CP1- SHT.020 Rev 15. Exact location/pipe material of the house connection from the main line up to the capped end one meter inside the plot boundary including isolation valve shall be verified on site.

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL This specification provides minimum requirements for HDPE pipe and fittings to be used in the design and construction from external tie connection up to connections to building internals as to (CWF) cold water feed lines supplying the different storage tanks for the domestic water, fire compartmented tanks both located at the third basement and the irrigation storage tank at first basement.

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope – This section specifies high density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) and fittings

for water utility use as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified herein. a. Furnish, Install, and Test HDPE pipe as indicated and specified in this

section, and as referred to in related sections, and as shown on the drawings.

b. The means and methods, including the testing for acceptance shall conform to all applicable standards as noted herein with the intention of providing a leak-free system to the piping network.

1.02 REFERENCES a. ANSI/AWWA C651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

b. AWWA M55 Manual of Water Supply Practices, PE Pipe–Design

and Installation




c. PPI TR-34 Disinfection of Newly Constructed Polyethylene Water Mains

d. ASTM F 714 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)

Plastic Pipe (SDR- PR) Based on Outside Diameter

e. ASTM F905 Standard Practice for Qualification of Polyethylene

Saddle-Fused Joints

f. ASTM F 1055 Standard Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing

g. ASTM F 1290 Standard Practice for Electrofusion Joining Polyolefin

Pipe and Fittings

h. ASTM F 2164 Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Piping Systems Using Hydrostatic Pressure

i. ASTM F 2620 Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of

Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

PART 2 – HDPE FOR 3 INCH AND SMALLER PIPE PER AWWA C901

2.1 PIPE A. Polyethylene pipe shall be made from a HDPE material having a minimum

material designation code of PE 4710 or PE 3608. The material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3350 and shall have a minimum cell classification of PE445474C for PE 4710 and PE345464C for PE 3608. In addition, the pipe shall be listed as meeting NSF-61.

B. The pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C901 C. Approved manufacturers are: (As per Engr‟s approved material and/or as

per vendors list)

2.2 FITTINGS

A. Butt Fusion Fittings - Fittings shall be made of either PE4710 or PE 3608, with a minimum Cell Classification as noted in 2A.01A. Butt Fusion Fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3261. Molded and fabricated fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to the pipe unless otherwise specified in the plans.

B. Electrofusion Fittings - Fittings shall be PE4710 or PE 3608, with a minimum

Cell Classification as noted in 2A.01A. Electrofusion Fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM F1055. Fittings shall have a pressure rating




equal to the pipe unless otherwise specified on the plans. C. Flanges and Mechanical Joint Adapters (MJ Adapters) – Flanges

and Mechanical Joint Adapters shall be PE4710 or PE 3608, with a minimum Cell Classification as noted in 2A.01A. Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters can be made to ASTM D 3261 or if machined, must meet the requirements of ASTM F 2206. Flanges and MJ Adapters shall have a pressure rating equal to the pipe unless otherwise specified on the plans. Markings for molded or machined flange adapters or MJ Adapters shall be per ASTM D 3261. Fabricated (including machined) flange adapters shall be per ASTM F 2206.

D. Service connections shall be electrofusion saddles with a brass or stainless steel

threaded outlet, electrofusion saddles, sidewall fusion branch saddles, tapping tees, or mechanical saddles.

For electrofusion saddles with threaded outlet the size of the outlet shall be one inch IPS unless a larger size is shown on the plans. Electrofusion saddles shall be made from materials required in part 2A.02 B. Electrofusion Fittings. For sidewall fusion saddles, the size of the saddle shall be as indicated on the plans. The saddle can be made in accordance to ASTM D 3261 or ASTM F2206. After installation, approximately ¼” of the PE pipe shall be visible beyond the saddle to confirm that proper surface preparation occurred. Saddle faces that do not provided ¼ inch of area beyond the saddle are not acceptable. Tapping tees shall be made to ASTM D3261 or D2683. Mechanical strap-on saddles can only be used where there use on PE pipe is approved by the mechanical saddle manufacturer. The body of the saddle shall be stainless steel, epoxy coated cast iron or brass. The gasket material and design must be acceptable for PE pipe. The outlet shall be threaded for one inch IPS unless a larger size is shown on the plans. Mechanical strap-on saddles shall be installed per the manufacturer‟s instructions.

3.0 TESTING

A. Hydrostatic leakage testing is recommended and shall comply with ASTM F

2164, ASTM F 1412, AWWA Manual of Practice M55 Chapter 9, and PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe Chapter 2 (2

nd Edition). If the test section fails

this test, the Contractor shall repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Pneumatic (compressed air) leakage testing of HDPE pressure piping is

prohibited for safety reasons.




C. Polypropylene PP-R Pipes and Fittings

All hot and cold water pipes for internal works (Inside toilets, pantries, canteen) for the building shall be in polypropylene plastic PP-R pipes to DIN 8078. Fittings shall be both welding fittings and metal insert fittings. All metal inserts shall be in dezincification resistant brass. Jointing between pipes and fittings shall be made by melting the parts. Locations where pipe is to be connected to equipment, PP-R fittings with metal insert shall be used. Polypropylene valves shall be used where available with manufacturers in their product range. All the components inside the valve in contract with water shall be dezincification resistant brass. For those valves (type and sizes) which are not available in the PP-R pipe manufacturer range, shall be made dezincification resistant brass as described in clause below. All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be suitable for a working pressure of 6 bars at 70

0C for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene

piping installation including supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance with manufacturer‟s recommendations. The contractor shall make allowance for expansion in the pipework. The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years.

PIPING SPECIALITIES

A. Water Hammer arresters: Bellows type with stainless steel casing and bellows pressure rated for 250 PSI tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH – 201

B. Relief valves: Provide proper size for relief valves in accordance with ASME Boiler and pressure vessel codes, for indicated capacity of the appliances for which installed.

19.2.02 INSTALLATION, STORAGE AND PROTECTION All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and due allowance made for thermal movement. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from one manufacturer only,

who shall be nominated by the contractor in writing and approved by the Consultant prior to ordering any materials. Materials from different manufacturers shall not be incorporated into the system. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be stored in properly ventilated well-supported racked storage sheds.

All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance arranged to

or at right-angles to the structural member of the building, giving maximum headroom and not obstructing window or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers, projections and into recesses forming part of the structural works whether so indicated on the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a minimum of 50 mm clear below to the finished floor level and at least 25 mm clear to the finished wall face.




The pipeworks, which are to be insulated, contractor shall allow space for each pipe around its whole circumference. Adequate clearance shall be provided between insulated pipework running together and adjacent to walls and floors. Clearances between insulation and floor and insulation and wall shall be as for bare pipework.

No joints shall be formed in the thickness of walls, floor slabs or roof slabs. No

pipework shall be chased into floor slabs, roof slabs or walls. During the installation period open ends of pipework shall be capped off using purpose-made plugs or blank counterflanges. Pipework shall be kept free of dirt and other foreign debris at all times.

All pipework fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation

shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be provided as appropriate for the diameter pipework in order to allow valves and equipment removal.

All pipework shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.

All low points in the system shall have draincocks fitted and high points shall have air bottles or automatic air vents.

19.2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS All pipework shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free

movement due to expansion, contractions, vibration or other changes in the system. Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes of direction. Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS 5572: 1978. Vertical rising pipes particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipework.

Pipework up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be supported clear of the

structure with cast brass brackets. Where exposed to view, bright finish brass hospital brackets shall be used with rawl plugs and brass screws.

All multi runs of pipework within false ceilings or service shafts shall be supported on

purpose designed proprietary brackets suitable for carrying more than one pipe run, and shall be secured using expanding plugs or other purpose designed fixing devices. Softwood plugs shall not be allowed. All purpose designed proprietary brackets shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval prior to ordering.

All G.I hangers and supporting brackets shall be painted with one coat of red oxide

and one coat of Galvanizing paint. The spacing of supports where not specified must not exceed the spacing given in the following schedules. Where one-support carries more than one pipe diameter the spacing shall be that specified for the smallest diameter.

All supports and hangers for GI piping shall be ferrous. Supports for copper pipes

shall be non ferrous and chromium plated, wherever specified. Brackets or supports




shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other fittings requiring maintenance.

All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at centres

as detailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support, the spacing shall be of a shorter interval.

All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unless

otherwise indicated, pipe hangers shall be spaced as follows.

a. 20 to 32mm Not over 2.4m apart - 10mm rods b. 40 to 100mm Not over 3.0m apart - 15mm rods c. Over 100mm Not over 3.6m apart - 22mm rods

Horizontal steel pipes on the roof shall be supported to prevent sagging or swinging. The pipes supports spacing shall be as follows.

a. 20 to 32mm - 2.4m b. 40 to 65 mm - 3.0m c. 80 to 100mm - 3.6m d. 125 to 250mm - 4.5m

Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are removed. All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc. necessary for fastening of hangers shall be furnished by the Contractor. Alll hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be supported. Oversized hangers shall be permitted. Details of hangers and supports to be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fitting. All hangers shall be provided with locak-nuts and have provisio for vertical adjustment of pipes. Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trpeze type hangers of G.I construction. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by the hangers consisting of malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type hangers or roller hangers where specified. Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipes supported form the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel clamps securely bolted on the pipimg with the end extention bearings on the building construction. Piping shall be achored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design. Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have tongue and groove design rubber support inserts of approved make or high density insulation capable of withstanding the compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal to metal contact.




All internal pipe supports, hangers and achors etc. are to be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer. All external pipes supports including ground floor pump room and plant room at loft area etc. shall be finally painted with two coats of enamel paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.

19.2.04 PIPE SLEEVES Pipe sleeves shall be supplied where pipework passes through walls, floors, footings

and waterproofed membranes. Sleeves shall be built in the correct locations at the time required by the main contractor. The inside diameter of all sleeves shall not be less than 15 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. Where pipes pass through buried walls or footings, sleeves shall be 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. The space between the pipe sleeve shall be neatly packed using asbestos string or rope to prevent the passage of noise, vermin or smoke. Sleeves shall not protrude beyond the finished surface. Where pipework is exposed to view and passes through wall or floor, chromium plated copper pipe flanges of the correct pipe diameter shall be fitted.

19.2.05 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS All valves and stopcocks shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of

Electricity and Water, Water Department and shall be dezinctification resistant. Valves shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed below or similar approved and shall conform to BS 5154 made of gun metal,non rising stem,screwed bonnet,one piece wedge type and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure. All valves shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval obtained in writing prior to ordering.

All valves shall be fitted in readily accessible positions. They shall be of even

thickness throughout, clean and smooth from scale. All stuffing boxes shall be packed with material specially selected and recommended by the manufacturer for the particular service in which each valve is used.

Non-return valves shall be screwed BSPT or flange BSEN 1092- 2 : 1997 in

accordance with the valve schedule in this specification. All non-return valves shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal mounting and shall be fitted in readily accessible positions.

Shall be installed in discharge line of pumps and other locations directed by the

Engineer to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of gun metal, swing pattern, metal to metal seats and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure conforming to BS 5154.




19.2.06 STRAINERS, AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS AND DRAIN COCKS All strainers shall be fitted in a readily accessible position and adequate access shall

be allowed for maintenance and cleaning of strainer basket. All strainers shall be manufactured by specialists and have a stainless steel 80 mesh screen basket.

Automatic air vents shall be fitted at all high points in the system and other points

where necessary. Shall be made of high pressure type made of DZR brass. All air eliminators shall manufactured by specialists and a discharge pipe shall be run

from the automatic air vent to a convenient position to drain. All draincocks shall be of the same manufacture and be in accordance with BS 2879.

Generally draincocks shall be provided at all low points in the system and other points where necessary and as directed by the Consultant.

19.2.07 FLOAT BALL VALVES, FLOAT SWITCHES Float ball valves on the mains shall be of equilibrium type, full bore, 6 bar

medium/high pressure to BS 1212 Part 1. Float switches sitted to the water tanks shall be a mercury switch in a plastic casing

suspended from its own cable.The float switch casing shall be made of polypropylene cable shall be sheathed with PVC compound. It shall be suitable for water temperature up to 50°C.

19.2.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION Excavation work shall be executed in whatever ground conditions may be

encountered to the line and levels as detailed on the drawings. The contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and any claim

arising from accident or damage to the public, adjoining property or labour on site. The contractor shall provide all necessary steel sheeting, timber supports, strutting and shoring to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant. Any slip or fall shall be immediately made good by the contractor at his own expense and the contractor shall take sole responsibility for any claim for damages arising out of inadequate support of excavations.

All excavation shall be maintained dry and free from water.To achieve this, the

contractor shall, without additional charge, provide all necessary pumping equipment, sumps, drains and soakaways. The contractor shall also be responsible for operating, running and maintaining all equipment at all times to ensure excavations are free from water.

All obstructions shall be broken out and voids and soft spots filled with concrete

grade 15 or as otherwise instructed by the consultant at the Contractor's expense.




Granular Bedding Pipework shall be laid on a granular bed with a minimum cover above the crown of

the pipe as follows:

1. Pipe lines 600-mm cover when there is no traffic on the ground above the pipeline.

2. Pipe lines 1000-mm cover when there is traffic on the ground above the pipeline.

The granular bedding shall comprise grave, stone chippings or crushed stone to

pass 12 mm sieve and be retained on a 5 mm sieve mixed with free draining course sand, in the ratio of two parts crushed stone or gravel to every one part of sand. Bedding material shall not contain more than 0.3% sulphate nor shall it be obtained from locations where 0.1 % sulphate is present in the ground water.

Bedding shall be laid 150 mm deep along the length of the trench and compacted

prior to work commencing on the pipe laying. After pipe laying, inspection and testing, a further 300 mm of bedding material shall be compacted by hand above the uppermost crown of the pipeline along its entire length. The bedding material shall span the entire width of the trench and shall be laid in not more than 150-mm deep layers, each layer being compacted by hand.

Laying of Pipelines and Fittings All underground pipelines shall be laid to true levels in straight lines to even

gradients shown on the drawings. Pipeline laying shall not commence until the Consultant has inspected and approved the granular bed and trench. Care shall be taken when laying pipes that no bedding material or building debris is pushed into the barrel of the pipe of fitting.

Backfilling Excavations After compaction of granular bed and surround, the trench shall be backfilled using

selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations proceeding it have been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm, each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 meters.

19.2.09 PIPEWORK INSULATIONS All thermal insulation shall comply with British Standard BS 5970: 1981 and BS 5442:

1981. All domestic hot and cold water pipes which are exposed to sun shall be insulated.




Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in accordance with this specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework prior to pressure testing and inspection by the Consultant giving clear instructions for further insulation applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of insulation to be applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the contractor shall allow for the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and equipment for inspection by the consultant. If the insulation proves to be of the thickness specified, then the cut section shall be made good and the whole installation completed. Should any cut section show a deficiency of thickness, further sections shall be cut at the direction of the consultant for inspection. If a deficiency of thickness or any other defects are found, the contractor shall remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the consultant directs and then shall supply, deliver and apply new insulation complying with the specification and restore it to the satisfaction of the consultant. This work shall be carried out at the contractor's own expense.

Thermal insulation shall be applied to all valves, strainers, non-return valves,

draincocks, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points. Insulation of these components in the pipework system up to and including 65-mm diameter pipework shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suit and of the same size as the line pipework.

No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings or vertical and horizontal

builders works shafts prior to inspection and approval by the consultant. Thermal insulation shall be 25 mm thick with a density of 48 kg/m2 rigid fiberglass

sections as set down in British Standard Specification BS 5422: 2001. The sections shall be covered with flameproof calico lapped and pasted down using approved adhesive and secured using aluminium bands at 1.2-m centres.

All piping, branching above false ceiling shall be insulated as per polypropylene manufacturers and with cloth fibre insulation.

Where exposed to view, the insulation shall be painted with two coats primer and

one finishing coat rubberized paint to an approved colour prior to the fixing of aluminium bands at 1.2 m centres. The finishing colour shall be to British Standard BS 1710: 1975, identification of pipelines complete with direction arrows.

19.2.10 WATER MEDIA FILTERS

Water Media Filters A packaged multimedia filtration system consists of (2 duty-1 standby) filters shall be

supplied for turbidity odor and smell removal. Tanks shall be of electric welded pressure vessel quality low carbon steel

construction rated for 100 psig, working pressure and hydrostatically tested at 50% in excess of the working pressure.




Access opening for tank shall be provided. Support for tanks shall be structural steel strap legs welded to lower tank head or adjustable jacklegs.

Tank shall be sandblasted internally to white metal, and then coated with 8-10 mils

DFT epoxy polyamide. The exterior surface shall be cleaned and coated with 2-3 mils DFT rust resistant primer.

Upper distribution system shall be of the baffle type to evenly distribute the water

over the entire tank area. Lower distribution system shall be of a proven design constructed with individual fine

slotted non-clogging polyethylene strainers arranged for even flow distribution through the resin bed.

The main operating valve shall be an industrial Automatic Multiport diaphragm type,

slow opening and closing, free of water hammer. The diaphragm assembly shall be fully guided on its perimeter when pressure actuated from one position to another to assure a smooth reliable shut-off without sticking. There shall be no contract of dissimilar metals within the valve and no special tools shall be required to service the valve.

The manufacturer of the equipment shall manufacture the main operating valve.

Single units shall have an internal automatic by-pass of untreated water during regeneration. Valve shall have a treated water sampling cock.

An automatic flow controller shall be provided to maintain proper backwash and flush

rates over wide variations in operating pressures and require not field adjustment. A factory-mounted and wired cycle controller shall incorporate an adjustable time

switch with multiported pilot valve to control all steps of automatic regeneration. Provision for push-button initiated regeneration shall be included.

An electrical signaling device shall initiate regeration with 240V / 1 ph / 50 Hz power supply.

All filter media shall be of good quality possessing characteristics of durability, long

life and resistance to attribution and shall not impart taste, odor or colour to the water being treated. Filter media shall be selected for removing particulates down to 10-micron size.

The filtration unit shall be supplied to remove suspended matters, dechlorination and

organic removal and odor removal. The granular media (multilayered) shall consist of three distinct filter layers in

addition to a support layer. Each layer shall be of selected density and particle size to stratify in the same order following a backwash. The filters‟ layers shall be stratified with the coarsest layer at the top and the finest layer at the bottom. Particle retention shall be 10 micron or larger.




19.2.11 STERILIZATION OF WATER SERVICES

All pipework, fittings, and storage tanks shall be sterilized starting with the external

water supplies, storage tanks and finally the water distribution system. Sterilization shall be done by contractor who specialized and certified by the water department to perform such works.

No sterilization shall be carried out until the system has been flushed out and

approval received in writing from the Consultant to commence sterilization. The following procedure shall be adopted for sterilization of the water distribution

systems:

a. Flush out all tanks, pipework, etc. b. Recharge all water systems adding sufficient sterilization chemical at the roof tank

(loft area) to a concentration of 1-2 parts per million. The concentration shall be confirmed by using a measuring instrument approved by the water department.

c. Starting with the draw-off point nearest the cold-water storage tank, each draw-off

point shall be opened until chlorine odour is present at each draw-off. d. When all draw-off points have discharged chlorinated water, the cold water

storage tanks shall be recharged adding sufficient sterilization chemical to give the correct concentration of 1-2 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall then remain charged for a minimum period of one hour.

e. The water shall then be chemically analyzed. Should no residual chlorine be

found, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Drain down all storage tanks and pipework, flushing out tank and pipework, and

run the system clean prior to retesting of the water to ensure no residual chlorine is present.

g. Finally a sample of tank water shall be taken to the Water Department for testing.

The results of these tests shall be forwarded to the Consultant for his approval.

19.2.12 INCOMING WATER SUPPLY AND METER

The plumbing contractor shall take connections from the proposed main water supply to the main electronic water meter cabinet, which shall be located at internal boundary wall of the project, as per the tender drawings. The water meter and cabinets shall be supplied and installed by the contractor and all meters and cabinets to be as per QCS – Section 19.




19.2.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

General Setting Out of Work and Commissioning The contractor, having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies

are available, shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction of the Consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.

After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor shall demonstrate its operation, at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Test shall be in accordance with British Standard Code of Practice CP 310: 1965.

The test shall demonstrate:

a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.

b. That all items of plant and equipment operate sufficiently quietly to meet the

specified requirements. c. That all instruments, protection and control devices, etc., are correctly calibrated

and accurate. d. That all water systems are properly balanced, vented, and operates satisfactorily

under test pressure. The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the

Consultant. The Client's representative and the consultant shall be at liberty to be present at test and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.

The contractor shall make all the records during the tests and on completion thereof,

shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record both in triplicate. The contractor shall also provide all test instruments, together with skilled

supervision and adequate labour for carrying out the tests.

Pipework Pressure Testing All pipework services shall be subjected to a test of 500 kN/m2 or one and half times

working pressure whichever is the greater, for not less than 24 hours. Where pipework is tested in sections, all valves shall be blanked off temporarily

using plugs or blank flanges. The valve wedge shall not be used to retain the water. The pipework services shall be charged with water allowing all air to escape and avoiding shock or water hammer. The test pressure gauge shall be mounted within the pipework system with a loop and cock and shall be calibrated such that the test pressure falls above its mid-range.




The contractor shall carry out his own test first to ensure there are no leaks prior to requesting the Consultant to witness the test. The witnessed test shall be maintained for a minimum of 4 hour without measurable loss and without further pumping.

Pipework main laid in ground shall be tested for 24 hours and leakage shall be

measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main under test. Leakage shall not exceed five litres per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 1750 metre length of pipe for 33 metres head pressure in a period of 24 hours. The Consultant shall witness all pipework tests. The contractor shall give the Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner of each pipework section to be tested.

19.2.14 PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS

Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be supplied by the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components are kept clean and dry. Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally. All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could be damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the consultant.

19.2.15 LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION

All items of Plumbing Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and as per the requirements of the Water Department.




19.2.16 INTEGRATED HOT WATER SYSTEM – SOLAR WITH HEAT PUMP

BACK UP

SECTION 1

SOLAR WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Solar water heaters B. Air to water heat pump backup

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specifications Sections.

B. Product Data: Size, dimensions, capacity, pressure rating, accessories and special features and operating characteristics of all equipments.

C. Shop Drawing: Detailed equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field connection.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring diagram for each item of equipment with electric

power supply.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for solar heater, control and accessories, including “trouble shooting” maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual in accordance with the requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with Australian standards or equivalent American standards.

B. Technical design, construction quality and measurement of performance

(accelerate ageing, continuous control) all shall be done as per Australian standards AS 2712.




C. Manufacturer‟s Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of solar heaters or types and capacities required whose products have been satisfactory used in similar services for not less than twenty years.

1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement and

framework requirements are to be coordinated with respective civil work.

1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product shall be delivered to site stored and protected under provisions of

General Conditions of Contract. B. Factory packaged items shall be stored in shipping containers or in safe covered

storage until time of installation.

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Solar Thermal Systems along with the air source hot water heat pump shall be installed in the designated area as shown on the dwg in the building along with all other specified related equipment to generate required temperature for the proper operation of hot water supply for the equipments.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

1.0 SOLAR WATER HEATERS QUANTITY: 34 nos. Solar Collectors with 7000 Ltr Heat store/ Thermal storage tank with actual heating 57.6kW air source heat pump back up.

2.0 GENERAL

Supply, deliver and install where indicated numbers of solar water heaters, Solar hot water systems shall comply with Australian Standard AS2712 or equivalent to American, and manufactured under a Quality Assurance System complying to ISO 9001. Technical design, construction quality and measurement of performance (accelerate ageing, continuous control) all shall be done as per AS 2712 or equivalent.

3.0 TOTAL SYSTEM CAPABILITY

The integrated solar system shall supply 15,000 Lts/day at 60 deg C (refer schedule) at an annual integrated (solar + Heat Pump) contribution of minimum 85%. Simulation need to be provided along with the technical submittal clearly indicating the energy contributions.




3.1 System Description

The system shall be designed as a fully integrated, packaged heating system incorporating the solar collectors, storage tank, primary circulating pumps, air to water heat pump backup with circulating pumps, storage calorifiers and all other necessary controls for safe and efficient operation. The solar circuit shall be an 'active' pumped system that utilizes drain back technology. When the unit is at the target temperature with the solar pump stopped the heat transfer fluid is able to drain back from the solar collectors into the Heat Store. This technology provides over temperature protections in times of high solar gain with little or no potable water use; additionally it affords total freeze protection to the collectors and closed circuit. The closed circuit is controlled by a temperature differential controller that gives preference to any effective energy available from solar rather than the back-up boost.

3.2 Solar Panels

The solar panels specifications provided below are the minimum requirements. The solar panels with still better specifications and with certified performance can be taken into consideration provided they meet the below minimum requirements from the approved vendors. Collectors shall be accredited to EN 12975, constructed of copper waterways with 13 risers, 38mm glasswool insulation in base and 28mm polyster insulation on the sides, marine grade aluminium outer casing and 0.2mm copper absorber plate. The absorber plate shall be Tinox sputtered copper. Titanium Oxide having a minimum absorbtance factor of 0.95+/-2% and maximum emissivity factor of 0.04+/-2%. The collector shall be glazed with low iron toughened safety matt glass of a minimum thickness of 3.2mm with a maximum iron oxide content of 0.04%. The stagnation temperature should be min 200 Deg C. Collector performance needs to be certified by SRCC (Solar Rating & Certification Company) and with Solar key mark. The collectors shall be manifolded in parallel into the appropriate number of rows for complete water circulation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations of maximum 8 collectors per bank. Each collector shall have a design flow rate of 2 L/min at a 1400 kPa working pressure. The flow and return lines from the collectors to the storage tank shall be of minimum required diameter and insulated with a minimum of 13 mm thick UV stabilized insulation. Solar collectors shall have the following as minimum requirement

Quantity 34 NOS Size 1.94m (L) x 1.02m (W) x 0.77m (H) Aperture 2 m2 (nominal) 1.86 m

2 (actual)

Absorber Copper Riser Copper




Surface Sputtered Tinox surface or Equivalent Absorbtance min 0.95+/-2% Emitance max 0.04+/-2%

3.3 Solar Storage Tank

It shall operate with neutral treated water at a pH level of 8.5 to 9.0. It shall contain the appropriately sized internal thermal expansion volume to suit the maximum number of solar collectors with a storage temperature rise of 75ºC and be equipped with all necessary pressure relief valves. The storage tank shall be made of mild steel and fully insulated with a minimum of 50 mm high density glass fibre bats and cased within a totally weatherproof outer enclosure made from Color bond steel. It shall come completely attached to a support frame for locating on a floor or concrete plinth.

Total Thermal Volume 7000 Liters Peak flow rate 180 LPM

3.4 Potable Water Heat Transfer Coil

Shall be constructed from eight copper coils connected in parallel which and have a pressure drop across the coil of no more than 35kPa. It shall be constructed with a ring main circulation return connection at the centre to facilitate re heating. It shall be fully brazed and hydrostatically pressure tested in manufacture to 2200 kPa for operation on a potable water circuit of upto 1200 kPa.

Working Pressure Closed Circuit 50 kPa Potable Circuit 1200 kPa

3.5 Fluid

Only Anti scaling, Anti-corrosion and Anti-freeze liquid shall be used on the primary closed circuit. Water shall not be used in the primary circuit.

3.6 Auxiliary Electric Boost

No electric boost shall be used in the solar storage.

3.7 Circulating pump: (1 Duty + 1 standby) 1.5 LPS @ 1 bar

A Grundfos SS 316/ or approved equivalent circulating pump shall be supplied along with the heat store to circulate the fluid between the heat store and the




collectors. The working of this pump shall be controlled through a delta T controller. The pump shall circulate the fluid only if the temperature in the system falls below the set point and if there is enough radiation to heat the fluid. The solar pump shall be of a centrifugal design and circulate 1.5 flow at a total pressure head of 1 bar or as required. It shall have a stainless steel 316 body, impeller and shaft.

3.8 Solar Controller

Description: Solid state differential temperature thermostat with capacity for up to 12 low resistance platinum resistance thermometers, solar pump contactors and overload protection. It has relay outputs to be connected to diverter valves and pump contactors.

a. Functions Standard: When collector outlet temperature exceeds storage temperature, close contacts to start solar pump and pump the primary fluid to flood the collector array. Over Temperature Protection: When collector temperature is less than 3 deg C differential with stored primary fluid, open contacts shall switch off the pump to allow primary fluid to drain back into Heat Store Cylinder/Tank. Freeze Protection: When no solar gain is available, open contacts shall switch off the pump and allow primary fluid to drain back into Heat Store Cylinder thus .preventing freezing High Limit Off: When Heat Store Cylinder/Tank temperature rises above required set point, user defined between 55 – 85 degrees C, open contacts. Primary fluid shall drain back preventing over-heating. Back up for Solar: Air source heat pump is provided as back up to Solar heat store instead of conventional electric elements in order to be energy efficient. The heat pump circulation pump shall switch if the tank temperature falls below 52°C. The circulation continues till the set temperature 65°C is achieved in the tank. Heat pump provided should be capable of provided hot water at 60°C. Heat pump shall have inbuilt controls and shall ON/OFF based on water flow detection by the flow switch and temperature difference.

b. Air to Water Heat pump: Quantity: 1 no.

The below performance specifications are taken into consideration while designing the system. Units with still better performances can be considered from the approved vendors.




4.0 GENERAL

Supply, deliver and install where indicated Air to water heat pumps as a backup to Solar hot water systems shall comply with Australian / European or equivalent American standards, and manufactured under a Quality Assurance System complying to ISO 9001. Heat pump provided should be Eurovent / AHRI certified.

4.1 Manufacturers

a. Rheem - USA b. Climaveneta - Italy c. Accent Air - Australia d. Viessmann – Germany e. Jacques Giordano – France f. Ecotherm - Europe

4.2 Each System Capability

Voltage/Phase 415 Volts / 3 Phase / 50 Hz Refrigerant R407C Heating capacity 50.9 kW Power input 14.5 kW COP 3.53 Max. Power Input 16.8 kW Noise Level 69 dBa @ 3 m

TECHNICAL DATA Compressor Make Copeland or equivalent Type Scroll Number Per Unit 2 min No of Refrigerant Circuits 2 min Fan Ziehl-ebm or equivalent Type Axial

HEAT EXCHANGER (Water Side)

Type Plate Material AISI 316 Max Outlet Water Temp 65°C Design Pressure Drop 20 kPa Max. Operating Pres. 1000 kPa

GENERAL INFORMATION Water Connections 1 ½” Copper




Drain 20mm PVC Voltage / Phase/Frequency 415V / 3P / 50Hz Cabinet Construction Peraluman external and coated galvanized steel or Equivalent suitable for corrosive environment. Condensing Coils shall be special fin guard silver treated / epoxidic treated for longer life in marine or high polluted atmospheres. Should pass 10,000 hours salt spray test ASTM B 117 in marine environment and 3000 hrs in acid salt spray test ASTM B 287 for Urban environment.

4.3 System Description

4.3.1 Technical Specifications

Heat Pumps Air Source, High Temperature: Heat pump designed for indoor installation with ducted exhaust producing hot high-temperature water up to 60°C for domestic use, with vapour-injection EVI hermetic scroll compressors operating on R407C, axial-flow fans, braze-welded plate heat exchanger and thermostatic expansion valve. Peraluman external panelling and coated galvanised steel base or equivalent. Operating limit in summer mode: +46°C outdoor temperature. Operating limit in winter mode: +5°C outdoor temperature.

Structure Specific structure for outdoor installation, with hot galvanised steel sheet base painted with polyester powder coat, perimeter frame made from aluminium section bars or equivalent. Fan compartment separate from the compressor compartments. Specific aluminium alloy panelling for outdoor installation, completely weatherproof, easily removable, designed to allow total access to internal components for inspection and maintenance (removal of front and side panels). Ventilation of compressor compartments.

Refrigerant Circuit Main components of the refrigerant circuit:

a. Two circuits with compressors operating individually in each circuit b. R407C refrigerant c. Mechanical thermostatic valves d. Dewatering filter e. Liquid flow indicator with moisture gauge f. High pressure safety valve g. Low pressure safety valve h. High and low pressure transducers




i. High pressure safety switches j. Liquid receivers k. Plate heat exchanger on subcooling line l. Solenoid on liquid subcooling line.

Compressor Hermetic rotary scroll compressor with vapour injection, complete with sump heater, electronic thermal protector with centralised manual reset, two-pole electric motor.

System Heat Exchanger Braze welded AISI 316 steel plate heat exchanger. The heat exchangers are lined on the outside with closed-cell neoprene lagging. When the unit is not operating, these are protected against formation of ice on the inside by an electric heater with thermostat, while when the unit is operating protection is ensured by a differential pressure switch on the water side. The unit can also operate with non-freezing mixes, down to heat exchanger outlet temperatures of -8°C.

Source Heat Exchanger Finned coil heat exchanger made from copper tubes and suit-ably spaced aluminium fins to guarantee maximum heat exchange efficiency, including subcooling circuit located in the bottom section of the coil.

Source Fan Compartment 450 mm axial-flow fans with IP 54 index of protection, external impeller, pressed metal blades, housed in aerodynamic tubes, complete with accident prevention grill. Six-pole electric motor with integrated thermal protector. Fan compartment divided into two zones to allow independent air flow for each circuit. Differentiated ventilation control with fans on inactive circuit shutdown. Condenser managed by continuous control of fan rotation speed.

Power And Control Electrical Panel Power and control electrical panel, built in compliance with EN60204-1/IEC 204-1 standards, complete with:

a. Transformer for the control circuit, b. Main door interlock disconnect switch, c. Fuses and contactors for compressors and fans. d. Cumulative alarm terminals (BCA), e. Remote ON/OFF terminals, f. Spring terminal blocks for control circuits, g. Valve control terminals,




h. Electrical panel for outdoor installation, with two doors andseal gaskets, i. Electronic controller. Unit power supply voltage: 415V/50 Hz/3N.

Certification Unit compliant with the following directives and amendments:

a. Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. b. EMC 89/336/EEC + 2004/108/EC. c. Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. d. Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Model A1. TÜV Italy

Tests Checks performed throughout the entire manufacturing process according to the procedures specified by ISO 9001. Performance or noise emission tests should be conducted by highly qualified technical personnel within the factory. Performance tests involve measuring:

a. Electrical data b. Water flow rates c. Operating temperature d. Power consumption e. Capacity delivered f. Pressure drop on the water-source heat exchanger at both full load (in rated

conditions and at the most critical conditions for the condenser) and at part load.

During performance testing the main alarm conditions can also be simulated. Noise emission tests verify the unit‟s sound power levels according to ISO 3744.

Controller

The controller is the device designed especially for heat pump applications with incorporated logic for high temperature hot water production. The keypad features function controls and a complete LCD display for viewing data and activating the unit, via a multilevel menu, with settable display language. The controller provides temperature control for the heating and cooling systems in the domestic hot water. These different temperatures are managed automatically based on the different conditions in which the system operates, with the possibility to assign specific levels of priority to domestic hot water production, depending on the needs of the application. Diagnostics include complete alarm management, with “black box” functions (via PC) and alarm log (display or PC) for best analysis of unit behaviour.




For systems made up of multiple units, differentiated device management means just a certain portion of the capacity installed can be dedicated to domestic water production, in this way ensuring more efficient energy distribution and, at the same time, guaranteeing simultaneous water delivery to the different distribution systems. The built-in clock can be used to create an operating profile containing up to 4 typical days and 10 time bands, essential for efficient programming of energy production. Defrosts use proprietary self-adaptive logic involving monitoring of multiple operating and climate parameters. This reduces the number and duration of defrosts, consequently increasing overall energy efficiency. Supervision is available with different options, using proprietary devices or by integration into third party systems using ModBus, BACnet, BACnet-over-IP and Echelon LonWorks protocols.

4.5 Heat pump Circulating Pump: (1 Duty + 1 standby) A Grundfos SS 316/or equivalent approved to vendors list, circulating pump shall be supplied along with the heat pump to circulate the fluid between the heat store and the heat pump. The working of this pump shall be controlled through a delta T controller. The pump shall circulate the fluid only if the temperature in the system falls below the set point. The heat pump circulating pump shall be of a centrifugal design and circulate 2.5 LPS (150 LPM) at a total pressure head of less than1 bar. It shall have a stainless steel 316 body, impeller and shaft.

5. Installation

Solar hot water collectors must be installed with tilt and exposed to direct sun (without shadowing). They should be tilted towards equator (south direction) with

angle of 25. Single unit or multiple units can be connected together in parallel and connected to common Headers (CWS, HWS, HWR) to cover the desired daily hot water load and shall be as per the design of specialist solar manufacturer. The system shall also be equipped with all necessary safety devices that guarantee the system shall function in a satisfactory way. Such safety devices shall involve cold inlet relief valve and Pressure & Temperature relief valves. A pressure reduction valve should also be fitted to maintain the incoming pressure less than 850 kPa. The Pressure & Temperature relief valve shall be set to relieve water at 1000kPa and/or

99C The piping between the solar collectors and the storage shall be of brazed copper with proper insulation with a continuous slope towards the heat store tank to avoid air-locks. No compression fittings shall be used in the primary circuit. The storage tank shall be equipped with all necessary fittings on cold and hot water side, in order to connect with piping network (by the specialist contractor). It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that all civil, electrical, mechanical (piping etc) and all work related to solar water heater system are done according to the specifications. All hot water piping shall be adequately insulated to ensure




minimum heat losses during re-circulation. A hot water circulation pump set (with 24 hrs timer) shall be provided to ensure continuous hot water availability in the ring main.

6.0 Warranty The complete solar system shall be Manufactured and Supplied by a Single Manufacturer who should extend their Warranty on the complete HW System, with a 5-year comprehensive warranty covering Parts and 1 year for Labor. And the heat pump need to be manufactured by the recommended manufacturers and should be with 2 years complete warranty. The local agent shall only assist the manufacturer in the installation of the system.

A. INSTALLATION AT SITE 1. Each building zone shall consist of 1 set of central solar heating system

supplying hot water through a common manifold to all the hot water outlets.

2. The bottom of the collectors shall be a minimum of 1 Mts above the top of the heat store to enable the Natural Drain Back of close circuit fluid to take place.

3. Hot water circulating pump set to be installed in the return line to ensure continuous hot water availability

4. The solar collectors shall face south with an inclination of 25 deg and shall be

mounted on a stand or plinth.

5. A 2-core cable from the hot sensors in the panels to the each heat store to be conduited.

B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of solar system, including piping and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.

C. COMMISSIONING

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service. 2. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.




3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements. Do not proceed with startup until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment supplier.

D. SCHEDULE OF INTREGRATED HOT WATER SYSTEM

Sr No Description Type Quantity

1 Solar storage tanks 7000 Liters 1 No

2 Solar collectors As per above 34 Nos

3 Solar controller - 1 No

4 Solar circulating pump 1D+1S 1 Set

6 Air to water heat pump 25 KW 1 No

7 Heat pump circulating pump 1D+1S 1 set

Hot Water Circulating Pumps

Hot water re-circulating pump shall be installed in hot water service to ensure that hot water is available at all draw-off points with minimum delay. Re-circulating pumps (one duty and standby) shall be in accordance with the duties indicated on the drawings.

Hot water service circulating pumps shall be direct driven in-line pumps suitable for

horizontal or vertical mounting. The pumps shall be of the same size as the pipe work bore. The pump shall be installed with an isolating valve, strainer or inlet, non-return valve and isolating valve on outlet.

The centrifugal circulating pump shall be driven by an electric motor preferably of

240 volts, single phase 50 Hz electric supply. Motors shall not exceed 2900 rpm. For capacity flowrate and head shall be as indicated in the dwg.

The schedules of equipment in the tender drawings are tentative and are intended as a guide and therefore is the contractor‟s responsibility to crosscheck the hydraulic head in conjunction with the equipment being offered and as per pipe run approved shop dwg and submit the same for Engineer‟s approval.

19.2.17 WATER STORAGE TANKS

Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following tank shall be used:

a. Reinforced Concrete Storage Tanks

The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:

a. There shall be one manhole to be positioned as follows: one shall be located in such a position to have easy access to the float

valve b. Stainless steel or GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.




c. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided. d. Water level controls (low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumps

shall be provided. e. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or

by other approved means. f. Manholes shall be provided with at least 100mm upstaged concrete and

double sealed to prevent leakage. g. isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines h. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on

all internal surfaces. i. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external

surfaces.

The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the drawing. The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any installation work begins.

b. GRP Sectional Tanks

Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following tank may be used: GRP sectional water tank insulated with rigid polyurethane foam complete with bolted inspection cover and with gunmetal pipe connections pre-molded in position. The tanks shall be suitable for ultra violet light and comply with the National Water Council of the United Kingdom. The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the tank. The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any installation work begins. Roof tank shall be protected from direct sunlight and cover to be made to architect approval.

The tank shall have the following additional components in addition to the

components listed above:

a. Low level electric float switches interlocked to their pressure pumps. b. External ladder of GRP or aluminium, supplied by the Tank manufacturer. c. Internal ladder of Fibre Glass or aluminium supplied by the Tank

manufacturer. d. Vent with wire mesh e. External graduated water level indicator f. Channel base, of galvanized steel g. Interconnecting pipes with valves h. Overflow and drain connection i. Access cover j. Level indications for visual reading of level.

The Contractor shall supply and assemble at Site sectional water tank of hot pressed moulded Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) insulated panels of ivory grey colour provide with lockable Manhole covers air vent with overflow and all piping connections. The panels shall comply with BS 7491: part 3: 1994 and shall have convex shape to assist a complete draining of water of the following characteristics:-




a. Specific gravity of 1.8 b. Tensile strength of not less then 850 kg/cm² c. Flexural strength of 1800 kg/cm² to ISO 178 d. Impact strength of 80 kg/cm² ISO 179 e. Thermal expansion of 2.1 x 10-5 deg. C to ATM D 696 f. Thermal conductivity of 0.6 W/ m² C to BS 7491 : part 3 g. Water absorption less then 0.2 % to ISO 62. h. Glass content more then more then 30 % i. No light transmission. j. Gasket of synthetic k. Bolts and nuts of stainless steel 316 / A4 l. Frame angles and frame plates of hot dipped galvanized steel m. External ladder of hot dipped galvanized steel n. Internal ladder of GRP or S.S according to Manufacturer‟s standards. o. Tie rods of stainless steel p. G.R.P panel thick not less then 8 mm q. Resin cover of 2 mm r. Glass tube level indicator for all compartments

Guarantee letter from the manufacturer for 10 years should be obtained

19.2.18 BOOSTER / LIFT PUMPSET FOR COLD WATER SUPPLY

a. DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMP SET

The cold-water pressure pump set shall be self priming pump set and shall be of the centrifugal type as stated on the drawings and shall comprise duplicate pumps, one running and one standby. Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number membrane tank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber bag complete with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure switch and 2 nos. pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work. Automatic control of the pressure pump set shall be by means of high/low level float Switches located in the storage tank and pressure switches. The pressure switches Shall be arranged to start/stop the pressure pump set to maintain the set pressure Within the distribution piping network. A low-level float switch shall be incorporated in the underground level cold-water storage tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of no water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be changed over. Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade stainless steel impellers to BS 1400.




Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage, conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm and shall be suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C. The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet, finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear, door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to provide sequence control. Interconnecting pipework headers and manifolds shall be fabricated from copper tube fittings as previously described. PVC and galvanized mild steel shall not be permitted.

b. COLD WATER LIFTING PUMP SET

The cold-water lifting pump set shall be self priming pump set and shall be of the centrifugal type for the duty/standby stated on the drawings and shall comprise duplicate pumps, one running and one standby. Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of high/low level float switches located in the high-level storage tanks and pressure switches. A low-level float switch shall be incorporated in the ground level cold-water storage tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of no water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be changed over. Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade stainless steel impellers to BS 1400. Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel cage, conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation in temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm and shall be suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C. The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet, finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear, door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to provide sequence control. Interconnecting pipework headers and manifolds shall be fabricated from copper tube fittings as previously described. PVC and galvanized mild steel shall not be permitted. The schedules of equipment in the tender drawings are tentative and are intended as a guide and therefore is the contractor‟s responsibility to crosscheck the hydraulic




head in conjunction with the equipment being offered and submit the same for Engineer‟s approval.

19.2.19 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractor‟s responsibility to provide the system - pressure reducing valve(s) if the distribution system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressure requirement being offered. This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arise due to over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in different levels throughout the building.

19.2.20 SNG SYSTEM

General

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the drawings. The complete installation shall be carried out by a WOQOD approved Specialist Contractor and shall comply with the current B.S. codes and codes of practice, NFPA 58. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials and installation are suitable for local conditions and comply with local regulations(Civil Defence Department).

The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and execution of the

works described in these specifications for the SNG system to produce a complete, tested, commissioned and fully operational installation including all necessary labor and materials whether or not specified in details.

Scope of Supply and Work

1. Supply and installation,testing and commissioning and any other related works necessary accessories,ie gas meters,leak detection controllers, emergency shut off system, from the tie in connection via the first pressure reduction system, thru the risers, to the 2

nd pressure reduction gas panel and up to point of

usage,linkage to fire alarm panel,Gas detection system, etc for proper working of the complete SNG system, whereby executed by contractor approved by Woqod to perform such works, Contractor shall consider on his pricing the complete SNG system.

2. The Contractor shall execute the gas piping network in coordination with other

services and as per the local Civil defence Norms.(in coordination with gas provider) to make the system functional without variation in cost.

3. SNG connection points are indicative, therefore it is the Contractors responsibility

to verify the final gas connection points and shall coordinate with the approved layout on the end usage.




SNG System The Contractor shall provide a fully functional system comprising of all components whether or not mentioned in the drawings. The complete SNG gas detection system installation shall be carried out by approved supplier cum installer.

The schedules of equipment /accessories in the tender drawings are tentative and are intended as a guide and therefore is the contractor‟s responsibility to crosscheck the allowable pressure in conjunction with the approved shop dwgs and submit the same for Engineer‟s approval.

The design consideration for AL SENDIAN TOWER ON PLOT COM-49 Proposed

Office Building GAS LOAD, internal network pipe run and pipe sizing calculation for pressure and flow is provided in the SNG dwg, where 21 millibar is considered as the residual pressure on the farthest outlet (applicance), using G.I. steel schedule 40 to ASTM A53, grade B seamless piping material was considered in the design and encased within a Black Steel sch 40 to ASTM A53, Grade B pipe. Pipe pressure drop was calculated relative to the pipe size being considered from the following:

a. The considered design residual pressure from the farthest gas appliance (21

millibars).

b. Pipe routing from the appliance to the outlet pipe of the 2nd

stage reduction station (27

th floor), calculated to be 21.632 millibar.

c. Pipe routing from the 27

th floor gas pipe riser to the inlet of the 2

nd stage

pressure reduction station, calculated to be 22.587 millibar using 1/2”G.I. pipe diameter.

d. Pipe routing entering the riser at 1

st basement high level to the the 27

th floor

gas riser, where inlet pressure to the 1st basement riser was calculated to be

34.1 millibar using a 2” dia.(77.9mm G.I. Internal pipe diameter), and where this value is less than 75millibar (as prescribed by Lusail Development to be allowed to have the gas and as per ASPE fuel Gas Piping system) piping to run internal of the building thru the nearest available shaft.

e. Pipe routing from the outlet of the 1

st reduction station to the pipe routing

entering the 1st basement high level. 34.1 millibar was calculated pressure

available at 2” dia.G.I.pipe. The infrastructure having available pressure of 2 bars, thus determines the 1

st stagePRS. The detailed calculation is provided

as part of the SNG schematic dwg. The details of the PRS as shown on the SNG standard details dwgs.

Pipes and Fittings/Pipe Encasement All pipework shall be seamless G.I. pipe sch 40 conforming to ASTM A53, GRADE

B. All the changes in direction of pipes shall be achieved by using proper fittings. No gas pipe shall be vented. All branch connections shall be taken from the top or sides




of horizontal main lines and not from the bottom. Compression fittings shall not be allowed on gas pipework.

All pipe encasement shall be black steel pipe sch 40 to ASTM A53 GRADE B.

Isolating Valves Valves shall be of lever operated ball type with an indication of „ON‟ and „OFF”

positions. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated type and constructed of non-ferrous materials. The valves shall be designed for capillary joint connections to the pipe lines. Where screwed connections are provided for pipe line connection, they should have I.S.O. metric thread in accordance with BS 3643. The valves shall be of wrought copper or bronze. Details of the valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Valves shall be Malleable iron to ASTM A47 and or Ductile Iron to ASTM A395. Rating as specified in table 5.9.4.1, as per NFPA58.

Identification of Gas Installation All pipes shall be identified with the appropriate color near stop valves, at any

change of direction and at 1.8m intervals along the line by means of self-adhesive 2 ply vinyl tapes. Self adhesive vinyl tapes shall be wrapped to overlap so that the tape adheres to itself as well as to the pipe. Each junction point shall be clearly marked by a color band. Self adhesive vinyl banding shall not be less than 50mm wide and shall include lettering to indicate the LPG.

Testing and Commissioning Testing and commissioning of the whole installation shall be carried out in

accordance with relevant BS Standards. It shall be the responsibility of the Specialist Contractor to provide all labor, materials, instruments and equipment required to test and commission the installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The tests shall be conducted and all defects rectified before any part of the installation is concealed or buried.

The pressure tests on the pipework shall be carried out by the Specialist Contractor

as described below. Plug all open ends of the pipework and put the pipework on pressure test (7 bars)

with the air. Disconnect the air supply and keep the pipework on test for 24 hours. No leak shall be observed during this period. If the above pressure is not maintained, the Specialist Contractor shall detect any leaks by the use of soap solution applied externally to joints and connections. The soap solution shall be carefully washed off and dried after testing.

Care shall be taken to ensure that all valves on main and sub-main branches of the

pipework are properly subjected to this test.




19.2.21 IRRIGATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

The purpose of this project is to supply, install and commission an automated irrigation system with all related components for the “Proposed building, at Lusail, Doha,Qatar” consisting of field AC electric control valves, control wires, filter, integrated dripper lines, drippers, flush valves, and central control system

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work shall be read in conjunction with the contract material specifications, contract drawings and installation details and it includes but not limited to the following:

A. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The

Main line, Laterals, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, Irrigation Controllers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, Bubblers and flush valves.

B. The contractor shall submit for client approval the technical information and samples of the material he intends to use which should be in accordance with the material specifications of this project.

C. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the work and then shall be handed over.

D. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the client with four original sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works and installation details.

E. The contractor shall upon completing the works provide the client with detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals (With applicable Arabic translations) in four originals. The manuals shall include but not limited to; complete and marked literature of all products used on the project and its reordering part numbers. It shall also include a list of the recommended spare parts for a period of 5 years. It shall include original print of the As Built drawings.

F. The client prior to issuing the Project Handing Over Certificate shall approve the As-Built Drawings and the Operation & maintenance Manual.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of irrigation

equipment, central control systems, pumps and fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.




B. Installers: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of irrigation works of a similar quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years.

1.04 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS ISO R 161 Confirming to German Standards Din 8061 & 19532 SASO 14&15 Confirming to Saudi Pipes Standards BS: CP312 Code of Practice for Plastics Pipe work (Thermoplastic Materials) of a uPVC Pipe work and Fittings BS: 1780 Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges. BS: 3505 Specification for uPVC pressure pipes for cold potable water. BS: 4346 Joints and fittings for use with uPVC pressure pipes.

BS: 5150 Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves for general purposes.

BS: 5154 Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves for general purposes

BS: 8010 Code of practice for pipelines.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings - The contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in 6 sets

which to be approved by the client representative prior to commencing installation work. The shop drawings shall show but not limited to valves, control wires route and numbers and controllers location

B. Products – The contractor shall submit for client approval prior to commencing

installation works; the products he intends to use with all technical details and literature in accordance with the specifications below.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the

detailed Operation & Maintenance Manual with equipment reordering codes and literature.

D. As-Built Drawings- The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the complete project as-built drawings reflecting the actual site installation.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. All primary distribution pipe work shall be Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC)

to Class 5 B. All primary distribution pipe fittings shall be solvent welded uPVC 16 bar C. As an alternative to the Specifications in items A&B, uPVC pipe work confirming

to BS 3505 Class E and fittings to BS 4346 of equivalent pressure rating may be used.

D. Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes:

1. All pipes shall be manufactured to SASO 14, Class V or BS 3505, Class E. All couplings and fittings for uPVC pipes shall be manufactured of materials conforming to BS 4346: Part I.

E. Flexible Piping for on line drippers:

1. Flexible Pipes for irrigation on line drippers shall be in the required sizes as shown on the drawings and B.O.Q extruded from linear low density polyethylene version raw material. Pipes shall be resistant to algae and ultraviolet deterioration with Carbon Black content not less than 2.25 %.

2.02 APPLICATION DEVICES

a. POP-UP SPRAY

The sprinkler shall be equipped with an adjustable arc (1-360 ) nozzle discharging 4.3 gpm, for the full circle and it shall be available in sizes to cover up to a radius of 17 feet at a pressure of 25 psi. The sprinkler nozzle shall automatically adjust the flow depending on the arc setting in orderto have a matched precipitation rate. It shall be an integral part of the riser assembly that can not be removed, and has the ability to open fully to allow flushing. It shall have grooveon the inner surface to allow dirt to go out of the nozzle easily. The sprinkler shall have radius reduction capability by means of a stainless steel, arc and radius adjustment screw. It shall also be possible to adjust arc and radius from the top of the riser assembly, using an adjustment key. This adjustment shall be possible in all the phases of installation (before and after installation, while static and while operating). The sprinkler shall have an inlet screen of length not less than 100 mm. It shall have 30 mm exposed diameter after installation. The body and riser of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy duty A.B.S The sprinkler shall accept a drain check valve, installed in the field from in the base of the riser to prevent drainage.




The sprinkler shall carry a one-year, exchange warranty (not prorated).

DRIPPER LINES AND DRIPPERS

Integrated Dripper Lines For Ground Cover and Shrub Beds

The dripper line shall consist of a ultra violet resistant low density Linear polyethylene tube with internal pressure compensating continuously self cleaning integral flat drippers welded to the inside of wall of the tube at the specified spacing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. The tube shall have a 17mm or 16 mm outside diameter. The dripper shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self cleaning EPDM diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. It shall have an inlet filter raised from the wall of the tubing. It shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates with a constant flow at an inlet pressure of 7-70 psi. The drippers shall have a manufacturer‟s coefficient of variability (CV) of 0.03 or less. The dripper discharge shall be 0.4, 0.61, or 0.92 gph utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and an EPDM diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. It shall also be continuously self-cleaning during operation and under pressure and have a flow exponent X = 0 and a Kd of 1.3. The dripper flow versus pressure shall be tested by an independent organization such as the Center of Irrigation Technology, and shall have available reports to be presented upon request. The dripper flow shall not be affected by temperature up to 60 degrees Celsius and shall not have a spike at start up. The filtration requirement of the dripper shall be a maximum of 80-120 mesh. The dripper line shall have a 7 years guarantee against solar radiation and 5 years warranty against manufacturing defects.

Drippers For Scattered Shrubs And Ground Cover The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall be available with a flow of 4, and 8 Liters per Hour (LPH) and shall be of the pressure compensating and continuously self-cleaning type. The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path.




The dripper shall have a uniform flow rate at a pressure range of 7-60 psi and shall have no flow emission spike at start up low pressure of 7 PSI. The dripper shall have a built in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction of external impurities with the need of dust cap. It shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to prevent water draining out of the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI. The dripper shall have a nipple outlet with color coded cap to identify flow for each type. It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter. The dripper shall have a Coefficient Of Manufacturing Variation (CV) 0.03 less.

BUBBLERS

The bubbler shall be of the pressure compensating type having a fixed flow under a pressure range of 20 to 90 PSI. It shall be constructed of corrosion and UV resistant plastic material. The bubbler shall have an integral electrometric flow bushing to maintain a constant flow at different pressure range. The bubbler shall have a plastic screen filter to protect it from debris that could be available in the water. It shall have a ½ inch female threaded inlet (FNPT) for connection to a ½ inch male threaded riser. The bubbler shall be available in 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 GPM flow rates. The bubbler shall carry a two years warranty

VALVES

Electric Solenoid Valves The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed, electronically actuated, diaphragm operated. The valve‟s body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced nylon, rated at an operating pressure of 200 PSI. The body of the valve shall have brass inserts, with through holes, which shall accept the bonnet Stainless steel bolts. The diaphragm shall be of molded construction, reinforced with nylon fabric. A heavy-duty removable seat shall be available to protect and support the diaphragm. The valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well with a self-cleaning metering rod, so only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter cleaning system ,that continuously cleans the filter when the valve is operating, shall be available.




The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an accurate set pressure regulator, to keep the downstream pressure constant after setting it. The regulator shall be of the top dial model with clearly shown pressure values in bars and PSI. It shall regulate the flow at a pressure range of 20 to 100 PSI. The valve shall be available in 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 inch size and it shall have a BSP female thread inlet and outlet. It shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.1 gpm (1”size) to 200 gpm (2”size) The valve shall have a 24 volts 60 cycle solenoid with a 370 mA in-rush current and 190 mA holding current. The solenoid shall be an encapsulated, one-piece unit with a captive plunger. The Valve shall be equipped with a manual internal bleed only giving the capability to release the upper chamber water to the down stream piping, allowing the valve to open. No external bleed shall be available The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.

PVC Electric Hydraulic Control Valve

The Valve shall be made of PVC material rated at 8 bars and of hydraulic type. It shall be of available in 3” inch and 4” sizes. The inlet and outlet connections of the valve shall be of the solvent weld type. The valve shall be of the flow through design, and of the diaphragm direct closing type which shall allow very low friction loss at high flows. The valve shall be of the normally closed type with a normally open 3-way solenoid 24VAC installed from outside. It shall be operated manually by means of a three-way selector knob. The internal parts of the valve shall be only a natural rubber diaphragm and a spring. The valve shall be serviceable in place just by unscrewing and removing the top. It shall also have the possibility of adding controls such as pressure regulation, pressure sustaining, etc.

Quick Pressure Relief Valve

The valve shall be of bronze construction 2”size with angle configuration. The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi. The valve shall have a pressure pilot for the adjustment of the pressure setting. It shall immediately open fully when the network pressure exceeds the set pressure.




The valve shall close slowly as the network pressure drops in order to prevent shock to the system and the on/off cycling of the pump. The valve shall also be available in sizes 3”, 4”, 6”, and 8” with flanged connections.

Check Valves The valve shall be of constructed of Aerospace quality composite and stainless steel (SAE 303) materials, 100% non-corrosive. It shall allow flow in one direction by the action of a spring loaded flap which closes against a rubber seal. The spring and the flap shall be connected via a moment arm in order to ensure that the spring pressure is maximum when the valve is closed. The valve shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars. It shall have an external position indicator that may be made electric for signaling a control system. The valve shall be available in 3”, 4”, and 6”size.

Air Release Valves Air relief valves shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings and shall be of the kinetic/automatic type that shall automatically release air when the lines are being filled with water and when air entrapment occurs while the system is working. The Valves shall be of the 2”size with plastic or brass male base. The body of the valve shall be constructed heavy duty plastic. The working components of the valve shall be constructed of 100% corrosion resistant materials to ensure maximum life and minimum water loss due to leaks. The Air Release valve shall employ rolling seal mechanism made of EPDM and shall remain open even when pipeline air pressure reaches 10 psi.

Line End Auto Flush Valve The automatic line end flush valve shall allow for temporary, automatic flushing of irrigation lateral lines during pressurization of the system. The valve shall be designed in a way that it shall not close prematurely at high pressure. It shall allow for disassembly for servicing. It shall have a operating pressure range of 15 to 57 psi. The valve shall be constructed entirely of non-corrosive plastic with a silicon diaphragm. No springs shall be employed in the operation of the valve. The connection of the valve shall be either ½ inch male thread or 17 mm insert.




Quick Coupling Valves The Valve shall be operated by insertion of a compatible hollow coupler key. The valve shall be operated by a 90º turn in clockwise direction with reverse turn for closure and be capable of 360-swivel action. The valves shall be of the low-pressure loss type. The Valve Body shall be made from brass material and have the two-section type with removable upper body. It shall be supplied with spring loaded locking cover made from thermoplastic rubber. The cover spring shall be of stainless steel material.

Gate Valves Gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar and water operating temperature of 45° C. Valves shall be the same size as the incoming line size with a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning counterclockwise. The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in valve indicating the direction of opening. Valves smaller than 3” shall be all bronze or brass conforming to BS 5154 with screwed and connections. Valves 3” and larger shall be cast iron body, and shall conform to BS 5150 with flange end connections.

Valve Boxes The valve boxes shall have enclosures, which are injected molded polyofin plastic with ultra violet additives, according to ASTM-D-V1248. It shall be light in weight with reduced side angles and increased break resistance. The valve box shall be non-conductive or sparking. The valve boxes shall be available in sizes 910, 1015, 1320, 1324 depending on installation requirements as per scope of work, specifications and drawings.

REGULAR CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL CABLES

Irrigation Control Cables The irrigation control cables shall be used between the solenoid valves and the irrigation controllers. The cables shall be of the single conductor type UF and they shall be engineered for direct burial use.




The wires shall be of the solid or stranded construction with soft bare copper conductor. They shall have extra heavy thickness of special polyvinyl chloride insulation highly resistant to the saline, acid or alkaline contaminants. The copper conductors of the wires shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-3, B-8. The thermoplastic insulation shall meet ASTM D-2219. All irrigation wires shall have surface printing on insulation.

Irrigation Controllers

The controller shall be of a modular design with a standard 8-station model. There shall be an insert able add-on 4 station and 8 station modules that enable the controller to be customized from 8 stations up to 48 stations in 4 or 8 stations increments. The controller shall have three independent programs (A,B,C) with 8 start times per program and one program (D) that can run concurrently with the other programs. Watering time shall be available from 1 minute to 2 hours in 1-minute increment per station in programs A, B and C and from 1 minute to 12 hours in program D. The controller shall have 4 weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day calendar, 31 days calendar, odd days programming and even days programming. The controller shall also have a 365 days calendar clock to accommodate true odd even watering. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a programming dial and selection buttons with user feed back by LCD display. The controller shall be equipped by a rain sensor. The controller shall have a cycle and soak scheduling capability that allows a cycle to be programmed for up to 60 minutes and a soak period up to 60 minutes. The controller shall have a seasonal adjust feature that allows for station run times to be changed from 10% to 150% in 10% increments to compensate for weather changes. The controller shall have automatic short circuit detection. The controller shall be equipped with a programmable pump circuit that can activate the pump start relay by zone. It shall have a programmable delay between valve stations. Programs backup shall be provided by a non-volatile memory circuit that shall hold the program, time and date indefinitely. The controller shall have a Stainless Steel cabinet and it shall be pedestal mounted. The pedestal shall be stainless steel.




The controller shall be compatible with a programming kit (SRP) that transfer the irrigation program from a personal computer and upload them into the memory of the controller.

Automatic Filtration System

The filtration system shall consist of a disc filter Battery having 2 or more 4”units depending on the flow and the water quality as specified on the drawings. The filter elements shall be of the grooved disc design providing both surface and depth filtration in a compact package. The grooved discs shall be fitted on a spine in a way that when the filter fills with filtrate the ring compress to prevent the outflow water. They shall be manufactured and laser cut so the width of each groove shall be constant from inside to out. The grooves in the disc shall be cut at an angle so that the grooves on the upper disc shall intersect with those on the lower disc. The filter battery shall be equipped with a fully automatic backwash mechanism consisting of 4”x 3” backwash valves and a backwash controller. The backwash system shall work on pressure differential and/or time. The backwash valves shall be plastic that accepts victual connection. During the backwash process the discs of the elements shall spin under the water pressure coming out from the outlets of the spine to ensure complete cleaning of the discs. The filtration units shall be assembled on epoxy coated steel manifolds. The maximum operating pressure shall be 10 bars and the minimum pressure at the battery outlet shall be 3.5 bars

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION A. All materials shall be shipped or otherwise conveyed in such a manner as to

assure no damage. All boxes shall be securely sealed and clearly marked with the name of the manufacturer. All pipes shall be protected from crimping, crushing and splitting. All non-metallic system components shall be protected from sunlight exposure as per the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Work and materials shall be protected from damage during storage, handling

and construction. Particularly, non-metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected from direct sunlight during storage. Facilities of the necessary dimensions shall be provided and maintained for storage of all non-metallic irrigation materials in




their entirety. All non-metallic materials shall be handled carefully and stored under cover to avoid damage. Pipes that have been damaged or dented shall not be used in this work.

C. In addition to the provisions for the protection of non-metallic components,

special attention shall be given to the protection of the control system compo-nents; protection shall be provided as per the manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Openings into the system, apparatus and equipment shall be securely covered,

both before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus or equipment.

E. Barricades, guards, warning signs and lights as necessary or required, for the

protection of the public and the work force shall be provided. F. Utilities: The location of existing underground utilities shall be determined and the

works performed in a manner which shall avoid possible damage. Hand exca-vation, as required shall be carried out to minimize the possibility of damage to existing underground utilities.

3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Layout and Verification

1. The Contractor shall stake-out the locations of all pipe and valves and the layout of work as accurately as possible.

2. The Contractor shall verify all horizontal and vertical site dimensions prior to

staking. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for relocating any existing services after

first obtaining the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall remove and relocate such services, at his own expense, if so directed by the Engineer.

4. Before starting work on irrigation systems, the Contractor shall carefully

check all grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths.

5. Fittings installed on pipes beneath pavements or walls shall be shown on

drawings. 6. All changes shall be recorded daily on the " As-Built" worksheets.

3.03 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before

installation. Any products that are found to be damaged or not in accordance with the specifications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and




replaced. Repairs shall not be undertaken without the Engineer's approval of Contractor's proposed action.

3.04 INSTALLATION A. Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with detail drawings. B. In bedding and backfilling granular material shall be used below and above the

pipes. The back fill material shall be free of stones bigger than C. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance shall be in accordance with the

common civil works standards covering the concrete class, shattering work, curing procedures etc.

D. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction

and the Drawings. E. Location of Irrigation Lines

1. Where the location of an irrigation line is not clearly dimensioned on the Drawings, the irrigation line shall not be laid horizontally closer than 3.0 meters from a sewer.

2. However, where the bottom of the irrigation line shall be at least 0.3 meters

above the top of the sewer pipe, the irrigation line shall not be laid closer horizontally than 1.5 meters from the sewer.

3. Where irrigation lines cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe

shall be fully encased in concrete, for a distance of at least 3.0 meters each side of the crossing or shall be made of pressure pipe with no joint located within 1.0 meters horizontally of the crossing.

4. Irrigation lines shall, in all cases, cross 0.6 meter above sewage pressure

mains. 5. Generally, where the irrigation distribution or secondary main with

accompanying cable bundle is running under hard surfaces or landscaped areas the pipe and the cables shall be directly buried in a clean sand bed with a marker tape above. At road junctions or other locations where pipes cross the road they shall be contained in a direct buried PVC sleeve. The sleeve shall extend beyond the road crossing by at least one meter on both sides. The sleeve shall be a minimum of 100 mm diameter, and for larger pipes shall be at least 25mm greater in diameter than the pipe running through it.

1. Header mains shall be direct buried in sand in the landscaped areas only.




F. Placing and Laying

1. Pipes shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are otherwise unsuitable for the work. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the material in the joints has hardened or until caulking or jointing is com-pleted. When work is not in progress, open ends of the pipe, fittings, and valves shall be securely closed so that no substance shall enter the pipes or fittings.

2. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged or capped,

and anchored, as shown or as directed. Pipes that have the grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid.

3. All piping with the exception of the flexible irrigation drip line shall be

surrounded by a sand bed to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings.

G. Plastic Pipes

Plastic pipes shall be installed in accordance with BS 8010: Part 1 and the Manufacturer's recommendations. Pipes with threaded joints shall be snaked from side to side of the trench to allow for expansion and contraction.

All main and branch piping to BS 3505, class E.

H. Jointing

1. Pipe joints of uPVC shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. Excess jointing material shall be removed.

2. uPVC male adaptors with specified threaded joint compounds to make

connections between plastic pipe and valves shall be used as detailed, and tightened with light wrench pressure.

I. Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed on main pipelines at all changes in direction or size. The thrust blocks shall be un-reinforced concrete and shall have a minimum dimension of 300 mm. The pipelines shall be located centrally in the thrust blocks.

J. Irrigation piping from the remote control valve boxes to the end of the irrigation drip lines shall be buried to the depths as shown on the Drawings.

K. Closing of Pipe and Flushing Lines:

1. Closing: Openings in piping systems shall be capped or plugged, leaving caps and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of the installation. Dirt and debris shall be prevented from entering pipe or equipment.




2. Flushing: All pipes and tubing shall be thoroughly flushed out before installation of the emitter control valves. Butt joints, fittings and connections shall remain visible.

L. Tagging and Identification: All remote control valves, motor-operated valves, pressure reducing valves, manually-operated gate valves and controllers shall be tagged and identified. All identifying numbers shall be consistent with like designations indicated on the irrigation controller schedule.

M. Site Equipment Installation

1. Isolation Valve/Gate Valve: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.

2. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Shall be installed in the positions as

indicated in the details, remote control valve assembly comprising gate valve, remote control valve with pressure regulator , and all appurtenances. Valve boxes containing the assembly shall not be placed closer than 300mm to paved areas. When the pressure gauge has been properly attached, the outlet pressure shall be set as required during coverage tests.

3. Valve Boxes: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.

All valves and valve assemblies shall be mounted in boxes as detailed.

a. The top of all boxes shall be set parallel with the grade and as detailed in a neat and orderly fashion.

b. Shall be placed parallel to paving, kerbs, walls or similar structures and

where more than one box, parallel to each other. c. All box locations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation of

valves. d. Valve boxes shall not rest on or come in contact with the valve, piping,

hose or conduit. e. Valve circuit number of the remote control valve shall be painted on rim of

box, such that:

i. Minimum height of letters and numerals - 38 mm. ii. Black enamel paint. iii. It shall be located on inlet side of box with bottom of letter aligned with

outer edge of box.

iv. A soak away 500 mm deep shall be provided under all valve boxes using clean crushed aggregate 20 - 30 mm nominal size.




N. Control System

1. Irrigation Controller

a. An irrigation controller shall be installed in locations approved by the Engineer, with the control cables, clearly marked with identification markers, attached to the appropriate terminals in the approved manner.

b. Shall be secure to a concrete pad with approved anchor bolts. Chipping,

cracking, or otherwise marring the finish of enclosure when securing to the concrete pad shall be avoided.

c. Programming of Irrigation Controller: Using the controller schedule

provided on the drawings, as a guide, the irrigation controller shall be programmed to correspond with the initial irrigation sequencing and duration of the cycles for each zone. The Contractor may find that during establishment and maintenance the schedule has to be modified to achieve a correct irrigation regime in accordance with good horticultural practice.

O. Irrigation - Electrical

1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission all items of electrical equipment associated with the irrigation systems.

2. All electrical works shall be in accordance with the BS and IEC, and as

further specified in Sections under Division 16. 3. The irrigation system shall commence at the controllers which shall be fitted

into a dwarf type distribution cabinet with solar shade and shall have a bolting down foot for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base. All incoming and outgoing cables shall be from below ground level. The cabinet shall have a hinged lockable opening door to provide full front access to the controller and equipment and shall be sized according to the equipment being installed.

4. All equipment, conductors, termination, etc., within the pillar and throughout

the irrigation system generally shall be fully insulated such that there are no live parts or connections exposed and shall be to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

5. The irrigation pillar shall have sufficient free space for fitting a kWh meter

together with any additional equipment or accessories required to complete the equipment.

6. Each irrigation pillar shall have permanently fixed on the inside of the door, a

distribution diagram showing all circuits connections, ratings, cable sizes, etc., together with a current controller schedule.

7. All terminals shall be of the crimped spade type with insulated grip. At all

connection locations 150 mm of "slack" shall be provided.




8. Conductor markers shall be used throughout which shall clearly indicate the

circuit reference or number. These shall be white plastic with black letters or numbers and of the type which acts as a sleeve over the conductor in-sulation.

9. Connections onto valves shall be made in a below ground PVC resin filled molded waterproof connector with integral wire clamp.

P. Drip Line/Soft line Testing

1. Drip lines shall be carefully uncoiled and laid in position without kinking. Any kinked section shall be cut from the line and subsequently rejoined with a line joiner section.

2. Drip lines shall be snaked as required for maximum coverage without the use

of compression fittings. Sharp bends shall be avoided where there is a likelihood of causing kinks in the line.

3. Drip lines shall be laid on the ground surface for a minimum of 48 hours prior

to the installation of irrigation emitters or stakes. 4. After this period the drip lines shall be realigned and secured to the ground

with stakes at 5 m intervals.

Q. Concrete Pads

1. Installation as detailed and where shown on the Drawings. 2. The exact location shall be confirmed to the Engineer prior to pouring. 3. Specified non-metallic conduit shall be provided as required to penetrate

boxes and enclosures as approved by the Engineer. 4. The anchor bolts shall be set in coordination with enclosure hole locations.

R. Pumps

1. Installation

a. Installation shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions, and as specified herein.

2. Fabrication:

a. All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer shall be interchangeable.




b. Whenever possible, the pump shall be manufactured such that it shall be possible to disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of other parts, such as suction and discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc.

c. All castings shall be clean without defect. Casting repairs shall be done

only after agreement is reached between the Engineer and the Contractor.

d. All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice

for the class of work involved. e. All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from

defects that shall prevent proper functioning of the pump. f. Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating. g. All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be

sprayed with PVC epoxy primer in accordance with pump manufacturer's standard practice.

h. Pump exterior shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and shall be

painted to meet specific application requirements in accordance with pump manufacturer's standard practice.

3. Shop Testing:

a. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with BS 5316.

In addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of operation from shut-off head to run out condition, including the guaranteed pump's performance point.

b. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design

pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one-hour test period. c. The Contractor shall submit Manufacturer's test certificates, including test

data to show that pump meets performance specifications.

3.05 SYSTEM TESTING

A. Purging

1. Immediately prior to hydrostatic testing, all irrigation lines shall be thoroughly purged of all entrapped air.

2. Mainline piping system may be tested in sections. Lateral Systems shall be

tested valve by valve. 3. Water shall be discharged from a single outlet by manipulation of isolation

control valves and installation of temporary caps.




4. Water shall be introduced into lines to be tested at full operating head and the water flow at end discharge point, and observed until all air and residual debris has been expelled from the line.

B. Initial System Test

1. Individual parts of the main network between isolation valve points having a length not greater than 500 meters shall be tested together with dead legs before backfilling operation.

2. Test shall be made only after completion of the above operations and not until at least seven days after the last concrete thrust anchor block has been cast.

3. Contractor shall supply all testing material and equipment, including all caps,

valves, pumps, tanks and gauges as required. 4. Pressure gauges shall be dual reading in bar and psi units. Calibration shall

be such that accurate determination of potential pressure loss can be ascertained.

5. The section of the main pipeline to be tested shall be filled with potable water

and all air expelled. After the main pipeline has been completely filled, the pressure shall be steadily and gradually increased until the specified test pressure has been reached. Simultaneous pressure and leakage tests and separate pressure test shall be made at 150 % of working pressure at the point of test, but not less than 125% of normal working pressure at highest elevation. Separate elevation test shall be made at 150 % of normal working pressure of the segment tested. Duration of simultaneous pressure and leakage tests shall be 2 hours and duration of separate pressure tests shall be 1 hour. All testing shall comply with AWWA M23-80, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Design and Installation. A graph shall be produced showing water input against time and the test shall run until the graph curve flattens out. Testing shall comply with AWWA specifications and requirements.

6. Separate tests shall be applied to the lateral distribution pipe work and the

irrigation pipe work from the remote control valves outwards. Test pressures for these shall be as described above.

7. When testing the irrigation lines from the valves, discharge devices shall be

replaced with temporary plugs or caps. 8. All trenches with pipe installed shall be immediately backfilled with preliminary

sand backfill sufficient to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. All joints, fittings and connections are to remain exposed until successful completion of hydrostatic testing.

9. Other than for preliminary sand backfill over pipes, no work shall be covered

before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.




10. During the tests, all exposed couplings, fittings and valves shall be carefully examined for defects and leakage. Leaking pipes, couplings, joints, fittings and equipment shall be repaired or replaced and the section retested as previously specified.

11. Upon receipt of approval of the Engineer to proceed, the remaining backfill

shall be placed and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry density. For further details refer to Section 02221 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, COMPACTION AND GENERAL GRADING.

C. Final System Test: The tests as specified above shall be repeated for the entire network after pipelines have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected. Each test shall be restricted to pipes of one class and particular care shall be taken to isolate air valves, etc. and not to apply higher pressures than specified at any point on the pipeline and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored before any test is carried out.

D. Test Results: Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested section of the pipe together with time of test and name of testing engineer in tabulated format shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer upon completion of the tests.

3.06 FLUSHING A. General: On completion of the system test, the system is to be thoroughly

flushed, the velocity of water being at least 1 m/s. Should the main water supply be unavailable or inadequate for this purpose at the time of flushing, then a swab of adequate size shall be used to remove all foreign matter from the pipeline. This process shall continue until the pipeline is completely clean. Each control valve shall be opened separately and the terminal systems also thoroughly flushed. After completion of flushing, the emitters and other discharge devices shall be fitted.

B. Operation Test: After the hydrostatic test, emitters shall be installed and the

system completed and tested to demonstrate functional efficiency. This shall be prior to covering the laterals with mulch.

C. The lines shall be operated for a period of 24 hours, not necessarily in one

continuous period, and all emitters checked for satisfactory operation. Any faulty/blocked emitters shall be replaced.




19.2.22 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

ITEM MANUFATURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

1. Copper Pipes KME EUROPE

WEDNESBURY UK YORKSHIRE UK

2. Copper Fittings KME EUROPE

YORKSHIRE UK WEDNESBURY UK

3. Valves CONEX UK

MARLEY UK PEGLER UK

4. PPR Pipes and Fittings HAKAN PLASTICS UAE,TURKEY

POLOPLAST GERMANY KOPEX UK ARIETE ITALY AQUATHERM GERMANY

5. Thermal Insulation KIMMCO KUWAIT

ARABIAN FIBREGLASS KSA ARMAFLEX UK

6. Pressure Reducing Valves CRANE UK

ZURN USA NIBCO USA GRINNELL USA

7. Pipes Hangers & Supplies TOLCO USA

HELTI GERMANY GRIPPLE LTD UK

8. Water Pumps ITT LOWARA ITALY

NOCCHI ITALY SPP UK WILO GERMANY

9. Fiber Glass Insulation KIMMCO

AFICO ARMAFLEX UK

10. Control Valves GRINNELL USA

TYCO FLOW CONTROL USA POTTOR ELECTRICS USA

11. Pipe Fittings INTERFIT FRANCE

ANVIL USA VICTAULIC USA




12. Pressure Reducing Valves NIBCO (PRV) USA

GRINNELL (PRV) UK KITZ JAPAN

13. GRP Sectional Tank FTC UAE

BRIDGESTON JAPAN HITANK KOREA

14. SNG System GASCO QATAR

JAMCO QATAR

15. Solar Hot Water SOLAHART AUTRALIA Heat pumps RHEEM USA

CLIMAVENETA ITALY ACCENT AIR AUTSTRALIA VIESSMANN GERMANY ECOTHERM EUROPE

16. Hdpe Pipes / Fittings TERRAIN UK

MARLEY UK HUNTER UK UNION PIPES(UPI) UAE

17. Media Filters CULLIGAN USA

AQUA SEA NETHERLANDS INNOVA ITALY

METITO UAE/USA

18. G.I, Black Steel Pipes/fittings NIPPON JAPAN DALMINE ITALY

NKK CORPORATION JAPAN TUBOS REUNIDOS SPAIN

19. Water and Gas Meters SENSUS GERMANY

20. Irrigation System HUNTER USA

FITCO INDUSTRIES UK RAINBIRD USA

SECTION – 20

DRAINAGE INSTALLATION



AEB-740-08-REV. 0 S-20-1/30 DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

SL. NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

20.1.00 DRAINAGE GENERAL 20.1.01 Site 20.1.02 Site Conditions 20.1.03 Definitions 20.1.04 Scope of Works 20.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulations 20.1.06 Drainage System 20.1.07 Programme 20.1.08 Contract Drawings 20.1.09 Working Drawings 20.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings 20.1.11 Material Submittals 20.1.12 Material Inspection 20.1.13 Alternative Materials 20.1.14 Setting Out of Works 20.1.15 Safety 20.1.16 Contractor’s License 20.1.17 Permits 20.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials 20.1.19 Protective Finishes 20.1.20 Works Test and Certificate 20.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 20.1.22 As Built Drawings 20.1.23 Period of Maintenance




20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK 20.2.01 Pipes and Fittings 20.2.02 Above Ground Pipes 20.2.03 Below Ground Pipes 20.2.04 Rain Water System Pipes 20.2.05 Pipes and Fittings, Installation and Inspection 20.2.06 Manholes 20.2.07 Sump Pit/Sump Pump 20.2.08 Manhole Covers and Gully Gratings 20.2.09 Oil Interceptor 20.2.10 Storm/Rain Water Holding Tank 20.2.11 Drains 20.2.12 Protection of Drainage Pipes 20.2.13 Testing and Commissioning 20.2.14 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers




20.1.01 SITE

Lusail, Doha, Qatar.

20.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS Unless otherwise specified, all the Drainage Materials & Equipment shall be capable

of withstanding the following site conditions:

1. Maximum Ambient : 50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in summer Temperature & 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in winter 2. Altitude : Sea Level 3. Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 % 4. Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Kms. per Hour 5. Prevailing Wind : North and northwesterly 6. Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular 7. Annual Rainfall : 50mm between January & April

20.1.03 DEFINITIONS The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall

mean: Site : The Locations where the works are to be

carried out. BS : British Standard Specifications CP : British Standard Code of Practice Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and the schedules therein. QCS : Qatar Construction Specifications

Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the purpose of execution of work at site.

As Built Drawings : This is the true record of the actual work carried out at site.




Works : To include the provisions for all the materials and works to be carried out by the contractor as per these specifications and for the satisfactory completion of the installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant in writing. Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing. Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing. Provide : Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission. Install : Shall mean install, test and commission. Furnish : Shall mean supply only. Concealed : Shall mean hidden from normal sight in the shafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions. Exposed : Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces, which may be reached without the use of ladders or any other temporary means of access.

20.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS The scope of works consists of furnishing, installing, commissioning and testing the

complete foul, waste and storm water drainage systems along with all associated manholes, catch pits, square top heavy duty parking structure floor drains, sand trap chamber, oil interceptor, and storm holding tank as indicated on the contract drawings, and in accordance with this specification and the requirements of section 20 of the QCS and shall be installed to BSEN 752-3 : 1997.

The contractor shall provide all supervision, labour, materials, equipment, machinery

and any other items necessary to complete the systems in all respects. The drainage system shall include the following:

1. uPVC buried system as shown on drawing and specified elsewhere. 2. uPVC soil, waste, vent, rainwater pipes as shown on drawing and specified

elsewhere. 3. Toilet/Pantry Floor drains, 300x300 size square top heavy duty carparking

structure floor drains and with heavy duty cover, overflows/underflows pipes, bottle traps for below pantry sinks and lavatories shown on drawings and as mentioned in the specifications.

4. Manhole, Manhole Covers, Steel Grating, Steps, oil interceptor, sand trap chamber with heavy duty cover, submersible pumps, sumppits, overflow/underflow drain pits, storage tanks’s drain sump pits, sump pumps.




20.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition.

The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labour to complete the works in accordance with the program of works.

The installations shall comply with the following regulations:

i. The installation of works shall be as per the latest edition and publication of Sewerage Division, Civil Engineering Department, Ministry of Public Works, State of Qatar.

ii. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of

practice (current editions including all amendments). iii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipment other than

the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right for such approval/s.

iv. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings

but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.

Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases

at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the construction, the consultant’s decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.

20.1.06 DRAINAGE SYSTEM The Drainage system includes various uPVC pipeworks including all the necessary

fittings and fixtures for the safe and sanitary disposal of Soil and Waste from the building, along with the provisions of various Manholes, finally discharge to the Infrastructure Sewer Manhole (FS/MD/3/10/1) via House Connection (HC-M-CO 050) as shown on the Site Development Sewer Layout dwg D-A0-0001.

uPVC Storm/rainwater network drainage piping discharge from the building are directed (by gravity flow) to the Storm water holding tank located at the third basement floor level and are constructed to have double storage height extending up to the whole level of 2

nd basement to provide enough volume for storage. Storm /rain

water holding tank access manhole is located at 1st basement level. A dedicated

(duty/standby) submersible storm water sumppit pumps are installed and operation shall be automatically controlled through float switches installed in the storm collection pit. The submersible sumppit pumps operates to discharge finally the storm/rainwater to the nearest infrastructure road gulley from the vicinity as shown on the Site Development Storm Water Layout dwg D-A0-0001A.




The scheme for the drainage system is detailed and provided in the Contract drawings for handling and disposal of:

a. Soil Water b. Waste Water c. Rain/Storm Water

20.1.07 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method

or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the Program:

1. Mobilization 2. Drawings and Material Submittals 3. Approvals 4. Equipment Deliveries 5. First Fix 6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works 7. Second Fix 8. Fixing of Accessories 9. Testing 10. Commissioning and Handing Over


The Drainage tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the

Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement required for the project.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor’s

responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Floor Gullies, Drains and other

accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders’ work associated with these drawings.





The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 for

details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant’s approval. The contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:

i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and

other accessories and fittings. ii Typical connection details of the various drainage systems of appliances, like

Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc., iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to

the other services Installations like, Electrical, Air-conditioning & Ventilation and Plumbing.

iv. Levels, Center Lines and Slopes/Gradients of the pipework installations.

20.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for

the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing and Drainage systems.

The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly

coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.

20.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the


equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary review and approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in

the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.

In case of items involving aesthetic, like Floor Gullies, Floor Clean Outs, Manhole

covers (if located Inside of Building) etc., samples must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical

literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the




equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the

Materials submittals of the Drainage Materials & Equipment in the following proforma to the consultant:

i. Submittal Number ii. Type of Material iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent iv. Date of Approval v. Date of Order / Order Number vi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea ) vii. ETA on Site viii. Status as on date of Report

a. Equipment Supply

All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local

agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,

then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from the consultant specifically.

b. Equipment Size and Delivery Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations

in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction program and the method of access.

c. Design References Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires

amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the change in the manufacturer’s range of production or availability etc., The contractor shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Consultant’s advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed

to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the execution.




20.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTION


materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at site, which is not approved earlier specifically, shall stand rejected without notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or

the sample submitted will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor’s account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace

with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

Materials Storage The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the

materials at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be strictly as per QCS, section 20 Part – 6.1.5.

20.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS Equipment and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule

of Manufacturer’s. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the equipment or material for the Consultant’s consideration. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives will be considered by the Consultant, before the tender is accepted and the Consultant’s decision will be final regarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed

in writing by the Consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the client’s convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor’s expenses etc.


The location of Floor Drains/Gullies, routes, Manholes etc., as indicated on the

tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and co-ordinated with furnishing and other services.




20.1.15 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower

and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipment at any point of time.


The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage

works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work. The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the

Mechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be rejected by the consultant.

20.1.17 PERMITS The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work

and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any connected works to others.


Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used

in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a “as-new” condition following

such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.





The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipment used in this

contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic conditions.

All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before

shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.

20.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Consultant or Consultant’s representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work executed by the contractor.

The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the

contract the list of works that to be inspected and the contractor shall give the Consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which the plant will be ready for testing.

The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's

test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates in original to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.

20.1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents for the

operating instructions and maintenance manuals along with the softcopy indicating the following:

a. Step by step operating procedures. b. Preventive maintenance schedule. c. Technical literature. d. Spare parts list e. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact

person. - Local as well as overseas. f. Work test certificates, if any. g. Routine Test results carried out at site.

20.1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall

be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings which are to be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.




Three sets of hardcopies drawings along with the softcopy shall be submitted after approval of the Consultant for onward submission to the client.


The contractor shall guarantee the entire Drainage System installed against Faulty /

improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days (Four Hundred) from the date, the Completion Certificate is issued, also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states

that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of notification at no additional cost to the contract.

In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within

the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault but nevertheless at the Contractor’s expense.




20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK

20.2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS All uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured under a BS 5750 and BS 5572, to BS 4514 for Internal above ground, and BS 4660 for the internal under ground installations, and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same manufacturer allowing the easy plumbing of an installation. All external under ground pipes shall be uPVC and manufactured under BS standards. The system shall comply with appropriate British Standards and bear the Kitemark. Applicable sub-sections of Section 20 of Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS) shall be applied to all drainage works.

20.2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPES

Soil, Waste and Overflow Systems Reference should be made to the following Codes and Standards: BS 3943 : 1979 Specification for plastic waste traps

BS 4514 : 1983 Unplasticised PVC soil and ventilating pipe fittings and accessories.

BS 5254 : 1976 Polypropylene waste pipe and fittings BS 5255 : 1976 Plastic waste pipe and fittings BS 5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for Sanitary pipework

(formerly CP 304) CP312 : 1973 Plastic pipework (Thermoplastic material) Part 1 & 2 Materials and colour: pipes and fittings shall be in uPVC in gray, white or rustic brown. Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain ended pipes. Seal ring expansion joints shall be provided where required. The system shall be compatible with buried drain system. Weathering Apron (solvent-weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil, waste, vent pipes for weather flashing around pipe at roof. Adjustable, plastic coated steel holderbats shall be used to support pipes or secure fittings. Galvanized mild steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used for horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated steel brackets. Floor gully inlet shall be in uPVC with stainless steel / bronze covers.




BSEN 1566-1 : 2000 (Formerly BS 5255 : 1976) Waste Water drainage, thermoplastic polymers,

plastic pipe fittings, caps, couplings, reducing couplings, thermal cycling test, leak test, quality control impact test, screwed fittings, chemical resistance.

BSEN 12056-2-2000 (Formerly BS 5572 : 1994) Sanitary appliance, water supply system,

drainage system, planning effluent, system layout, building pipeworks.

20.2.03 BELOW GROUND PIPES

(uPVC Buried Drain System) The uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 1401-1:1998(formerlyBS 4660) and BS EN1401-1:1998(formerly BS 5481), comprising complete drainage system, compatible to soil waste and rainwater system and where appropriate shall bear the Kitemark. Materials and Colours : buried drain system pipes and fittings shall be uPVC with polypropylene seal retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden brown, approximately to BS 381 C : number 414. Seal retaining caps and seal rings are black. Rodding eyes shall be provided where required. uPVC solvent weld socket seal / lip and lip seal / lip seal shall be used. Where necessary, lip seal / lip seal slip coupling shall be used.

Solvent Cements

Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non pressure pipework or BS 4346 : Part 3 for pressure pipework.

Sealing Rings Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS 2494.

20.2.04 RAIN WATER SYSTEM PIPES

As shown on drawings rain water system in uPVC complying with BS 4576, BS EN 12200-1:2000 and bearing the Kitemark shall be provided. UPVC rainwater systems shall be in gray as approved by the Engineer. All joints should remain watertight under working conditions. Pipes inside the building should be capable of withstanding the watertightness of a positive pressure of 38 mm water gauge for at least 3 minutes.




Rainwater pipes should be firmly supported without restricting thermal movement. Rainwater pipes shall not be encased in concrete columns structural walls and it is important rainwater pipes in casing or ducts are accessible for maintenance, repair and replacement. Relevant regulations of BS 6367, BS EN 12056-3:2000 shall be followed to ensure good performance of the rainwater system.

BS 5414 UPVC soil and vent pipes fittings and accessories and BS 4576 UPVC rainwater goods may be used for rainwater system. Roof and balcony outlets shall be made uPVC complying with the BSCP308 : 1974 and the Building Regulations 1976. The rainwater outlets shall incorporate a circular grid domed outlets secured with brass crews and washers. All outlets are either 178 or 406 mm in diameter. Self coloured, smooth, gloss and moulded, gray colour to BS 5252 : 1976, 10 A.07. When jointing UPVC pipes a gap should be left between spigot end of pipe and shoulder of socket that it enters in order to allow for thermal movement. UPVC pipes shall be with solvent weld sockets usable with seal ring adapter.

All rainwater pipes from upper roofs shall be free discharge to lower roof,and lower roof discharges to storm/rainwater piping network to the Storm/rainwater holding tank and pumped finally to outside toward the nearest road gulley in the vicinity .

20.2.05 PIPES AND FITTINGS, INSTALLATIONS AND INSPECTION

A. Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers All pipework shall be adequately supported in such manner as to permit free

movement due to expansion contraction, vibration or other changes in the system. Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction. Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS 5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for sanitary pipework.

Vertical stacks shall be adequately supported at the base to stand the total weight of

the riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipework.

High temperature uPVC waste pipework 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm shall be

supported using two piece holderbats screwed to the wall using round head zinc plated wood screws.

Brackets shall be galvanized steel and be rigid. Where soil and ventilation pipes are

suspended from the underside of slab, they shall be held rigid in position. Single angle iron supports may be used for pipework up to 500 mm from underside of slab. Double angle iron supports shall be used for pipework 500 mm, 1000 mm from the underside of the slab. All supports shall be proprietary brand and manufactured from




galvanized steel. Double angle iron braces shall be installed on both single and double angle iron supports at 6 metre centres of vertical and horizontal runs of pipework and anchored as necessary.

B. Rodding Eyes Rodding and cleaning eyes shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings

and as required.

C. Roof Termination All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300 mm above the point of exit from the

services duct.

D. Jointing

Jointing of uPVC and high temperature PVC shall be "O" ring and solvent welded. Prior to jointing all pipework fittings and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned. Pipework shall be cut square, end chamfered and swarf and dust removed. Prior to jointing pipes and fitting should be checked for correct position and alignment and marked to ensure accurate assembly. Where 'O' ring joints are to be used pipes shall be marked for insertion depth "O" ring placed in ring seal prior to application of small quantity of lubricant or petroleum jelly around the chamfered spigot end. The pipe shall then be inserted into the socket joint finally adjusted to the correct insertion depth. Where solvent joints are to be used, special care shall be taken to ensure both spigot and socket are free from all dirt, grease and swarf. Solvent cement shall then be applied liberally and evenly to both socket and spigot prior to inserting spigot into socket. The joint shall immediately be cleaned of surplus solvent with a dry cloth around newly formed joint. Jointing of W.C outlet to UPVC pipework shall be by means of either a straight or bent connector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection for W.C spigot outlet.

E. Laying Rigid Pipe Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected

for defects. Pipes with flexible joints, except concrete protection is provided as specified

hereafter shall be laid on a well compacted bed of granular bedding material extending for the full width of the trench and with sufficient material at the side to




permit the pipes to be worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true line and level. Sufficient space should be left to enable the joints to be made tested and inspected but the contractor shall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe length is fully supported. After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Consultant the trench shall be carefully filled to 300 mm above the crown of the pipe with granular material.

F. Laying Plastic Pipe All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc., of pipes plastic

materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations subject to the approval of the Consultant.

G. Setting Out and Pipe Alignment All pipes and pipelines shall be laid to the lines and depths shown on the drawings or

as otherwise directed by the Consultant. All pipelines shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that, except where

otherwise specified, the finished pipeline is in a straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes. Where shown on the drawings or other wise permitted by the consultant small changes of direction shall be achieved by deflection at joints within the maximum permitted by the manufacturer. Where the angle of the bend required is greater than that obtainable by joint deflection then manufactured bends of the appropriate degree shall be used. Manufactured bends shall only be used where shown on the drawings or where otherwise permitted by the Consultant.

All pipelines forming part of a drainage system shall be laid to the specified line and

levels so that every pipeline lies in straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes between successive manholes on the line. No bends will be permitted other than at manholes.

Every pipe shall placed in position individually and shall be set out accurately to the

line and level required. All setting out to line and level of both pipelines and individual pipes shall be achieved by methods approved by the Consultant.

Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid the contractor shall provide, fix

and maintain at such points as may be directed by the Consultant properly painted sight rails and boning rods of pre-determined measurement for the boning in of individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically over the line of pipes or immediately adjacent to and there shall at no time be less than three sight rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any other gradient.

If the contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipeline

alignment, he shall submit his proposed method to the Consultant for approval.




INSPECTIONS Written notice on prescribed form shall be given for the purpose of inspection,

measurement and testing for each of the following cases:

i. Setting out completed ii. Excavations completed iii. Beddings Laid iv. Drainage Laid and ready for testing v. Drainage bedding cover complete and compacted vi. Backfilling complete and compacted with ground level finish complete and ready

for final testing.

20.2.06 MANHOLES

CEMENT AND CONCRETE

A. Cement All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works whether

above or below ground level shall be sulphate resistant cement complying with BS 4027.

Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by

volume in suitable boxes in the proportions given in Section 20 of QCS. Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No. 1.

The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or

shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous in colour. Water shall then be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.

Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked

up again after it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be removed from the works.

Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12 mm thick layer of approved

epoxy mortar.

MANHOLES

A. General Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction gradient or diameter. The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings

and fully comply with CED regulations and QCS Section 20.




B. Blockwork Manholes Blockwork manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to

the dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Consultant. The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract

Drawings. Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate

resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1. Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.

Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25 concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound material. If the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be coated with an approved waterproofing material.

Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be

of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of concrete Grade SRC 30.

Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick

SRC mortar rendering Class 1. All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel

fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.

All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge

polythene membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling. Where indicated on the Drawings, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solid

precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete. Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole accesses opening are less

than the internal dimensions of the manhole chamber. The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron manhole covers and frames

of the quality specified. The covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set on precast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.

Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half

section vitrified clay channel branch bends shall be used for branch connections. Benching in manholes shall be carefully formed according to the number, diameter and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes shall have vertical sides extending from the vitrified clay channels at least to the level of the crown of the highest pipe. The benchings shall be sloped towards the channels at a gradient of 1 in 10 or as otherwise detailed on the drawings.

The benching shall be rendered with a 12 mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering. The ends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape




to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes, and shall project through on the inside, the benching being continued round the pipe to form a fillet.

C. CATCH PIT Catch Pit shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to the

dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Consultant. The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract

Drawings. Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate

resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1. Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.

Each catch pit shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25 concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound material. If the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be coated with an approved waterproofing material.

Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be

of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of concrete Grade SRC 30.

Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick

SRC mortar rendering Class 1. All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel

fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.

All exterior faces of catch pit chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge polythene

membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling. Where indicated on the Drawings, catch pit cover frames shall be supported on solid

precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete. Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where catch pit access opening are less

than the internal dimensions of the catch pit chamber. The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron heavy duty grating covers

and frames of the quality specified. The heavy duty grating covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set on precast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.

Testing of catch pit chambers shall be as detailed in Part 6 of Section 20 surface

water drainage.




20.2.07 SUMP PIT/ SUMP PUMP

SUMP PIT The construction of Sump Pit shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985. The Sump Pit shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly in accordance with the structural engineering details. Sump pit shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats) and externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm access manholes shall be provided at the top, with heavy duty manhole covers as detailed in the schedule of manholes. If the pit is more than one(1) meter depth, it is shall be provided with galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be provided at 30 mm centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm below cover level. The Sump Pit height shall be governed by the following:

a. height between the top of the slab and the bottom of lowest drainage pipe drained to the sump pit

b. height between the bottom of lowest drainage pipe and the sump pump switch on level.

c. minimum storage height of waste water. d. height between the sump pump switch off level and the height of water

required to submerge the pump discharge.

As shown on the drainage standard detail drawings, the pit height varies due to the above factors, therefore It shall be the contractors responsibility to fully check and verify as per site requirement for the height needed to suit the site condition.

SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP Electric submersible sewerage pumps shall be suitable for wet sump or dry pit installation and for intermittent or continuous operation. Pump shall be suitable for a maximum depth of submersion of 10 M with the outlet directed vertically upwards Motor shall be of the synchronous squirrel cage type IP 68 rating, hermetically enclosed within the stator housing. Stator shall be wound with double lacquered wire and subsequently triple dipped to provide insulation in accordance with IEC 85 temperature class “F” (155 deg. C) Stator winding over temperature shall be prevented by bimetallic thermal switches or thermistors embedded in each of the stator phase windings. Motor shall be designed for a maximum of 15 starts/hour. Cable entry glands shall be suitable designed to effectively seal the junction box from the surrounding liquid at depths up to 10 mtrs and to mechanically restrain the




cable to avoid distortion of the gland rubbers and to prevent kinking of the cable adjacent to the cable entry. Motor shaft shall be stainless steel and mounted on robust pre greased rolling element bearings. The shaft seal assembly shall comprise of two independent mechanical face seals mounted in tandem with an interposing oil chamber to cool the seals and to act as an additional leakage barrier. Seal combination shall be high wear resistant tungsten carbide. Motor and pump casing constructed of cast iron. Pump casing shall be smooth profiled volute geometry for clog free operation fitted with replaceable inlet wear rings. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced screw depending on the pump selection and duty specified. Pump set shall be supplied with a control panel complete with breakers, fuses starters duty/standby pump selector switch, pump on/off/fault indicator lights, auto change over facility etc. Panel enclosure shall be to IP 65. Pump operation shall be automatic controlled through level switches installed in the storm/rain collection pit. Pumps shall be supplied with all accessories including foot bends, guide rails stainless steel lifting chains, switches etc.

20.2.08 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 and shall be of the sizes

and types as shown on the contract drawings. In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of three types, as follows unless

otherwise specified. Heavy Duty to BS 497 Grade A Medium Duty to BS 497 Grade B Light Duty to BS 497 Grade C

Heavy Duty All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy to BS 497

Grade A. Reference M.A 60. The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the

loosely-bolted double triangular type with three point suspension to provide stability under load.




Medium Duty

All manholes installed external to buildings, but not in roadways or trafficked areas,

shall be medium duty to BS 497 Grade B1. The over and frame shall be of grey or ductile iron and the cover shall be either

rectangular or circular as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shall incorporate a single seal between cover and frame. Following flushing out and testing of the drainage system, the sealing groove shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.

The cover and frame shall be made from grey iron and shall incorporate a double

seal between cover and frame. Following out and testing of the drainage system, the sealing grooves shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.

In those areas where it is required to accept a tilled floor finish, the manhole covers shall be of the recessed type. In kitchens or other areas subject to washing-down manhole covers and frames shall have stainless steel edging and trim. Double cover units shall be provided where specified in the Manhole schedule. The contractor shall provide two sets of lifting key for each type of manhole. Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.

Step Irons Step irons shall be manufactured from galvanized malleable cast iron and shall

comply with BS 1247 – 3 : 1991 - BSEN 13101 : 2002 and be of the general purpose or precast concrete manhole pattern as applicable.

The tail length shall be 230 mm for both manhole types.

22.2.09 OIL INTERCEPTOR The construction of Oil Interceptor shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985. The oil interceptor shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly in accordance with the structural engineering details. Oil interceptor tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats) and externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm access manholes shall be provided at the end, with heavy duty manhole covers as detailed in the schedule of manholes. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be provided at 30 mm centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm below cover level. The inlet shall be via a uPVC inlet tee complete with access cap.




The Oil interceptor shall be installed in the waste line leading from carpark where oil may be introduced into the drainage system in quantity that can effect line stoppage storm/rain water disposal. Oil interceptor material shall be concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi and shall have two compartments. Access to grease interceptor shall be provided by a manhole cover over the inlet and a manhole over the outlet. Oil interceptors shall be maintained in efficient operation condition by periodic removal of the accumulated oil.

Oil interceptor shall be as per Drainage Department requirement refer to the details as shown on the design drawings.

22.2.10 STORM/RAIN WATER HOLDING TANK

The construction of holding tank shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS :4027, 1980. All reinforced concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985. The tanks shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly in accordance with the structural engineering details. Holding tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats) and externally with one coat of bituminous emulsion paint. A 600x600-mm access manholes shall be provided at the end, with heavy duty manhole covers as detailed in the schedule of manholes. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be provided at 30 mm centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm below cover level. The inlet and outlet storm/rain water shall be uPVC and have a puddle flange located within the holding tank wall. The inlet shall be uPVC inlet tee complete with access cap. A scum board shall be located at the outlet end of the tank as detailed in the drawings and a 100 mm cast iron holding tank vent, complete with insect guard, shall be provided.

22.2.11 DRAINS

HEAVY DUTY PARKING STRUCTURAL DRAIN

Floor drains in car parking areas on the 1st-2nd

basement parking and ground level adjacent drop off driveway as well as 4

th-5

th level car parking shall be square

top(300x300 cast iron grate cover) heavy duty parking structural floor drains, shall be

oven cured acid resistant epoxy coated aluminum body with 100Ǿ bottom outlet, top

membrane clamping collar, anti-ponding slots sediment bucket and heavy duty anti tilt hinged slooted grate, steel hinge pins, grate open area 0.019 m2(30 inch square) typical to Z-535(reference p108 Zurn catalog)/or equivalent to approved vendors list.




DOME TYPE PLANTING AREA DRAIN (LANDSCAPE AREAS)

Planting area floor drains in landscaping areas on the ground and 6th floor level shall be dome type planting area floor drains, shall be Dura-coated cast iron body with

75mmǾ bottom outlet complete with combination membrane flashing clamp/gravel

guard,low silhouette dome and stainless steel mesh screen over dome, Dome open area 0.050m2 (78 inch square) typical to Z-348(reference p73 Zurn catalog)/or equivalent to approved vendors list.

INVERTED ROOF CONCRETE DECK DRAINS Inverted roof concrete deck drains with perforated ballast extension, sump receiver,

Dura coated cast iron underdeck clamp,vertical expansion joint, shall be proposed to allow roof deck waterproofing membrane, insulation and gravel filling(crushed and washed limestone chippings between 15-30mm around outlet) typical to Z-107-C-85, Z-100-85–R-C-XJ(Zurn p38,p43 Zurn catalog)/or equivalent to approved vendors list.

20.2.12 PROTECTION OF DRAINAGE PIPES

A. Concrete Protection to Pipelines

All underground drainage pipework shall be surrounded with 150 mm thick Grade

SRC 20 sulphate resisting concrete, along its entire length in the following locations:

1. All drainage below buildings or structural elements 2. All drainage with less than 600 mm cover. 3. Drainage with a cover of between 600 mm and 1200 mm where there is vehicular

traffic over the ground above the drain line. 4. Elsewhere as indicated on the Contract drawings.

The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as

indicated on the Contract drawings. Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75 mm blinding of

concrete Grade 25 shall first be laid over the full width of the trench. The pipes shall be laid jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks which shall

be separated from the barrel by 25 mm thick timber packing. After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Consultant the top of the

concrete bed shall be thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20 carefully placed and compacted under and around the pipe to a height of at least 150 mm above the crown of the pipe.

Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded 13 mm thick fiberboard or

polystyrene sheets shall be fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full cross




section of the remaining concrete bed and surround, and accurately cut to fit the profile of the pipe.

B. Pipelines Protection from Extraneous Material The pipelines shall at all times be kept free of extraneous material and when work is

not is progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an approved watertight plug or stopper. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage the pipe will not be approved.

The contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior

to jointing and shall swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt sand or other matter that may contaminate the pipeline.

The entire absence of foreign matter from the completed line shall be a condition

precedent to acceptance.

C. Trenches

All trenches excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of QCS

Section 20-2 and this specification, Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the installation of the required pipe

bedding, granular or concrete as specified. Generally the depth of cover shall not be less than 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.

Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table:

Nominal Minimum Maximum

Pipe Bore Width Width

mm mm mm 100 430 630 150 490 690 200 560 760 The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300

mm above the crown of the pipe. Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of

the Consultant. The contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required depth with concrete or other such materials as the Consultant may direct.

In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or

within 5 metres of buildings the contractor will be required to execute the works so as to minimize damage and disturbance. Vertical trench side will generally require support by timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides will not be permitted.




D. Granular Bedding Material for Rigid Pipes. Granular bedding material for rigid pipes shall consist of gravel or broken stone and

shall be a suitable "all in" ballast or stone. For pipes up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore the material shall be graded 12

millimeters to 5 millimetres all passing 12 millimetres and not more than 20 percent passing 5 percent millimetres B.S sieve.

E. Backfilling Excavation After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete

surround, the trench shall be backfilled using selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it has been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm. each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 metres.

20.2.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING All drain pipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and

the requirements of Section 20 – 5.3.1 of the Q.C.S. The Consultant shall witness all drainage tests. The contractor shall give the

Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each drain section to be tested.

The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies

are available shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction of the consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.

After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor shall demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Tests shall be in accordance with British Standard BS 6700: 1987.

The tests shall demonstrate:

a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.

b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet the

specified requirements. c. That all instruments protection and control devices etc. are correctly calibrated

and accurate: d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.




The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the Engineer. The Client's representative and the Consultant shall be at liberty to be present at tests and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.

The contractor shall make all records during the tests and on completion thereof

shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The contractor shall also provide all test instruments together with skilled supervision and adequate labour for carrying out the tests.

A. Proving Tests All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down

and thoroughly flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipework system. After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the

drainage, soil and waste system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow. Particular attention shall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory flow when a number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any trap.

B. Water Test All drains shall be tested before backfilling immediately after the drain has been

properly laid on the correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to set. A water test pressure of 1.3 m head above the soffit of the drain shall be applied at the high end, but not more than 2.4 m head at the low end. The test shall be carried out on lengths of drain not less than half the distance between manholes, all to be agreed with the Consultant on site. The lower end of the drain shall be plugged and the higher end shall have a stand pipe not less than 1.2 m high. The drain shall be filled, taking care to eliminate trapped air. After repair of leakage due to defective pipes, joints and plugs the drain under test shall be left for one hour to allow water absorption by pipes and fittings. The loss of water over a period measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and noting the quantity of water required to maintain the original level in the stand pipe. For drains up to 300 mm diameter, the water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06 litre per hour per 100 linear metres per millimeter of nominal bore of the drain under test.

All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding

cover and selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface complete.

C. Air Test A gauge in the form of a "U" tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of

the length to be tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall be plugged. Air shall then be pumped in from the other end of the drain under test




until a pressure equal to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further pumping the pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during a period of five minutes.

Air tests shall be carried out after 3 p.m. and all pipework shall be shaded from the

sun at all times. Should an air test fail a water test shall be carried out as described in this specification.

D. Profile Test A hardwood ball of an approved profile shall be drawn through all foul drains from

manhole to manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and W.C's are filled. The diameter of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal internal diameter of the pipe by not more than 6mm or by not more than 45% of the nominal internal diameter of the pipe whichever is the greater difference.

During commissioning all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall

be carried out to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and that they are free of debris.

E. Manhole Test All manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and

the requirements of Section 20 of Q.C.S. The Consultant shall witness all manhole tests. The contractor shall give the

Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contract shall also provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each manhole to be tested.

All concrete manholes cast in situ and precast concrete manholes shall be water

tests by plugging all necessary connections and filling the manhole with water to a minimum height of 600 mm above the top of the benching. Water shall be added at ten minute intervals until absorption has ceased. No change of water level shall occur for an uninterrupted period of three hours.





ITEM MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

1. uPVC Pipes HEPWORTH UAE/UK TERRAIN UK MARLY UK

SD QATAR QATAR

2. uPVC Fittings HEPWORTH UAE/UK TERRAIN UK MARLY UK

SD QATAR QATAR

3. Rain Water Outlet TERRAIN UK HUNTER UK HEPWORTH UAE ZURN USA

4. M.H. Cover/Grating SAUDI CAST KSA

GLYNWED KSA ST GOBAIN FRANCE PAM ACCESS UK

5. Floor Gully, Cover, WADE USA Floor Drain Cover ACO UK/GERMANY

F.C.FROST UK ZURN USA

6. Sump Pump ITT LOWARA ITALY NOCCHI ITALY FLYGT SWEDEN

HOMA GERMANY GRUNDFOS DENMARK

SECTION – 21

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

AL SENDIAN TOWER (2B+G+27F+PENTHOUSE) ON PLOT COM-49

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS


AEB-740-08-REV. 0 S-21-1/261 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

21.0. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

21.1 General 21.1.1 Site 21.1.2 Site Conditions 21.1.3 Definitions 21.1.4 Scope of Works 21.1.5 Compliance - Specifications and Regulations 21.1.6 Electrical Supply System 21.1.7 Program me 21.1.8 Contract Drawings 21.1.9 Working Drawings 21.1.10 Co-Ordination of Drawings 21.1.11 Material Submittals 21.1.12 Material Inspections 21.1.13 Alternative Materials 21.1.14 Setting Out of Works 21.1.15 Safety 21.1.16 Contractor's License 21.1.17 Permits 21.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials 21.1.19 Protective Finishes 21.1.20 Labels and Identification 21.1.21 Works Testing and Certificates 21.1.22 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 21.1.23 As Built Drawings

21.1.24 Period of Maintenance





21.2.25 Connection Fee

21.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION 21.2.1 Transformers 21.2.2 MV Panels 21.2.3 Bus-Bar Risers Trunking 21.2.4 Power Factor Correction 21.2.5 Sub-Main Switchboards/Electrical Digital Meter 21.2.6 Distribution Boards 21.2.7 Air Circuit Breaker 21.2.8 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 21.2.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers 21.2.10 Fuses 21.2.11 Motor Starters 21.2.12 Contactors – Overload and Control Relays

21.2.13 Fuse Switches and Isolators 21.2.14 Cables 21.2.15 Conduits 21.2.16 Cable Trunkings and Trays 21.2.17 Electrical Ducts 21.2.18 Light Fittings 21.2.19 Wiring Accessories

21.2.20 Fire Detection and Alarm System 21.2.21 Emergency Lighting 21.1.22 Telecoms and Data 21.2.23 CCTV and Security System 21.2.24 Standby Diesel Generator Set





21.2.25 Uninterruptible Power Supply System 21.2.26 Earthing and Lightning Protection 21.2.27 Lighting Control System 21.2.28 Master Antenna and Satellite Reception System 21.2.29 Grid-Tied Solar PV System

21.2.30 Testing and Commissioning 21.2.31 Warranty and Guarantee 21.2.32 Spare 21.2.33 Schedule of Mounting Heights 21.2.34 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers





21.1 GENERAL

21.1.1 SITE

For site location, refer to the Project Drawing and Specifications.

21.1.2 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the Electrical Equipments shall be capable of withstanding without deterioration the following site conditions:

1. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50oC (Dry Bulb) in Summer Temperature

& 5oC (Dry Bulb) in Winter.

2. Design Ambient Temperature: 50oC.

3. Maximum Metal Surface Temperature Exposed to Sun: 85oC.

4. Altitude: Sea Level.

5. Maximum Relative Humidity: 100 %.

6. Design Ambient Humidity: 100%.

7. Maximum Wind Velocity: 162 Km per Hour.

8. Prevailing Wind: North and North Westerly.

9. Storms: Dusty, sporadic and Irregular.

10. Annual Rainfall: 50mm – 100mm between January & April.

21.1.3 DEFINITIONS The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall

mean:

1. Site: The Locations where the works are to be carried out.

2. Contractor: The Contractor to be appointed for the works covered by this section of the specification.

3. Consultant: The Client‟s appointed representative and advocate with regards performance of these works and the Author of this specification document.

4. QGEWC: Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation

5. OOREDOO: Qatar Telecommunication Company





6. KAHRAMAA Regulations: Regulations issued by QGEWC for the Installation of Electrical Equipment, Wiring & Air-conditioning of residential & Commercial Buildings (February 2006 Edition).

7. IEE Regulations: BS 7671:2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations 17

th Edition) issued by BSI.

8. BS: British Standard Specifications published by the British Standards Institute (BSI).

9. CP: British Standard Code of Practice published by BSI.

10. Tender Drawing: The Drawing on which the tender is based and the schedules contained there-in.

11. Working Drawings: The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the purpose of execution of work at site.

12. As Built Drawings: Which form an accurate and true record of the actual work carried out at site.

13. Works: To include the provisions for all the materials and tasks to be carried out by the contractor as per this specification and for the satisfactory completion of the installation.

14. Approved: Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant in writing.

15. Submitted: Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing.

16. Accepted: Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing.

17. Provide: Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.

18. Install: Shall mean install, test and commission.

19. Furnish: Shall mean supply only.

20. Concealed: Shall mean hidden from the normal line of sight in shafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs, partitions, enclosed voids..

21. Exposed: Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces, which may be reached without the use ladders or any other temporary means of access.

22. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (USA).

23. NEC: National Electrical Code (Standard 70) (USA) published by the NFPA.

24. IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.

25. EN: Euronorm (European Harmonized Standards).





26. UL: Underwriters Laboratories.

27. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (USA).

28. ANSI: American National Standards Institute (USA).

29. DIN: German Industrial Standards.

30. VDE: Verband De Utscher Elektro Techniker (Germany)

21.1.4 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works to be executed under this contract includes the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical materials and equipment as per the specifications drafted in these sections and the drawings.

The contractor shall provide complete installations for the project and other

associated works such as supporting structures, ancillary works etc. A brief description of electrical works will be as follows:

1. Transformer: The transformer scope shall be by the Infrastructure Consultant/Contractor.

2. MV Panels: Provide the MV Panel(s) within the Sub-Station as shown upon the drawings, inclusive of the main cables and connections to the associated Sub-Main Distribution Boards, fixed loads and Distribution Boards.

3. BUSBAR TRUNKING: Provide The Bus-bar risers including the accessories, used for the project as shown upon the drawing and shall conform to BS EN 60439-2 (IEC 439) and with the relevant provisions of the 16th edition of the Wiring regulations BS 7671.

4. Power Factor Correction: Provide the MV Power Factor Correction Cubicle(s) within the Sub-Station as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

5. Sub-Main Distribution Boards: Provide the Sub-Main Distribution Boards within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

6. Distribution Boards: Provide the lighting & power Distribution Boards within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings, inclusive of the final circuit cables and connections to the associated lighting & power loads.

7. Motor Control Centres: Provide the Motor Control Centres within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.





8. HVAC Plant: Provide the power & controls wiring to all the items of HVAC plant within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

9. Lighting & Power: Provide the lighting & power installations within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

10. Emergency Lighting: Provide the Central Battery Emergency Escape Lighting installations within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

11. Wiring Containment: Provide the Wiring Containment for all the electrical systems within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

12. Fire Detection & Voice Alarm: Provide the Fire Detection & Alarm Systems within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

13. Security System: Provide the CCTV, Access Control & Intruder Alarm installations within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

14. Audio-Visual System: Provide the Audio-Visual System installations within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

15. Telecom & Data: Provide the Telecom & Data networks and installations within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

16. Standby Generation: Provide a complete Standby Generator installation within the development inclusive of the change-over switch gear and essential power distribution within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

17. Uninterruptible Power Supplies: Provide the UPS units, power distribution and connections installations within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

18. Earthing & Lightning Protection: Provide the earthing networks, conductors, connections & bonds for the complete Earthing & Lightning Protection systems within the development as described within this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

21.1.5 COMPLIANCE - SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS The installations shall comply with the following regulations:





1. Electrical Installations: These shall comply with the KAHRAMAA Regulations issued by QGEWC for the Installation of Electrical Equipment, Wiring & Air-conditioning of residential & Commercial Buildings (2010 Edition).

2. Equipment & Fittings: All equipment & fittings shall conform to the relevant British Standard specifications & codes of practice (current editions including all amendments).

3. Fire Detection & Alarm Installations: Shall comply with the coordinated requirements of NFPA 72, BS 5839-1:2002 and the Qatar Civil Defense Department whose requirements shall take precedence over all others.

4. Emergency Lighting Installations: Shall comply with the coordinated requirements of NFPA 101, BS 5266-1:2005, and the Qatar Civil Defense Department whose requirements shall take precedence over all others.

5. Earthing & Lightning Protection Installations: Shall comply with the requirements of BS7430:1998 & BS EN 62305:2006.

6. Qatar Construction Specification Shall comply with the requirements of latest Edition from QCS.

If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipments other than those specified and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right to reject any applications for such approvals without the right to appeal.

Any apparatus, appliance, materials or works not shown on the contract drawings but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried out by the contractor without any additional costs to the contract sum.

Clarification shall be obtained at the tendering stage by the Contractor from the Consultant in writing for any installations where it is perceived that the extent of specified installations and the expected content or works are not clear. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards or during the construction, the Consultant‟s decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.

21.1.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM

The following supply system is prevails in the State of Qatar:

1. Supply: Alternating current (ac), 4-wire.

2. Nominal Voltage: 415 V phase-phase & 240 V phase-neutral or earth (tolerance ± 6%).

3. Nominal Frequency: 50 Hz (cycles per second) (tolerance ± 0.5%).





4. Number of wires: 4 (3 phases + 1 neutral) + Earth conductor.

5. Neutral: Full capacity and same size as phase conductor, solidly earthed to transformer star point at MV Panel (TN-S).

NOTE:

All the equipment and accessories shall be fully rated and compatible with the above

Qatar electricity supply parameters. No other variants will be permissible i.e., 220/380 V or 115/220 V etc. equipments will be summarily rejected.

Throughout this specification and on the drawings references are made to the

ranges of nominal voltages (rms values for ac) and these are defined as follows:

1. Extra Low Voltage (ELV): Normally not exceeding 50 V between the Conductors or to Earth.

2. Low Voltage (LV): Normally exceeding Low voltage but not exceeding 250 V between Conductors or to Earth.

3. Medium Voltage (MV): Normally exceeding 250 Volts but not exceeding 650 Volts, whether between the Conductors or any conductor and Earth.

4. High Voltage (HV): Normally exceeding 650 Volts between conductors or between any Conductor and Earth.

21.1.7 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on the CPM (Critical Path

Method or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to complete the project on time. The following construction milestone dates shall be highlighted in the Program:

1. Mobilization 2. Drawings and Material Submittals 3. Approvals 4. Equipment Deliveries 5. First Fix 6. Main and Sub-Main Distribution Equipment 7. Second Fix 8. Fixing of Light Fixtures 9. Testing 10. Power-on dates for each phase of the works for both temporary and

permanent power supplies. 11. Commissioning and Handing Over.






The electrical tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule

of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared to show the bidder the principal equipment and general arrangement required for the project.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work and as such are not to be

interpreted as working drawings. It is the Contractor‟s responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked against the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of lighting points in relation to the

furniture and equipments. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the local regulations and have included in his prices for all the necessary installations and builders work associated with these drawings.


The contractor shall prepare the working drawings to a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5

for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultant‟s approval. The contractor shall detail the following in the working drawings:

1. Actual conduit routes with circular junction boxes indicating the size of

conduit, number and size of wires it is carrying, where it is to rise up or fall to below etc.

2. Separate drawings shall be prepared for both the small power and lighting

layouts.

3. Reflected ceiling plans showing coordinated services, light fittings and other ancillary equipment such as fire alarm, A.C diffusers etc., with respect to the ceiling.

4. Mounting arrangement of light fittings, cables, cable trays, trunking etc.

5. Sectional views for coordinating the electrical wiring and other services i.e.,

Air-conditioning, Drainage and Plumbing to the Consultant‟s requirements.

21.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS The Main contractor will produce working drawings for building works required for the

services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing and Drainage systems.

The Main contractor is to ensure that all the working drawings are properly

coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be





installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the clearances required between each of them as per the QGEWC Regulations.

21.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

a. General The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the


equipment intended for use on the project, to the consultant for the necessary approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted:

in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly supported by the written confirmation from the manufacturer for confirmation.

In the event that items involving aesthetics, like light fittings, wiring accessories,

smoke / heat detectors, etc., samples must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical

literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit to the Consultant a status report every

month, of all the materials submittals for electrical equipment in the format that follows:

1. Submittal Number 2. Equipment / Model Number 3. Manufacturer / Local Agent 4. Date of Approval 5. Date of Order / Order Number 6. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea ) 7. ETA on Site 8. Status as at the date of the Report

b. Equipment Supply

All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The Contractor shall mark the same clearly on the submittals (item No. 3. above).





In case of any item/s required to be purchased direct from outside the country (only for valid reasons) then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain prior and specific written approval from the consultant.

c. Equipment Size and Delivery

Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installation in the position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction program and the method of access.

d. Design References

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, that require amendments or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the change in the manufacturer‟s range of production or availability etc., then the contractor shall discuss the matter with the Consultant and obtain an approved readily available alternative. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Consultant‟s advice and obtain approval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the execution.

21.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS


materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same by the Consultant. Any material used at site not approved specifically prior to delivery shall stand rejected.

Any item of supply found found at site that differs from the examples shown in the

submittal catalogue or the submitted sample will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any time-delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractor‟s account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace

with approved materials at his own expense. In the event the contractor fails to do so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works with the assistance of other agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials at site and provision of such protective covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be strictly as per the relevant QCS sections.





21.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Equipment and materials that shall be used as the basis for the design are listed in

the Schedule of Manufacturers. The bidder may submit alternative proposals for any of the equipment or material for the Consultant‟s consideration but only in cases where the specified item(s) are not available due to valid reasons. The Consultant will only consider such alternatives before the tender is accepted and the Consultant‟s decision will be final regarding the matter.

If the proposed alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance

of the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the Contractor is cautioned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification requirements, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.


The location of switches and other electrical accessories as indicated on the tender

drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and coordinated with the Interior Design scheme and other services.

21.1.15 SAFETY

The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary safety procedures at site to protect

manpower and machinery. Temporary electricity supplies either generated on-site or obtained from supply authorities shall be effectively earthed and protected with suitable earth leakage circuit breakers.

The socket outlets used for construction shall have enclosures and construction with

ingress protection rating IP67, and shall be of the industrial type with suitable plugs etc. to comply with BS EN 60309. The cables and socket outlets shall be protected against mechanical damage at site. The assembly of the socket outlets shall be properly wired and mounted on purpose made racks fabricated out of sheet steel and angle iron. These racks shall be securely fixed on the wall at convenient places and shall also be earthed. Wooden racks will not be allowed to be used for this temporary supply.

The cables shall also be properly supported on the wall. Only those wires used for

the final connections from the socket outlets to the tools will be allowed to lie on the floor preferably protected against mechanical damage.

The Contractor shall provide single line wiring scheme for the construction site

temporary power supplies for the approval of the Consultant and carry out the works strictly in accordance with QGEWC Regulations.






The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Electrical

works shall have a valid license from the QGEWC. The grade of license shall also be in accordance with the total load of this project. A copy of the License shall be submitted to the Consultant.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the

Electrical Engineers, Electrical Foreman and Electricians to be employed on the project along with their QGEWC license copies, and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. The consultant will reject any application with less than 5 years of experience.

21.1.17 PERMITS The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work

and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the relevant authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any works in connection with others.


Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used in

the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining written permission from the Consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged plant or material allegedly brought to an “as-new” condition following

such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal and only at the discretion of the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.


The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in

this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic conditions.





The Contractor or his representative shall before shipment inspect all materials and equipment to ensure that the finishes are in accordance with the specifications and protected against deterioration.


All main switches, isolating switches, distribution boards and main switch boards

shall have labels fixed to the outside by means of four small round-head screws. Labels shall not be less than 50 mm x12 mm high, and engraved with 6 mm or more, black lettering to indicate the purpose of the switch or distribution board. The labels shall be of white / black / white Traffolyte substrates. The minimum height of lettering for switchgear equipment shall be 6 mm.

Each distribution board shall be provided with a type-written circuit chart on cartridge

paper protected by a perspex envelope (pocket) and fixed to the inside of the door. The circuit list shall give the number and details of points served by each circuit and the rating of the fuse or circuit breaker. Sample lists shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval before installation.

Each underground cable shall have its size and feeder‟s name engraved / punched

on an aluminium strip 12 mm wide of 16 gauge thickness and shall be tightened on each end where cables enter / come out of the trench or soil.

All accessible switchboards and distribution boards shall be provided with warning

plates “DANGER - 440 VOLTS” having 8 mm red letter on white vitreous enamel plate.

21.1.21 WORKS TESTING AND CERTIFICATE

Provision shall be made by the Contractor for the Consultant or the Client or the

Client's representative to witness tests of major items of equipment at the manufacturer‟s works.

The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the

contract of the list of equipment to be inspected and the contractor shall give the Consultant the required notice of the date on which the plant will be ready for witness testing.

The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's

test sheets without witness. The contractor shall supply all the original test certificates to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.

21.1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The contractor shall provide six copies of the project Operation & Maintenance

Manuals in the form of Lever Arch type bound documents indicating the following:

1. Step by step operating procedures.





2. Preventive maintenance schedule. 3. Technical literature. 4. Spare parts list. 5. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. Telephone no., and

contact person. - Local as well as overseas. 6. Works test certificates. 7. Routine Test results carried out at site. 8. Record Drawings (complete set).

The O&M Manuals shall also be provided as full content soft copies (x6) recorded upon DVD discs.

21.1.23 AS BUILT DRAWINGS After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall

be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shall be supported by sketches and incorporated on the “AS-BUILT” drawings, which are to be submitted to the Consultant within one month of on-site project completion.


The contractor shall guarantee the entire Electrical System installed against faulty /

inappropriate materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days (Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted by the Consultant, and shall commence only after the availability of the QGEWC mains Electric Supply at site. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply to these items.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for the entire contract works, which

states that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents. For the duration of the maintenance period, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of notification at no additional cost to the contract.

If the Contractor fails to promptly attend to any such faults as mentioned above

within the specified time, then the client shall make his own arrangements to rectify the fault but nevertheless at the Contractor‟s expense.

21.1.25 CONNECTION FEE

The Contractor shall allow for the KAHRAMAA connection fee in his price based on the KW connected load for the project. However, if there is a change in the fee tariff by KAHRAMAA at the time of Construction, / Connection, the Contractor shall not be paid for any additional cost.





21.2.00 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION

21.2.01 TRANSFOMERS

1) SCOPE

a. This specification details about the requirements for design, manufacture,

testing, transporting, and delivery of 11/0.433KV Cast Resin (Dry Type) distribution transformers,

b. The transformers shall be two winding, cast resin, natural air cooled (without

any forced ventilation) with metallic enclosure, and connected through bushings in cable boxes.

c. The transformers are intended to be installed in Indoor Applications, in non-

air conditioned rooms. These transformers need to withstand the harsh ambient and climatic conditions prevailing in the state of Qatar, as specified in subsequent sections.

d. The rated capacities of the transformers shall be 1600KVA for continuous

service at 50 Hz to transform energy from 11kV (nominal) to 415/240V (nominal).

2) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The following conditions prevail throughout in the State of Qatar

a. Altitude - low lying, generally close to sea level, no part exceeding 100m above sea level.

b. Maximum air temperature 50oC ( 46oC typical). c. Minimum air temperature 0oC ( 10oC typical) d. Mean maximum summer air temperature, 45oC typical. e. Mean maximum exposed sunlight temperature, 75oC f. Solar radiation- peak, 1030 Watts/sq.m. g. Humidity - 100% humidity is common throughout the year and may occur at

air temperature of 30oC or more. h. Rainfall - very low on average. The winter season may bring infrequent very

heavy rainfall. i. General atmospheric conditions: A hot atmosphere containing very fine,

highly penetrating dust particles. In parts the atmosphere contains a highly corrosive salt laden sea mist. Prevailing winds generally from the north west, mostly light but occasionally gusting in excess of 30 knots

3) SYSTEM CONDITIONS

The 11kV system has three phase, 3-wire system with star point earthed through earthing transformer at 66/11KV primary sub-station.

1. Nominal Voltage 11kV





2. Maximum Voltage 12kV 3. Maximum Symmetrical fault level 25KA 4. Limited earth fault current through earthing transformer 4.5KA 5. Impulse Voltage 75kV 6. Rated Frequency 50 Hz

The LV System has 5 wires i.e. 3 Phase + Neutral + Earth. Neutral and earth is directly shorted at the Distribution Substation end. A consumer earth terminal is provided.

1. Nominal Voltage 415/240V 2. Highest Symmetrical fault level 44kA 3. The highest fuse rating(at LV Distribution Feeder Pillars) 400 A

Fault duration is limited by HRC fuses, Type-J to BS 88 (at LV Distribution Feeder Pillars).

4) APPLICABLE STANDARDS

This Specification makes reference to the following documents: Transformers IEC 60076-11 Dry type Power Transformers. IEC 60076 Power Transformers IEC 60076-10 Power Transformers – Determination of Sound Levels. IEC 60905 Loading guide for Dry Type Power Transformers. BS 2562 Specifications for Cable Boxes for Transformers, Flanges, Bushings BS 6435 Un-filled enclosure for dry termination of HV Cables for transformers

Surface Preparation, Coating & painting Works ISO 8501-1 to 4 Preparation of Steel Substrates before application of paints and r elated products. BS 381C 1980 Specification for Colours for Identification, Coding, and Special

Purposes. BS EN ISO 1460 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Ferrous metals – Gravimetric

determination BS EN ISO 1461 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Ferrous metals- Specification

& test methods ISO 2081 Electro-plated coatings of zinc with supplementary treatments

on iron or steel ISO 2063 Thermal spraying- Zinc, aluminum and their alloys BS 2569-2 Sprayed Metal Coatings – Protection of Iron & Steel against

Corrosion ISO 4628-1 to 5 Evaluation of Degradation of paint coatings ISO 9227 Salt spray test ISO 1519 Paints & Varnishes – Bend test ISO 2808 Paints & Varnishes – Determination of film thickness ISO 2409 Paints & Varnishes – Cross cut test ISO 1520 Paints & Varnishes – Cupping test





ISO 6272 Paints & Varnishes – Rapid deformation (Impact resistance) test ISO 6270 Paints & Varnishes – Determination of resistance to humidity ISO 11997 Paints & Varnishes – Determination of resistance to cyclic

corrosion conditions

5) GENERAL DESIGN FEATURES

1) The design, construction & testing of Cast-resin transformers shall be generally in accordance with IEC 60076-11, unless other-wise specified. Cable boxes, mounting flanges, bushings shall generally conform to the respective standards mentioned above, unless other-wise specified.

2) The transformer shall be fitted inside sheet steel enclosure having IP protection degree of IP23D with natural air ventilation. However, all ventilation louvers and other openings (if any) at top or bottom of enclosure should be closed with strong non-corrosive metallic vermin screens (aperture size not more than 2mm dia)

3) The Transformer or its Enclosure shall not be fitted with any forced ventilation or exhaust fans. Only the natural air ventilation available in the civil building room shall be able to provide necessary ventilation needs. The manufacturer needs to provide necessary air flow requirements and sizing details for ventilation of indoor civil room construction.

4) The transformers shall be capable of delivering full rated power continuously, under specified service and ventilation conditions, without any thermal overloading. The design & construction of transformer shall be such that, no de-rating factor shall need to applied on account of specified temperature rise limits, enclosure IP protection, and ventilation requirements.

5) The no-load LV output voltage of the transformers shall be 433/250V, when HV side is applied with 11kV at center tap. This is to provide consumers with a nominal supply voltage of 415/240V (three phase 4 wire/Single phase 2 wire, 50Hz), after permitted system voltage drops.

6) The sub-assemblies of the transformer shall be so designed that they should not un-duly increase the vibrations or cause resonance. Anti-vibration mounts shall be incorporated to reduce vibration & noise levels.

6. RATINGS AND CHARACTERISTICS

1) Service conditions & maximum winding temperature rise limits

a. Average of hottest month temperature of cooling air outside enclosure is

350C b. The maximum temperature of cooling air outside enclosure may exceed

500C any time c. The relative Humidity surrounding the transformer may reach 100% d. Frequent Condensation may occur during high humid conditions





e. The surrounding air may contain very fine, highly penetrating, sand dust with highly corrosive salt laden sea mist.

f. The maximum temperature rises of the windings shall not exceed by 850K over an ambient temperature of 500C, when fully loaded inside in the specified enclosure (along with vermin screen), without forced ventilation.

2) Ratings

a. Rated Power of Transformers : 500KVA/1000KVA/1600KVA b. IP protection of Enclosure : IP23D + Vermin screen (not less than 2mm

aperture) c. IK protection of Enclosure : not less than IK7 (2.0 joules) d. Ventilation : Natural air cooling-AN (no forced ventilation) e. Th. Insul. class of windings(HV/LV) : Class F/F f. Winding material (HV/LV) : CU/CU g. Voltage ratio : 11000/433V h. No. of phases : 3-Phase i. Connections : Delta- Star, as per vector group Dyn11 j. Rated frequency : 50HZ k. Rated voltage (U) : 11kV l. Maximum flux density : ≤ 1.6 Tesla at normal voltage and frequency m. No-load current : ≤ 1% of transformer rated current n. Tapping range & steps : +5% to -5%, in 4-steps each of 2.5% o. Rated Insulation Levels

Parameter Name HV Side LV Side Rated Voltage(U) 11KV 433/250V (at no load) Rated Highest 12kV 1.1kV Withstand Voltage(Um) Rated Lightening Impulse 75Kv - Withstand Voltage (peak) Rated Power frequency 28kV 3kV withstand voltage

p. Guaranteed values of losses (load & no-load), percentage impedances

measured at principal tap and corrected to reference temperature of 750C shall be as mentioned below.

KVA Rating Max. No-load losses* Max. Load Losses* % Impedance 1000KVA 2300 8800 5.45 ±10% 1600KVA 2875 12500 6.00 ±10%

*Note: The values specified for No-load & load losses are maximum values. q. The climatic class of the transformers shall conform to: Class C1 r. The Environmental class of the transformer shall conform to: Class E2 s. The Fire behavior class of the transformer shall conform to: Class F1 t. Maximum dimensional limits of Enclosure: 2300 (L) x 1500 (W) x 2300 (H), mm u. IP protection of HV & LV Cable boxes: IP43





3) Short Circuit Ratings

Verification of transformer‟s ability to withstanding short-circuit conditions, shall be made through type testing in accordance with IEC 60076-5, at reputed independent laboratories.

a. Thermal ability of the transformers to withstand short circuit current shall be verified for a duration of 2 sec. The value of ambient temperature shall be considered as not less than 500C for calculation of initial winding temperature.

b. Ability to withstand dynamic effects of short circuit shall be verified by tests (not by calculation method)

4) Tapping Range & Tapping Method

a) Off-circuit tapping selection shall be made by the use of bolted links on the HV

winding. The tapping range shall be ±5% in steps of ±2.5% For total 5 tap positions.

b) Current carrying capacity of the bolted links for tapping shall be capable of withstanding the rated short-circuits capacity.

5) Magnetic flux density

a) The flux density at any point of the magnetic circuit when the transformer is

connected on normal tap (3) and operating at normal voltage and frequency shall not be more than 1.6 Tesla, and well below the saturation level. Proof of this shall be submitted for verification in the form of B/AT magnetizing curves of the magnetic core assembly

6) Thermal insulation Class of windings & temperature rise limits a) Thermal insulation class of HV & LV windings shall conform to the class-F/F

(Insulation system temperature - 1550C) as defined on IEC 60085. b) The maximum temperature rises of the windings shall not exceed by 850K over

an ambient temperature of 500C, when fully loaded the transformer inside the specified sheet steel enclosure without forced ventilation.

7) Noise (Sound) Levels

a) Verification shall be done by conducting type test, through reputed

independent laboratory, for sound level measurements in accordance with IEC 60076-10 under indoor conditions.





b) The maximum values of sound pressure and sound power levels, measured at a distance of 1 meter from the „principal radiating surface‟, are as mentioned below

8) Climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes

a. Special tests for climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes shall be carried out as per the tests specified in clauses# 26, 27 and 28 of IEC 60076-11 in a reputed independent testing laboratory.

b. A transformer is considered to be passed these tests, when all the prescribed tests are conducted on same transformer in the sequence as given in table-5 of IEC 60076-11.

c. The climatic class of the transformers shall conform to: Class C1 d. The Environmental class of the transformer shall conform to: Class E2 e. The Fire behavior class of the transformer shall conform to: Class F1

7. RATING AND CONNECTION PLATES - MARKING OF TERMINALS

1) Rating and Connection Plates (as per IEC 60076-11/Cl-9) Each Transformer, as well as the associated enclosure, shall be fitted with individual rating plates of weather-proof materials, in a visible position, showing all the items indicated below. The entries on the plate shall be indelibly marked (that is, by etching, engraving, stamping, or by a photo-chemical process)

a. Dry-Type transformer b. Compliance standards reference c. Manufacturer Name d. Manufacturer‟s serial number e. Month & Year of manufacture f. KM Contact/Tender number g. Insulation system temperature of each winding h. Number of phases i. Rated frequency j. Rated voltage including tapping voltages k. Rated current l. Connection symbol m. Short circuit impedance at 750C n. Type of cooling o. Insulation Levels p. Degree of Protection





q. Environmental class r. Climatic class s. Fire behavior class t. Total mass with and without enclosure

2) Marking of Terminals & start of windings

a. HV and LV Terminals shall be identified by characters of a type which cannot be obliterated, marked on plates of durable and non-corrodible metal securely fixed to a visible position.

b. The sequence of markings on HV terminals when read from left-to-right, facing HV cable box, shall be as: A, B, C

c. The sequence of markings on LV terminals when read from left-to-right, facing LV cable box, shall be as: c, b, a, n

d. Suitable markings to identify the start and end of windings shall be marked on each physical winding.

8) GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND FITTINGS

1) Magnetic Core & connecting bus bars

a. The magnetic core shall be constructed from high grade, low watt loss, cold

rolled grain oriented silicon steel sheets, having specific watt loss of not more than 0.95w/kg at 1.7T and 50Hz, and conforming to IEC 60404-8-7:2008 and IEC 60404-1: 2000.

b. The construction of yoke and limbs shall be such that best space factor and

highest dimensional accuracy is achieved to ensure low core losses and nose levels.

c. The core shall be coated with high performance surface insulation

material(s), conforming to the requirements of IEC 60404-11, to obtain good insulation resistance and anticorrosion protection.

d. The clamping structure shall not allow any bolt piercing the core lamination in

order to avoid circulating current in the core and local concentration of the flux in the yoke

e. The limb & yoke core joints shall be interleaved using modern step-lap technology to achieve optimum conformity of magnetic flux pattern.

f. The core shall be pressed and banded and shall be clamped and bolted at

the top and bottom in such a manner as to ensure that no distortion shall take place when the transformer is subjected to magneto motive forces equivalent to those which would be present in the event of a total short circuit being applied across the low voltage terminal with an infinite power supply at normal voltage and frequency available, at the high voltage terminals.





g. All bus-bars shall be made of hard drawn high purity electrolytic copper with electro-tin plating.

2) Windings

a. The HV windings of the transformers shall be made of high purity electrical grade copper wire and shall be totally encapsulated in a glass-fiber reinforced resin-cast insulation. The casting shall be made under vacuum in such a manner that all air shall be totally evacuated from casting.

b. The casting shall be such that the composite structure shall have sufficient

resilience strength against stresses developed due to differences in co-efficient of thermal expansions between insulation materials and copper.

c. Laying pattern of HV winding wires shall ensure to achieve superior linear lightening voltage distribution characteristics

d. LV windings shall be made of copper foil with impregnated type interlayer insulation. The interlayer insulation shall be made of solid polyester foil with impregnated fiber glass film which thermo-sets by curing, or by an equivalent process having same or higher performance levels.

e. Sufficient numbers of cooling channels shall be provided in both the LV and HV windings to restrict the temperature rise of the windings within the specified values and thereby minimizing the damage due to hot spot. The cooling channels are arranged in a vertical manner and all coils have even surface to minimize dust accumulation and to give maximum cooling efficiency.

f. The completed winding stack assembly and connections shall have sufficient mechanical rigidity to ensure no distortion or movement of any one winding, or to any other winding or section of windings, shall take place when the transformers is subjected to the short circuit stresses created by a total short circuit at the low voltage terminals with an infinite power supply at normal voltage and frequency available for two seconds at the high voltage terminals.

g. Sufficient barriers shall be provided between windings and core, and between HV and LV windings.

h. The winding insulation shall be such that the transformer may be operated at 155° C with no deterioration of the insulation properties as per IEC 60076-11 requirements. It shall comply with the requirements of Class F/F insulating materials.

i. The high voltage and low voltage connections shall be brought out on opposite sides of the transformer

j. The windings shall be connected Delta Star in accordance with Vector Group reference Dyn11.





k. All leads or bars from windings to the termination points, shall be rigidly supported. Stresses on coils and connections must be avoided.

l. The insulation materials used on windings and connections shall be shall be free using any insulating compounds prone to shrinking or collapse during service life. Further, there shall not be any joints either in the LV foil or insulation.

3) Enclosure

a. The Transformer shall be contained in a sheet steel ventilated enclosure

suitable for indoor service. The overall limiting dimensions of the enclosure and fittings attached there-in shall not exceed the values specified below:

i. Length: 2300 mm ii. Width : 1500 mm (excluding cable boxes) iii. Height: 2300 mm.

b. The enclosure degree of protection shall not be less than IP 23D including its bottom surface. However, all ventilation louvers and other openings (if any) at top, sides, or bottom of enclosure should be closed with strong non-corrosive metallic vermin screens (aperture size not more than 2mm dia). If so desired, number of ventilation louvers may be increased to take care of ventilation requirements, but these must be closed with vermin proof metallic screens.

c. All side panels and top of the enclosure shall be removable type using

standard metric spanners. No handles or other aids to easy removal of panels shall be employed. All bolts & nuts shall be electro-plated to prevent from corrosion.

4) Fittings & Accessories

The following accessories are required to be fitted on the transformer:

a) Earthing Terminal

Two stainless steel earthing flags, of size 63x63mm , and 6mm thick each, having hole suitable for connecting M14 bolt, or an equivalent arrangement shall be provided at bottom of the transformer frame work on either side. All exposed metallic conductive non-live parts shall be connected to earth terminals by construction through full earth fault rated conductors/braids.

b) Lifting Lugs on Total assembly The transformer with enclosure assembly shall be fitted with two lifting lugs enabling lifting of transformer and enclosure assembly. The position of the lugs facilitates easy attachments of lifting slings. The transformer shall be suspended absolutely vertical when it is lifted by means of the lifting hooks.





c) Lifting (hoist) eyelets on transformer (active part) Four lifting (hoist) eyelets shall be provided on all four corners (one at each corner) of upper press-beams/clamp-bars of the transformer, to facilitate lifting of transformer alone (without enclosure) when required. d) Haulage holes on under base Four haulage holes shall be provided on all four corners of lower press-beam/clamping-bar (one at each corner). e) Bi-directional rollers at base Four bi-directional flat rollers with blocking facilities (as mentioned below) are to be fitted at base of the transformer, on to which entire load of transformer & enclose assembly shall be transmitted. f) Anti-vibration pads and Roller blocking devices Anti-vibration pads made of polycarbonate material, having capability of carrying loads of the transformer & enclosure, shall be provided at base to dampen the intensity of vibrations and avoid resonance. They should also serve as roller blocking devices to arrest the movement of transformer unit after installation. g) Rating & Connection Plate, and colour coding Rating and connection diagram plates with details as described in clause # 5.1 shall be provided both on transformer and enclosure. Colour coding (Red, Yellow & Blue), with indelible markings, shall be provided at suitable locations on the frame of active part, to identify phase of each core, and inside cable boxes to identify phases of HV & LV terminals. h) Danger Boards Danger Boards, prepared as per KM specification # ED-01-400 (Drg # STD-PRT-04) shall be fixed permanently on all four sides of the enclosure. [Note: Removable labels or stickers are not acceptable] i) Viewing Window A transparent viewing window, of 6 inch x 4 inch size, with 5mm thick clear polycarbonate sheet shall be fitted on enclosure at front, to view the tapping position of transformer. This fixture shall have IP 65 protection with necessary gasket(s). j) Chart of tap-changing link positions A chart showing the combination of links positions for each tap position shall be permanently fitted on enclosure at front. The details on the chart shall be indelibly marked by etching, or engraving, or stamping, or by photo-chemical process





k) Temperature monitoring unit for thermal protection

1. At least 2 sets of PT100 based, high accuracy, RTD type PTC Temperature sensors shall be embedded into to each phase of LV winding.

2. The sensors & its associated wiring shall be insulated, to avoid occurrence of any short circuits with the transformer winding. The sensors shall be placed as close as possible to the hottest spot in the winding.

3. The insertion of sensors shall be made through capillary tube to enable them to be replaced whenever necessary.

4. The first set of the sensors shall be set to give „alarm signal‟ at 1400C, and the second set shall be set to give „trip signal‟ at 1500C. These values shall be in conformity with Class F insulation.

5. The „alarm‟ and „trip‟ signals shall be in the form of voltage free relay output contacts. Each output relay contacts shall have at least 2NO+2 NC and each rated for 6@240Vac.

6. The temperature monitoring unit (i.e Electronic converter with relays and wiring terminal block) shall be capable of operating in the specified local ambient conditions. It shall be flush mounted on front side of the enclosure. The unit shall be capable of operating on 240Vac @50Hz power supply.

7. The monitoring unit shall have features of circuit-fault indication, storage of maximum value of temperature, live voltage indication, status of relay positions with different coloured light indications, reset facility, etc.

8. The power supply for the monitoring unit shall be connected from transformer LV output (240Vac, 1-Phase) through suitably rated terminal blocks. The terminal block shall have additional spare terminals, to facilitate connecting external power source (auxiliary source), when required.

9. All wiring, to and fro, from the temperature monitoring unit shall be routed through properly clamped and insulated trunking-channels. No wires shall be left loose or hanging inside the enclosure.

10. The monitoring units shall not cause any false tripping. It shall be sourced from reputed brands and its source and technical details to be submitted along with tendering information.

l) Thermometer

1. In addition to the temperature monitoring unit as described above, a dial type thermometer, having nominal dia of 100mm, with stainless steel bezel and casing, shall be fitted on the transformer (not on enclosure) with suitable sensing element. The thermometer shall indicate the temperature of the winding and maximum temperature.

2. Its dial shall be graduated in degrees Centigrade and cover the range 0°C to

160°C with increment marks at not more than 5°C intervals. The dial shall be fitted with pointers to indicate the winding temperature, and maximum temperature value with a RED pointer. The maximum temperature pointer shall be manually re-settable. The thermometer shall be located in a safe and suitable place to have clear view.





5) Corrosion protection and Painting of Enclosure.

1. The definitive guideline documents are BS EN ISO 12944 Parts #1 to 8, & BS EN ISO

2. 14713. The painting procedure selected by the manufacturer should clearly indicate its relationship to the appropriate parts and tables of BS EN ISO 12944 and BS EN ISO

3. 14713 4. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to assess environmental

classification, select suitable surface preparation process, protective paint system, execution and supervision process, in accordance with above referred standards and requirements.

5. The painting work should render a service life of at least 20 years to the equipment, withstanding local ambient climatic & environmental conditions.

6. The exact Specification & painting procedure going to be followed by the manufacturer shall be submitted at time of tender.

7. The manufacturer should posses required laboratory testing equipment, in their factory, to test the painting work samples in accordance with BS EN ISO 12944-6. The test reports should be submitted along with each consignment of delivery.

8. The paint work shall nee to pass following tests

a. Measurement of thickness of protective coating (ISO 2808) b. Specular gloss factor at 60 deg (ISO 2813): 90±5% c. Falling weight test (ISO 6272): 1kg/50cm d. Cross cut test (ISO 2409): classification: 0 e. Cupping test (ISO 1520): 08mm f. Bending test – Cylindrical mandrel test (ISO 1519): 3.0mm g. Salt spray (fog) test (ISO 7253): 1000hrs

6) Cable Boxes

a. 1)-generally comply with the requirements of BS 2562 and, where applicable BS 6435. The details are as explained in APPENDICES-A, B & C.

b. 2)- High Voltage and low voltage cable boxes shall be mounted on opposite sides

of the transformer.

c. HV & LV Cable boxes shall be suitable for vertical bottom entry of cables. However LV cable box shall also have suitable facility (in addition to this bottom cable entry) for top entry bus-bar connections, when required. [Note: Bus-connections shall be made through cable box only, they should not be made through top of enclosure directly]

d. The bushing heights of HV and LV shall be 1320 mm from the enclosure base to

centre of bushings assembly.

e. The construction shall be such that the accumulation of water is avoided and the box is effectively sealed against weather and insects





f. The minimum size of any fixing stud or bolt for securing a front cover plate shall be M10 mild steel. All bolts used in assembly of cables boxes or enclosure shall be electroplated for corrosion protection

g. Gaskets, where applicable shall be of nitrile rubber-bonded cork and shall not be

less than 5mm thick. [Note: Neoprene based cork gaskets are not to be used]

7) QUALITY CONTROL The manufacturer of the equipment specified shall possess certification, issued by a body authorized to do so, which indicates that the manufacturing unit operates to a standard equivalent to ISO 9001. Copies of valid ISO 9001 certificates need to be submitted along with tender documents.

8) TESTS

1) General

a. Manufacturers shall submit copies of test certificates, as prescribed below, issued from reputed independent testing laboratories. All type tests & special tests are to be carried out on representative specimen transformers essentially of the same design & ratings.

b. KM reserves the right to verify the original test certificates & reports, if

required.

c. Special tests for climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes shall be carried out as per the tests specified in clauses# 26, 27 and 28 of IEC 60076-11. A transformer is considered to be passed these tests, when all the prescribed tests are conducted on same transformer in the sequence as given in table-5 of IEC 60076-11.

d. Each transformer shall be subjected to all routine tests prescribed below, and

one set of routine Test report shall be attached with the body of transformer in a strong water-proof envelope, at the time of delivery.

2) Type Tests & Special Tests on Transformer

a. Lightning Impulse test (type test) as per IEC 60076-3. b. Temperature Rise test (type test) as per IEC 60076-2. c. Partial discharge tests (routine & special tests) as per IEC 60076-11/Cl-22 d. Measurement of sound level (special test) as per IEC 60076-10 e. Short circuit test (special test) as per IEC 60076-5 f. Environmental test (special test) g. Climatic test (special test) h. Fire behavior test (special test)





3) Routine Tests on Transformer

a. Measurement of winding resistance.(IEC 60076-11/Cl-15) b. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement (IEC60076-

11/Cl-16). c. Measurement of short-circuit Impedance and load loss(IEC 60076-11/Cl-17) d. Measurement of no load loss and current (IEC 60076-11/Cl-18) e. Separate source AC withstand voltage test(IEC 60076-11/Cl-19) f. Induced AC withstand voltage test(IEC 60076-11/Cl-20). g. Routine partial discharge test (IEC 60076-11/Cl-22.4.1.1) h. Transformer Noise level Test at 1meter distance. i. Check of vector group by voltmeter method j. Measurement of Insulation resistance of LV winding at 2500V, DC k. Over-voltage test at 2000V, AC, for 60sec, on secondary wiring & equipment l. Measurement of thickness of painting work

9) TESTING, INSPECTION AND DELIVERY

a. Before commencing the production/manufacturing of 1st lot, against KM tenders, the manufacturer is obliged to produce samples of Transformer with enclosure and inform Kahramaa for inspection and acceptance through witnessing factory acceptance tests, and routine tests.

b. For every subsequent lot, the manufacturer is obliged to inform Kahramaa, at least 20 days before dispatch, and obtain clearance for dispatch. KM Engineers have the option of inspecting & witnessing all factory acceptance tests (FAT), including routine tests, at manufacturer‟s factory premises for each lot.

c. Acceptance by KM Engineer(s)/Representative(s) of any Transformer shall not relieve the manufacturer from any of their responsibilities, guarantees, or from other obligations, to manufacture the product fully complying with KM specification.

d. Type tests are to be carried out on specimen Transformer with enclosure, essentially of same design and ratings, as being offered. Manufacturer is obliged to provide details of test procedures being followed, to the KM inspection team before commencing factory accepting tests.

e. Each Transformer unit need to be subjected to all routine tests at factory before delivery. Further, each unit may be subjected to inspection on receiving them at DOHA to verify its healthiness and its conformity with the guaranteed design data.

f. All tests should be performed in accordance with the latest issue of relevant IEC standards

g. Three sets (copies) of routine tests & FAT reports to be prepared. One set to be attached with the body of transformer enclosure, in a strong water-proof envelope. Second copy to be sent along with delivery note. Third copy to be sent to the end-user department.[This is mandatory requirement]

h. FAT report shall include copy of „quality control report‟ containing „list of check points‟ verified/inspected at factory against each transformer.

i. Each delivery note shall include the details of „serial number‟ and „month/year‟ of production of each transformer.

j. Both the manufacturing date (i.e month/year) and delivery date should be shown on the rating plate of each transformer, and the time difference





between manufacturing date and delivery date should not be more than 6-months.

10) WARRANTY

Manufacturers need to provide a warranty of minimum 5 years from the date of delivery, or 4 years from the date of installation (whichever is earlier) for each unit supplied, against any design, manufacture, or material defects. Any Transformer unit failed while in service, with-in the warranty period, need to be replaced with new unit free of cost. Further, the manufacturer/supplier need to arrange for fault or abnormality analysis of any units(s) by reputed independent agencies, when required by Kharamaa and respective abnormality and fault-analysis report(s) to be submitted.





21.2.2 MV PANELS

a. General

Main MV switch board [MV Panel‟s] shall be provided for the connection of incoming mains and / or standby electrical power supplies and subsequent mains distribution as shown on the single line drawings. The Switchboard shall be provided complete with all the necessary functional, protective and control devices and be fit for purpose.

The MV panels shall be constructed to comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and the

internal separation shall be of Form 4B, Type-6 . The panel shall have facilities for bottom entry of the incomer cables and top entry for outgoing cables. The Panel manufacturer shall take the above matter into consideration during panel construction.

The main horizontal bus-bars shall be so positioned within the panel to account for the most efficient and safe connection of the functional units and shall be segregated from all other parts by a separate enclosure. The outgoing functional units shall only be tapped from the branch bus-bar sections. The panel shall have adequate space for the termination of the cables and facilities shall be made from connecting parallel cables to the outgoing MCCBs where this is required. All cables shall be terminated direct onto extension bus-bar sections appropriately routed, supported and braced from the circuit breaker terminals.

The electricity supply shall be 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz alternating current.

The switchgear and bus-bar system comprising of three phase and neutral shall be of fully insulated tinned copper bus-bars, including heavy duty shrouds or boots to all connection joints and terminations. incorporating withdraw able motorized and manual main Air Circuit Breakers and MCCB‟s shall be of cubical type having a minimum fault rating of 44 kA for 3 seconds. The ratings shall apply to the whole switch board including main air-circuit breaker, main bus-bars, MCCB‟s etc.





All components and workmanship utilised in the construction of MV switchgear assemblies shall conform to the appropriate standards listed in this specification. Conformance with the standards and this specification are mandatory and shall be both assured and traceable by the application of comprehensive verification and testing activities commencing with the manufacture of individual components through to final assembly. All MV switchgear assemblies shall always be selected from a single approved switchboard manufacturer whom will be listed in the schedule included in this specification and must be from the specified product range and of the type specified.

b. Switchboard Enclosures

The Construction of switchboards shall be in the form of multiple cubicles or sections each manufactured from a rigid steel frame work and clad with steel plates. Each of the sections will be further partitioned or segregated to achieve the specified form of separation. The partitioned spaces shall be segregated into:

1. Enclosure. 2. Main and distribution bus-bars. 3. Functional units (circuit breakers, metering & protection relays). 4. Chambers for the induction and routing of cables. 5. Terminals for connection of external conductors.

The switchboard sections shall be floor standing and modular in construction and assembled into a single block that can readily be dissembled at the manufacturing plant and shipped to site for reassembly. These operations shall only be performed by the manufacturers own trained and skilled factory and field operatives. Separate sections shall be provided for the devices that follow:

1. Main incomer - ACB (1 per section only). 2. Standby supply incomer – ACB (1 per section only). 3. Bus-coupler – ACB (1 per section only). 4. Outgoing – ACB (1 per section only). 5. Outgoing - MCCB (multiple units may share a section). 6. Power factor correction plant.

The assembled switchboard dimensions shall not exceed those shown on the layout and details drawings but in any event the height shall be limited to no more than 2200 mm above finished floor level. As a minimum the installed switchboard shall have front and rear clearances from nearest walls / columns of 900 mm from the outer edge of the largest hinged access panel which is fully in the open position. In addition the minimum clearances at the switchboard ends and nearest walls / columns shall be 1900 mm as this dimension includes 1000 mm for possible future extensions. (refer to the approval civil substation). All panels provided for front and rear access shall be installed on robust hinges which can be readily demounted by use of a hand tool if so required. The size and weight of each access panel shall be limited to minimum sizes for adequate access





and be split into twin doors where possible in order to reduce the necessary clearances specified above. The switchboard shall be made to be extensible at both ends and be provisioned with facilities and features to readily accomplish this without the need to remove sections for modifications in a workshop. At a minimum the bus-bars will terminate just short of both ends of the panel and be provided with adequate pre-drilled holes for coupling and extending the bus-bars. The necessary bus-bar coupling plates shall be provided and fitted in place. The end panels shall also include a bolt on steel plate cover in line with the bus-bar ends to permit unimpeded extension of the bus-bars without the need to cut or further modify the switchboard. Each switchboard shall be provided with a made to measure supporting plinth designed to adequately support and stabilize the unit where it over-laps the cable trenches. Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with removable heavy duty threaded lifting eyes installed in position on the top at each corner. The lifting eyes shall be designed and installed to comfortably withstand the dynamic weight of the MSB section spread over all four lifting points with a safety factor of x2 or more. The MSB enclosure and framework shall be manufactured of hot dipped galvanised mild steel channels and plates. The minimum thickness of mild steel used shall be as follows:

1. Plinths and base framework – 3.0 mm. 2. Framework – 2.0 mm. 3. Covers and doors – 3.0 mm.

It is an important requirement for the MSB framework and enclosure to be designed, selected and constructed to be rigid and resist distortion or the visible deflection of mild steel plates caused by reasonable force or pressures. If thicker steel than specified is required to achieve this then it should be utilised and included for in the bid price. All the enclosure and frame metalwork shall prior to painting be first cleaned and degreased before being primed with zinc spray ready for the application of acrylic stove enamel paint coats. Two paint undercoats shall be applied before final cover with a finishing coat. Between each coat the surfaces shall be rubbed down and washed ready to receive the next coat. Surfaces within the enclosure interior shall be coloured white while the exterior surfaces shall have a Green finish to BS 4800, shade 14E53. Minor damage caused to paint surfaces during transit or installation may be repaired at site by the manufacturer‟s own skilled site operatives. Damage to large areas of paint or denting of metal plates will require either the switchboard or the steel plates (if removable by undoing set screws or bolts) to be returned to the manufacturer for repair at cost to the contractor.

c. Cabling Facilities

Each cubicle shall include cabling and termination chambers for all the cables connecting to devices to be housed within that cubicle plus any specified spare





capacity. Cables shall not be permitted to gland or terminate at one cubicle en-route to another cubicle. All switchboards shall be arranged for both front and rear access for cabling and maintenance operations. All switchboards shall be arranged to allow for both top and bottom entry for each cable plus top and bottom glanding facilities to give full flexibility during cable installation operations on site. Cable gland plates provided for the incoming and outgoing cables shall be made of a non-ferrous material. The gland plates shall be pre-drilled to accept the appropriate number and sizes of cable glands for the actual cables to be installed at each cubicle plus the spare capacity. Where outgoing cables are to be connected to the terminals of circuit breakers then this shall be achieved by HDC bus-bars extended to the designated integral cabling and termination chambers where the bus-bars shall include sufficient pre-drilled holes and space to readily terminate the number of cable cores specified including multiple cables to be connected in parallel. All cable connections to bus-bars shall be made via compression type cable lugs secured to the bus-bars by nut, spring washer & bolt fixings through the pre-drilled holes. Screw down clamp connections or cable terminal blocks shall not be permitted.

d. Anti – Condensation Heaters.

Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each compartment in strategic positions, these shall be controlled by an internally mounted humidistat and an external overriding ON/AUTO switch

e. Conductors

The switchboard bus-bars shall be fully rated for the maximum incoming circuit breaker frame size to be provided and subject to a 2500 Amp minimum rating. The fault-withstand capacity of each switchboard and the assembled components shall be as follows:

1. The minimum ultimate breaking capacity ICU shall be rated at 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.

2. The rated service breaking capacity ICS and rated short time withstand current ICW shall also be equal to or greater than the ICU.

Bus-bars shall be made of tinned hard drawn copper [HDC] bars of the appropriate cross-section rated for the maximum design and fault currents to be expected.





All main bus-bar sections and subsidiary sections and connectors shall be adequately braced and rigidly supported throughout the entire lengths as appropriate. No signs of distortion, deflection or creepage shall be visible through the effects of physical or thermal stress or strains once all cables are connected. All circuit breakers shall be connected to the bus-bars by HDC bus-bar link sections and not cables.

f. Earthing

Each switchboard shall be provided with an externally mounted earth bar made of 50 mm x 6 mm tinned hard drawn copper bar and provided along the full length of the board fixed to the topside and adjacent the front edge. This earth bar shall be connected to the neutral bar by means of a bolted and removable test link positioned on top of the mains incomer switchboard section. This link is required for the star point earthing of the associated distribution transformer and should suitable constructed for this purpose. A permanent engraved warning label is to be provided alongside the test link in a normally visible position to read – “IMPORTANT – STAR POINT EARTHING DO NOT REMOVE”. Label to have red foreground and white text. It is important that the test link is installed in position at the manufacturer‟s works to link the earth and neutral bars. A combined neutral and earthing bar will not be accepted. The top mounted earth bar shall be extended into the cabling compartments of each switchboard section to be provided for the termination of circuit protective conductors for each of the functional units. Throughout the entire length of the earth bar a selection of M6, M8, M10, M12 pre-drilled holes shall be provided in the appropriate locations for termination of all the cables planned plus 20% extra provision. An adequately designed and constructed coupling piece shall be supplied to link the earth bar on top of each section to the neighbouring sections.

g. Operating handles

All moulded case circuit breakers shall be housed in individual cubicles with hinged front opening doors. The circuit breaker shall be operated by means of specially designed and robust moulded plastic rotary handles in conjunction with steel shafts and spring loaded mechanisms. The action of opening or closing the circuit breaker shall be smooth and precise and the service status positively indicated: Open /Closed/Tripped.





The hinged cubicle doors shall be prevented from opening while the circuit breaker is in the closed position by means of an interlock that cannot be readily defeated with or without a tool. The rotary handles shall all be provided with mechanisms that can be padlocked in both in the open or closed positions.

h. Labels

The switchboard shall be provided with a full complement of labels, tags and plates that will assist the permit the safe and informed switching or maintenance operations to be performed throughout the service life. All such labels, tags and plates shall be permanent in nature and meet the minimum quality requirements outlined here. The labels shall all comprise high quality durable traffolyte plaques with substrate layers revealed by the process of engraving to form the intended label text or graphic. The material and finish shall be resistant to discolouration and degradation through the effects of the environment. The labels shall be a minimum of 3.0 mm thickness and the edges of each shall be neatly chamfered. Labels shall be fixed to the panel by countersunk brass set screws neatly and accurately fixed to the switchboard fascia. The use of adhesives for fixing shall not be permitted. Prior to ordering any labels the contractor shall present the Engineers for approval with a schedule to identify all labels that will be produced with proposals for the information to be included, letter height and colours of the label foreground and the text. As a minimum the contractor will be deemed to have included in the bid for 3 foreground and 3 text colours offered in any combination. The label text should be of a size to be clearly read from a distance of up to 3 metres in front of the switchboard.

i. Inspection and Testing

Each switchboard may be covered by a type testing report issued by LOVAG (ASTA, KEMA OR ASEFA) registered test house. The report must unequivocally demonstrate the proposed switchboard will comply fully the type of construction and required performance specified. Where such a report has not been commissioned for the type of switchboard intended to be supplied then the manufacturer must commission such a report from an ASTA or KEMA test house on either the actual switchboard to be provided or another of the same type. If this route of compliance is chosen then it must have no detrimental effect upon the construction programme or incur additional charges to those contained in the manufacturer‟s bid for the project.





While undergoing manufacture and at completion the switchboard shall be subject to progressive inspection and testing activities to verify the successful completion of each stage. The inspections activities shall verify but not be confined to the following:

1. All components are present and of the correct type as compared to the workshop drawing.

2. The arrangement displays no non-conformities in relation to the relevant standards and good working practices.

3. All conductors are present and configured correctly. 4. All insulation sheaths and boots are fitted and adequately applied or fixed in

position without any damage. 5. The insulation colours match the functions of the conductors identified. 6. All barriers and partitions are present and correctly installed to screen off the

intended live parts. 7. All terminations and joints have been correctly made and to the

recommended torque or tightness. 8. The correct type and quantity of washers have been selected and used. 9. The type, ratings and settings of all circuit breakers and fuses are correct. 10. All relays, indicators lamps and metering are present and correct. 11. All operating handles are correctly engaged and positively actuate the

devices without undue effort. 12. All labels and warning notices are provided and adequately fixed in the all the

locations required. 13. The enclosure panels are free of damage or blemishes. 14. The enclosure colours are in accordance with the specification requirements. 15. The enclosure surfaces are clean and not debris of any kind remains within.

The testing activities shall verify but not be confined to the following:

1. Polarity. 2. Earth continuity. 3. Insulation. 4. Flash and impulse. 5. Operation of protection relays, indicator lamps and metering. 6. Operation of residual current devices to verify compliance with BS EN

7671:2008.

Each switchboard section shall undergo a full pre-delivery inspection at the manufacturer‟s works prior to shipping. This exercise shall be conducted with checklists and the purpose of which is to actively record, witness and verify the following:

1. All component parts are provided and cross referenced to the shop drawings and specification.

2. All components are correctly assembled and configured. 3. All components and surfaces are free from damage and blemishes. 4. The test Engineers comprehensive inspection and testing reports and results

are present and the switchboard section is signed off as completed by both the Production Engineer(s) and the Testing Engineer(s). Copies of these





documents along with the completed and signed PDI checklist are to be placed inside the switchboard section within a durable Perspex wallet.

TRIPPING BATTERY

A 30 D.C supply is required for tripping of the MV ACBs through a DC shunt trip of a

restricted earth fault relay. The Contractor to provide for this unit complete with trickle charger and long life batteries.

The unit shall be designed to operate on 240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz A.C supply and for

continuous duty at an ambient temperature of 50oC and 98% relative humidity.

The capacity of the unit is to be determined by the manufacturers and based on

number of trip units.

One DC supply unit shall be provided per switchboard.

21.2.03 BUS - BAR RISERS (Trunking) The Bus-bar risers including the accessories, used for the project shall conform to

BS EN 60439-2 (IEC 439) and with the relevant provisions of the 16th edition of the Wiring regulations BS 7671.

The 5 bar 3-phase Bus-bar risers shall be constructed to the British standards requirements; with Extruded aluminium housing and side flanges and be suitable for both Horizontal and Vertical Installation The trunking shall be of the ventilated totally enclosed type to provided a degree of protection not less than IP 54 for vertical runs and IP65 for horizontal runs. All the Phase and Neutral conductors shall be of copper and of same size and rating as mentioned in the drawings and shall be supported individually within the housing of the riser and insulated by high di-electric strength sleeves. Class F

The minimum certified short circuit ratings of the bus-bar trunking shall be as follows:

Rating kA / 1 Sec. kA Peak kA, N & PE

200A-630A 44 74 21

800-1250A 50 105 30

1600A-2500A

60-70 132-150 36-44

The busbar trunking shall be of the totally enclosed sandwiched insulated type

provided with busbars and with suitable tap-off positions as specified in later clauses. The moulded bus bar insulation and insulating supports will be made from insulation

possessing flame retardant and self-extinguishing, die-electric and non-hygroscopic properties.





The Bus-bar risers shall be suitable of operating at an ambient of 50 Deg.C, and suitable derating factors shall be considered during the selection, and the temperature rise shall not exceed 55 deg.C, when the Bus-bar riser is carrying the full load current continuously.

Suitable fire barriers of intumescing compound shall be installed when the bus-bar

riser passes through the floors and fire integrity for at least 2 hours shall be maintained

The joints shall be of single bolt pressure design providing optimum electrical contact

and mechanical strength. The busbars shall be of rectangular section tinned hard drawn high conductivity

copper. Jointing of the busbars shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the

manufacturer, using purpose-made links throughout. Where straight length of busbar trunking are installed in excess of 15 meters

expansion joints shall be fitted in the busbar run. Phase bus bars will be completely enclosed with molded or extruded insulation,

except where provisions will be made for splicing adjacent sections together. The joints for splicing adjacent sections together will be silver plated and enclosed by

either moulded insulation bolts or approved taped insulation system. After assembly, all conductor joints shall be accessible by the removal of covers in

the enclosure. Such covers shall be weather-proof by neoprene gaskets or other suitable means.

Tap-off Points

1. All lengths of trunking shall be provided with tapping positions at not greater than 600 mm center.

2. Each tap-off position shall be provided with covers or shutters to screen entry to

live busbars when the position is not occupied with a tap-off unit. 3. The tap-off positions shall be arranged so that the plug- in connectors self align

with the busbars. 4. Tap-off positions shall be suitable for tap-off units to be plugged in either below

or above the busbars.

Tap-off Boxes and Accessories

1. Tap-off boxes shall be rated as detailed in the schedule and drawings attached to this Specification.





2. Tap-off boxes shall be constructed of sheet metal and shall be complete with hinged lids and entry gland. The boxes shall house MCCB and neutral link and have polarity and rating as detailed in the schedule.

3. Where tap-off boxes are to be inserted into live busbar trunking, they shall be

designed and constructed so that current carrying metal is not exposed during insertion or removal and that the box in connected to earth before contact is made with live busbars. The box shall remain earth during removal until all live connections are disconnected. The design shall ensure that the tap-off can only be inserted to give the correct polarity.

4. Where change of direction or termination occurs in a busbar run, the

manufacturer's purpose-made bends, tees pieces, cross-overs, reducers, and end covers shall be used.

5. Where switches are connected to the busbars through tap-off points an interlock

shall be provided to prevent removal with the switch in the 'ON' position. These switches shall comply with the requirement in the LV switchers section of the Specifications.

6. Each tap-off unit shall be fitted with terminal blocks in order to hook up the

outgoing cables. The size and rate of these terminal blocks shall be chosen according to the prospective outgoing cable size as indicated in the drawings.

FACTORY TESTING

The manufacturer on each piece of busbar trunking shall carry out the following tests before it leaves the factory:

3.5kV Dielectric Test for 4 seconds. 1000V Meggar Test

A Factory Certificate of Testing and Inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer.

SITE TESTING

1. Before installation each piece of busbar trunking shall be Meggar tested at

1000V 2. On completion of the installation each busbar run shall be Meggar tested at

1000V 3. A temperature heat rise test in accordance with the manufacturer‟s

recommendation/procedure shall be carried out on site.

All test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer for approval.





21.2.4 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

a. Summary This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.

b. Submittals

The Contractor shall be required to make submittals of the following:

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or elements; and data on features, ratings, and performance.

2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,

weights, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and workspace requirements and required clearances.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Provide Details of both internal and interconnecting wiring.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of product‟s compliance with specified requirements.

5. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements. 6. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals.

Include lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at the project site.

7. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and

abnormal conditions.

c. Quality Assurance Comply with IEEE 18, IEC 60070A and NEMA CP 1.

d. Co-ordination

Coordinate sensor-communication module package with B.M.S data network for

successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.





e. Capacitors (General)

Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and mounted in metal enclosures.

Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallic-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside plastic container. Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following:

1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A, minimum.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer.

3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but is still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure.

4. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from Capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated.

6. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.

f. Fixed Capacitors

Description: Integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated. Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of pressure terminals.

g. Automatic Power Factor Correction Units

Shall comply with NEMA ICS 2. Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed in independent enclosures. Units include a separately mounted current transformer to sense current in the power circuit being corrected and to provide input to unit controls. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any value between unity and 0.90 lagging. Controls continuously sense





the power factor on circuits being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10 seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting. Switch only one capacitor bank at a time. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:

1. Under voltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects

capacitors for power supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.

2. “Advance” and “Retard” push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled capacitor-bank switching.

Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty of the capacitor application.

Buses: Tinned hard drawn copper. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring, and capacitors.

Inductors: Air-core type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to within contactor ratings. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum fault current to which they may be exposed. Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel. Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.

1. Indicated target and actual power factors.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.

3. Mounting: Flush or semi flushes in unit door.

Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit and the Operating handle can be padlocked.

1. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication modules, and network interface units, matched to and compatible with B.M.S. Communication module transmits data to remote monitoring devices. Data includes actual corrected power factor number of capacitor steps connected.





h. Source Quality Control

Factory test the power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with NEMA CP I. Include the following:

1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak, and dissipation-factor tests.

2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective

devices.

i. Active Harmonic Filtering

1. The contractor shall make provision in the main LV panels for the future

addition of external (from the panel) active harmonic filtering equipment, this shall include space for future CTs

2. The contractor shall allow within his tender to undertake a power quality/condition survey of the new LAD building following practical completion, in order to determine the extent of harmonics present during normal daily operation of the system.

3. The contractor shall employ a specialist and use suitable power monitoring equipment at each of the main LV switch room locations to monitor and record power quality. Upon completion of assessment of harmonic distortion the contractor shall prepare and present a detailed report of the findings to the contract administrator.

4. If appropriate, the contractor shall select and install active harmonic filtering equipment to meet with the requirements of the local wiring regulations. Companies such as Group Schneider or ABB shall be considered for this work.

5. The contractor shall include within his tender for a provisional sum of QR 360,000 for the supply, installation and commissioning of the active harmonic filtering equipment only, to correct any main power supply distortion as a result of installed equipment within the building.

Active harmonic filtering equipment shall be connected to each main LV switch panel via a spare way as detailed on the LV Distribution schematic drawings.

21.2.5 SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS/ELECTRICAL DIGITAL METER

The complete sub main switchboard shall be capable of withstanding, without

damage, a symmetrical prospective fault current of the system which shall be assumed as 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.





The switch board shall be of panel board type suitable for Wall mounting as indicated upon the drawings and comprise of both an incoming and outgoing moulded case circuit breakers as indicated on the drawings. The switchboard shall comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and as a minimum the internal separation shall be of Form 2b plus ingress protection to IP32.

The sub-main switchboard shall incorporate all the items detailed on the drawings

and as detailed in this specification. The sub-main switchboards shall be installed so as no operating handle is placed at a height that exceeds 2100 m from the finished floor level.

The main incoming isolator shall form an integral part of the unit and be of the moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) type with adjustable thermal and magnetic settings complying with BS EN 60947-2:2006.

The bus-bars shall be of tinned hard drawn copper type and insulated with PVC heat

shrink sleeves, supported on non-hygroscopic insulating material conforming to BS 159 and suitably de-rated taking into account insulation applied to the bus-bars and connections.

The equipment current ratings that have been indicated are the minimum acceptable

but the manufacturer‟s standard items may be utilized provided that they are not lower ratings than those specified.

The switchboard shall contain a suitable earth bar to at which all circuit protective

conductors, cable glands and required bonded metalwork shall be connected. The minimum cross sectional area of this earth bar shall be not less than the csa of the feeder cable conductors. Similarly the neutral bar shall be provided of the same cross section as the live bus-bars. The neutral and earth bars shall remain electrically isolated from each other.

The manufacturer‟s blank insulated fillers shall be securely fitted to fill and shield all

unused outgoing circuit breaker spaces plus bus-bar connections. In addition the circuit breaker sections shall be provided with a hinged metal cover complete with locking mechanisms.

The switchboard shall be constructed to conform to the specified requirements of

KAHRAMAA and the relevant British Standards. The drawings of proposed arrangements should be forwarded by the Contractor to the Consultant and

KAHRAMAA for approval prior to commencement of manufacture. The contractor shall be responsible for checking access plus builders work details in

order to confirm that the switchboard is constructed and installed as required by the

KAHRAMAA regulations and the relevant British Standards. The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (ICS) of all outgoing MCCB shall be

equal to or greater than 25 kA for 3 seconds duration. All outgoing MCCB in the sub-main switchboards shall be of the selective type to

provide full discrimination with the downstream circuit breakers and conform to BS





EN 60947-2:2006, and shall be of triple-pole in construction with magnetic and thermal overload protection, de-rated for an ambient temperature of 50

oC.

The rating of all MCCB‟s to be provided in the sub-main switchboards are indicated

upon the drawings. All sub-main board panel fascia shall have installed 3 no. maximum demand

indicating ammeters (1 no. for each phase), a voltmeter with selector switch, control fuses and 3 No. phase live indication lamps.

Electrical Digital Metering

1. All MSB/SMB shall be provided with digital meter as per shown in the Power

Single Line Diagram to measure/monitor utility consumption downstream network.

2. Meters use both current and voltage input to calculate energy consumption.

3. Solid core CTs shall be used for all digital meters.

Digital Metering Features

1. ANSI accurate current transformer (CTS) deliver superior revenue-grade

accuracy, for high quality, long term reliability.

2. Built-in communication features allow for future automation.

3. All meters shall be equipped standard with an isolated pulse output channel for BMS interface.

4. UL listed for energy monitoring equipment.

5. Color coded current transformers.

6. Solid core with high quality for CTS with 0.3% maximum error accurate Class 0.1A.

7. Measures kWH and demand load.

8. Up to 3 sets of CTs per phase connection be paralleled.

9. LCD display shows kWH, spontaneous and peak demand with manual keyed rest.

10. Load indicator LED verifies meter functionality.

11. Reverse phase indicator LED illuminates if the meter is improperly installed.

12. Ten year warranty.





13. Rated voltage (Un) : 3 x 240/415 Volts

14. Working Voltage : 07Un - 1.3 Un

15. Rated Frequency : 50Hz + 5%

16. Power Consumption : < 8VA

17. Working Temperature : -25OC to 55

OC

18. Unit Temperature : -40

OC to 70

OC

19. Working Humidity : <85% RH

21.2.6 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

General Distribution boards shall conform to BS EN 60439-3:1991+A2:2001 and be suitable

for operation at 415 V / 240 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz. The required fault minimum withstand fault level shall be 10 kA.

These boards shall be “Type B” factory assembled suitable for flush or surface

mounting as indicated on the tender drawings. Distribution boards shall be complete with all the specified outgoing circuit protective devices eg. MCB / ELCB / RCCB‟s, incoming isolators and other accessories as indicated or required.

The enclosures shall be fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having adequate

gauge to ensure a rigid and robust construction free from distortion. Each enclosure shall be of adequate size to accommodate all components specified and be finished in stove enamel.

The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel front panel, which shall be firmly fixed

by a minimum of 4 no. cheese-head screws of minimum of 6 mm in length. The front panel shall be manufactured with neatly cut apertures to allow, the MCB‟s /

RCCB‟s levers to comfortably protrude through. The front panel shall however effectively conceal and segregate all conductors, contactors, bus-bars and any other live parts installed within the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be fitted with a rigidly constructed double-hinged sheet steel door with locking mechanisms.

All doors shall be provided with gaskets and fitted with at least two robust hinges.

The bus-bars shall be of the electro–tinned copper type. Multi-terminal bus-bars shall be provided for all the neutral & earth conductors and shall not be shared (a single conductor per terminal only).

Each enclosure shall be fully equipped to accommodate the number of MCB‟s /

RCCB‟s of ratings as indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall supply and install additional spare circuit protective devices of the ratings / types indicated upon





the drawings / circuit schedules. The manufacturer‟s purpose made blank shields shall be provided and securely fitted to the blank spare circuit ways.

Distribution boards located remote from the Main Panel, or sub-main boards shall be

mounted at a height of not less than 1200mm to the center of the board from the finished floor level and the maximum height from the finished floor level to the top of the board shall be 2200mm.

Where single phase distribution boards are specified, they shall be complete with

double-pole incomer isolator and where 3 phase distribution boards are specified, they shall be complete with triple-pole incomer Isolator and removable / demountable neutral link. An ELCB shall not be accepted or used as the DB main disconnect switch for any distribution board.

Earth and Neutral bars located in distribution boards shall have the same number of

connections as there are for phase connections. All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full rated current of the

associated protective device and shall be of the flat tinned-copper type rigidly mounted, supported on shock resisting, non-hygroscopic, high-grade insulators with high resistance to tracking, not subject to mold growth or termite attack with adequate space and clearances.

Connections from the bus-bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular

conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each connection to or from the phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing screws, washers and locknuts. Each distribution board shall be fitted with an identification label on its front cover.

The label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution board‟s reference number

/ rating in volts and amperes and the number of ways in both English and Arabic. In addition to the above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board

giving details of each circuit, MCB size, cable size, the SMDB to which it is connected and the location etc., The reference cards shall be fixed to the inside of the distribution boards door within a protective transparent plastic envelope.

All live terminals and parts shall be shrouded with insulating materials in the form of

shields, barriers and applied insulation to ensure that it is impossible for any live part to be touched while withdrawing or replacing the MCB‟s. All distribution boards should conform to a minimum ingress protection of IP 30.

Outgoing circuit breakers shall generally be MCB that comply with BS EN 60898-2:2006. The circuit breakers with the indicated ratings (calibrated for an ambient temperature of 50

oC) but the rating must never exceed the declared current carrying

capacity of the final circuit conductors. All distribution boards and the circuit breakers shall be selected and sourced from a

single manufacturer and the same range throughout the whole of the works.





21.2.7 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Air circuit breakers shall be triple pole, for main in comer ACB‟s certified by KEMA, ASTA or other test station approved by the Engineer in writing prior to acceptance of Tender, for a rated short time current of 44KA at 415V for 3.0 seconds minimum. Meeting with BSEN60947-2 or IEC 974-2 sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of utilization category B), tested in same enclosure as which they are to be installed unless otherwise is indicated on the drawings. Air Circuit breakers shall be electrically fully motorized of the horizontal draw out pattern with full load current ratings, all as detailed on the drawings. Electrically operated ACB to have integrally mounted spring charging motor mechanism automatically recharged upon closing. The ultimate breaking capacity (ICU) shall be minimum of 44 Ka for 3 seconds. The rated service breaking capacity (ICS) and rated short time withstand current (ICW) shall be equal to or greater than ICU. The ACB section of the switch board shall be in separate cubicle separated from other parts of the switch board. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders. The gland plate for the incoming cables shall be no-ferrous material with brass compression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds. In case single core cables are used, the clamping arrangement is to be supplied as per the sketch nos.7,8,9 and 10 shown on KAHRAMAA regulations. ACB‟s (Electrical or Mechanical) shall have charging lever and a direct acting, open and close push buttons, stored energy shall allow open/ close/ open sequence of operation without a use of external energy. Safety features is to allow discharging stored energy without closing ACB. Withdrawable circuit breakers shall have auxiliary terminal shield /Arc chute over, inter phase barrier and automatic safety shutters for screening the fixed contacts when the breaker is withdrawn to the inspection position. It shall be possible to padlock the shutters in the closed position. It shall not be possible to withdraw or rack in a withdrawable circuit when it is close. The action of withdrawing a circuit breaker shall necessitate a deliberate action distinct from any other operation. It shall not be possible to inadvertently fully withdraw a circuit breaker from its housing. The control unit shall be of solid-state type with the following minimum facility / functions:

a. Adjustable ampere setting (0.5-1.0 X full rated Amp.) b. Adjustable long time setting c. Adjustable long time delay d. Adjustable long time delay e. Adjustable Instantaneous trip





f. Adjustable Earth fault protection up to 40% of frame size with adjustable delay between 0.1- 0.4 seconds.

g. Time delay and over ride Instantaneous discriminator h. Short time delay to be adjustable in steps of 2-10 Times Sensor rating

with settable or adjustable time band between 0.1 and 0.4 seconds. Circuit Breaker Accessories are to include the following: 1. Padlocking or key locking provisions for all positions (Disconnected, test,

connected, closing blocking, open) 2. Overload, Short-Circuit, ground fault trip LEDS 3. Trip indicator and re –set button 4. Operations Counter 5. On/ Off pilot lights 6. Shunt trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control. 7. External on-off push buttons to operate the breaker through the shunt close and

shunt trip coil. Auxiliary Contacts : To include N.O. and N.C contacts on switch gear as required,

plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C spare contacts.

21.2.8 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS The Contractor shall provide the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as indicated

on the tender drawings for the outgoing sub-main circuits. They shall be triple-pole, 415 volts, 50 Hz, with both thermal and magnetic over load protection complying with BS EN 60947-2:2006+A1:2009. At sub-main distribution level the fault withstand capacity of the circuit breakers shall be not less than 25 kA for 3 seconds duration. If installed at the Main MV panel level then the fault withstand capacity shall be not less than 44 kA for 3 seconds duration.

Circuit breakers of 100 A frame size and above shall be supplied complete with

adjustable thermal and magnetic trip settings plus short–time / delay trip selection.

Circuit breakers shall be constructed of high quality mouldings with all essential parts treated for corrosion resistance and plated for good electrical conductivity. The declared over-current capacity of the MCCBs is not to be less than 125% of the current rating (In) for a time to trip duration of 90 minutes. Where MCCBs are mounted individually, then, the enclosure shall be manufactured from heavy sheet steel with removable front plate, and removable gland plates at top and bottom. Knockouts shall not be accepted. These enclosures shall also include the necessary cable spreader boxes to comfortably terminate all the cables to be installed.





21.2.9 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be utilized to protect all outgoing circuits and

shall be of an approved make to comply with BS EN 60898-2:2006. The trip mechanisms shall be of the temperature compensated thermal overload and short circuit trip type. MCB shall be of the single or triple pole type rated and calibrated as shown on the drawings for an ambient temperature of 50

oC. All MCB shall be of

hermetically sealed type with a minimum rated breaking capacity (ICU) of 10kA rated at 415 V.

The rated short circuit withstand capacity of all distribution boards shall be a

minimum of 10 kA.

The modular frame size of all MCBs shall be identical so that they can be easily interchanged. The MCBs shall be of the DIN-rail mounting type (plug-in type are not acceptable). Circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the breaker on a faulty circuit without resetting and shall also clearly indicate the ON/OFF positions. The standard commonly available ratings of MCBs shall be used for ease of availability.

Earth leakage protection shall be afforded final circuits of distribution boards that

feed power to socket outlets, water heaters and domestic appliances. For three phase circuits a four-pole ELCB device shall be used and double-pole device for a single-phase supply. The trip setting shall be 30 mA, unless specified otherwise. The ELCB device shall be supplied integrated with the MCB (RCBO) as a single device and shall comply with BS EN 61008-1:2004.

MCBs shall be suitable for use without any distinction to be made between supply side & load side.

The fault withstands rating for the combined MCB / ELCBs shall not be less than 6

kA.

21.2.10 FUSES High rupturing capacity (HRC) cartridge fuses shall be used for overload protection

and short circuit protection only where indicated upon the drawings. The contractor shall include for the provision of HRC fuses of the maximum rating of

all equipment, in compliance with BS 88 for AC 46 Category of Duty and Class Q1 fusing factor.

Confirmation of fuse ratings shall be obtained from the Consultant before placing any

order. HRC fuses provided on this contract shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and be of the same class or type to ensure adequate discrimination and grading throughout the distribution system.

Exposed or Semi-enclosed fuse elements shall not be provided or used. Cartridge

fuses for use in conjunction with lighting and small power accessories shall be comply with BS 1362.





2.2.11 MOTOR STARTERS

a. Description Starters shall be manufactured and type tested in accordance with BS EN 60947-4-1:2001.

All motors shall be provided with heavy duty contactor type motor (fuse-less) starters, generally complying with the following and protected by means of moulded case circuit breakers for both overload and short circuit fault conditions. The type of motor starter to be employed shall be governed by the motor electrical input rating as follows:

1. 11 kW and below > Direct on-line starting 2. 11 kW to 37.3 kW > Star-Delta starting. 3. 37.5 kW and above > Reduced voltage electronic soft-starter. 4. REFER TO POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

All motor starters shall be grouped and housed with motor control centre (MCC) panels as indicated upon the drawings. Each MCC panel shall be provided with a main incoming MCCB capable of carrying the full-load current.

Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:

1. On load triple-pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed auxiliary switches. The MCCB shall be mechanically interlocked with the starter component door and capable of breaking the motor starting current and of making onto a fault located at the motor terminals. Provisions shall be made for padlocking the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.

2. Four-pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally

closed auxiliary contracts. All the auxiliary contacts shall be wired down to the starter terminal block.

6. One triple-pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current (with

adjustable trip settings), phase sequence and lost phase protection. An external panel fascia mechanical hand reset button is also to be provided.

7. An appropriately rated (6 A) MCB and one copper link provided to protect the

controls power circuit.

8. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a local/remote/auto selector switch (hand/off/auto) as required. Each starter control wiring terminal block shall include terminals for connection of remote push buttons, automatic control circuits and local / remote emergency stop push buttons.

9. Where more than one motor with a duty/standby (duty/backup) function are

used, the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change duty upon a fault condition tripping the manually selected duty motor. A duty/standby sequence selector switch shall also be provided for automatic timed (hours run) duty sharing between the selected motors.





10. Each starter shall be fitted with transformer operated lamps indicating i. Motor running (green) ii. Motor stopped (red) iii. Overload tripped (amber)

11. Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors of

rating 3 kW and above.

12. Each starter to be equipped with labels both in English and Arabic giving drive designation, plant number and control operation.

13. Each starter shall include the wiring terminals and control relays as necessary

to achieve electrical interlocking as may be specified elsewhere. Starter units that include manual operation facilities shall have push buttons provided for both starting and stopping operations, together with auxiliary contacts for remote indicator lights where specified. Starter units arranged for automatic operation shall have hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons. All Star-Delta starters shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks between the star and delta contactors to prevent short circuiting. Star-Delta starters shall also be provided adjustable time-delay devices for the automatic change-over from star to delta.

b. Enclosures

MCC Panels enclosures shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electro-galvanized coated steel plate with a high quality solid polyester enamel electrostatic spray paint finish. Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP54. All MCC panels shall be arranged for front access for cabling and maintenance operations to be carried out and be equipped with robust hinged lift-off doors (only by means of a tool). Dust and damp proof gaskets shall be provided around the door panel edges. Each access door with MCCB located behind shall be fitted with lockable cam type chromium plated handle that shall be mechanically interlocked with the starting MCCB to require electrical isolation before the door can be opened.

All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws into tapped holes and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP2X. The minimum short circuit withstand rating for the different components shall be 25 kA for 3 seconds duration. However, the contractor shall forward a short circuit calculation and upgrade the components if found necessary.

c. Internal Wiring

The MCC panels shall be fully wired internally at the manufacturer works to terminal strips.





The control panel internal wiring shall accord with BS 7671:2008. All internal wiring of the control panel shall utilize 600/1000V grade single core, circular Tri Rated PVC (heat resistant) insulated cables of appropriate current carrying capacity complying with BS 6231.

The control circuits live conductors shall be wired using white colour insulation while the neutral conductors shall have black colour insulation.

All cabling within the panel shall be run within appropriately sized purpose made slotted, plastic trunking, fitted with appropriate retaining clips and arranged to run continuously around inside the panel. Cables to items of control gear shall then leave the trunking slots adjacent to their location, with any quantity of cables from the trunking to control item being formed into a loom using flexible plastic loom wraps.

d. Fixings

No item of equipment secured within the control panel shall incur penetration of the main cabinet enclosure for riveting, bolting, etc. All fixings shall be achieved with adequately sized brass bolts and nuts (or threaded inserts). Any fixing bolt visible from the front face of the panel shall be mushroom headed and bright chromium plated with similar sized visible bolt heads generally used, with the possible exception of main panel fascia plate retaining bolts which may be larger.

e. Identification & Referencing

Each isolator switch, indicator lamp and panel component shall have its function clearly identified and labeled. Adjacent to each external connections terminal block shall be fixed a label identifying each field device to be connected with each wiring terminal individually referenced to the main wiring diagram. Each circuit breaker and starter shall be labeled to define the item protected and the rating or overload settings to be used.

For ease of tracing cabling, at each termination position the cable shall be identified with a numbered Helerman cable identification ferrule corresponding to the workshop wiring diagram provided with the control panel.

All label plaques shall be screw fixed engraved black traffolyte having white substrate with clear and legible letters / numbers, graded in size for emphasis and positive identification. The intended labeling text and formats shall in all cases be submitted to the Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing. Warning labels shall be provided in all compartments and spaces fixed in prominent locations to warn of any dangerous voltages that may be present eg. 415 V and 240 V.

Engraved traffollyte mimic diagrams plaques shall be provided fixed to all MCC panel fascia to clearly chart in a single-line format the configuration of electrical connections.





The intended labeling diagram, text and format shall in all cases be submitted to the Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing.

f. Compensated Equipment

Any motorized valves and damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be arranged such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated selection and enable manual opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any compensator unit mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the manufacturer's purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

The panels shall contain all the necessary devices for the automatic restart of units after power failure where required.

21.2.12 CONTACTORS - OVERLOAD AND CONTROL RELAYS

Contactors used for any application in the project shall be type tested to AC3 duty and comply with BS EN 60947-4-1:2001.

The contactors shall be 4-pole units designed for use on ac electrical systems. The magnet and contact movements shall be horizontal. The contacts shall be double break, butt- type and each moving contact shall be individually spring-loaded. All fixed and moving contacts shall be of the silver-cadmium oxide type.

The contactor coils shall be of the continuous rated type. These coils shall be wound on moulded formers and shall be vacuum impregnated.

The contactors shall be factory calibrated and compensated for operation at an ambient temperature 50

oC and be sealed.

Each contactor shall be provided with an adequate number of auxiliary switches of N/O and N/C types.

Contactors shall be complete with provisions for manual operation (ON/OFF),

indications and overload relays.

a. Overload Relays

These are to be used in conjunction with motor starters to provide protection against overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage conditions.

The relays shall be selected such that the full-load current of the equipment protected falls at the centre of the relays adjustment range. For Star-Delta starting, the overload relays shall be placed on the mains supply contactor.





b. Control Relays

Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate positive visual indication that the operating coil is energized. Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally, to ensure relay is vertical above the base when the control cabinet is in its intended location. Cable terminals shall be of the screw type, suitable for receipt of spade type crimped/soldered lugs. Adjustable time-delay relays used for Star-Delta starters shall ensure precise tolerance for the timing function. The relay shall have a linear setting scale over a 350

o rotation

by means of a knurled knob with calibrated timer setting marks. The relay shall be equipped with two electrically separated time-delayed contacts, one normally open and one normally closed.

21.2.13 FUSE SWITCHES AND ISOLATORS

a. General

These shall be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with the enclosure to prevent opening while the switch is closed and Shall comply with BS EN 60947-3:2009.

The switches shall have clear and positive "On/Off" indications and a means of locking in "Off" or out of service position. Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP65 for external or damp locations and IP54 for other situations.

Load break switches and switch-fuses should be „ARC TESTED‟ (complete system along with enclosure) and type tested from by a reputed international testing laboratory for the degree of ingress protection as well as electrical arc testing.

The enclosure should have a reliable position indicator so that in the event the switch contacts are welded together, the handle (front operated) should deviate from the ON-Position less than 45

o.

b. Fuse Switches and Switch-Fuses

Shall comply with BS EN 60947-3:2009.

Fuses shall comply with BS 88 and be of bolted fixing type, class Q1, certified for 415V and AC3 duty, rated as indicated.

Fused switch carriages shall be of the withdrawable type.

Fuse switches shall be ASTA certified to 50 kA minimum.





c. Disconnect Switches (Isolators)

These shall be of the same design as the switch-fuses, fitted with solid copper links in place of the fuses. Single-pole and neutral (SP&N), or triple pole and neutral (TP&N).

Ratings: Minimum rated fused short-circuit current, 50 kA RMS.

Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP65 for external or damp locations and IP54 for other situations. Some applications (as identified upon the drawings) may require 2-pole (SPN), 4-pole (TPN) or 6-pole versions of these switches and these shall be provided where ever indicated.

21.2.14 CABLES

a. Trunking and Conduit Wiring

Wiring to general purpose lighting and power circuits shall be via PVC insulated single core cables with stranded copper conductors which shall be contained within adequately sized cable Trunkings and conduits. The cables shall be of 450/750 volts grade conforming to BS 6004:2006 and be sized and configured for each circuit as

described upon the drawings and in conformance with the KAHRAMAA regulations. The number and sizes of cables drawn into the conduit / trunking shall not exceed

than that given in the appropriate tables of the KAHRA MAA regulations. In all cases, it must be possible to draw-in and withdraw any cable(s) without incurring damage to the remaining cables. The cables to be used shall be colour coded insulation - Red, Yellow and Blue for the respective phase wiring. Black shall be reserved for the neutral cables and Green/Yellow stripe for the earth conductor. The cables shall be installed on the ' loop-in' system (no through wiring), no joints being made anywhere in the installation.

Cable ends shall be stripped with purpose made cable stripping tools correctly

adjusted to suit the conductor size. All terminations to fittings and accessories subject to a temperature rise in excess of 130

oF shall be carried out with conductors

insulated with heat resisting material such as Butyl Hypalon or Equal and approved. Within distribution boards the wires comprising each circuit shall be bound together

and neatly wired into position in an approved manner in-line with good workmanship practice.

When cables are installed in trunkings the conductors of each circuit shall be bound together in an approved manner at 600 mm. intervals. In vertical trunkings, cables shall be supported by means of racks to prevent stress caused by the weight of the conductors. The overall cross-sectional area of all conductors installed shall not

exceed the 45% space factor permitted by KAHRA MAA.





To identify the wires, each phase wiring insulation shall be of the designated color and provided with cable marker ferrules to identify the circuit number.

No more than two cable conductors shall be joined in a terminal of any lighting or small power accessory including light fittings. The minimum conductor size to be used for lighting circuits shall be 2.5 mm

2, and for 13 A socket ring circuits it shall be

4 mm2.

The cable core identification ferrules or sleeves shall be made of a heat resistant

elastic insulating material which shall be white with a gloss finish. The cable marker ferrules shall not be adversely affected by contact with oil or moisture. Text characters shall be suitably and indelibly marked in black.

b. Surface Wiring

Wiring for sub-main wiring and large items of plant shall in general be by multi-core armoured cables run exposed on the surfaces of cable ladders / trays or fixed and cleated direct to the building fabric as indicated upon the drawings. The cable conductors shall be sized to comply with the following:

1. Derating regulations of KAHRA MAA.

2. Switch rating of the load.

3. Allowance for 2.5% maximum voltage drop from the transformer secondary

terminals or KAHRA MAA supply point to the furthest most circuit load. The contractor shall provide armoured cables where-ever specified. These cables

shall be designed for 600/1000 V systems and shall be either PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/LSOH type as indicated on the drawings.

Any armoured cable being used at site must bear the manufacturer's name on the

outer sheath and the voltage rating for which it is manufactured.

1. PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 6346.

2. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 5467.

3. XLPE/LSOH/SWA/LSOH cables shall comply with BS 6724. Cables carrying 3 phase and neutral loads shall be 4 cores, the neutral conductor

having the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductors. The minimum internal radius of bends in cables shall not be less than that given in

the appropriate Table of the BS 7671:2008. Parallel cable runs comprising more than one cable shall be fixed by suitable sized

nylon cable cleats at an interval not to exceed 1500 mm along the cable tray or cable ladder.





Cables shall be installed as indicated upon the drawings. The arrangement of cables and the methods of drawing and laying down shall be approved by the Consultant prior to commencing installation. Where cables are installed in areas or locations that may be subjected to direct sunlight, the contractor shall provide suitably approved sunshield made of an inverted 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet and fixed in position with approved nut and bolt fixings.

Cables indicated on the drawings to be installed in floor trenches shall be provided

with adequate cable racking / tray / ladder supports appropriate for the quantity and weight of cables to be installed. Cables shall be run neatly and arranged to make the most efficient use of the space provided within the cable trench.

Cables indicated upon the drawings to be buried direct below ground shall be laid at

a minimum depth of 600 mm below the finished grade. The cables shall be laid as a single layer on a cushion of graded and washed fine builders sand of 200 mm depth and shall be covered with another layer of 200 mm depth above it. Cable marking tape shall be installed on the top layer of sand throughout the cable route. A minimum horizontal clearance of 50 mm shall be maintained between the cables.

Where indicated upon the drawings cables installed below ground shall be drawn

into concrete encased duct banks to cross below roads, paths and paved / concrete areas. Concrete encased duct banks shall comprise circular PVC ducts of minimum 150 mm diameter buried at a depth of 800 mm. below ground level and surrounded by a concrete layer of 100 mm. thickness from all sides, unless otherwise specified.

Cable route and joint marker posts of an approved type shall be provided along the

route of buried cables as instructed by the Consultant. Markers shall be installed at all cable joint positions and all places where the route changes direction and on straight routes at distances not exceeding 100 m. The provision and installation of cable markers shall be included in the schedule of rates for excavation and reinstatement.

Where any part of the cable is buried in the ground, the armouring shall not be used

as the earth and instead a separate PVC sheathed earth conductor shall be provided and buried alongside the power cable. The size of the earth conductor shall not be less than half the associated phase conductor but not less than 16 mm

2.

The Contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing of all cable trench

covers, free of charge, during the execution of his work as directed by the Consultant.

All single core and multi-core main power cables shall be installed with cleats or

saddles when fixed along vertical routes. Small power cables, those having conductor areas of 16 mm

2 and less, shall be installed on trays but segregated from

other cables on the same tray by a space of at least 30 mm. All multi-care / pair control cables shall also be installed on trays dedicated to controls cables.

All cable terminations shall be carried out using compression type cable glands

designed to adequately and firmly secure the steel wire armouring. All armouring and all faces of armour clamps making contact with them shall be thoroughly cleaned during installation and all clamps shall be adequately tightened to ensure good electrical contact. The installation shall be such that there will be no electrical





discontinuity along the armouring and no local hot spots or high resistances. The means of earthing the armouring to the earth bar at either end shall be provided by means of an approved metallic bond of adequate conductance and the bonding connection shall be as short and straight as practicable. All terminations are to be fitted with PVC shrouds so as no exposed cable armouring exists.

c. Fire Barriers

Where cable ladders, trays, conduits or trunkings pass through fire-resistant structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall after installation be sealed or fire stopped according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance of the breached fire wall. In the case of cable trunkings or conduits an approved internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of fires.

d. Mineral Insulated Cables

MICC/PVC covered cables 600/1000 V grades Conforming to BS 6207 Part 1, shall be used mainly for the sub-station wiring within the HV switchgear and transformer rooms.

Mineral insulated cables shall have copper conductors with copper sheath and PVC over sheaths in all applications.

Neoprene conductor sleeves shall be fitted to the exposed conductors and cold

setting compound shall be used packed within the pot seals for normal applications. Terminations shall comply with BS 6081-1. The temperature classification of the seal

shall be “Class 105” unless otherwise indicated or directed by the consultant. Glands shall be Type “Y” and a PVC shroud shall be neatly fitted over gland terminations. Before fitting the shroud in place, all bare metal shall be wrapped with pressure sensitive adhesive PVC tape.

On three phase circuits, the insulation sleeves shall carry distinctive coloured

(red/yellow/blue) bands identifying each phase, and for single phase circuits then a red band shall be used to mark the phase conductor. For circuits involving 3 phases, the correct phase identification colour bands shall be used, and the markers shall conform to BS 1710.

Cables shall be fixed to walls or cable tray by means of PVC covered copper clips.

Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type fire-resistant as made by the cable manufacturer, or by special copper saddles for runs of large number of cables.

The distance between fixing centres shall follow manufacturer's recommendations and the completed installation shall present a neat, appearance, with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.

Cables rising from the floor in exposed positions shall have some form of mechanical

protection for approximately 450 mm. above floor level. This may either be a short length of metal channel (mainly cable tray).





Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensure that pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried in the structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and its protection channel have been covered.

While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable

run in order to take up possible expansion movements.

e. Fire Rated Flexible Multi-core Cables

Fire rated flexible multi-core cables conforming to BS 7629-1 shall be used as shown in the drawing for applications that do not require cable armouring. These thermoplastic LSOH sheathed / insulated cables shall have stranded copper conductors with high performance damage resistant insulation and an aluminium foil / polyester tape screen in contact with adequately sized bare tinned annealed copper stranded circuit protective conductor.

The Fire rated flexible cables shall comply with the following fire performance

standards:

1. Resistance to Fire: BS 6387 category CWZ. 2. Smoke Emission: BS 7622. 3. Acid Gas Emissions: BS 6425-1 <0.5% Acid gas. 4. Flame Retardant: BS 4066-1. 5. Reduced Flame : BS 4066-3 Category C propagation.

In addition the cables shall have excellent data/signal transmission characteristics,

manufactured under an ISO9001Quality system and be BASEC certified. These cable shall be run in PVC conduits or cable tray / trunkings or run in open

execution (no more than two parallel cables) in the ceiling voids by means of LSOH coated single hole, fire resistant metal fixing clips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type as made / recommended by the cable manufacturer or by special LSOH coated saddles for runs of large number of cables.

The distance between fixing centers shall follow the manufacturer's

recommendations and the completed installations shall present a neat, appearance, with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.

While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable

run in order to take up possible expansion movements.

21.2.15 CONDUITS

a. General

Polyvinyl Chloride Conduits and accessories shall be used for lighting and small power circuit wiring unless otherwise specified. These shall be concealed in cast within the slabs, walls and floor screeds,. In areas external to sealed voids where the





conduits are exposed then galvanised (GI) steel conduits and accessories shall be used. The use of black enamel (BE) conduits shall not be permitted.

b. UPVC Conduits

The plastic conduits (uPVC) shall be manufactured from heavy gauge, rigid un-plasticized polyvinyl chloride compound of the high impact grade. The impact strength shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 61386. No conduit smaller than 20 mm in diameter shall be used.

The minimum wall thickness for the conduits shall be as follows:

20 mm dia.: 1.8 mm 25 mm dia.: 1.9 mm 32 mm dia: 2.5 mm 38 mm dia.: 2.5 mm 50 mm dia.: 2.5 mm All PVC conduit accessories shall be manufactured from rigid uPVC of the same

manufacturer as that of the conduits. Where a solid fixed joint between a conduit and accessory is required, use shall be

made of an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic conduits selected. When making a joint, care must be taken to ensure that the plastic conduit is thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure good adhesion.

Flexible joints shall be made using a non-hardening adhesive and shall be used in

conjunction with approved expansion couplers. Conduit installations that become distorted or flexed through thermal expansion will not be accepted.

Where bends or off-sets are required, these shall be made in accordance with the

manufacturer‟s instruction without altering the section of plastic conduit/s. For plastic conduits up to 25 mm diameter, cold bends shall be acceptable. The bends shall be formed with the use of a bending spring obtained from the plastic conduits manufacturer.

For large sizes of conduit/s, bends shall be formed by pre-heating the tube before

inserting the spring to prevent shrinking. Pre-heating shall be done with a suitable electrically heated and powered blow lamp (NOT a naked flame) and sufficient care shall be taken to avoid physical damages of the conduits (deformation). Any other method of bending can also be considered subject to the approval of the consultant.

Deep circular boxes shall be used where more than 10 nos. of 2.5 mm

2 cables are

crossing within the box. Plastic conduits shall not be installed in situations where the continuous ambient temperature exceeds 50

oC or where, for intermittent periods, the

ambient temperature exceeds 70oC; badly formed or damaged plastic conduits shall

not be permitted to be installed. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of plastic conduits exceeding 6000 mm in length. The plastic conduit shall be free to slide within saddles to if used in a surface mounting application..





Special consideration should be given to fixing of all accessories in situations where the temperature fluctuates excessively. The plastic conduits shall be fixed at 1000 mm intervals by spacer bar saddles; draw-in points shall be provided at every 8000 mm interval along straight runs or after not more than one right angle bend; where such points are provided exclusively for draw-in purpose, they must comprise inspection couplers.

Where the conduit system are required to be laid concealed then all the lighting

conduits shall be laid at the roof level and dropping down to each point and all the power circuit conduits shall be laid in the screed of the floor wherever possible or in the floor slab using only the correct manufacturers fittings and accessories.

The Electrical Contractor shall exercise care when installing plastic conduits to

prevent interference with or from other services and shall keep at least 300 mm clear of any hot water pipes.

No equipment weighing more than 12 kg shall be suspended from the circular plastic

boxes. For loads more than 12 kg in weight then approved and purpose made supporting systems shall be used with flexible cable and plug-in type roses used for the final wiring connections.

Where purpose made junction boxes are used to draw-in the cables, then the covers

of these boxes shall be of the same finish as that of the switch / socket plates. Where enclosed bulkhead type light fittings are fixed directly to a high impact circular uPVC conduit box, steel insert clips must be used for fixing the luminaries on the box.

c. Galvanised Steel Conduits

Steel conduits shall be new, heavy gauge, solid drawn, galvanized (GI) and shall comply with BS EN 61386. Each length of the conduit shall bear a stamp guaranteeing it to be as per the required specifications. The use of conduits less than 20 mm in diameter will not be permitted.

All conduit fittings and accessories including screwed couplers, ordinary clips,

saddles, pipe hooks, screwed reducers, stopping plugs, lock nuts plus male and female brass bushes shall comply with BS EN 61386 as applicable. All screwed couplers, screwed reducers, and locknuts shall only be used on surface installations, Screwed or push-fit inspection elbows, bends and inspection couplings must not be used.

Galvanized steel sheet adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed in

inspection and in locations where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall be 150 x 150 x150 mm deep, (inside measure). Where the boxes are fully recessed, they shall be provided with 14 SWG galvanized steel lids, overlapping the boxes by 6mm all round.





d. Methods of Installation

Conduits buried in concrete shall have 37 mm depth minimum of cover over the entire length; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth minimum of cover over its entire length. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by means of corrugated steel saddles and secured by hardened steel pins at 1200 mm centres. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the joints between the beams unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.

In the case of cast “in-situ” applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequate

precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of all conduits and boxes during the construction operation. These conduits and fittings must also be suitably plugged to prevent the ingress of foreign matter in order to prevent the conduit system from becoming blocked during the building construction. Any additional costs resulting from blockages or damage to conduits due to negligence or lack of attendance shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

Female brass bushes shall be fitted on to all free ends of the conduit system.

Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight

after the installation is completed. Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until

dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthing system. Separate circuit protective conductors shall be installed within the conduits in all cases.

All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted

with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection boxes must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by the Consultant.

No more than one right angle bend or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs

between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted after each second conduit length.

Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the section

or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radius of less than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be machine made.

The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and

free from burrs and other defects. Exposed GI conduits shall be painted with two coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.





21.2.16 CABLE TRUNKING AND TRAYS

a. Steel Trunking

Cable trunking shall be used where it is accessible and can replace numerous final circuit conduit runs.

A reputed and approved Engineering company shall manufacture all the trunking and

fittings. Galvanised (GI) sheet metal cable trunking shall be used throughout in all vertical

rising ducts, in the positions detailed on the drawings or for terminating conduits and cables at distribution boards etc. Cable trunking must be used in ceiling voids where otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur.

Cable trunking and fittings shall comply with BS EN 50085 and shall be Class 3

galvanized (G) protected as detailed in the following specifications and drawings. All cable trunking shall consist of abutted sections manufactured from Zintec coated

high-grade steel sheet of not less than 16 swg. All accessories such as bends, tees, offsets, reducers etc., shall be of the same manufacture and finish and be of the gusseted type to aid the installation of cables.

Multi-compartment trunking shall be divided into the required number of

compartments by means of continuous steel sheet separators running the full length of the trunking. Each partition shall be at such a height that when the trunking cover is fastened in position there shall be no gap between the top edge of the partition and the inside face of the cover. Corresponding separate compartments shall be provided in all tees, angles, reducers etc., to ensure that segregation of the various services is effected as detailed in the specifications and drawings.

All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners. All

angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners. Adjoining lengths shall be correctly aligned and the trunkings shall be joined together

by means of internal fishplate connector and mushroom headed set screws or purpose made coupling pieces depending on the design of the trunking. After joining, there shall be no gap visible between sections of the trunking or compartment partitions.

Internal fish plate connectors shall be not less than 2.5 mm. thick and attached by

means of not less than 4 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having a total cross sectional area below 5700 mm

2 and 8 nos. cadmium

plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having cross sectional areas in excess of 5700 mm

2 each passing through clearance holes, shake proof washers

and nuts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall be connected by tinned copper links with split washers under the nuts to provide guaranteed electrical continuity across the joints.





The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copper straps shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, tees etc. The copper straps shall be fixed on the external faces of the trunking to be visible.

All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at

intervals not greater than 1200 mm dependent upon the size of the trunking and number of cable contained.

The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material which

shall be secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head screws spaced not greater than 450 mm. Where trunking terminates at switchboards, distribution boards and equipment enclosures, a proper-flanged coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the enclosure.

Solid end stops shall be a manufacturer‟s purpose made steel sheet terminal piece. In case of trunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will not be permitted and under no circumstance either will gaps be accepted.

Where trunkings passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be

permanently fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends a minimum of 50 mm. beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.

The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of the

manufacturer‟s own clips or bars fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of trunking, with separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the trunking.

Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected

to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they shall be distinguished by separating the cables and binding with insulated tape at intervals of 1200 mm together with an approved means of identification sleeve adjacent to each binding that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference.

All connections between trunking and/or bus-bar chambers and to each item of

switch, switch-fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and without intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom glanding plates of the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to be cut to accommodate passage of all the cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and trunking and bus-bar chamber with a slot 6 mm to be smaller all around than the slot cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.

All covers shall be easily removed with a hand tool and the trunking shall be properly

spaced away from any surface which may prevent this. Dimensions obtained from site shall determine the shape of purpose-made pieces of

trunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be provided in trunking runs where they cross building expansion joints and as required.





Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity minimum for the installation of any future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor of the fully loaded trunking is provided.

Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever

possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top and sides of the assembly.

The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure

and below the concrete soffit. Conduits shall be used to complete the final containment of each circuit from the

general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated and shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall then be taken through the structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various lighting, power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.

For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used

with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables shall be terminated with glands of appropriate type and size.

The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a skilled workman like fashion so that it

presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.

b. Cable Trays

The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel.

Aluzink is a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating consisting of Silicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and zinc (43.4%) safeguarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A, AZ150 in conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215. Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the part of the tray upon which the cables are laid.

The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind

to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shall ensure that overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for all the cable trays necessary to complete the works and as indicated upon the drawings.





The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present requirements. Cables shall be run as a single layer: Stacking will not be permitted.

Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards or

downwards respectively to suit and shall be anchored with an approved fixing with spacing and washers such that the tray is spaced at least 25 mm from the surface of the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each section of cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the nearest earth continuity conductor.

Each section of tray shall be securely bolted to the next with sufficient overlap to

prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bends of not less than 450 mm radius shall be used.

The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant prior

to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the structure of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shall be approved by the Consultant before installation.

The manufacturer shall confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable trays against any corrosion in the Qatar climatic conditions.

Wherever tees or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No

cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be properly painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviation from the straight shall, if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose made bends cannot be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site to the approval of the Consultant.

All the supports shall be fabricated out of appropriately sized galvanized steel

channels.

21.2.17 ELECTRICAL DUCTS

For electrical power and low current system cables to be buried below ground the cables ducts shall be made of high impact resistant uPVC compound. Ducts shall be of the diameter and number indicated upon the drawings. In any event any duct run run / bank shall include at minimum 1 no. spare duct (not indicated on the drawings) of the same size to be installed in parallel.

Each duct shall include a suitably sized nylon draw rope to protrude at both ends for

the future drawing-in of cables. Power cable ducts shall be as follows:

1. Material - High Impact Resistant uPVC.

2. Internal Diameter - 150 mm / 100 mm / 75 mm / 50 mm.(as indicated upon the drawings).

3. Minimum Wall thickness - 3.6 mm for 150mm Dia.

- 2.4 mm for 100mm Dia.





- 2.4 mm for 75mm Dia. - 2.4 mm for 50mm Dia.

4. For Telephone Cables - 90mm Dia., as per Q-Tel Standards.

uPVC pipe ducts shall be installed for the incoming Qatar Telecom(QTel) cables in accordance with the configuration and methods detailed QGEWC (Electricity) standard drawing for road crossings and elsewhere as described on the drawings.

uPVC pipe duct continuous pathway systems shall be installed in accordance with

Qatar National Telephone Service (QNTS) publication, with which the contractor is deemed to be familiar.

Electrical Ducts used for Cables etc., shall be of the following types, as per QGEWC

regulations & Q-Tel standards and supplied by an approved manufacturer.

21.2.18 LIGHT FITTINGS

The contractor shall include in his costs for supply, erection, and connection of all specified light fittings complete with suitable lamps in the positions shown upon the drawings, unless otherwise directed.

No lighting fittings shall be purchased until the express authorization has been

received, in writing, from the Consultant to do so. This authorization shall be sought by the Contractor in good time in order to allow the programme of works to continue unaffected.

All light fittings shall be of types specified or be both equal and approved by the

Consultant. No alternative light fittings will be considered unless the Contractor receives in writing the express approval from the Consultant.

All fluorescent lamp fittings, as a minimum, shall be complete with low loss epoxy

filled ballasts, switch start control gear and power factor correction condensers to give a minimum power factor of 0.9 lagging and the control gear noise level shall be limited to 24 dB.

The Contractor shall provide fluorescent lamps with electronic high frequency

ballasts if this is required on the schedule of light fittings. The units shall be of high quality, low loss and low noise level units superior in all respects to the equivalent conventional wound ballasts. These units and the lamps shall also be compatible for use with the standard available dimming technologies.

The light fitting shall not be considered complete without the lamps of specified

wattage. The connections between the circuit wiring and the light fittings mounted upon the

underside suspended ceilings shall be effected by means of plug-in type ceiling roses and 1.5 mm

2 3 core heat resistant flexible cable. The same method shall be

used for lighting fittings installed with chain or steel wire suspensions.





For light fittings fixed direct to conduit systems the cables shall loop-in to the light fitting via a neoprene bush provided to protect the cables. The cables shall then be terminated in the light fitting terminal block. No through wiring shall be permitted in light fittings and the cables that do enter shall be kept as short as possible and be fitted with heat resistant sleeves. All metal work shall be bonded to earth.

Where surface mounted light fittings are installed, conduit boxes, either of the loop-in

type or standard type shall be installed above each fitting position. Extension rings shall be fitted as necessary so that the bottom of the ring is flush with the underside of the ceiling. White break joint rings shall also be provided between the fittings and conduit box to mask the joints as shall be deemed necessary by the Consultant.

In areas where the ceiling is of the suspended type, the weight of the conduit and

light fittings shall under no circumstance be carried by this type of ceiling and suitable independent suspension fixings shall be provided and installed by the con tractor to carry the weight of the fittings.

All lamps throughout the installation shall be supplied and fixed in position as per this

contract. They shall be of the sizes and types specified. All lamps over 150 W shall be of the Edison screw-cap type. The lamps shall be supplied complete with end caps compatible with the fittings into which they are to be inserted.

Fluorescent lamps shall be of correlated colour temperature of 3000

oK unless

otherwise specified.

Each and every light fitting shall be fitted with power factor correction capacitors to raise the power factor to 0.9 lag or better.

All lighting luminaries shall comply with BS EN 60598. The contractor shall ensure that fluorescent fittings are connected to the three phase

distribution boards such that there is no stroboscopic effect. With the exception of certain light weight domestic and commercial pendant types of

light fittings, no fittings shall be suspended by means of flexible cables. Where light fittings are suspended they shall be by means of purpose made metal supports.

The contractor shall supply and install all necessary materials and equipment to provide external lighting as shown on the drawings.

All excavation of cable trenches shall be carried out by the Main Contractor with the

Contractor in attendance. The Contractor shall supply all the electrical cable ducts, warning tapes and marker posts required to complete the works. The electrical contractor shall include for the necessary liaison with the Main Contractor in the instruction and execution of this work. Before excavations are backfilled the Consultant shall be notified by the Contractor in writing that the cable installation is complete in order that an inspection may be made of the exposed cable installation.

All cables serving the luminaries shall loop in and out of the designated fittings and

joint boxes. No other intermediate cable joints shall be permitted.





An efficient and durable earth connection shall be made between the metalwork of the luminaries and the wire armour of the cables.

All cables used for the external lighting installation unless otherwise detailed, shall be

of PVC/SWA/PVC sheathed type supplied and installed in accordance with the relevant clauses of this specification and the details indicated upon the drawings.

21.2.19 WIRING ACCESSORIES

a. Switches

The switches shall be single-pole type rated for 240 V and a 10 A inductive load. No de-rating of the switches shall be required in the case of use fluorescent light fittings or other inductive loads.

All 1 way lighting switches shall be arranged to switch on the lights when the rocker

is pushed downwards.

Switches shall be of robust construction to provide a long trouble free operational life. All the cover plates, switches, grid mounted systems and mounting boxes shall conform to BS EN 60670 and BS EN 60669–1:2000. Wherever more than one switch is shown on the drawings, they shall be multi-gang grid switch assembly and where they are powered from different phases, then the manufacturers phase barriers shall be provided and correctly installed. Switch terminals shall be of the screw down type to avoid any to give firm and secure electrical connections.

b. 13 A Socket Outlets

All 13 A socket outlets shall be of the switched type with 240 V, 13 A rated 3-pin socket. The socket outlets shall comply with BS 1362-2:1995. Twin socket outlets shall be used wherever two adjacent sockets are indicated together unless otherwise mentioned.

All socket outlets shall be adequately earthed, the circuit protective conductor shall

terminate direct and a flying lead shall be installed between the outlet earth terminal and outlet box. For switched socket outlets exposed to external environmental conditions or internally in damp areas shall be weather proof (IP65 rated) and corrosion resistant.

The switched socket outlets shall be provided with integral neon indicating lamp to indicate the 'ON' status of switch, unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant. All switch socket outlets shall be connected in ring circuits unless otherwise specified and no spurs shall be permitted.





c. Connection Plates

All connection plates shall be provided flexible cable outlets and shall be installed adjacent the equipment served such as fan coil units, water heaters and exhaust fans. The connection plates shall be of a suitable rating having 3-way terminal blocks and brass screws for direct connection of the flexible heat resistant cables. They shall be of robust construction, of approved finish and of very high quality. All flex outlets shall conform to BS 5733:1995.

d. Ceiling Roses

Ceiling roses shall be of an approved manufacture and be constructed from plastic with a white finish conforming to BS 67:1999. All ceiling roses shall be fitted with an integral 3-plate (high capacity) terminal block with earth terminal to comply with the

KAHRAMAA regulations. Where ceiling roses are mounted direct to recessed conduit boxes they shall be fitted with a break joint ring (halo).

e. Double-Pole Switches

The switches for window A.C s. water heaters, hand dryer‟s units etc., shall be double-pole, rated for either 20/30/50 A as appropriate and the selection made based on the connected load. The switches shall have indicating lamps and the face plates to match the finished required for the area concerned. These switches shall conform to BS EN 60669-1:2000.

f. Time Switches and Photo-Cell Controls

Photo-cells shall be of the photo-resistor type mounted externally in suitable location to be approved by the Consultant. These photo-cells shall be equipped with adjustment for the trigger light level.

A robust electro-mechanical time switch shall be provided. The time switch shall be

of the solar dial type suitable for the geographical latitude at which it shall operate. It shall have a spring-reserve winding so that during power failure the clock mechanism shall automatically keep accurate time for a minimum period of 12 hours.

The time-switch and photo-cell shall be wired and configured as shown upon the

drawings. The lights shall be switched by a multi-pole contactor also wired and configured as shown upon the drawings. The contactor shall be of the rating indicated on the drawings and shall be equipped with a coil that operates at 240 V 50 Hz, single phase ac.

The contractor shall also provide an override switch to switch on and switch off the

lights in the event the time and photo-cell controls fail to operate.





21.2.20 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

NETWORK FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM PART

1.0 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled and intelligent network fire alarm systems components required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for

Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification and/or the AHJ. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.

C. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by one of the specified

manufacturers. D. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed

under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm systems

and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL 864 9th

Edition listing. E. The installing company shall employ factory trained technicians on site to guide

the project commissioning, ensure the system integrity, and to prepare the system for inspection and turn over to the owner. The installing company shall employ qualified and factory trained project management to ensure the above.

1.2 SCOPE

A. General

1. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.

B. Basic Performance

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be employed on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part

of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y)





as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit or as a direct panel NAC output.

4. On Style 6 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on

the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm.

5. On Style 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault, open circuit, or

short circuit on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. Style 7 configurations shall employ Short Circuit Isolation (SCI) technology.

6. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power

failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.

C. Basic System Functional Operation

When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur:

1. The system alarm LED on the system display shall flash. 2. A local panel buzzer in the control panel shall sound with a distinct sound

separate from the trouble indication sound. 3. A backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire

alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.

4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated

with each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.

5. All system output programs assigned via CAUSE AND EFFECT interlock

programming to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General

1. Eight copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.

2. All references to manufacturers part numbers and other pertinent information

herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, function and quality of a UL-listed system and equipment.





B. Shop Drawings

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power

requirements, battery calculations, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, riser diagrams, conduit layouts, and sequence of operations.

3. Show system layout, configurations, and terminations.

C. Manuals

1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets.

2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the

interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the

information required to properly operate the equipment and system.

D. Software Modifications

1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.

2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation

necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for all system points. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site.

E. Certifications

Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative in Qatar. Include names and addresses in the certification.

1.4 GUARANTEE

All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract





shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. A (4) year additional service/maintenance contract shall be quoted separately per section 1.5 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE of this document.

1.5 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE

A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from the factory trained authorized representative for this project for a period of four (4) years after expiration of the guarantee per item B below.

B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs

C. will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of four (4) years after expiration of the guarantee.

D. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the

AHJ and/or local fire codes and regulations. A preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the procedures for preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include:

1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual

fire alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, water-flow switches and all accessories of the fire alarm system.

2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually.

3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 10.

1.6 POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS

A. The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labor to expand the system specified, if so requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance.

1.7 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

The codes and standards below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the current or latest editions of these codes and standards as applicable. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: No. 13 Sprinkler Systems





No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code No. 70 National Electric Code - Article 760

No. 101 Life Safety Code

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:

No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems (9th

Edition) No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications

No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances

No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes

No. 346 Water-flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

No. 1971 ADA Visual Notification Appliances No. 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

C. Requirements of Qatar Civil Defence Directorate FSS.

1.8 APPROVALS AND LISTINGS

A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following recognized agencies:

UL – Underwriters Laboratories Inc FM – Factory Mutual Inc.

CSFM – California State Fire Marshall

B. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of the UL 864 9th Edition

standard (Control Units) for the following types of listed service:

Local commercial protected premise: Automatic, manual, water- flow, sprinkler supervisory, Auxiliary Service (local energy), and Central Station Service (DACT). The Fire Alarm system shall be Qatar Civil Defence Directorate (QCD) approved.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL

A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code and appropriate UL listing categories identified in this document.





B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.

C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be

held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE

A. CONDUIT

1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local

and state requirements.

2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit.

3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1

circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-29.

4. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and

similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals.

5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely

mounted control panel equipment or back- boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.

6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum.

B. Wire

1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. All exposed wire shall be Mineral Insulated Cable (MICC).

2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NFPA70-

NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.

3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency





for use with a fire protective signaling system.

4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR).

5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. The design of the system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication circuit.

6. Wiring used for the network communications shall be twisted shielded pair, minimum 20ga., sized as necessary to support the extended fire alarm network.

7. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault.

8. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of t-tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4) Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems that do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of t-taps, length of t-taps etc., are not acceptable.

9. Existing wiring may be used for SLC or NAC circuit use provided this meets the minimum requirements of the manufacturer, local code requirements and the site location Authority Having Jurisdiction.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets

1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their intended use and purpose. 2. All terminal, junction boxes and cabinets not marked with the fire alarm

manufacturers name shall have the box covers painted red, or shall be designated with “F/A” or “Fire Alarm” in bold permanent lettering.

D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke,

water-flow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices.

E. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch

circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe, proper building grounding point, or grounding rod to the designated ground point on the fire control equipment.

2.3 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE

A. General Main FACP or network node shall be a fire alarm control panel and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, annunciators, expansion accessories, and other system controlled devices.





B. Operator Control

1. Panel Sounder Silence

a. Activation of the control Panel Sounder Silence button in response to new

alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel sounder signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady- ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of the "More Alarms", or "More Events" buttons shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.

b. Depression of the Panel Sounder Silence button shall also silence all Remote Annunciator panel sounders if so programmed per network node configuration.

2. Alarm Silence Button

Activation of the Alarm Silence button shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silence-able by this button shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include optional auto-silence timers. The fire alarm panel display will continue to show two red LED‟s indicated “Fire”,

and the Panel Sounder Silence yellow LED will indicate steadily until the fire

alarm panel is RESET and the conditions are clear. Should other types of alarm or trouble conditions be present, the system shall respond accordingly and the appropriate LED‟s associated with this category of alarm or trouble will indicate until the panel has been restored to normal condition. Subsequent alarms, if any will activate the alarm notification appliances and relays again.

3. Fire Drill Button

The Fire Drill button shall activate all notification appliance circuits and addressable modules/sounders that are programmed for General Alarm operation. The drill function shall latch these circuits and devices “on” until the panel is silenced or reset. The two red “Fire” LED‟s shall flash, the yellow “On Test” LED shall indicate steadily on the panel display and the LCD display shall display “Fire Drill”. Pressing the Fire Drill or Reset button shall silence and reset all related circuits and devices.

4. ReSound Alarm Button

Pressing the “ReSound Alarm” button on the front display, at any time after the FACP has been silenced, but not Reset, will re-activate the notification appliance circuits and addressable modules/sounders that are programmed for General Alarm operation back into the appropriate alarm condition.





5. System Reset Button

Activation of the System Reset button shall cause all electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, and annunciator displays to return to their normal condition. Addressable duct detector relays will also return to normal condition provided the auxiliary relays have been configured to interrupt power to the duct detectors.

6. Lamp Test

The Lamp Test button shall activate all local system LEDs and illuminate each segment of the liquid crystal display (LCD) while the Lamp Test button is depressed.

7. Programmable Function

The Programmable Function button shall be user programmable and shall activate any programmed action or output, or group of actions or outputs associated with programmed Cause and Effect software control to function with the operation of this button. Associated LED‟s or display codes will appear on the FACP display as needed to indicate the category of the programmed function. The programmed function button will only activate while the button is pressed during Level 2 password access or front panel “Enable” key switch access.

8. Enter

The Enter button shall be used as necessary in association with the keypad to enter various commands, menus, or system modes.

9. Exit

The Exit button shall be used to exit any level of access, various commands, menus, or system modes and return display to its original condition.

10. More Events

The More Events button shall be used by the system operator to view additional alarm, trouble, supervisory or other event category conditions as they occur or have occurred on the FACP. The most current events shall be displayed first. Older event shall display last. The system will automatically continue to organize and display events as they occur in real time. The events displayed in this menu

are active and current events (current event buffer). For viewing historical events

that have already been restored, the user must view the event history log.

11. More Fire Events

The More Fire Events button shall be used to display all high priority “Fire” alarm conditions on the panel. The LCD display will display two fire alarm events at a time. The first (original) and last (latest) fire alarm events will be displayed by default. When the More Fire Events button is used, the system will cycle the last





fire alarm event entry through all currently active fire alarm events, keeping the originating event concurrently displayed. The system will automatically continue to categorize and display alarm events as they occur in real time.

12. Numeric/Arrow Navigation Buttons:

The numeric arrow buttons shall be used by the system technician and/or other appropriate personnel to enter the Access Level 2 or 3 menu structures. From these menus personnel can perform programming functions, disablements, set system time, device parameters, printers, maintenance alerts, etc. The Access Level 2 menu functions are for standard user functions and system operation. The Access Level 3 menu functions are for system programming and higher-level administrator operations.

13. Question Button (?)

The Question button shall be used by the system operator or technician to provide help to describe the particular menu or level the operator is currently in. Example, by pressing the help button when the panel is in alarm mode will explain to the operator what is occurring and suggest appropriate action. Fire alarm systems that do not provide dynamic onboard front panel help via menu function shall not be acceptable.

C. System Capacity and General Operation

1. The control panel or network node shall provide, or be capable of, SLC

input/output capacity of 800 addresses and sub- addresses at full panel expansion.

2. The control panel or network node shall support (2) or (4) SLC loop

configurations.

3. The control panel or network node shall support (127) sensors/detectors/modules and (127) addressable sounder bases per loop totaling up to 254 addressable points per SLC loop. Systems that are not capable of this SLC capacity shall not be acceptable.

4. The control panel or network node shall include five (5) onboard

programmable Form-C relays with default operation for Common Fire 1,

Common Fire 2, Common Trouble, Common Supervisory, and Auxiliary

functions rated at a minimum of 1.0 amp @ 30VDC.

5. The control panel or network node shall include four (4) onboard Class B (NFPA Style Y) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits rated at 2.5 amps @ 24VDC.

6. The control panel or network node shall include three (3) onboard additional

programmable supervised reverse polarity voltage outputs (common fire, common trouble, and programmable) rated at 500mA @ 24VDC.

7. Each FACP NAC, voltage, and relay output (except for Supervisory) may be





individually programmed to operate on any pre-defined condition via Cause and Effect programming.

8. The control panel or network node shall include (500) network- wide zones.

Systems that do not employ this type of zoning shall not be acceptable.

9. Protection: All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent

with the requirements of the UL864 9th

edition standard.

10. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: For ease of installation and service all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall have sufficient capacity for #18 to #12 AWG wire.

11. The control panel or network node shall include and employ (2) RS485

network ports configured in a Class A “ring” topology for high integrity operation. Systems that employ a single RS485 port or Class B 2-wire network operation shall not be acceptable.

12. The control panel or network node shall include a slave RS485 port for

remote expansion accessories. This expansion port shall support up to (32) optional remote expansion accessories with a capacity of up to (512) secondary inputs and outputs or (15) local serial LCD annunciators and (17) expansion accessories. Systems that do not employ a slave RS485 port for expansion accessories shall not be acceptable.

13. The control panel or network node shall include (1) onboard RS232 port for PC programming.

14. The control panel or network node shall include (1) onboard RS232 port for

3rd

party serial fire printer support.

15. The control panel or network node shall include (8) onboard digital logic

inputs without the need for expansion modules. These inputs shall be capable of PLC style logic and secondary input operation. Systems that do not employ onboard digital inputs shall not be acceptable.

16. Protection: The control panel or network node shall incorporate surge and

lightning protection devices as required to meet the UL 864 9th

Edition criteria.

17. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and

annunciation panel that shall include a backlit (320) character (8 lines x 40 characters) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), with individual color coded system status LEDs, and a keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system.

18. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field

without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate





programming changes. The memory storage of the system shall be Flash memory type, EPROM type shall not be acceptable.

19. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs via advanced Cause & Effect software programming. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or have only basic logic programming are not considered suitable substitutes.

20. The FACP shall support up to 500 Cause & Effect logic statements involving

up to 2000 inputs, 2000 outputs, and 500 zones. The logic shall support "AND," "OR," and "COINCIDENCE” operators to be used for advanced programming. Logic statements shall require the use of a PC with software utility designed for programming. The logic statements shall support special macro operations to perform advanced automated system bypass disablements and multi-zone One Man Walk Test functions. Systems that do not employ this Cause & Effect capability, capacity, or special logic macros shall not be acceptable.

21. The FACP or network node shall include the following features:

a. Automatic drift compensation employed per UL864 9th

Edition criteria where each smoke sensor/detector automatically adjust its zero-point, fire-point, and alarm threshold sensitivity to adjusted ambient environmental conditions (“clean-air” samples) taken within each (24) hour period. This operation adjust each smoke sensor/detector automatically to suit ongoing subtle changes in the ambient air conditions. The adjusted values and operation insure smoke sensors/detectors are always optimally tuned to their environment and do not fail to operate or false alarm as the smoke chambers slowly become dirty or obscured. Systems that do not employ automatic drift

compensation to the UL864 9th

Edition criteria shall not be acceptable.

b. Integral detector sensitivity test method between the control unit and the smoke sensor/detector that meets the requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 10 section 10.4.3.2.4. Systems that do not employ integral detector

sensitivity test method shall not be acceptable.

c. Early warning maintenance alert to warn of increasing dirt, dust, or other

obscuration accumulation in the smoke sensor/detector chamber, or if the device drifts out of factory nominal ranges indicating a potential maintenance trouble condition. Systems that do not employ an early warning maintenance alert function shall not be acceptable.

d. Two individual variable sensitivity levels of alarm for each sensor/detector

in the system, one for Day mode, and another for Night mode. The alarm level range shall be .88 to 3.57 of obscuration percent per foot for analog/addressable photoelectric sensors/detectors and 0.88 to 2.57 percent per foot for analog/addressable duct detectors. Analog/addressable ionization detectors shall have sensitivity assigned according to fixed values set to low, medium, or high.





Analog/addressable thermal heat sensors/detectors shall have an alarm level range of 32 – 158 degrees Fahrenheit, but are UL listed for fire when set between 135 – 150 degrees Fahrenheit.

e. The system shall also include an automatic dynamic pre-alarm function assigned as a fixed relationship to the adjustable alarm threshold or sensitivity of a given sensor/detector. The dynamic pre-alarm value varies automatically with each sensor‟s/detector‟s sensitivity setting and is adjusted across the sensor/detector range. This allows for a continuously variable multi-step pre-alarm operation. Pre-alarm function can be turned on and off manually via programming option.

f. The ability to display or print system reports, loop/zone configurations,

and history events.

g. Alarm verification of smoke sensor/detector zones per UL864 9th

Edition

criteria. Alarm verification time value shall be programmable from (5) to

(60) seconds in (5) second intervals.

h. The ability to link inputs to outputs and/or to group inputs and outputs using Cause and Effect Wizard via simple point/click and menu driven programming. Systems that use DOS commands, machine language commands, executable statements, or #,+ -, or other non-standard unique programming styles are not acceptable.

i. Rapid alarm reporting with digital fire detection protocol supporting 1.5

second alarm response reporting worst case on any given SLC. All system nodes shall meet NFPA 72 requirements for alarm activation from initiation to notification within 10 seconds. Systems that do not meet this requirement and ability shall not be acceptable.

j. Automatic daily sensor/detector calibration and test function conducted

by the control panel. This system shall automatically test and calibrate every sensor/detector in the system every (24) hours and perform drift compensation during each calibration event. Systems that do not employ automatic daily calibration and self-test function shall not be acceptable.

k. Cross zoning (Coincidence operator) function: Any two objects of a

subset applied in the “Cause” section of Cause & Effect using the “Coincidence” operator, will activate the output action subset outlined in the “Effect” section of Cause &Effect from any two objects defined in the “Cause” section of Cause & Effect. This function allows any two “Cause” input objects such as two detectors, two software zones, one detector and one software zone, one smoke detector and one thermal detector, or any combination of two inputs and/or zones to operate in a cross-zoned fashion via Cause and Effect Programming.

l. One Man Walk test mode with optional Cause & Effect driven macros for

automated multi-zone One Man Walk Test mode operation.

m. Automatic day/night mode adjustment of sensor/detector sensitivities based on unique daily time schedules on a weekly basis.





n. Advanced auto-learn feature that learns all SLC loop devices and

addresses, internal control panel and expansion structure, and network relationship to other nodes. The default learned configuration assumes safest UL864 and NFPA 72 compliant settings and attributes for all system components such that the system will not need further programming to operate in General Alarm mode. This allows the system to operate “out-of-the-box” after an auto-learn is performed. Systems that

do not employ an advanced auto-learn function in this manner shall not

be acceptable.

22. The FACP shall be capable of coding control panel notification appliance circuits in March Time, Temporal 3 (per NFPA 72/ANSI), and Continuous patterns for notification appliance devices.

23. Network Communication

a. The network architecture shall be based on a communications package that utilizes a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative highly secure format and protocol. A node may be an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or Network Remote Annunciator/Control Station (RNA). The network shall be capable of expansion to at least (64) panels and/or nodes.

b. Each network node address shall be capable of storing up to (500) events. Any network node can serve as a reporting or control node for another node if necessary by programming the necessary network routing attributes.

c. The network shall be capable of communicating via wire. A wire network shall include a fail-safe means of isolating the nodes in the unlikely event of complete power loss to a node. Loss of a network node, cable short-circuit, cable open-circuit, or fault of network communications shall activate a trouble signal on the network nodes (panels and network annunciators) programmed with the necessary network routing attributes. The wire network shall include and employ (2) RS485 network ports configured in a Class A “ring” topology for high integrity operation. The Class A “ring” topology network operation shall communicate in both directions over both ports and not be degraded by a single break anywhere on the network. The network wiring shall be a minimum (20) gauge twisted shielded pairs suitable for RS485 style communications. The network transmission shall be capable of (4000) feet between each node. The overall network wire length shall be capable of (256,000) feet in the maximum network configuration. Systems that employ a single RS485 port or Class B 2-wire network or that do not perform in the above manner shall not be acceptable.

d. Network Fire alarm panels or nodes shall be capable of up to (500) software zones that may be assigned network-wide. Panels and network nodes shall not be restricted to unique zones. Any zone may be used by any combination of panels and network nodes. Systems that do not





employ network-wide zoning or have zoning restrictions shall not be acceptable.

e. Network process and event handling shall be capable of independently

and separately routing each system event type and/or control from any network node to and from any other network node. The network shall be capable of routing the following individual types of event categories: b. Fire c. Supervisory

d. Trouble e. Pre-Alarm

f. Emergency

g. Auxiliary h. Security

i. Disablements (Bypass events) j. Test (Walk Test events)

k. Status & Control (system status/panel controls)

The network shall be capable of individually handling each of the above types of event categories as follows:

1. Process (act on the network event) 2. Display (display the network event)

3. Log (record the network event) 4. Print (print the network event)

5. Buzz (activate the buzzer from the network event)

Each network node (panel or network annunciator) shall be capable of having unique network routing assignments. Each network node shall be capable of receiving any and all network events from any and all other network nodes. Each network node shall be capable of receiving all events from a maximum size network of (64) nodes, which supports (51,200) addresses/sub-addresses within the (85,000) total system points possible. Systems that do support these network capabilities shall not be acceptable.

D. Central Microprocessor

1. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art, and it shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include Flash memory for system program and site-specific configuration storage, and shall include a supervised "watch dog" circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure.

2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all control-by- event programs

for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Control-by-event operations shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.

3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time/date





annotation of system displays, printer, and history log. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real-time clock shall have an option for Daylight Savings Time. The real time clock shall also control panel functions such as Day/Night mode, Calibration, Alarm Verification, AC Failure Delay, Sounder Timeout, and I/O timer functions per their respective programmed settings.

4. Microprocessor shall utilize system protocol for efficient reliable

communications with addressable analog addressable devices.

5. An auto-program (auto-learn) function shall be provided to quickly install initial default functions, SLC devices, and network attributes and make the system operational.

6. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, all system programs and

functions shall be configured with the System Configuration Software. This program shall be used to off-line program the system with batch upload/download functions, and have the ability to upgrade the manufacturers (FLASH) operating system firmware code.

E. System Display and User Interface

1. The system shall support the following Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

properties:

a. Panel and annunciator displays shall include a (320) character backlit

alphanumeric LCD display. The LCD display shall arrange the (320) characters in (8) lines of (40) characters. Each display shall be capable of duplicating the display of any other panel or network annunciator display if so programmed via network routing attributes.

b. The LCD display shall have a contrast adjustment to set to contrast intensity of the display.

c. The LCD display shall include a ¼” plexi-glass clear protector cover to prevent field damage and to provide security protection from vandalism.

d. The LCD display shall provide comprehensive information for system events, menus, and devices. At a minimum the following shall be displayed: date, time, node#, loop#, zone#, address#, sub-address#, device type, event category, specific event type, action message, and (40) character location text.

Menu text shall display complete and unabbreviated verbiage. Systems that support less than (320) characters total, (8) lines total, (40) characters of location text, or employ abbreviated text shall not be acceptable.

2. The system shall provide indications and controls on the front panel or

annunciator user interface as follows:





a. Control buttons: Panel Sounder Silence, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, Reset, Re-Sound Alarm, Fire Drill, Programmable Function and Lamp Test.

b. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED) indicators: AC Power On, (2)-Fire Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Fire Output Active, On Test, Panel Sounder Silenced, Delay Active, More Events, Point Bypassed, General Trouble, Power Trouble, System Trouble, NAC Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm. Systems that do not include these indications are not acceptable.

c. Menu navigation and programming buttons: Exit, Enter, More Events, More Fire Events, numeric/navigation, and help (?) buttons.

d. The system user interface shall feature an easy (5) point navigation system with built in "help" button with the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels (three Access Levels total, Level 1 being no password used) shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming.

e. The system shall support easy entry of password codes via navigation system or key switch to easily access level 2 or level 3 command menus.

F. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC)

1. Each FACP or FACP network node shall support up to (4) SLC loops. Each SLC loop shall provide power to and communicate with up to (127) analog addressable sensors/detectors (ionization, photoelectric, duct, and/or thermal) and addressable modules (input monitor, addressable pull-station, output relay, conventional zone, and/or supervised output), along with (127) addressable sounder bases for a loop capacity of up to (254) SLC devices. The (2) loop panel shall be capable of supporting (508) SLC devices and

when the two-loop expander is used the (4) loop panel shall potentially be

capable of (1016) devices by loop architecture, however the panel memory maximum will limit this total to (800) addresses and sub-addresses for the (4) loop panel.

2. Individual panels can be networked up to (64) nodes to provide a maximum

of (51,200) addresses/sub-addresses within the (85,000) total system points possible. Each SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring.

3. FACP shall receive analog information from all analog addressable

sensors/detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, pre-alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each sensor/detector. The software shall automatically maintain the sensor/detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each sensor/detector. The panel will assess the sensor/detector analog data to determine when the fire condition is reached and the alarm must be generated. The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing/calibration and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements. See Drift Compensation and Calibration portions





of this document for additional details.

4. Point monitor modules shall be programmable for (13) different types of event categories depending on the module type: fire, trouble, pre-alarm, supervisory, emergency, auxiliary, security, silence, reset, fire drill, transparent, disablement, and test mode. In addition, each point shall be capable of being assigned an action message. There shall be (20) action messages total (11 preset and 9 custom with up to 15 characters each).

Each point shall have the capacity for up to (40) alphanumeric characters. In

addition any monitor module can via its selected program, individually override alarm output delays, set an input delay time, and support advanced programming options. NFPA, UL, AHJ, and local, state, and federal codes must be observed. Systems without this capability shall not be acceptable.

G. Serial Interfaces

1. The system shall include five serial interfaces. Each interface shall comply

with EIA standards for RS232 and RS485. Systems that do not include these integral serial interfaces and their supported operation shall not be acceptable. a. The system shall include (1) slave Class B multi-drop RS-485 serial port

for optional expansion accessories such as I/O boards and local serial annunciators.

b. The system shall include (2) peer-to-peer RS-485 serial ports arranged in a Class A “ring” topology for the primary fire system network connecting multiple fire control panels and/or remote network annunciators.

c. The system shall include (1) RS-232 serial port for connection to fire or ancillary serial printers.

d. The system shall include (1) RS-232 serial port for connection to laptop, desktop, or handheld computer systems using configuration software and its related utilities. This port shall also support a proprietary high-level protocol for optional integration and interface to third party building automation platforms, graphics software, and other enterprise building software suites.

H. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Output

1. The Notification Appliance Circuit outputs shall provide four fully supervised

Class B (NFPA Style Y) notification circuits.

2. The notification circuit capacity shall be 2.5 amperes maximum per circuit not to exceed 4 amperes maximum per panel based on battery and voltage drop calculations.

3. The notification circuits shall not affect other portions of panel operations in

any way during a short circuit condition.





4. The notification circuit terminal of the panel shall be UL Listed for use with up to 12ga. AWG wiring.

5. Notification circuits shall be fully programmable for variable use. The outputs

may be activated by common alarm, general event categories, zoned, point, or logic triggered operation. NAC shall support silence-able and strobe output options, as well as audible patterns for horns. NAC shall have optional settings for non-NAC operation such as continuous, door holder, and reset-able power functions.

I. Auxiliary Programmable Inputs and Outputs

1. The panel shall provide eight (8) auxiliary programmable logic input circuits.

The inputs may be programmed to any type of secondary ancillary logic operation.

2. The panel shall include five (5) programmable relay outputs and three (3)

programmable 24vdc voltage outputs. The voltage outputs shall be rated at 500mA each.

3. Each input or output shall be capable of fully independent operation and can

be involved independently in network- wide Cause and Effect logic programming via software.

4. Each input or output shall be capable of independent enable/disable conditions via timed and un-timed settings via menu commands when front panel controls are in Access Level 2 or in key-switch enabled mode.

J. Enclosures

1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface

or semi-flush mounting. The cabinet and door shall be corrosion, rust, and vandal resistant.

2. The cabinet and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel with

provisions for ½” and ¾” electrical conduit connections into the sides, top, and bottom of the cabinet.

3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other

transparent opening for viewing of all LCD indications. The opening shall be protected by a ¼” plexi-glass or acrylic transparent cover. For convenience, the door may be removed to facilitate installation of system wiring or ease of use. The removable door shall have a hinge pins to facilitate quick removal without damage to system electronics. The bottom hinge pin shall be longer to allow easy guided re- installation of the door after removal.

4. The cabinet shall include a designated earth ground stud identified with a

label containing appropriate earth ground symbol per UL864 9th

edition, NFPA-70, and applicable building and safety electrical codes.

5. The cabinet shall include a grounding block to receive shielded drain wires





and other low-voltage grounding needs.

6. The cabinet shall include a removable back-plane for mounted electronics allowing quick and easy removal to facilitate installation of system wiring or ease of use without damage to system electronics.

K. FACP Power Supply

1. The panel power supply output shall be rated at 4.0 Amps for internal panel

power and external SLC, NAC, and other auxiliary power needs. The battery charger shall be rated at 1.5 Amps and shall not detract from the 4.0 Amp total output current.

2. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC) fuses or other over- current

protection shall be provided on primary AC input, DC power output, and battery input.

3. The primary AC input power shall have dual operating voltage capability at

120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary primary power for the panel.

4. The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger for use with

batteries up to 60 AH. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field per the manufacturer‟s recommended methods.

5. The power supply shall meet new UL864 9th

edition requirements introduced in 2005/2006 per the updated control panel standard. The power supply shall be capable of handling NAC and surge transients outlined in the new standard. DC power outputs shall be UL listed for “Regulated” use.

L. Other Specific System Operations

1. Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all analog/addressable intelligent detectors and sensors in the system from the system keypad or via configuration software. Sensitivity ranges shall be within the allowed UL window.

2. Alarm Verification: The analog/addressable smoke detectors and sensors in

the system may be enabled for verification per zone.

3. Point Disable: Individual inputs, outputs, SLC, NAC, zones, or all audible devices in the system may be enabled or disabled on a timed or un-timed basis through the panel user interface.

4. Point Status: The system shall be able to display or print the following point

status diagnostic functions:

a. Device status b. Device type c. Custom device label

d. View analog detector values





e. Device zone assignments f. All program parameters

5. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall

contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 500 events. The buffer shall be prioritized such that higher priority events (example: fire) are retained as lower priority events are dropped, keeping the highest priority items present in the 500 event buffer. Systems that do not have this capability are not suitable substitutes. Each of the system events shall be stored with a date/time stamp that includes actual time of the activations and restores. The contents of the history buffer may be manually viewed or printed, one event at a time, by event category, or in its entirety. The history buffer may also be uploaded to the software to be viewed or printed from a

computer or stored as a Microsoft Excel file.

6. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall

automatically interrogate each intelligent detector or sensor and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector or sensor in the system responds with a reading that is above or below normal limits, the system will generate one of two maintenance troubles, and the particular detector or sensor will be annunciated on the system display and/or printed on the optional printer. There shall be two maintenance trouble types. 1: early warning; service unit. 2: outside limits, service or replace unit. When trouble 1 occurs units will continue to operate, when trouble 2 occurs they units may no longer function properly. The automatic early warning feature

(trouble 1) shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform. In addition with the software it shall be possible to download a printed report showing the exact numeric analog condition of every analog/addressable photoelectric or ionization smoke detector/sensor in the system. It shall also be possible to view the health of each individual detector or sensor as a color status bar in the Loop Explorer software indicating the device condition. Systems that do not offer an automatic early warning feature, maintenance reports, or viewing software for device health shall not be acceptable.

7. The fire alarm control panel shall include a one man walk test feature. It shall

include the ability to test initiating devices and notification appliance circuits from the field without returning to the panel to operate the system. Operation shall be as follows:

a. Alarming an initiating device shall activate notification and other outputs

that are programmed for General Alarm when placed in walk test mode.

b. Walk Test mode shall be recorded in the history buffer.

c. Walk Test mode shall automatically time out after 15 minutes from the last device tested. The system will automatically return to normal detection and alarm operation after this timeout.





d. Walk Test mode shall have the option to have audible or silent operation of system notification outputs during test modes.

8. Water-flow Operation

An alarm from a water-flow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the system display and turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits. Water-flow inputs shall have the option of not being affected by the alarm silence switch.

9. Supervisory Operation

An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the system display, light a common supervisory alarm LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble or fire alarm mode.

10. Alarm Silence Operation

The panel shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay, voltage, module, etc) to deactivate upon depression of the alarm silence switch. The alarm silence operation shall only operate when the system is placed in Access Level 2.

11. Non-Alarm Input Operation

Any input in the system may be used as a non-alarm input to monitor normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices. The following optional secondary input event types shall be available:

a. Emergency b. Auxiliary c. Trouble d. Pre-Alarm e. Security f. Test g. Disable h. Transparent

M. System Configuration Software Utility

1. The software shall support standard Microsoft Windows programming styles

such as drag & drop, cut & paste, hot keys/short cuts, auto-fill, etc. Systems that do not support this style programming shall not be accepted.

2. Zone Manager: Allows quick drag & drop or cut & paste style programming of

system input/output to any of (500) zones.





3. Quick Config: Allows each SLC loop to be placed in spreadsheet format to allow quick and easy programming of location text and zones. Feature must support cut & paste style programming.

4. System Print/Pre-view: Allow all programming attributes to be viewed and

saved as a Microsoft Word document for “as- built” programming records.

5. Advanced Cause & Effect logic: Supports up to 500 Cause & Effect logic statements involving up to 2000 inputs, 2000 outputs, and 500 zones. The logic shall support "AND," "OR," and "COINCIDENCE” operators to be used for advanced programming. Supports three styles of logic: actions, disablements, and test zones. The Cause and Effect logic shall operate network-wide and shall not be restricted to a single panel or network node.

6. Advanced configuration download/upload: Allows configuration loads via a

single connection to a single panel or node on the network. Any and all panels or nodes may be loaded from a single point. Eliminates the need to go to each panel or node to perform configuration loading. Systems that do not have this feature shall not be acceptable.

7. Virtual Panel mode: Allows virtual control of any panel or node as if standing

at the control unit from a single panel or node connection on the network. Any panel or node may be accessed from any other single panel or node connection. Systems that do not have this feature shall not be acceptable.

8. Event Log: Allows event logs from any panel or node on the network to be

viewed and extracted to the software utility and saved as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

9. Analog Values: Allows last calibrated and drift compensated sensor/detector

values to be viewed on a SLC loop basis and saved as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

10. Monitor Mode: Allows real-time event monitoring of any panel or node directly

connected to the software utility to be viewed and saved as a Microsoft Word document. This document can be a record of inspection or test activity and provided to the AHJ as an electronic or printed test record. This eliminates the need for hand written records.

11. Advanced Help Functions: Software utility shall include embedded help library

with components from the installation and programming manual. An embedded online help function shall be included that links to the manufacturers product and support website. A built-in email link to the manufacturers Tech Support department shall also be included.

2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS – EXPANSION AND ACCESSORIES

A. General Control panel expansion and accessories shall be one or more of the following:





1. Network Annunciator (RNA) 2. Local Serial Annunciator (LSA) 3. (16) Input/Output Expander Board (IOM) FN-CTM 4. City-Tie Module [local energy] (CTM) 5. Accessory/Battery Extension Enclosure (ACC) 6. Enclosure Trim Ring (ETR) FN-ULADA Series 7. Remote NAC Booster (RNB) FN-ULX Series 8. Auxiliary Power Supply (APS) HD9068 Dialer (DACT) 9. Dialer Programmer (DACT)

B. Remote Network Annunciator (RNA)

1. The RNA shall be capable of displaying all information for all (85,000) possible system points on a maximum size network of (64) nodes. Same as the main FACP.

2. The RNA shall include a (320) character backlit alphanumeric LCD display.

The LCD display shall arrange the (320) characters in (8) lines of (40) characters. Each display shall be capable of duplicating the display of any other panel or network annunciator display if so programmed via network routing attributes. The LCD display shall operate exactly the same as the described in this document for the main FACP. The LCD display shall have the same contrast adjustment and plex-glass protection as described in this document for the main FACP.

3. Control buttons: Panel Sounder Silence, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, Reset, Re-Sound Alarm, Fire Drill, Programmable Function and Lamp Test. Same as the main FACP.

4. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED) indicators: AC Power On, (2)-Fire Alarm, Pre-

Alarm, Fire Output Active, On Test, Panel Sounder Silenced, Delay Active, More Events, Point Bypassed, General Trouble, Power Trouble, System Trouble, NAC Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm. Systems that do not include these indications shall not be acceptable. Same as the main FACP.

5. Menu navigation and programming buttons: Exit, Enter, More Events, More

Fire Events, numeric/navigation, and help (?) buttons. Same as the main FACP.

6. The RNA user interface shall feature an easy (5) point navigation system with

built in "help" button with the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels (three Access Levels total, Level 1 being no password used) shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. Same as the main FACP.

7. The RNA shall support easy entry of password codes via navigation system

or key-switch to easily access level 2 or level

8. 3 command menus. Same as the main FACP.





9. Each RNA address shall be capable of storing up to (500) events. Any network node can serve as a reporting or control node for another node if necessary by programming the necessary network routing attributes. Same as the main FACP.

10. The RNA shall mount in its own steel enclosure and shall support either

surface or flush mounting (when the trim ring is used). The enclosure shall be corrosion, rust, and vandal resistant. The enclosure shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel with provisions for ½” and ¾” electrical conduit connections into the back, top, or sides of the enclosure.

11. The RNA or control panel may serve as a remote network annunciator for

any other panel or network annunciator in the network.

12. The RNA shall have 24VDC power input that can be supplied via the control panel or an auxiliary UL864/UL1481 listed power supply.

13. When properly supplied, the RNA shall be capable of providing 500mA of

supervised power limited auxiliary 24VDC power for system accessories.

14. The RNA shall include two optically isolated industry standard RS-485 ports for network communication with other network nodes via the Class A “ring” network topology. These ports shall operate and have the capacity as described in the Main FACP and Network Communication section of this document, as well as perform all of the network routing and handling functions described therein. This allows the RNA to function as a global system annunciator, local panel annunciator, or any hybrid combination required.

15. The RNA shall include a third slave RS-485 port for remote expansion

accessories. This expansion port shall support up to (32) optional remote expansion accessories with a capacity of up to (512) secondary inputs and outputs or (15) local serial.

16. LCD annunciators and (17) expansion accessories. Systems that do not employ a slave RS485 port for expansion accessories shall not be acceptable. Same as the main FACP.

17. The RNA shall include (1) onboard RS232 port for PC programming. Same

as the main FACP.

18. The RNA shall include (1) onboard RS232 port for 3rd party serial fire printer support. Same as the main FACP.

19. The RNA shall include four (4) onboard programmable Form-C relays with

default operation for Common Fire, Common Trouble, Common Supervisory, and Auxiliary functions rated at a minimum of 1.0 amp @ 30VDC.

20. The RNA shall include an auto-program (auto-learn) function to quickly install

initial default functions, local I/O, and network attributes and make the system operational.





C. Local Serial Annunciator (LSA)

1. The LSA shall be capable of displaying all information for all (85,000) possible system points on a maximum size network of (64) nodes. Same as the main FACP.

2. The LSA shall include a (320) character backlit alphanumeric LCD display.

The LCD display shall arrange the (320) characters in (8) lines of (40) characters. Each display shall be capable of duplicating the display of the panel it is connected to. The LCD display shall operate exactly the same as described in this document for the main FACP. The LCD display shall have the same contrast adjustment and plex-glass protection as described in this document for the main FACP.

3. Control buttons: Panel Sounder Silence, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, Reset, Re-

Sound Alarm, Fire Drill, Programmable Function and Lamp Test. Same as the main FACP.

4. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED) indicators: AC Power On, (2)-Fire Alarm, Pre-

Alarm, Fire Output Active, On Test, Panel Sounder Silenced, Delay Active, More Events, Point Bypassed, General Trouble, Power Trouble, System Trouble, NAC Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm. Systems that do not include these indications shall not be acceptable. Same as the main FACP.

5. Menu navigation and programming buttons: Exit, Enter, More Events, More

Fire Events, numeric/navigation, and help (?) buttons. Same as the main FACP.

6. The LSA user interface shall feature an easy (5) point navigation system with

built in "help" button with the capability to: a. Command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric

information, and field programming. Two different b. Password levels (three Access Levels total, Level 1 being no password

used) shall be provided to prevent unauthorized c. System control or programming. Same as the main FACP.

7. The LSA shall support easy entry of password codes via navigation system or

key-switch to easily access level 2 or level a. 3 command menus. Same as the main FACP.

b. The LSA shall mount in its own steel enclosure and shall support either

surface or flush mounting. The enclosure shall be corrosion, rust, and vandal resistant. The enclosure shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel with provisions for ½”and ¾” electrical conduit connections into the back of the enclosure and ½” electrical conduit connections into the sides of the enclosure. The enclosure shall also support 2-gang, 3- gang, and 4-gang holes for standard electrical back-box and switch-box mounting styles.





8. The LSA shall have 24VDC power input that can be supplied via the control panel or an auxiliary UL864 or UL1481 listed power supply such as the of auxiliary power supplies and NAC boosters.

9. It shall be possible to connect up to (15) LSA units to a single panel or network annunciator.

10. The LSA shall connect to the dedicated multi-drop RS-485 slave port of the panel. This port shall be a Class B two-wire serial connection and shall be capable of distances up to 4000 feet.

11. The LSA shall have throughput wiring provisions for 24VDC Power and serial

connections.

12. Each LSA shall mimic the main controls, LED indicators, and LCD display of the panel it is connected to.

D. Input/Output Expansion Module (IOM)

1. The IOM shall have 16 channels of input/output points.

2. Each channel shall be configurable as an input or output point.

3. Inputs shall be an opto-isolated, non-supervised, and pull-down type triggered from a “dry” contact input source.

4. Outputs shall be open collector transistor pull-down type that provides a “wet”

voltage output (100mA max each).

5. There shall be 32 IOM modules possible per panel (512 channels of input/output points).

6. The IOM shall have simple 4 wire connection to the control panel (2 for

power, 2 for data).

7. All inputs/outputs shall be assignable to global functions, any event category, and used in network wide Cause & Effect logic.

8. The IOM can be mounted locally within control panel enclosure or remotely

via FN-ACC accessory enclosure up to 4000ft. from the panel.

9. Input/Outputs shall be for secondary use, not for primary fire initiation inputs or notification outputs.

10. Two LED‟s shall be provided for communication and power status.

11. The IOM shall be rated at 24VDC. Quiescent Current: 20mA.

a. Current per input: 3mA max. Current per output: 100mA max. (within overall limits). Current per bank is 500mA max. (for banks 1-8 & 9-16) for 8 outputs: Total current per I/O board: 1A max.





b. The IOM shall communicate via two wire Class B multi-drop RS485 capable of distances up to 4,000 ft. The IOM shall connect to the panel or network annunciator slave RS485 port.14. The IOM shall have terminals capable of receiving 12 AWG wire. E.

E. City-Tie Module [Local Energy type] (CTM) The CTM terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting up to 14 AWG wire. The CTM shall be configured such that the NAC EOL (end of line) device of the panel will connect directly to the CTM to ensure that supervision of NAC interface wiring is performed. This integrates the panel NAC EOL device into the CTM operation to provide full supervision of the circuit.

a. The CTM shall fit into a standard 4" electrical back box.

b. The CTM interfaces the panel to a Local Energy type City Tie monitoring circuit.

c. The CTM shall be Underwriters Laboratories Listed for the intended \purpose.

d. The CTM shall have a wide operating voltage range: 12 ~ 30 VDC. The current consumption shall be 0mA in standby and 1 Amp for 0.5 seconds during alarm to operate the Master BoxTrip Coil.

e. The CTM shall provide power limited operation and include transient protection.

f. Accessory/Battery Extension Enclosure (ACC)

i. The ACC shall be a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface mounting. The cabinet and door shall be corrosion, rust, and vandal resistant.

ii. The cabinet and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel

with provisions for ½” and ¾” electrical conduit connections into the sides, top, and bottom of the cabinet.

iii. The ACC shall have mounting provisions to support remote I/O

expansion accessories and power supplies when the unit is used as an accessory enclosure.

iv. The ACC shall support batteries sizes above 17AH that exceed the

standard panel enclosure dimensions. The ACC shall be a battery extension cabinet when used in this fashion and shall include provisions for extended wiring harness and connectors for this purpose.





F. Enclosure Trim Ring (ETR)

1. The ETR shall be a UL-listed trim ring suitable to support semi- flush mounting of the control panel. The ETR shall be corrosion, rust, and vandal resistant.

2. The ETR shall be constructed of 16 gauge or thicker steel.

G. Remote NAC Booster (RNB)

1. The RNB outputs shall be rated 24VDC at 6, 8, or 10 Amps respectively.

2. The RNB shall be remote controlled and monitored by the panel NAC output circuit or Addressable Supervised Output Module (SOM). The NAC and/or SOM provide integrated operation of the RNB with the control panel. Each NAC or SOM shall be capable of, through system programming, deactivating upon depression of the alarm silence switch. Visual Appliances (strobes) optionally may be set to continue to flash during alarm silence with the appropriate hardware and software settings.

3. The terminal strips shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire.

4. RNB shall include 1 Amp of 24vdc filtered regulated un-switched power for

constant auxiliary power and 1 Amp of switched 24vdc power for door holders.

5. RNB shall include two (2) Class A or two (2) Class B control inputs for NAC

or SOM connectivity. Two (2) N.C. dry contact trigger inputs shall also be provided.

6. RNB shall include four (4) Class A or four (4) Class B indicating circuits that

are Class-2 power limited outputs rated at 2.5 Amps each, not to exceed to overall output rating of the given RNB series booster.

7. Two (2) Class B outputs may be paralleled for more power on an indicating

circuit for any given RNB series booster.

8. The RNB shall support 2-wire horn/strobe sync mode that allows audible notification appliances (horns) to be silenced while visual notification appliances (strobes) continue to operate.

9. The RNB shall support audible/visual notification appliance sync protocols

such as Gentex, System Sensor, Faraday, and Amseco/Potter.

10. Short circuit and thermal overload protection, zero voltage drop upon transfer to battery backup, and built-in battery charger shall be included.

11. The RNB shall also include the following features:





12. Indicating Circuit Trouble Memory - facilitates quickly locating of intermittent system troubles and eliminates costly and unnecessary service calls. LEDs indicate a prior fault (short, open, or ground) has occurred on one or more indicating circuit outputs.

a. Horn Patterns: Temporal Code 3, Steady, and March Time.

b. Input to Output Follower Mode (maintains synchronization throughput of

indicating circuits)

c. Common trouble inputs and outputs, as well as ground fault detection shall be provided.

13. The RNB shall have the following LED indicators and relays:

a. System Fault LED b. AC ON LED c. DC ON LED d. (4) NAC output LED e. (2) FACP input LED f. AC Fail relay (Form C) g. DC Fail relay (Form C) h. Auxiliary Power Supply (APS)

1. The APS outputs shall be rated 24VDC at 2.5, 4, 6, or 10 Amps respectively.

2. The terminal strips shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire. 3. Short circuit and thermal overload protection, zero voltage drop upon

transfer to battery backup, and built-in battery charger shall be included.

4. The APS units shall be used for auxiliary 24VDC power needs throughout the addressable modules, expansion modules, accessories, annunciators, door holders, relays, indicators, etc.

5. The RNB shall have the following LED indicators and relays: a. AC ON LED b. DC ON LED c. AC Fail relay (Form C) d. Battery Low relay (Form C) e. Battery Present relay (Form C)

H. Dialer (DACT)

1. The Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) is an interface for communicating digital information between a protected premise fire alarm control panel and an UL-Listed central station.

2. Five (5) reporting formats shall be supported: Modem IIIa2, Contact ID,

SIA110, SIA300, and 4/2.

3. The DACT shall have LED indicators for Heartbeat, System Trouble and Phone Line Trouble (one per line).





4. The input power shall support either 12VDC or 24 VDC voltages.

5. Internal supervision of the DACT shall be accomplished with a hardware watch-dog circuit. Failure of the control program in the unit will result in a hardware reset within two seconds. The onboard trouble relay will be released for the duration of the reset (the relay is normally held energized). The following items shall be automatically tested periodically: EEPROM memory, a. Input points, and phone lines. The EEPROM checksum is verified every

10 minutes. If the EEPROM checksum fails, a trouble b. Condition is locally annunciated and a trouble report is sent.

6. The DACT shall support five (5) user programmable inputs that may be

triggered by dry contact relays or open collector outputs. Each of these inputs can be configured for one of seven types of conditions: Fire Alarm, Water-flow Alarm, Supervisory, Monitor Alarm, System Fault, AC Failure and Low Battery. The inputs shall be supervised via Class B (Style B) wiring.

7. There shall be six different report groups that can be routed to one of four phone settings. These report groups consist of non- supervisory alarms, supervisory alarms, alarm restorals, resets, supervisory restorals, tests, troubles, and trouble restorals.

8. Programming shall be accomplished via the HD7033 optional LCD remote keypad and programmer. All DACT settings shall be adjusted via the HD7033.

9. The DACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. Phone lines shall be supervised.

10. For lightning and static suppression, the DACT shall include MOV and spark gap suppressors for inputs and telephone line interface.

11. The DACT shall also include the following features:

a. Onboard Form C Trouble Relay (normally energized). The trouble relay shall operate from the following conditions: Any onboard dialer trouble condition, internal diagnostic faults, phone line supervision faults, input point supervision faults, and communication failure/faults.

b. 100 Event History Buffer c. Real Time Clock

2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENTS – ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

A. Addressable Devices - General

1. Analog/Addressable devices shall be the following

a. Analog Photoelectric Detector (sensor) b. Analog Ionization Detector (sensor)





c. Analog Heat/Thermal Detector (sensor) d. Analog Photoelectric Duct Detector (sensor) e. Analog Duct Detector Accessories f. Analog Duct Detector Sampling Tubes g. Addressable Sounder Base h. Analog Detector Base (6”) i. Analog Detector Base (4”) j. Addressable Manual Pull-Station k. Addressable Single Input Module l. Addressable Dual Input Module m. Addressable Conventional Zone Module n. Addressable Supervised Output o. Addressable Dual Relay Output p. Short Circuit Isolator Module q. Addressable Device Programmer

2. Addressable devices shall be simple to install and not require mechanical DIP

or rotary address switches. Devices shall be digital and able to be addressed electronically via a hand held programmer.

3. Addressable devices, which use a mechanical address setting method, such as a DIP-switch, or decade dial (rotary) switches shall not be acceptable.

4. Addressable detectors/sensors shall be intelligent, analog, addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.

5. Addressable detectors/sensors shall provide dual alarm and polling LED indicators. The indicators shall flash red under normal conditions, indicating that the detector/sensor is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The indicators shall be placed into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED indicator.

6. The fire alarm control panel shall permit addressable detector/sensor sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system or by using the software. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust and alternate sensitivity between Day and Night modes.

7. The addressable detectors/sensors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance via intelligence and control from the panel per calibration and drift compensation functions. The detectors/sensors and control panel shall meet the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 10, section 10.4.3.2.4.

8. Addressable detectors/sensors shall include a separate twist- lock base. The bases shall permit direct interchange with the ionization type smoke sensor, photoelectric smoke sensor, and the heat sensor. The vandal-resistant, security locking feature shall be used in those areas required by the application and implemented per the manufacturer‟s instructions. The locking





feature shall be optional and can be implemented when required. Both 4-inch and 6-inch model electronics free bases shall be supported.

9. Addressable detectors/sensors shall provide an integral test means whereby an internal fire test of the chamber or sensor shall be performed by the control panel automatically during each 24 hour calibration cycle. This operation shall guarantee every detector/sensor in the system is operational with each calibration cycle and any detectors/sensors that do not pass this test method shall indicate a trouble and maintenance alert on the control panel.

10. Addressable devices shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device specifically. The panel shall identify the exact type of detector/sensor, module, etc. Addressable devices of different types or variant models shall not use the same type code.

11. Addressable detectors/sensors shall operate in an analog fashion, where the detector measures its environment variable and transmits an analog value to the control panel based on real-time measured values of the ambient conditions. The control panel, not the detector/sensor, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector/sensor to be set and monitored by the control panel. The system operator shall have the ability to view the current analog value of each detector/sensor.

12. Addressable modules shall mount in a standard 4-inch square electrical construction box. Mini-Modules shall fit inside a standard 4-inch square or single-gang box.

13. Addressable devices shall be capable of accepting up to 14- gauge wire

sizes.

14. Addressable devices shall be UL listed and compatible with analog/addressable control panel employing Protocol/.

15. Addressable device addresses shall be electrically programmable and stored in EEPROM.

16. Addressable device shall use Digital Communication Protocol (DCP) which is noise immune and utilizes alarm interrupts for fast response to fires.

17. Addressable devices shall be programmed/addressed by using the hand-held device programmer.

18. Addressable detectors, sensors, and modules shall operate on SLC addresses 1 – 127. Addressable sounder bases shall operate on SLC addresses 128-254. The SLC shall support 254 addresses total.





B. Analog Photoelectric Smoke Detector

1. Analog photo smoke sensors shall have a UL listed operating range from .88%/ft. to 3.57%/ft. obscuration graduated across an air velocity range up to 4000 fpm. Analog photo smoke sensors that do not support this operating range or velocity capability shall not be acceptable.

2. Analog photo smoke sensors shall have a low profile design, only 1.97" high,

including base.

3. Optical fire test feature shall be built-in.

4. The plastics shall be a PC/ABS blend and shall be resistant to yellowing from prolonged UV exposure. The color shall be bone.

5. The smoke chamber shall be removable to allow ease of maintenance and

cleaning.

C. Analog Ionization Smoke Detector

1. Analog ion smoke sensors shall have a UL listed operating range from .55%/ft. to 1.15%/ft. obscuration.

2. Analog ion smoke sensors shall have a low profile design, only 2.22" high,

including base.

3. Fire test feature shall be built-in.


D. Analog Thermal/Heat Detector

1. Analog heat sensors shall have a UL listed operating range from 135 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit when used as a fire detection device. The analog heat sensor shall support an increased operating range from 32 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit when used as a supervisory device.

2. Analog heat sensors shall have a low profile design, only 2.0" high, including

base.

3. Fire test feature shall be built-in.






E. Analog Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector

1. Analog photo duct smoke sensors shall have a UL listed operating range from .88%/ft. to 2.75%/ft. obscuration across an air velocity range from 300 to 4000 fpm. Analog photo duct smoke sensors that do not support this operating range or velocity capability shall not be acceptable.

2. Optical Fire test feature shall be built-in.


4. Analog photo duct smoke sensors shall include two (2) built- in programmable Form C relays, rated at 10 Amps @ 250VAC. An alternate non-relay two-wire model shall also be available that does not require 24VDC input power. The relay model operates on four-wires and requires 24VDC input power.

5. The duct detector housings shall be of metal construction and complete mechanical installation may be performed without removal of detector cover. The duct detector shall not require additional filters or screens which must be maintained. The housing shall contain a base which will accept an analog photoelectric duct sensor head. The housing cover shall be clear for easy inspection. Terminal connections shall be of the screw type and be a minimum of a #6 size screw. For installations requiring relay function, terminals shall be provided for remote pilot, remote alarm indication, strobe/ horn and remote key switch. A manual reset switch shall be located on front of the device. For installations not requiring relay function, visual indication of alarm and power must be provided.

6. The smoke chamber and head shall be removable to allow ease of maintenance and cleaning.

F. Addressable Sounder Base

1. The addressable sounder base shall be fully programmable and operate on an independent SLC address. The ASB shall not require extra control wiring, DIP switches, decade dial (rotary) switches, etc. to link multiple, independent sounder bases, or groups of sounder bases together. The ASB shall accommodate all analog sensors, such as photo, ion, or heat.

2. The addressable sounder base shall be UL listed as an indication device that provides 85 decibels of sound level output at 10 feet and shall have programmable audible patterns for temporal, continuous, or march time.

3. The ASB shall be programmable to operate from any global event category, zone, point, or Cause & Effect logic. The flexible programming and operation shall allow multiple trigger sources for fire alarm, supervisory, and other logic to support hotel and high-rise apartment style applications, all from intelligent addressable output control from the panel.





4. The sounder base shall include support for a remote alarm LED indicator as an option.

5. The ASB shall be self addressing based on the host sensor address it is attached to, not requiring any special device address programming. The ASB shall automatically add 127 plus the detector address to obtain its independent address. The addressable sounder base shall operate in the higher SLC address range from 128 to 254. Systems which cannot automatically address the sounder base, sounder bases that are not fully programmable, or SLC that do not support 254 addresses shall not be accepted.


G. Addressable Manual Pull-Station – (AMS)

1. Manual pull stations shall be single or dual action and shall be made of 14 AWG CRS and painted with Red enamel. The words Fire Alarm shall be in a contrasting color and be embossed text 1/2" tall. The electronics shall be fully integrated into the manual pull station requiring only connection to the SLC loop of the control panel. Programming of the manual pull station address must be possible with the manual pull station fully installed.

2. Manual pull stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed, CSFM

Approved, and be installed within the limits defined in the American Disabilities Act.

3. The AMS shall have the following features and options:

a. Addressable integrated design b. All metal construction c. Single and dual action models available d. Extremely easy to operate e. Bi-colored status LED indicates Standby and Alarm conditions f. Address is programmable in EEPROM g. Address can be programmed when installed h. Key lock or hex key lock models available i. Terminals accept up to 14AWG wire j. Surface mount back box available k. ADA compliant

H. Addressable Conventional Zone Module

1. Addressable Conventional Zone Module shall provide one supervised IDC initiating zone for conventional alarm initiating devices and will connect to the SLC.

2. The CZM shall be suitable for Style D (Class A) or Style B (Class B)

operation.





3. The CZM shall provide an address point for a conventional initiating zone

(IDC) of up to (25) conventional smoke detectors depending on the model and brand. Conventional devices with a N.O. dry contact output may also be used and do not have a restriction of (25) devices. UL 2-wire compatibility is required on all conventional zone powered devices used on the IDC of the CZM module. Devices with N.O. dry contact output shall not require UL 2-wire compatibility.

4. The CZM shall have a bi-colored LED indicator that flashes green when

polled and latches on red (controlled by panel) when activated for alarms.

5. The CZM shall require a 24VDC auxiliary power source to provide IDC power for the conventional zone of detectors.

I. Addressable Dual Input Monitor Module – (DIMM)

1. The DIMM shall provide two (2) independently monitored inputs to connect N.O. dry contact type initiating devices to the SLC. Each input shall be capable of independent operation, such as one input for water-flow (Fire), and the other for valve tamper (Supervisory). The two inputs shall not interfere with each other or require common function and shall be capable of programmable operation, such as water-flow (Fire), valve tamper (Supervisory), manual pull- station (Fire), and other general event categories.

2. The DIMM shall only occupy one (1) SLC address. The two (2) inputs shall be

sub-addresses that operate under the single SLC address of the module. An SLC using DIMM shall be capable of (254) inputs when all (127) SLC addresses are used.

3. The DIMM shall operate on Style 4, 6, or 7 SLC. The inputs shall be capable

of being programmed for N.O. or N.C contacts, with an option for non-supervised N.C. (no EOL) operation.

4. The DIMM shall have a bi-colored LED indicator for displaying device polling

and alarm status.

J. Addressable Single Input/Mini Monitor Modules

1. Addressable single input modules shall provide a monitored input to connect N.O. dry contact type initiating devices to the SLC. The input shall be capable of programmable operation, such as water-flow (Fire), valve tamper (Supervisory), manual pull-station (Fire), and other general event categories.

2. The module shall operate on Style 4, 6, or 7 SLC. The input shall be capable of being programmed for a N.O. or N.C contact, with an option for non-supervised N.C. (no EOL) operation.

3. The module shall have a bi-colored LED indicator for displaying device polling and alarm status.





K. Addressable Supervised Output Module – (SOM)

1. The SOM shall provide supervision and controlled activation of polarized 24VDC audio/visual notification appliances and other 24VDC powered devices.

2. The SOM shall provide a voltage output rated at 24VDC @ 2.0 Amps. The

output shall be wired for Style Y (Class B) operation. The output shall provide reverse polarity operation for supervision of the device circuit. Outputs patterns shall be Temporal, Continuous, and March. There shall be a silence-able option.

3. Audio/visual load power for the SOM shall be provided by a separate

supervised 24VDC auxiliary power circuit from the control panel or from a auxiliary power supply or RNB remote NAC booster unit as described elsewhere in this document.

4. The SOM shall be suitable for remote supervision and control activation of

remote NAC booster units.

5. The SOM shall have 16 different control states and modulation patterns for multi-state programming. The operating parameters for the SOM shall be maintained in the module after device initialization and will not require individual control commands from the control panel during fire conditions to operate. The control panel shall instead broadcast system-wide commands on the SLC and the SOM or group of SOMs will respond based on individual programming allowing simultaneous group device activations from a single control panel command. Systems that do not meet this requirement shall not be acceptable.

6. The SOM shall be programmable to operate from any global event category,

zone, point, or Cause & Effect logic. The flexible programming and operation shall allow multiple trigger source options for fire alarm, supervisory, and other logic to support hotel and high-rise apartment style applications, all from intelligent addressable output control from the panel.

7. The SOM shall have a bi-colored LED indicator for displaying device polling

and control status.

8. Systems that do not meet the SOM performance criteria shall not be acceptable.

L. Addressable Dual Relay Module

1. The dual relay module shall provide two (2) independently controlled relay outputs to connect devices requiring control from the fire system to the SLC. Each output shall be capable of independent operation. The two outputs shall not interfere with each other or require common function and shall be capable of programmable operation such as general event categories, zone control,





point control, silence-able option, two output delay options, and Cause & Effect logic control.

2. The R2M shall only occupy one (1) SLC address. The two (2) outputs shall

be sub-addresses that operate under the single SLC address of the module. An SLC using R2M shall be capable of (254) outputs when all (127) SLC addresses are used.

3. The R2M shall operate on Style 4, 6, or 7 SLC. The outputs shall be two (2)

Form C relay contacts rated at .5 Amps @ 125VAC or 1 Amp 30VDC. The R2M shall not require a

4. 24VDC auxiliary power supply source.

5. The R2M shall have 16 different control states for multi-state programming. The operating parameters for the R2M shall be maintained in the module after device initialization and will not require individual control commands from the control panel during fire conditions to operate. The control panel shall instead broadcast system-wide commands on the SLC and the R2M or group of R2Ms will respond based on individual programming allowing simultaneous group device activations from a single control panel command. The R2M shall also have the ability to receive individual commands (non-group commands) from the control panel along with the group command broadcasts. Systems that do not meet this requirement shall not be acceptable.

6. The R2M shall be programmable to operate from any global event category,

zone, point, or Cause & Effect logic. The flexible programming and operation shall allow multiple trigger source options for fire alarm, supervisory, and other

7. logic to support elevator recall, fan/damper control, door holder/lock control,

and other building control functions, all from intelligent addressable output control from the panel.

8. The R2M shall have a bi-colored LED indicator for displaying device polling

and control status.

9. Systems that do not meet the R2M performance criteria shall not be acceptable.

M. Short Circuit Isolator Module – (SCI)

1. The SCI shall be provide automatic isolation of wire-to-wire short circuits on a Class A (Style 6 or 7) SLC or Class B (Style 4) SLC trunk and/or branch circuits. The isolator module shall prevent addressable devices from being rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC when used in a NFPA 72 Style 7 configuration. When used in Style 4 or 6 hybrid configurations (i.e. not fully Style 7 compliant), the isolator module shall limit the number of addressable devices from being rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC.





2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the segment of the SLC that is shorted. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the SCI shall automatically reconnect the isolated segment.

3. The SCI shall not require address-setting or an SLC address. The SCI

operation shall be completely automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an SCI after its normal operation. The SCI shall have the ability to be placed anywhere on the SLC and shall not have a limit of how many can placed on a given SLC.

4. The SCI shall provide a single yellow LED that shall illuminate steadily to

indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated.

2.6 SYSTEM COMPONENTS – OTHER DEVICES

A. Audible/Visual Notification Appliances

Audible/visual notification appliances shall meet the applicable requirements of UL464 and UL1971 respectively, and shall be compliant with NFPA72 & ADA guidelines accordingly. All A/V notification appliances shall be UL listed as compatible with the control panels and identified by UL per the control panel installation manual. The following A/V notification appliances manufacturers shall be acceptable:

B. End-Of-Line Relays

C. Beam detectors shall be UL-listed and shall be connected to the Fire Alarm system signaling line circuit through an addressable control module.

D. Gas Detectors shall be suitable for the content of to be stored in the hazardous materials stores and shall be UL-listed. He gas detector shall be connected to the Fire Alarm system Signaling line circuit through and addressable control module.

E. Transmitters and receivers shall be compatible and shall be installed as indicated in the drawing. The contractor to ensure that the fire alarm control panel is supplied with the required interfacing/communication cards, etc.

F. Water-flow Indicators (Fire)

1. Water-flow switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non- coded, non-

accumulative retard type.

2. Water-flow switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. Initial settings are recommended at 30-45 seconds. The water-flow switches and installation, along with initial retard delay action and settings, shall comply with UL864 9th Edition, UL346, NFPA72, NFPA13, local codes, and AHJ, as applicable.





3. All water-flow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series. The electrical properties of the flow switch output shall be a N.O. dry contact (when in normal non-water-flow condition) rated at a minimum of 1 Amp resistive.

4. Water-flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but

installed by the mechanical contractor.

5. Where possible, locate water-flow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting which changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve.

G. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Position Switches (Supervisory)

1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a valve position supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.

2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be equipped with a valve

position supervisory switch.

3. The switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjusted to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position. The valve position supervisory switches and installation shall comply with UL864 9th Edition, NFPA72, NFPA13, local codes, and AHJ, as applicable.

4. All valve position supervisory switches shall come from a single manufacturer

and series. The electrical properties of the valve monitor switch output shall be a N.O. dry contact (contact is open when the valve is not in the bypass position and regular water-flow is enabled) rated at a minimum of 1 Amp resistive.

5. The supervisory switch shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum

housing, which shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves.

6. The switch housing shall be finished in red baked enamel.

7. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a

switch operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from its mounting.

8. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this

section and installed by mechanical contractor.

9. Where possible, locate valve position supervisory switches a minimum of three (3) feet from the value.





10. Valve position supervisory switches shall be monitored.

2.7 BATTERIES

A. The fire system standby batteries shall have sufficient capacity to provide power to the fire alarm system for not less than twenty- four (24) hours in standby and five (5) minutes of alarm upon a failure of normal AC power and shall comply with UL864 9th Edition and NFPA72 criteria.

B. Batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.

C. Battery sizes up to 60AH shall be acceptable and sized per fire alarm system demands and capacities of the individual control panels, network nodes, NAC boosters, auxiliary power supplies, and/or external battery chargers and supplies.

D. If necessary to meet standby requirements system wide, external battery and charger systems may be used. All power supplies and chargers must comply with UL864 9th Edition and/or UL1481 standards, as applicable.

E. All loading for batteries, standby power, and alarm power for the fire alarm system shall be calculated and provided for compliance to this specification. Appropriate battery calculators for applicable control panels, network nodes, NAC boosters, auxiliary power supplies, external battery chargers and supplies, and/or other power sources shall be included with this submittal.

PART 3.0 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. Installation shall be in accordance with the Codes and Standards outlined earlier in this specification, as well as with all local and state codes, per AHJ requirements, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

2. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system commissioning, programming, and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage, including using the manufacturer‟s device dust covers.

3. All fire detection and system devices, control panels, network nodes, remote annunciators, etc. shall be flush mounted where possible when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.

4. Manual pull-stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi- flush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor. Manual





pull-station installation shall comply with ADA requirements and all local building codes.

5. All equipments exposed to weather such as Manual Call Point, Sounders, Strobes, etc shall be weather proof or installed in a weather proof enclosure.

3.2 TEST

The service of a competent, factory-certified/trained for the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system, during initial commissioning, as well as with post installation service and maintenance testing, as applicable. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 10.

1. Before energizing the system, cables and wires, check for correct

connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation failures.

2. Close each sprinkler system monitor valve and verify proper supervisory

operation at the control panel. 3. Verify activation of all water-flow switches and verify proper fire alarm

operation at the control panel.

4. Verify all trouble signals for SLC, NAC, system network, system devices and accessories to ensure proper trouble signal actuation and operation.

5. Verify operation of system ground fault detection to ensure proper trouble

operation and to prove the fire alarm system is clear of all grounds.

6. Check all notification appliance device operation by performing fire drill tests. Verify proper audibility, synchronization, and tone patterns. Check and confirm proper strobe operation, synchronization, and light intensity. Audible/visual notification appliance installation and operation shall comply with UL864 9th Edition, UL464, UL1971, NFPA72, local codes, and AHJ requirements.

7. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all alarm zones using the

walk test function.

8. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the control panel and the correct activation of the control points. The system sequence of operations and logic supplied with the submittal of the fire alarm system per this specification and as required by the local plan check division of the AHJ, shall be tested and verified during final commissioning of the system.

9. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's

documentation shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification





functionality and similar. In general, test methods shall comply with the manufactures instructions and recommendations for the equipment under this specification.

3.3 FINAL INSPECTION

A. At the final inspection, a factory-certified/trained representative for the equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.

B. The system shall be demonstrated satisfactorily and comply with local AHJ requirements for Temporary Certificate of Occupancy (T.C.O.) and/or Permanent Certificate of Occupancy (C.O.).

C. The final inspection performance and documentation shall comply with local AHJ and NFPA72 requirements.

D. System operating instructions placard or signage shall be installed at AHJ designated locations for the control panels and annunciators in the system per UL864 9th Edition and NFPA72. The manufacturers system operating instructions shall be used for this purpose.

E. As-built drawings and programming shall be provided upon completion.

3.4 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.

B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation."

C. Appropriate quantities of installation and operation manuals shall be provided and used for instructional purposes.

3.5 CABLES INSTALLATION

A. Fire Barriers

Where cable ladders, trays, conduits or trunkings pass through fire-resistant structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall after installation be sealed or fire stopped according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance of the breached fire wall. In the case of cable trunkings or conduits an approved internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of fires.





B. Mineral Insulated Cables

MICC/PVC covered cables 600/1000 V grades Conforming to BS 6207 Part 1, shall be used mainly for the sub-station wiring within the HV switchgear and transformer rooms or where superior fire rating performance is required. Mineral insulated cables shall have copper conductors with copper sheath and PVC over sheaths in all applications. Neoprene conductor sleeves shall be fitted to the exposed conductors and cold setting compound shall be used packed within the pot seals for normal applications. Terminations shall comply with BS 6081-1. The temperature classification of the seal shall be “Class 105” unless otherwise indicated or directed by the consultant. Glands shall be Type “Y” and a PVC shroud shall be neatly fitted over gland terminations. Before fitting the shroud in place, all bare metal shall be wrapped with pressure sensitive adhesive PVC tape. On three phase circuits, the insulation sleeves shall carry distinctive coloured (red/yellow/blue) bands identifying each phase, and for single phase circuits then a red band shall be used to mark the phase conductor. For circuits involving 3 phases, the correct phase identification colour bands shall be used, and the markers shall conform to BS 1710. Cables shall be fixed to walls or cable tray by means of PVC covered copper clips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type fire-resistant as made by the cable manufacturer, or by special copper saddles for runs of large number of cables. The distance between fixing centres shall follow manufacturer's recommendations and the completed installation shall present a neat, appearance, with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed. Cables rising from the floor in exposed positions shall have some form of mechanical protection for approximately 450 mm. above floor level. This may either be a short length of metal channel (mainly cable tray). Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensure that pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried in the structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and its protection channel have been covered. While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable run in order to take up possible expansion movements.

C. Fire Rated Flexible Multi-core Cables

All fire detection and alarm cables shall be of the type that follows: Fire rated flexible multi-core cables conforming to BS 7629-1 shall be used as shown in the drawing for applications that do not require cable armouring. These thermoplastic LSOH sheathed / insulated cables shall have stranded copper conductors with high





performance damage resistant insulation and an aluminium foil / polyester tape screen in contact with adequately sized bare tinned annealed copper stranded circuit protective conductor. The Fire rated flexible cables shall comply with the following fire performance standards:

a. Resistance to Fire: BS 6387 category CWZ & BS EN 50200:2000 (class PH60)

b. Smoke Emission: BS 7622. c. Acid Gas Emissions: BS 6425-1 <0.5% Acid gas. d. Flame Retardant: BS 4066-1. e. Reduced Flame : BS 4066-3 Category C propagation. f. Robust and impact resistant construction.

In addition the cables shall have excellent data/signal transmission characteristics, manufactured under an ISO9001Quality system and be BASEC certified. These cable shall be run in PVC conduits or cable tray / trunkings, or run in open execution (no more than two parallel cables) in the ceiling voids by means of LSOH coated single hole, fire resistant metal fixing clips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type as made / recommended by the cable manufacturer or by special LSOH coated saddles for runs of large number of cables. The distance between fixing centers shall follow the manufacturer's recommendations and the completed installations shall present a neat, appearance, with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed. While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the cable run in order to take up possible expansion movements.

D. Galvanised Steel Conduits (for all warehouses and exposed areas)

Steel conduits shall be new, heavy gauge, solid drawn, galvanized (GI) and shall comply with BS EN 61386. Each length of the conduit shall bear a stamp guaranteeing it to be as per the required specifications. The use of conduits less than 20 mm in diameter will not be permitted. All conduit fittings and accessories including screwed couplers, ordinary clips, saddles, pipe hooks, screwed reducers, stopping plugs, lock nuts plus male and female brass bushes shall comply with BS EN 61386 as applicable. All screwed couplers, screwed reducers, and locknuts shall only be used on surface installations, Screwed or push-fit inspection elbows, bends and inspection couplings must not be used. Galvanized steel sheet adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed in inspection and in locations where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall be 150 x 150 x150 mm deep, (inside measure). Where the boxes are fully recessed, they shall be provided with 14 SWG galvanized steel lids, overlapping the boxes by 6mm all round.





E. Methods of Installation

Conduits buried in concrete shall have 37 mm depth minimum of cover over the entire length; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth minimum of cover over its entire length. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by means of corrugated steel saddles and secured by hardened steel pins at 1200 mm centres. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the joints between the beams unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant. In the case of cast “in-situ” applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequate precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of all conduits and boxes during the construction operation. These conduits and fittings must also be suitably plugged to prevent the ingress of foreign matter in order to prevent the conduit system from becoming blocked during the building construction. Any additional costs resulting from blockages or damage to conduits due to negligence or lack of attendance shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Female brass bushes shall be fitted on to all free ends of the conduit system. Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight after the installation is completed. Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthing system. Separate circuit protective conductors shall be installed within the conduits in all cases. All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection boxes must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by the Consultant. No more than one right angle bend or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted after each second conduit length. Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the section or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radius of less than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be machine made. The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and free from burrs and other defects. Exposed GI conduits shall be painted with two coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.





3.6 CABLE TRUNKING ANDTRAYS

A. Cable Trays

Cable trunking shall be used where it is accessible and can replace numerous final circuit conduit runs. A reputed and approved Engineering company shall manufacture all the trunking and fittings. Galvanised (GI) sheet metal cable trunking shall be used throughout in all vertical rising ducts, in the positions detailed on the drawings or for terminating conduits and cables at distribution boards etc. Cable trunking must be used in ceiling voids where otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur. Cable trunking and fittings shall comply with BS EN 50085 and shall be Class 3 galvanized (G) protected as detailed in the following specifications and drawings. All cable trunking shall consist of abutted sections manufactured from Zintec coated high-grade steel sheet of not less than 16 swg. All accessories such as bends, tees, offsets, reducers etc., shall be of the same manufacture and finish and be of the gusseted type to aid the installation of cables. Multi-compartment trunking shall be divided into the required number of compartments by means of continuous steel sheet separators running the full length of the trunking. Each partition shall be at such a height that when the trunking cover is fastened in position there shall be no gap between the top edge of the partition and the inside face of the cover. Corresponding separate compartments shall be provided in all tees, angles, reducers etc., to ensure that segregation of the various services is effected as detailed in the specifications and drawings. All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners. All angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners. Adjoining lengths shall be correctly aligned and the trunkings shall be joined together by means of internal fishplate connector and mushroom headed set screws or purpose made coupling pieces depending on the design of the trunking. After joining, there shall be no gap visible between sections of the trunking or compartment partitions. Internal fish plate connectors shall be not less than 2.5 mm. thick and attached by means of not less than 4 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having a total cross sectional area below 5700 mm2 and 8 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having cross sectional areas in excess of 5700 mm2 each passing through clearance holes, shake proof washers and nuts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall be connected by tinned copper links with split washers under the nuts to provide guaranteed electrical continuity across the joints. The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copper straps shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, tees etc. The copper straps shall be fixed on the external faces of the trunking to be visible.





All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at intervals not greater than 1200 mm dependent upon the size of the trunking and number of cable contained. The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material which shall be secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head screws spaced not greater than 450 mm. Where trunking terminates at switchboards, distribution boards and equipment enclosures, a proper-flanged coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the enclosure. Solid end stops shall be a manufacturer‟s purpose made steel sheet terminal piece. In case of trunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will not be permitted and under no circumstance either will gaps be accepted. Where trunkings passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be permanently fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends a minimum of 50 mm. beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors. The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of the manufacturer‟s own clips or bars fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of trunking, with separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the trunking. Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they shall be distinguished by separating the cables and binding with insulated tape at intervals of 1200 mm together with an approved means of identification sleeve adjacent to each binding that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference. All connections between trunking and/or bus-bar chambers and to each item of switch, switch-fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and without intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom glanding plates of the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to be cut to accommodate passage of all the cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and trunking and bus-bar chamber with a slot 6 mm to be smaller all around than the slot cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided. All covers shall be easily removed with a hand tool and the trunking shall be properly spaced away from any surface which may prevent this. Dimensions obtained from site shall determine the shape of purpose-made pieces of trunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be provided in trunking runs where they cross building expansion joints and as required. Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity minimum for the installation of any future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor of the fully loaded trunking is provided.





Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top and sides of the assembly. The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure and below the concrete soffit. Conduits shall be used to complete the final containment of each circuit from the general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated and shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall then be taken through the structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various lighting, power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points. For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables shall be terminated with glands of appropriate type and size. The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a skilled workman like fashion so that it presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.

B. Cable Trays

The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel. Aluzink is a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating consisting of Silicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and zinc (43.4%) safe guarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A, AZ150 in conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215. Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the part of the tray upon which the cables are laid. The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shall ensure that overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for all the cable trays necessary to complete the works and as indicated upon the drawings. The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present requirements. Cables shall be run as a single layer: Stacking will not be permitted.





Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards or downwards respectively to suit and shall be anchored with an approved fixing with spacing and washers such that the tray is spaced at least 25 mm from the surface of the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each section of cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the nearest earth continuity conductor. Each section of tray shall be securely bolted to the next with sufficient overlap to prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bends of not less than 450 mm radius shall be used. The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant prior to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the structure of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shall be approved by the Consultant before installation. The manufacturer shall confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable trays against any corrosion in the Qatar climatic conditions. Wherever tees or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be properly painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviation from the straight shall, if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose made bends cannot be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site to the approval of the Consultant. All the supports shall be fabricated out of appropriately sized galvanized steel channels.

4.0 ASPIRATION SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

A. General

A Very Early Smoke Detection System, VESDA shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on the drawings. The system shall consist of highly sensitive LASER-based Smoke Detectors with aspirator connected to networks of sampling pipes. When required, an optional Display unit shall be provided to monitor each detector, and a Programmer shall be supplied to configure the system.

B. Approvals

The Very Early Smoke Detection System must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by:

1. AFNOR (Association Francaise de Normalisation), France 2. FM (Factory Mutual) for ASD Fire Suppression Release / Actuation by ASAT

Calculation Software





3. LPCB (Loss Prevention Certification Board – EN 54 part 20 compliance ), UK 4. NTC (National Test Centre), China 5. SSL (Scientific Services Laboratory), Australia 6. UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc), UL Listing 268,268A, 864,1481,1887 7. ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada 8. VdS (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V.), Germany 9. CSFM Lisitng 7259-1728:100

C. Solution Description / Compliance 1. The detection solution and design shall be compliant with sensitivity classes

A,B and C as defined in the FIA CoP for ASD Systems (Fire Industry Association Code of Practice for Aspirating Smoke Detection Systems). (see this document para 4.1)

2. Bidders shall submit products and design calculations which provide: a. *Primarily Class A / B early warning + Class C confirmed Fire condition b. *Primarily Class C Fire condition + Class A/B early warning c. Primary detection shall for Cabinet detection & Return air grills d. Secondary detection for Room protection and floor voids

Bidder‟s proposal shall qualify how and why classes of detection are to be achieved. (see para 4.1)

3. Bidders shall qualify how and why compliance with classes of detection will be maintained over the operational life of the detector (see para 4.2).

D. Route to Compliance

The product / proposal shall provide key features to ensure that the requirements of para 3 are met. 1. A design and supporting ASPIRE modelling calculations must be submitted

which clearly shows how and why the solution complies with para 3.1, para 3.2 and 3.3.

2. The detector shall consist of a highly sensitive LASER-based smoke detector and Aspirator. Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilised in this device as follows:

a. The Laser Detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and

capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying size. A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading. Note: The Particle counting circuitry shall not be used for the purpose of smoke density measurement.

b. The detector shall feature a dual stage disposable filter. The filter first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra- fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of 0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detector‟s optics. This feature prevents contamination, ensuring that:





1. The detector sensitivity and hence design performance is maintained over the lifetime of the installation

2. Adaptive algorithms or drift compensation are not employed which may cause it to adjust the sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A change in sensitivity is not acceptable without the clients prior agreement because it will result in a change in the systems compliance with para 3.4 and ongoing compliance with para‟s 3.1-3.3 (Class A, B or C as required during design). Accuracy, availability and repeatability of the detection system is therefore achieved

3. Lower ongoing maintenance cost are achieved for the end user client

Note: 100% compliance with Para‟s 1 to 4 must be shown.

E. Additional Product features

1. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed rotary vane air pump. It shall be capable of allowing for multiple sampling pipe runs up to 200m in total, (4 pipe runs per detector) for LaserPLUS, LaserSCANNER, 80m for LaserCOMPACT and 50m or 25m for LaserFOCUS detectors with a transport time of less than 60 seconds or as appropriate codes dictate.

2. The system may be modular, with each detector optionally monitored by a Display featuring LEDs and a sounder. The system may be configured by a Programmer that is either integral to the system, portable or PC based. The system shall allow programming of: a. Smoke threshold alarm levels b. Time delays c. Faults including airflow, detector, power, filter and network as well as an

indication of the urgency of the fault d. Configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault conditions.

3. The system shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the

detection system, supported by calculations from a computer-based design modelling tool.

4. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each even shall be recorded in order to provide the client with a comprehensive audit tool. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing no less than 12,000 events and must not require the presence of a display in order to do so. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system, or a dedicated VESDA System Management (VSM) graphics package.

The HSLASD system will consist of a central housing with 15 micro-bore pipes that are routed to the protected area. The minimum micro-bore pipe length allowed by the system will be 50 m (164 ft), covering a maximum of 1500 m2 (16150 ft2). The system will actively sample air from this area into the housing where a laser-based smoke detector is located, with a sensitivity to detect smoke with a density of 0.001%Obs/m (0.0003%Obs/ft). The optical chamber





will be field serviceable without need for recalibration or specialty equipment. The removable chamber will include a two-stage particle filter. Alarm states will be shown on the display panel and an audible warning will be given. The unit will be approved by VdS with EN54-20 compliance, approved by FM and listed by UL. The unit will be placed at a convenient height for ease of use.

F. Performance Requirements

The system shall be tested and approved to cover up to 250 or 500sq m for LaserFOCUS, 800sq m for LaserCOMPACT and 2,000 sq.m. for LaserPLUS and LaserSCANNER as UL Listing 268.

Principal of Operation The system will use a high performance vacuum pump with a minimum pressure of 0.7 bar to sample air through micro-bore flexible tubes at near-ambient pressure. The smoke detector will be of an integrating mass particle detection nephelometer type using a laser as the light source. The detector will provide a direct (absolute) measurement of obscuration, without attempting relative scaling or other compensation for contamination of the chamber. Samples from all inlets (sectors) will be combined as an overall sample in the inlet manifold, filtered, and fed to the smoke detector. If smoke is detected and the obscuration is determined to exceed a preset non-alarm level of smoke density (TRACE threshold), the detector will sequentially scan the sectors using a rotary valve to determine the source of the event. If the smoke level is then determined to exceed a preset alarm level, the detector will signal to the host panel or other monitoring equipment after a configurable time delay. There will be at least four stages of Alarm: ALERT, ACTION, FIRE1 and FIRE2 and another smoke density level, TRACE, set below the ALERT alarm level to initiate the scanning sequence. It will be possible to set different levels for TRACE, ALERT, ACTION, FIRE1 and FIRE2 Alarm levels and delay times. The respective relay outputs and indications can be set to latched or unlatched. 1. Calibration and Ambient Pollution Compensation

Unlike traditional point detectors, background compensation or floating background compensation algorithms within the sensor will not be accepted; particularly as real events below 0.03 %Obs/m (0.009%Obs/ft) might otherwise be masked.





2. Flow Monitoring

The control unit will continuously monitor for blockages and/or disconnection of tubes on an individual sector basis. The unit will enable the user to normalize flow readings to a nominal 100% for each sector. The unit will have default and configurable high and low flow thresholds and configurable delays for each threshold. 3. Product specific

The housing will be constructed of a robust metal and plastic materials meeting all relevant flammability requirements. The unit will have tamper proof screws preventing unauthorised access. The unit will employ an in-line filter to remove dust particles from the air sample and shall enable simple on-site filter replacement without use of any speciality tools. The HSLASD will allow closed loop sampling whereby the exhausted air will be completely returned to the sampled area. The unit will provide a programming facility through a display or PC based software that may also be used for monitoring and configuration procedures. The unit will provide an RS232 port to download all the data that is logged within the unit. It will be possible to view and retrieve all detector and user events or trends collected over a period of time and stored in the event log. The event log will store at least 4000 events. When equipped with a TCP/IP module, the event log will store at least 20000 events.

Programming The units will be programmed through a software package connecting to the RS232 port or remotely through Ethernet or RS485. The software will allow at least the following actions and settings:

a. Perform flow normalization (when the detector is not in alarm) b. Set Flow Fault delay period c. Set High and Low limits set for Flow Fault thresholds d. Set Day sensitivity e. Reset and Isolate the detector f. Silence the sounder

The unit will record engineering values during manufacture and operation such as:

a. Software version b. Sample flow through the detector c. Log of flow changes d. Measurements of sample flow rates for each sector e. % Obscuration f. Settings for a 4-20mA output module





Inputs and Outputs The unit shall be externally powered at 24 VDC to be provided by an EN54-4 or UL1481 or ULC 527 approved power supply. There will be an Auxiliary 24 VDC output supply (fused to 1 A) for powering an external devices. It will be possible to remotely reset the unit by applying 24 VDC to a dedicated input. The unit will provide an RS485 port for remote operation, as well as a RS232 connection for conducting Test/Configuration functions and interrogation of the fault log data. The unit will provide an Ethernet connection for connecting to a host computer. With this capability, the unit will support remote monitoring and control of all detector functions. The unit will provide at least 5 relay outputs reflecting ALERT, ACTION, FIRE1 and FIRE2 alarm status. There will be a common fail-safe relay for fault signalling. The system will support any mix of at least 2 self-declaring I/O modules. These can be of the following types, an 8-channel 4-20mA-output module, or a 4-way SPDT relay module. The 8-channel 4-20mA-output module will have a minimum 16-bit resolution.

Display The display board will enable the following user functions as a minimum:

a. ACCEPT – Switches the internal sounder off and acknowledges all current alarm states while leaving all other warning mechanisms to continue unchanged. New alarm events will cause the sounder to revert to continuous operation.

b. SOUNDER SILENCE – Switches the internal sounder off until one or more new alarm events occur.

c. RESET – Clears all latched alarms and faults. Current Alarms or Faults will remain.

d. ISOLATE – Disables alarm relays so that Alarm and/or Fault conditions will not be reported back to the Host Panel. It is intended for use when diagnosing faults, testing new installations etc.

e. TEST – Scrolls through date, time and performs a LED test where all LED segments are illuminated.

f. Control and configuration buttons – Enables all local user-interface operations, which are also accessible a software package.

The display board will have the following indicators as a minimum:

a. SAMPLE, ALARM and FAULT indicators for each sector. b. POWER – Power supply is ON





c. GENERAL FAULT – Detector has one or more faults. Individual faults will also be shown by specific fault indicators. The FAULT relay contacts will follow the state of this indicator.

d. GENERAL FAULT (flash on/off) – Detector EEPROM is faulty. e. PROCESSOR RESET – Processor has been reset f. FLOW FAULT – Flow rate for any sector is outside the bounds set by the

High and Low flow limits. g. ASPIRATION FAULT – Rotary valve is faulty. h. DETECTOR FAULT – Laser smoke detector has developed a fault i. COMMUNICATION FAULT – Part of the internal RS485 communication link

is faulty. j. HOLD – Unit has been set to sample from only one sector. k. UNLOCK – An access code has been entered and some functions for the

detector are now enabled. l. ALERT, ACTION, FIRE 1 and FIRE 2 – A smoke density exceeding the

respective alarm level has been detected. The alarm LEDs will operate in tandem with corresponding relays on the I/O board to indicate progressive levels of smoke. They will be programmable for both obscuration level and time delay.

m. Smoke density bar graph n. Status display – Display for the smoke density value and all SETUP and

CONFIGURE procedures. o. Indication of the sector that is currently being monitored.

Environmental The units will have an IP30 rating and operate at an ambient temperature range of at least 0°C to 39°C (32 to 103 °F) at a relative humidity of 10-95% RH (non-condensing). The detector will be tested to a temperature range of -10°C to 55°C (14 to 131 °F) and be able to sample air with a temperature ranging from -20°C to 60°C (4 to 140 °F). Product UL listed for use from 0 °C to 38 °C (32 °F to 100 °

G. Primary Detection

VFT 15 Firetracer detector with 6 mm micro bore sampling nylon tube shall installed for 15 channel - inlet specifically design to meet only In cabinet detection with max 50 meter per capillary tube.

Secondary Detection VESDA LaserScanner detector pipe net work shall be install in ceiling level and floor voids with ASAT Calculation software It shall be shown that the system can be designed to provide optimum sensitivity to smoke but also ensure that the possibility of activating an alarm due to “nuisance” smoke can be kept to an absolute minimum. To support this, the system must be designed using suitable software capable of accurately calculating aggregate sensitivity to smoke of specified groups of sampling holes proving that the proposed





system provides suitable performance to meet requirements for High, Enhanced and Normal sensitivity. It shall be approved to provide very early smoke detection and provide up to four programmable alarm levels corresponding to Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2 for LaserPLUS, LaserFOCUS detectors and Pr-alarm and Fire for LaserCOMPACT detectors. The alarm levels shall be field programmable and able to be set at sensitivities ranging from 0.025 – 20% obsc/m with time delays for each threshold adjustable between 0-60 seconds. The system shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output relays, via VESDA System Management software or via Intelligent High Level interface. The system shall be self monitoring for filter contamination and shall incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe or ultrasonic flow monitor in order to provide four staged airflow faults.

A. Display Assembly

When required, a detector Display module may be located within the detector enclosure on LaserPLUS systems, a remote mounting box or a 19 inch remote rack.

1. Design Requirements

The display assembly shall feature: a. A 20 segment bargraph display. b. For LaserPLUS, LaserFOCUS four independent high intensity alarm indicators,

Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire2, corresponding to the four alarm thresholds of the detector.

c. For LaserCOMPACT, two independent high intensity alarm indicators, Pre-alarm and Fire corresponding to the two alarm thresholds of the detector.

d. Alarm threshold indicators showing alarm levels. e. Detector fault and airflow fault indicators. f. Faults originating in the particular detection zone (Zone Fault) shall be

distinguished from those produced by the overall smoke detection system and from those resulting from network wiring errors (Network Fault). LED indicators shall be provided for each fault category.

g. Minor and urgent fault LED indicators. h. A remotely mounted Display may be optionally equipped with 7 or 12

configurable relays for signalling alarm and fault conditions. i. Four buttons supporting the following features:

1. Test 2. Mode/Test - Scrolls through the information on the Display‟s digital display:

Sensitivity (Fire 1 Threshold setting), current smoke level and detector Zone number. When pressed and held initiates a lamp test on the individual display module.

3. Silence - Silences all devices on the system 4. Reset - Unlatches all latched alarm conditions on the assigned VLP zone.





5. Isolate - Isolates the individual VLP zone (inhibits Alarm and Fault relays and initiates Isolate relay).

B. Programmers

When required, a Programmer module may be located within the detector for LaserPLUS, a remote mounting box, a 19 inch remote rack, or in a portable hand-held unit. Alternatively, programming may be performed using Vconfig® or VSC® application running on a PC connected through a High Level Interfacing unit (PC-Link HLI). 1. Design Requirements 2. Programming of any device on the VESDAnet system. 3. Viewing of the status of any device in the system. 4. Adjustment of the alarm thresholds of a nominated detector. 5. Setting of Day/night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings where

applicable. 6. Initiation of AutoLearn™, to automatically configure the detector‟s alarm

threshold settings to suit the current environment. 7. Multi-level password control. 8. Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation. (Laserplus only) 9. Programmable energised or de-energised relays. (LaserPLUS only) 10. Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision. 11. Programmable aspirator speed control. (LaserPLUS only) 12. Programmable maintenance intervals. 13. Facilities for referencing with time dilution compensation. 14. Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.

H. Device Networking Requirements

1. The devices in the smoke detection system shall be capable of communicating

with each other via twisted pair RS485 cable. The network shall be able to support up to 250 devices (detectors, displays and programmers), of which at least 100 detectors can be supported.

2. The network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit. Any communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in the fault messages.

3. PC based configuration tools shall be available to configure and manage the network of detectors.

4. Digital Communication Port Shall comply with EIA RS485 Protocol.

I. Pipe & Tubing Network

1. All Aspirating Smoke Detection pipe installation shall be in compliance with

VESDA UL listed 1887





2. UL listed certification for pipes shall be submitted for the engineer‟s approval & perusal.

3. All Pipe & fittings shall comply with NFPA 90 A Plenum tubing classified for flame and smoke.

4. All VESDA pipes and fittings shall comply with wide range of operating temperatures from 0 deg F to 200 deg F

5. 6mm micro bore tubing shall be fire resistance and use imperial fittings

J. Power Supply Unit

1. VESDA power supply shall be listed to 1481 UL listed. 2. UL Listed certification shall be submitted for the engineer‟s approval & perusal.

K. Quality Assurance

1. Manufacturer

The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production experience in the manufacturer and design of high sensitivity aspiration-type smoke detection systems. The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9002 for manufacturing.

2. Equipment Supplier

The equipment supplier shall be authorised and trained by the manufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air sampling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such on request.

21.2.21 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

a. General

The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed & installed to meet the local fire department requirements & the respective EN & BS standards and regulations applicable on the project. The products shall have a binding agency agreement with a local company in Qatar and the product shall have installation references in Qatar and shall have installations in the Middle East for at least 5 years. Spares parts and engineering support shall be continuously available for the product both during installation / commissioning as well as the operational life. Local Civil Defense Department approval shall also be granted the product. Emergency lighting shall fulfill the functions that follow:

1. Illuminate the escape routes. 2. Indicate the escape route direction clearly. 3. Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors. 4. Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving

equipment on the premises are adequately illuminated.





5. Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all hazardous processes.

Each emergency lighting circuit shall be used for the supply, automatic testing & monitoring of a maximum of 20 no. emergency light fittings per circuit. The quantity and locations of the panels shall be as indicated on the layout / riser drawings. The system shall be fully addressable type with individual light monitoring facilities as follows:

1. Input Voltage: 240V ac. 2. Output Mains: 240V ac. 3. Output Emergency: 220V DC.

Battery back-up shall be provided for a minimum duration of three hours under full load emergency operation, with a minimum of 75 -100% light output on all connected light fittings.

b. Mechanical Construction

The battery housing shall be a sheet steel, powder coated housing (IP21) with removable screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the batteries and components. The electronics section shall have I(P21) sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate window. Within electrical sub-stations panels shall have IP54 ingress protection.

The electronics module shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries from the top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables & looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per ENVDE0100. All outgoing light fitting circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-in type terminals able to accept 2.5 mm

2 conductors.

c. Electrical Construction

For the change-over module the system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being of the plug-in type and encapsulated design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through change-over modules. Each module shall be capable of switching two separate circuits with a maximum load of 3 Amps or 20 Nos. light fixtures connected to it. Emergency & Exit lights will be connected to each circuit, thereby allowing connection of luminaries of all switching modes, namely Maintained, Non-maintained and Switched Maintained in the same circuit. All the change-over modules will be plug-in type and are no load and short circuit protected with independent fuses for mains and battery supply and will have LED type status indication for operation and failure.

d. Batteries

Each panel will have maintenance free sealed lead acid batteries with rated 10 years service life at 25

0C and capable of supporting the connected load for 3 hours. The





central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximum room temperature of 25

0C. The room shall be air-conditioned using a re-circulation air-

conditioning system without any special battery room ventilation requirement. Where the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same in standard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in a fire rated room, on purpose built support stand / enclosure.

e. Battery Charger

The battery Charger module shall be a fully encapsulated plug-in type, microprocessor controlled module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU characteristics. An automatic boost charging facility shall be built-in to the system depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging & supervising via battery monitoring at intervals of 5 minutes or less for failure indication of battery circuit as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours.

The charger shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for the battery circuit and shall be provided with LED indications for:

1. Operation 2. Charger On 3. Booster On 4. Mains Operation 5. Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100% 6. Charging Failure 7. Insulation fault

The charger shall also have potential free indicator contacts for remote indication of:

1. Charging failure. 2. Fast charge. 3. Insulation fault.

The charger shall have a push button to test and simulate earth leakage failures. It shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and battery accessible via the front plate of the charger

f. Control Module

Each panel will have modular plug-in type freely programmable control module with 4x20 character contrast controlled liquid crystal display, touch pad keys for programming and monitoring of the panel & constant memory back up with two year duration logbook facility. It should have separate buttons for test, function test and battery duration test. In addition three freely programmable buttons shall be provided to conduct functions as per user‟s priority. Each control module shall be programmable as master / slave to access status of the other panels installed on site.





The control module should have the features that follow: 1. Monitor & control all test cycles & functions 2. Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries 3. Display & program the status of each circuit 4. Conduct an Earth Leakage test on each circuit. 5. Luminaries‟ failure will be displayed with text location 6. Communicate and program the function of addressable electronic ballast on

every slave luminaries. 7. Programming for the volt-free contacts for the BMS operation. 8. Programming and status of the Sub-circuit monitoring inputs and the

associated luminaries.

The control module shall also display the battery voltage level, withdrawn battery current in the test or emergency modes, charge failures, interrupted battery charge circuit, luminaries failure (address with text location), final circuit or sub-distribution board supply failure (address with text location), function test, battery test, earth leakage failure with respect to circuit. Both tests shall be manually programmed. The control module has three LED‟s for status indication of mains supply ON/OFF, luminaries or unit failure and battery supply. Failure recognition for each individual safety / EXIT light in conjunction with proprietary electronic ballast including two wire monitoring module without additional data line.

Programming of the control module will be possible through a smart card & all the information including the logbook shall be stored on smart card, which is readable on PC directly. An electronically regulated monitoring loop output is included to monitor the mains failure at distribution boards and sub-distribution boards. Final circuit monitoring shall be carried out from the panel in such a way that emergency lights‟ pertaining to specific areas where power has failed will be energized only. Central monitoring shall be carried through an Open Protocol network. Each central battery/ sub-station panel shall be fitted with a terminal to facilitate communication to the BMS system / Central monitoring unit via an open protocol to provide the complete panel status.

g. Automatic Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility

An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less with daily / weekly function testing of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring, luminaries, registration and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test feature shall also be provided in addition to the automatic testing regime feature. The monitoring system and data transfer shall be carried out based on a current multiplexed system in DC mode.





h. Central Monitoring Facility

When not centrally monitored through a BMS system, a separate central monitoring computer shall be provided for the emergency lighting system. The central monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software, monitoring & programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of an IBM compatible PC with monitor, INTEL Pentium (latest generation processor), keyboard, mouse and a printer. The unit shall operate with the latest visualization software to give detailed address & information of all luminaries connected to system. The program shall be user friendly with visually clear fault indication screens on the monitor.

Features shall also be provided as follows:

1. Monitor & control all test cycles & functions. 2. Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries. 3. Display the status of each circuit. 4. Luminaire status & failure information will be displayed with text location. 5. Log the events on the system in a separate window to facilitate easy access.

i. Sub-Circuit Monitoring Interface

Exit lights shall remain in the Maintained mode of operation. Dedicated luminaries used for emergency operation shall remain in Non-Maintained mode of operation. Sub-circuit monitoring shall be carried out for Non-Maintained lights using a 24 V monitoring loop within the panel wired to phase monitoring relays in the relevant lighting DBs (all up to the approval of the Consultant). Where mains lighting in switched-maintained mode are used for Emergency operation, the switching shall be coordinated using fully encapsulated switching interface modules such that the same switch is used for switching mains and emergency lighting. A detailed schematic shall be presented for approval of the Consultant.

21.2.22 TELECOMS AND DATA SYSTEM

A. Contractor and Manufacturer Qualifications

The minimum Contractor and Manufacturer Qualifications shall be as follows: All equipment and work detailed within this section shall be furnished and installed by a certified Data & telecommunications contractor, hereafter referred to as the Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the conduit, electrical boxes, and pull-wires. The Contractor shall have the following qualifications in Data and Telecommunication Systems installation:

1. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience in application, installation and testing of the specified systems and equipment.

2. All supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have factory certification from each equipment





manufacturer that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. General electrical trade staff (electricians) shall not be used for the installation of the premises distribution cables and associated hardware.

3. All operatives assigned to the installation of this system or any of these components shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components.

4. The equipment and hardware provided under this contract will be from manufacturers having a minimum of five years experience in producing the types of systems and equipment specified.

a. Standards and Regulations

1. Requirements of the service provider (QTEL)

2. ISO/IEC 11801:2002 - Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, with addendums.

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA 598-A - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements

for Telecommunications 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-67 - Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing

of Twisted Pair Cabling System 9. EIA/TIA-526-7 “Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single Mode Fibre

Cable Plant 10. EIA/TIA-526-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fibre

Cable Plant 11. TIA/EIA-854 Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000Mbps Operating Over

Category 6 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling. 12. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers Sixteenth Edition 13. IEEE 802.1 - LAN/MAN Bridging and Management. 14. IEEE 802.3 - CSMA/CD Access Methods.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data

For each type of equipment manufacturer‟s data is required for approval including original catalogues, literature, illustrations, wiring diagrams, installation instructions, sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes and with full description of components and operating parameters for:

a. UTP and fiber optic cables





b. Outlets, RJ45 modules, faceplates and connectors c. Fiber optic panels and RJ45 Patch Panels d. Enclosures and cabinets. e. Telephone sets (IP & Analog). f. All Active components

Workshop Drawings

On architectural backgrounds the supplier shall submit dimensional layout plans, sections, elevations, single lines, wiring diagrams, detailed equipment routing and details that show the exact location and installation details of all equipment and its accessories, wiring, etc. The drawings shall include signal levels throughout the system as they were on the acceptance date of the system. The drawings shall show:

a. Plan drawings indicating locations and identification of information outlets, Floor Distributors (IDF‟s), and backbone (cable) riser runs.

b. Telecom rooms (TR and/or MDF) termination detail sheets. c. Cross-connect schedules including MDF main-cross-connects, Distribution

point cross-connects and floor distributor cross-connects. d. Backbone (riser) diagrams e. System block diagram, indicating interconnection between system

components and subsystems. f. Interface requirements including connector types and pin-outs, to external

systems and systems or components not supplied by the contractor. g. Fabrication drawings for custom-built equipment

As-Built Drawings

On architectural backgrounds dimensional layout plans, sections, elevations, single lines, wiring diagrams, detailed cable routing and details that show the as-built location and installation details of all equipment and its accessories, wiring, etc.

Calculations

The supplier has to submit:

a. Calculation for all systems and equipment wiring, output levels, attenuation levels, etc.

b. Optical loss calculations for each optical fiber run.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The supplier shall submit:

a. Original manufacturer operation and maintenance manuals including original manufacturer catalogues, list of all contact names, numbers, addresses, etc.





b. Labeling and administration documentation. c. Warranty documents for equipment. d. Copper certification test result printout and soft copy. e. Optical fiber power meter/light source test result printouts and soft copy. f. Optical fiber OTDR cable signatures and test result printouts and soft copy.

Field Test and Commissioning Reports

The supplier must submit field test and commissioning reports that show proper testing and commissioning signed from manufacturers and system installers.

Spare Parts

The supplier shall provide a detailed list of manufacturer-recommended spare parts for a period of 2 years.

Samples

Samples produced by the installers or their suppliers shall be inspected for compliance with the documentations.

Catalogue in Lieu of Sample

Samples shall be submitted to all equipment, accessories, and systems for inspection prior to installation. However, subject to approval of the Superintendent, where an item of equipment is a standard item, copies of the manufacturer‟s catalogue or brochure may be accepted in lieu of a sample provided that all dimensions and relevant information are shown in the catalogue or brochure.

Identification Labeling Samples shall be labeled to identify their intended use and relation to these documents, e.g. server name, data cable. The identified samples shall be submitted within sufficient time to permit modifications to me made without delaying the work if such are deemed necessary by the Superintendent and to provide the Superintendent with not less than seven (7) working days to make his comments.

Technical Data Samples shall be accompanied by the entire manufacturer‟s relevant technical data.





Return of Samples

Samples given permission to use shall be held in site after inspection and used as a standard for acceptance or rejection of subsequent production units and then maybe returned to the Sub-Contractor

EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum twenty (20) year warranty on

all Passive and active components included in the structural cabling system. These warranties shall be provided in written certificate form.

B. The system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the Owner that in event of

the demise or failure of the installing certified system installer/vendor, the manufacturer shall be responsible for providing another certified system installer/vendor to fulfill the remainder of the warranty conditions.

B. The Contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty-four (24) hour response time

to any warranty claims.

STRUCTURAL CABLING AND OUTLET

CATEGORY 6 CABLES a. All horizontal structural cabling cables must comply with LSZH Category 6

10G performance, 4 pairs 24 AWG UTP cables as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B2 addendum 6 or ISO/IEC 11801 standard. Numbering and coloring should be in accordance with EIA/TIA 568B, ISO 11801 / EN50173 using T568B option

b. Cables shall be run from the user outlet to the cabling rack (as indicated on

drawings) without any transition points.

c. All UTP cabling must be tested using a level III field tester by the supplier and full documentation must be provided to demonstrate that the cabling meet the industry standards (i-e IEEE 802.3, EIA / TIA 568 – B.2-1).

d. Category 6 defines four-wire twisted –pair UTP copper cable that can

transmit data and proven support for 100 Mbps fast Ethernet, 500 MHz Broadband Video, 10Gigabit Ethernet

e. The Cat 6 cable shall be of low–capacitance and exhibits low crosstalk. However, all figures of the cable must be Category 6 compliant.

f. The cables short term bending radius is 6 times the cable diameter in

operation and 10 times the cable diameter in installation.





MULTI-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLES

a. OM3 - 50/125 m multi-mode fiber optic cables LSZH shall be installed from each IDF up to the main data rock.

b. The cable shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in ducts and risers,

rodent resistance type with LSZH – flame retardant outer sheath.

c. Fiber Optic Cables shall be suitable for 10/100/1000 Base and to be tested @ 1350 and 1500 nm, Full OFL tested shall be performed before and after installation.

d. The cable shall be with tight buffer structure, glass yarn reinforcement and

water- blocking elements

e. Low friction jacket for ease of pulling through ducts.

RJ-45, CAT 6 OUTLET a. The outlet shall be category 6, eight - position angled RJ-45, T568B or T568A

Color Code pinned and modules mounted within the service floor outlet box or on wall flush mounting. The cabling contractor should coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure compliance and matching between the RJ-45 data connectors with the floor boxes or single gang box and face plates.

b. The presentation of the outlets shall be provided for labeling and

identification. The outlet shall be complete with a transparent window to protect the labeling tag.

c. All conductors of the 4-pair cat 6 horizontal cable shall be terminated on the

respective contacts. To avoid installation errors, the wire organizer of the snap-in connector should be identified by the same standard color coding as the cat 6 cable wires.

d. Each connector shall provide both T-568A and T-568B color code

identification for the pins at the rear of the connector. The punched down should be in accordance with the T-568B color code.

e. Each outlet to receive one 4 pair cable. Submit sample of the socket for

review and approval.

f. Outlets shall be supplied Complete with Faceplate from the same Wiring Devices Manufacturer.

CATEGORY 6 (10G) RJ45 PATCH PANELS

The Copper Data Patch Panels:





a. Shall be 24 or 48 ports CAT 6 compliant. Patching Connections at the MDF, IDF can be made Via RJ45 to RJ 45 patch cords.

b. Shall have RJ 45 jack terminations in the front and Insulation Displacement Connectors (IDC) at the rear of the module. All panels shall conform to the Category 6 (10G) requirements of EIA/TIA 568B, IS11801 and EN50173.

c. Shall be mounted in a standard 19” rack with wall brackets where applicable. d. The 24-port panels shall be 1.75 inches (4.45 cm) high (3.5 inches). e. The 48-port panels shall be 3.5 inches (8.9 cm) high (5.25 inches). f. The modular patch panels will have insertion life of 750 cycles minimum. g. In the rack cabinet, the patch panels shall be separated by metallic patch-

guides to protect the patch cords. The height of these guides shall be 1HU or 2HU depending on the rack space.

RJ45 Patch panel shall meet the following specifications:

Insertion Life 750 cycles

Plug/Jack Contact force 100 g min

Plug Retention Force 133 N

Operating temperature Range 00C to 600C

Humidity 5 to 95% (non condensing)

Height 4.41 cm (1U)

Width 48.26 cm (19 inch)

Depth 4.06 cm

CATEGORY 6 (10G) RJ45 PATCH CORDS

a. Cat 6 RJ45 to RJ45 patch cords between the Data switches and RJ45 Patch

panels.

b. Drop cords at the desktop should also be CAT 6 RJ45 to RJ45 Patch Cords.

c. Data patch cords used at the telecommunication rack and at the information outlet shall be 24 AWG, 4-pair assemblies. Patch cords shall be factory-assembles by the manufacturer of the cabling system using the stranded conductors. Each patch cable must be individually packaged in a plastic bag with a label showing the part number and the cable length. The patch cables must have an Anti-Snag connector and shall be backward compatible with category 6(10G). Outlets shall require one 3-meters patch cord and one 1-meter patch cable to connect the patch panel to the active equipment.

d. The patch cable shall meet the requirements warranted to meet ISO/IEC 11801,

EN 50173 and EIA/TIA 568A/B category 6(10G) wiring standards capable of connecting 10 Gigabits high speed information terminal devices to inform outlets panel applications. The patch cord shall be designed to provide support for extended multimedia transmission distance over frequency ranges up to and potentially beyond 100/250 MHz.

e. The patch cord shall support the computer networking applications over

frequency ranges up to and potentially beyond 500 MHz and shall be compatible with voice and information applications.





f. The construction of the cord shall be of stranded type cordage tightly twisted, 24 AWG, 8 conductor. The cord shall be terminated to an 8-positon RJ-45 modular plug on one end and a 8-position RJ-45 modular plug on the other end for Data. The cords shall support the transmission requirements warranted to meet ISO/IEC 11801 Class E, EN 50173 or TIA.EIA 568CB Category 6(10G), Class E component specifications and standards.

g. The Contractor supplied cord shall be of factory crimped plug at both ends.

h. Category 6 RJ-45 patch cables must be provided for the all project, considering

the structural cabling will be initially used at 50% of its capacity and two patch cords must be provided for each end to end connection. Whenever possible on the patch panel side color coded cables will be used to segregate the nature of the service:

1. IP Phone (Blue) 2. Analog Phone, Fax or credit card machine (Black) 3. TV (Green) 4. WiFi Access Point (Grey) 5. Internet (Yellow) 6. Back Office or Business (Red)

FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS

a. A.Fiber optic patch panels shall be rack mounted with 12 duplex LC ports and shall take no more than one unit of vertical space on the rack cabinet, the patch panel shall be complete with splicing tray.

b. The patch panel shall be equipped with a mechanism that ensures the retention

and support of the incoming fiber optic cables.

c. The patch panel shall be designed with a sliding mechanism enabling front installation and maintenance work to be carried out without having to remove the entire panel. The patch panel shall be delivered complete with top cover.

d. The patch panel shall provide facilities to recess the front connector plate deeper

than the front of the 19” rails of the cabinet. This will provide sufficient bend radius for the patch cords once connected to the panel. This shall also prevent damage to the patch cords when the cabinet door is closed.

e. Cable management unit shall be provided with the fiber optic patch panel.

f. Fiber Optic Patch Panels Shall be supplied complete with all LC connectors

needed for terminating the Multi Mode Fiber Cables.

FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS

a. Optical patch cords will be provided with Duplex LC/LC connectors by default, the provided quantity will be in line with the number of optical active equipments





ports activated within the deployed infrastructure plus 10% for spare. Connector will have to be adapted to suite connectors provided on active equipments.

b. All patch cords will be provided with different appropriate lengths to ensure efficient usage of cable management.

EQUIPMENT / PATCHING RACKS

IDF

The contractor shall provide the following equipment racks within the equipment ELV rooms. The racks and their configuration shall be as follows:

a. All racks must be having standard 19” front and rear adjustable rack rails and

must be, 800mn wide, 800mn deep and NOS OF U high as per electrical drawings. Rack doors must be having key lock. For open racks it must be 19” capable, 600mn wide, and 29 U high

b. All racks panels must be bounded to a common rack earth point. The rack c. Earth point must be connected to the room earth bar by a cable of section not

less than 16mm2 d. All racks must be having a 6 way fan tray with 6 number low noise fans. e. All racks must be provided with sufficient screws, washers and cage nuts for all

passive and active components. f. AT least 200mn must be available between each open rack for vertical cable

managers. g. Racks must be equipped with two single phase 16 PDUs. Each rack PDU will be

connected to one of the rack power feed. PDUs must not be having any fuse or power switches. PDU must be equipped with 2 x IEC EN 60320 C19 sockets and 16 x IEC 320 EN 60320 C13 sockets at minimum. IEC EN 60320 C19 and C13 male/female power extension cords of length 1.5 meters must be provided. (50% of the total number of sockets)

h. The cabinet/ rack shall be equipped with removable and lockable side panels‟ for easy access to the installed equipments.

i. The cabinet/ rack shall have 180 degree of double swing front and back door with lock and reversible type door i.e. easy re-hanging to open on right or left.

j. Each IDF room must be clear of any pipes handlings either pressurize, unpressurized liquids, vast or gas. Generally speaking no extra services than the one‟s requires for the room itself must be going through the room. IDF rooms must be dedicated to that purpose.

k. A clean class 1 earth is to be provided in each IDF room. Earth impedance is to be less than 1 Ω (Ohm). Earth to be presented on an earth bar mounted on wall, feeding cable section should not be less than ( (35mn2)). All racks must be bounded to the earth bar with cable of section not less than ( (16mn2)).

l. Each Rack Shall have at least 30% free Space for installing of Active Equipments.

5. 2 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME

A. The main distribution frame (MDF) shall be of free standing type enclosure and shall consist of three parts.





1. The first part (MDF) is to connect all incoming trunk lines of the Building Plus 10% spare.

2. All circuits of this part shall be protected against over voltage and over current.

3. The second part (MDF) is to connect all of the Riser Multi-Pair Cables to all IDF's with at least 10% Spare Capacity.

B. Terminals shall be identified by numbered tags corresponding to the respective

lines or extensions. The contractor shall submit the proposed numbering scheme for prior approval by the Engineer.

C. Two sets of the special tools required for MDF wiring (e.g. IDC insertion tool) as

well as test cords shall be provided with the main distribution frame. D. There must be provision for at least five racks. Racks should be provided with

metallic perforated, front and rear door. E. All racks must be having a 6 way fan tray with 6 number low noise fans. F. All racks must be provided with sufficient screws, washers and cage nuts for all

passive and active components.

IP PABX

1. PABX must be provided with a 400 days service guaranty. Any hardware,

software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

2. PABX must be provided with three days of training for two persons. Training will

be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.

3. PABX must include all hardware and software components to ensure end to end

secured solution taking in account the following business rules:

4. The PABX will be IP based and be able to support both Analogue and IP phones. Only IP phones will be deployed at the exception where ever IP phones are not available with suitable characteristics (like water proof) PABX must be able to support wireless phones using Wifi IP infrastructure.

5. The PABX must be redundant for all its functions including voice mail.

6. The PABX must be able to support SIP and SIP-T protocols.

7. IP phones must be deployed using an open standard protocol like MGCP / H323

/ SIP. If not it must be understood / guaranteed that all licenses / software can be converted to standard one‟s at no cost.

8. PABX / PABX gateway must be a Telecom Service Provider approved model.





9. The PABX must be an IP based IP PABX. The core components of the PABX must be IP.

10. The PABX must be redundant for all its components and more especially the

core, the voice mail and the gateways.

11. The PABX gateway(s) must be able to support the various and localized versions of public Telecom service provider based connectivity like ISDN PRI (ETSI) / QSIG / E1 and POTS CO trunk lines. (NT interface at minimum).

12. The PABX gateway(s) must be certified / approved as per local Telecom

regulation for the required public network connectivity.

13. PABX must have least call routing features.

14. The PABX must be able to support IP phones / Meeting room phones (spiders) / gateways / ICD from different vendors with different features.

15. The PABX must be able to support analog extensions either directly or through

specific gateways. The telephony features given on an analogue extension must be similar to the ones given on an IP phone

16. IP phones must be registering in a secure way to avoid any kind of spoofing / hacking.

17. The PABX must be able to cope with fax services using T38.

18. The PABX must be SIP compliant and must also support H323, H450, H248,

MGCP, TAPI, JTAPI.

19. PABX must be supporting auto attending console.

20. PABX must be able to offer call center functionalities by license addition. The IVR must be voice XML compliant.

21. PABX must offer follow me features where an incoming call could simultaneously

be ringing on IP phone, WiFi phone as well as GSM phone. First one to pick up will be having the call.

22. PABX must be able to offer soft phones on PC and PDA. (Personal data

assistant)

23. The PABX must be able to support different codec either in A or μ low G.711, G.729A, G729B, G726.

24. PABX must be able to support 3 times the number of deployed extensions

without any major changes other than software licenses.

25. The PABX must be able to support Wireless Wi-Fi phones and offer enhanced security functionalities specific to this kind of handset.





26. When IP phones are used it should be possible to intensively customize the look and feel using XML based contents / configurations.

27. The PABX must be able to interface with external software to offer enhanced

Multimedia services.

28. PABX must be delivered with an easy to use secured web based management interface.

29. PABX must be able to deliver usage CDR and to store / buffer them inside the PABX.

30. The PABX and the voice mail system should offer an external API interface

compatible with market standard hospitality call accounting and Property Management Systems. This interface should allow the following controls:

a. Changing telephony features b. Barring / unbarring Local / National / International / Mobile calls c. Activating / clearing the voice mail system d. Wake up call

31. The management software should be able to manage a scheduled upgrade of

part or all IP phones / gateways / ICD without end-users interaction.

NETWORK

1. Network must be provided with a 400 days service guaranty. Any hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

2. Network must be provided with three days of training for two persons. Training

will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.

3. Network must include all hardware and software components to ensure end to end secured solution taking in account the following business rules:

a. Service platforms should never be presented directly to edge devices (IP

Phone, STB…) / users directly. It must always go through an application aware security function performing full packet inspection and preventing attacks.

b. Network infrastructure should follow the “need to know” security paradigm allowing only required communications in the infrastructure, and discarding any other traffic.





NETWORK CONCEPT

1. Network must be hierarchic and composed of at least access and core levels. Depending on the size of the project an aggregation or multiples core could also be required especially if there are multiples buildings.

2. Network must be IP convergent and must offer the appropriate performance and quality of service required to support today and tomorrow services. All network points should be offering 10/100/1000 Mbps connectivity. Backbone must be preferably at 10Gbps, if not aggregated 1Gbps link can also be used.

3. Access level and core level will be interconnected by a minimum of two redundant links at a speed not less than 10Gbps

4. The core must be based on highly available chassis and consist of two equipments. Core equipments must be redundant in logic and power supply. Core must be using a passive backplane and pluggable modules.

5. Each IT equipment / service platform required to be connected to the core must be using at least two diverted connections one to each of the core node.

6. Network equipments must offer 30% free ports for future usage and 50% upgrade capabilities in capacity without changing the equipment itself for chassis.

7. All edge network ports must be PoE capable of delivering 15.4W per port without limitations in the number of simultaneously used ports. PoE switches must be able to deliver the accurate power on demand and only when it is required.

8. All provided network equipments should be 19” rack mounted.

9. All provided network equipments must be offering an out of band (RS232) and an in band (SSH / SNMP / Web) management interfaces.

10. All network equipments must be capable to handle two simultaneous software images with a remaining 50% free flash or equivalent memory space.

11. Network equipments must be offering the following features: a. L2 and L3 based Vlans b. Vlan trunking according to 802.1q c. Vlan trunking/encapsulation QinQ d. L2 Vlan priority according to 802.1p e. Trunk based classification, marking based on L2 QoS 802.1p / IP ToS / IP

DSCP / Vlan number f. Port based classification, marking based on L2 QoS 802.1p / IP ToS / IP

DSCP g. Input and output policing based on layer 3 and 4 headers h. Minimum four queues per port i. Strict priority queuing j. Unicast and multicast routing k. 10/100/1000 Mbps interfaces l. Half and full duplex





m. Auto MDI-X n. Mac address limitation per port (static or learning) o. Extended access lists per port or per VLAN p. Private Vlans with community, promiscuous and isolated support q. LLDP support in addition of proprietary protocols like CDP r. DHCP server service s. DHCP snooping t. DHCP option 82 u. IP source guard / ARP poisoning prevention v. Broadcast storm control w. 802.1d spanning tree protocol, PVST, 802.1w x. Spanning tree BPDU guard y. Spanning tree fast reroute z. Hardware based IP V4 and IP V6 routing aa. Virtual IP interface redundancy by HSRP or VRRP bb. Bridging STB cc. Unicast routing protocol RIP, OSPF and BGP for the core dd. MPLS or multiples virtual routers for the core ee. Multicast routing protocol as PIM-Dense Mode and PIM-Sparse Mode ff. Fast join, fast leave, IGMP-V2 and IGMP-V3 snooping protocols gg. 802.3ad for link aggregation including LACP hh. 802.3af for PoE with minimum capacity of 15.4W on all ports simultaneously ii. 802.1x user authentication associated with radius allowing VLAN(s)

assignments and port security through dynamic access list jj. 400 Gbps Switching capacity for the core and 100 Gbps for the edge. kk. 100 Millions PPS in routing (64 Bytes Packets) for the core and 50 Millions

PPS for the edge.

12. Network equipments must be offering the following network management features: a. Local RS-232 console port b. SSHv2 for remote access c. SNMP V2c at minimum for remote management d. Radius for centralized authentication / authorization and accounting e. Syslog f. SFlow or Netflow traffic accounting capabilities at the core level g. RMON h. Port mirroring

13. When doing the Fiber / copper patching in IDF / MDF all patch cables must be

uniquely labeled at each end, allowing easy identification of patch cords usage and interconnection points.

14. A Network management solution should be offered as part of the network support. This solution should be able to monitor network components; third parties element managers as well as systems using either agent or windows build in WMI capabilities.

15. Network Management should be offering: a. Configuration management / archiving, b. Inventory / asset management, c. Faults,





d. Radius authentication, e. Radius authorization, f. Performance collection / indicators, g. Been able to report fault or performance related alarms using both E-mail or

SMS, h. Receive, categorize and raise alarm for syslog and snmp based events i. Discovery of network devices and calculate Layer 2 relationships to provide

views of the network by different views including j. LAN edge view and a general Layer 2 view. k. Topology maps to indicate the discovery and Simple Network Management

Protocol (SNMP) status of network devices. l. Tools for creating, deleting and editing VLAN‟s. m. User tracking functions to correlate MAC address and IP address to switch

ports. n. Path analysis tools to perform path analysis for Layer 2 and Layer 3 devices

using the device host name or IP address. o. Change monitoring log recording users and applications which are active on

the network.

Network Security

A Layered approach to Network Security shall be adopted as follows:

Perimeter Individual network zones shall be firewalled and protected via software antivirus and intrusion detection applications. End point security shall be provided so as to validate and authorize wired and wireless connectivity.

Core Network access control shall be provided incorporating Host ID and MAC based filtering to ensure that unauthorized communication is disconnected.

VLANS VLANS (Virtual LAN) are utilized within the switch software configuration in order to segregate services and increase security between users.

The primary security consideration is to completely segregate the public network from the Administration network.

The secondary security consideration is to protect the admin servers via a firewall from the end users. Additionally, separate V-LANs will be configured for individual networks as follows:-





a. Administration LAN b. WiFi c. IPTV / HiTV

Wireless Network

1. Wireless Network must be provided with a one 400days service guaranty. Any hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

2. Wireless Network must be provided with three days of training for two persons.

Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.

3. Wireless Network must include all hardware and software components to ensure end to end secured solution taking in account the following business rules: a. The wireless infrastructure must be based on centralized controller(s). b. The controller(s) must be redundant. c. Wireless infrastructure must be able to support 802.11a/b/g at minimum.

Depending on availability 802.11n support must also be assessed. d. The wireless infrastructure must be able to support multiples SSID with all

models of authentication and encryption. At minimum free access/WEP/WPA/WPA2 and PSK/TKIP/AES.

e. The communication between APs and controller(s) must be encrypted in a tunnel or equivalent secured mechanism.

f. Based on the controller model, it should be able to deploy APs in configuration less mode, plug and play.

g. Wireless infrastructure must be able to offer indoor as well as outdoor coverage.

h. Wireless access points must be of small form factor, preserving esthetics, and compliant with PoE/802.3af at the exception of outdoor AP that could require extra power.

i. The wireless infrastructure must be self defending at the wireless/air level as well as at the IP level and include some firewall as well as IPS features.

j. The wireless infrastructure should be offering localization services related to active WiFi end points as well as passive or active RFID end points.

k. Wireless infrastructure must be compliant with local Telecom regulation in term of power transmission and used frequencies.

4. The wireless access points should be of small form factor, allowing easy

integration and preserving esthetics.

5. Solution must be able to support the following authentication methods: a. No authentication / free access b. MAC based c. 802.1x d. WPA PSK (Pre Shared Key) e. WPA TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) f. WPA-2 CCMP/AES (WPA-2 Enterprise) g. WPA-2 PSK (WPA-2 Personal)





6. The solution must be able to support local user database or remote databases using RADIUS, Microsoft® Active Directory or standard LDAP.

7. Solution must be able to support the following encryption /Key management methods: a. No encryption / free access b. WEP (Static or through 802.1x) c. TKIP d. AES

8. In addition to protocol based authentication the solution must be able also to

support a secured customizable internal web server (SSL enabled) allowing authentication even in free access mode. Authentication possibilities in that mode should follow general requested capabilities.

9. Solution must be able to support per SSID security policies, including access list and more preferably firewall like possibilities.

10. Solution must be offering build in NAT/PAT features as well as DHCP service.

11. Access points must be available for indoor as well as outdoor coverage.

12. The wireless infrastructure should offer a global building coverage, ROOMs, common areas, outdoor, back office.

13. Centralized redundant controller(s) to control distributed Access Points.

14. Solution must be able to offer one VLAN per SSID as well as combined VLAN.

15. Support the following different SSID:

a. Support Wifi phones

16. Support localization services for WiFi clients as well as passive or active RFID.

17. Wireless network should be provided with a full as built documentation including: a. Bill of quantities including deployed room / equipment / part number and

serial number b. Schematic diagrams c. Patching schedule including cable references, port number, socket number d. Configuration files

INTERNET GATEWAY

1. Internet gateway must be provided with a one 400days service guaranty. Any hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

2. Internet gateway must be provided with three days of training for two persons.

Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.





3. The Internet gateway function must be fully redundant using active/active model and comprise of one or more hardware or software components from a functional perspective.

4. The Internet gateway must be including security functions like firewall with deep

packet inspection as well as intrusion prevention system

5. The internet gateway must be able to connect directly to the Internet connection(s) given by the local Internet service providers. There should be more than one connection, and should be possible to benefit from all connections.

6. The Internet gateway must be able to offer multiples VLANs to segregate users.

7. The Internet gateway must include a DHCP function allowing user based

allocation of private or public IP address simultaneously.

8. The Internet gateway must offer local authentication through its own customized web portal. Either an internal or external user database can be used. The external user database should be reaching either using LDAP or RADIUS protocols. It should also be able to support authorization and accounting. It should already been tested and pre-integrated with Fidelio Opera PMS.

9. The Internet gateway must be able to apply different IP address schema (private

/ public) and to limit or guaranty Internet bandwidth according to information‟s given by the PMS at authentication time or statically configured.

10. The Internet gateway must be able to prioritize traffic based on define class of

service. By example ensuring smooth browsing / e-mailing while peer to peer traffic will be shaped.

11. The Internet gateway must be able to offer remote VPN services either IPSEC,

SSL or site to site using AES 128 minimum encryption.

12. The internet gateway must be able to support at least a 100Mbps throughput in each direction and at least 20Mbps of encrypted traffic simultaneously.

GSM INTERNAL COVERAGE

An internal GSM coverage solution must be deployed allowing full coverage of the building. Both voice and data services must be offered (2G/GPRS/3G/3G+/HSDPA).

The single antenna network should be design in such a way that multiple telecom service providers can use the same antenna. Approval must be obtained from the different providers.

Preferably one preferred Telecom service provider will deploy the antenna as well as the initial active components; other will be sharing the same infrastructure either at the antenna level or using local rooming at the BTS (Base transceiver station) level.





SERVERS

All required servers must be centrally located in the IT room. Preferably that all servers should be of blade technology to ensure space and technology efficiency.

1. Each Individual blade server must be having as a minimum the following

characteristics: a. 2 CPU Dual-core Intel® Xeon processor b. 4 GB Memory c. 2 * SAS Disk 72Go – 15K rpm d. 4 * 10/100/1000 Mezzanine Ethernet interfaces e. 2 * 4Gbps Emulex Mezzanine SAN interfaces

2. At least one blade chassis should be installed to support the different blade

servers. The capacity and number of blade chassis will be adjust based on the number of required server blades.

3. The blade chassis must be provided with enough redundant power supplies in an N+1 configuration.

4. The blade chassis must be provided with a redundant SAN switches. Build in setup will be preferred.

5. There should be two SAN switches enabled ports per blade server. Provision for four external fiber interfaces must be done. (Connection to external storage / external tape).

6. Blade chassis must be supplied with sufficient physical Ethernet Network connectivity allowing at least three Ethernet connections per blade. Built-in Ethernet switching module will not be used. All Ethernet interfaces, including chassis management ones, will be connected to the Core switches. Each Blade must be connected to each core switch plus one extra interface for backup purpose.

7. External redundant disk storage with redundant power supplies (N+1), redundant controllers, external SAN connectivity. Disk storage must be equipped with required capacity depending on the number of blades and associated locally deployed applications. Minimum offered usable capacity should not be less than 4To taking in account that disk should be configured at minimum in Raid 5 groups.

8. Blade chassis must be from HP vendor C3000 or C7000 series or equivalent from the same vendor.

9. Blades should be from HP vendor BL460c or equivalent from the same vendor.

Blade SAN switches must be Brocade 4Gb SAN for C-Class HP chassis. San Switches must be redundant in number





The Q-Tel approved Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the Vertical & horizontal cable sizes, MDF size in accordance with Q-Tel regulations. Telephone outlets shall be of a RJ45 type used by the Q-Tel and to the approval of the Consultant. Outlet boxes shall be provided where shown on drawings. Pull boxes shall be provided according to Q-Tel regulations and wherever needed to facilitate the pulling-in of CABLES. All internal telephone conduits shall be 25 mm diameter. unless otherwise specified. PVC conduit, trunking, boxes and accessories shall comply with the relevant clauses of these specifications. Manhole covers for telephone manholes shall be heavy-duty type of a manufacture and shape approved by Q-Tel.

21.2.23 CCTV AND SECURITY SYSTEM

Scope of Work

Generally the works shall include the supply, installation, testing, commissioning, hand-over, training and maintenance of the following:

i. Access Control System. ii. CCTV System.

The scope for the Contractors shall include the provision of all labour, equipment, power supplies, cables and ancillaries as detailed upon the drawings and necessary to render complete functioning systems. This shall include comprehensive testing and commissioning activities

The various components and major constituents of the system shall be sourced from manufacturers, who have proper and local representation of the products in Qatar and can technically support the total system through qualified and trained personnel. The system shall be IP based system and shall be wired independently of other wiring systems. The contract drawings only show the scheme and location of the processors, monitors, and so on. The actual routes of conduits wires, trunking etc. to the various equipments shall be clearly shown by the contractor on the working drawings.

SECURITY ACCESS AND CCTV SYSTEM

Security System Overview CCTV Cameras shall be installed at various vantage points as indicated at contract drawings. These locations are based on general safety and security surveillance. The cameras shall be the following types





General Specification of Security Surveillance System

1. System must contain a program capable of simultaneous recording, playback,

storage, copying and remote access without any adverse effect on any of the functions.

2. Management software should provide camera number, location, data & time of recording generated by system server, forced masking (password protected) in recorded video and alarm management.

3. Images recording and storage system‟s performance must be checked daily. 4. Cameras used in the system must be vandal proof, tamperproof, weatherproof

and Day/Night according to the environmental requirements. 5. Cameras must be suitable for operation under extreme temperature, relative

humidity and non-condensing. 6. System must have sufficient storage system for all camera recordings for a

period of 120 days. In MPEG-4 or H.264 format or better quality compression techniques. The recording frame rate and resolution must be programmable from the user level. It should give the ability to customize also quality of the video output based on the viewing needs and storing capacity.

7. Cameras used in the system for outdoor and indoor specific areas must have auto-iris, auto-ICR, auto-exposure, backlight compensation, wide dynamic range, contrast enhancement, digital noise reduction, digital image stabilization, privacy masking, motion detection, digital/optical zoom, multiple gain audio I/O, VPS / interlaced scanning features.

8. The camera representation of the object for monitoring should be as follows:

a. For identification purposes- the figure should cover at least 120% of the screen height.

b. For recognition purposes- the figure should cove at least 50% of the screen height.

c. For detection purposes- the figure should cover at least 10% of the screen height.

d. For monitoring purposes – the figure should cover at least 5% of the screen height.

9. For number plate recognition, the recommended screen image representation

must be at least 50% of the screen height. 10. A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at

any one time in a standard 32” wall screen. At any given circumstances, the number of cameras per display screen will depend primarily as the size of the screen. A separate viewing displays or area may also be required for reviewing recorded video.

11. Remote wide area network (WAN) connectivity must be secured with the latest encryption/decryption techniques to preserve the authenticity without compromising the good quality video transmission over the network.

12. The system must also support NTP (network time protocol) to synchronize the system time of the video to reference time for time stamping.

13. Camera numbering and location details in display and recording must be according to site and location to easily distinguish captured scenes.

14. System must have full function control unit (joystick control unit and touch screen feature.





15. The system should ensure that the image and video being produced is tamperproof and cannot be altered. The recording shall have an audit trail feature.

16. System administration must contain different levels of user privileges and roles in accordance with the user‟s responsibilities.

17. The system must contain search feature of the camera, location, and time and date.

18. The system must have the ability of long term storing on external storge devices as well as copying on different external media.

19. The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like CD/DVD/Blu ray recorders or any other device in a format which can be replayed through a standard PC based software. Log of any such activity should be mentioned by the system which can be audited at a later date.

20. The recoded video should be exported in its native file format. (without converting between format) to maintain image quality and no additional compression should be applied during the export process.

21. The system must have a hot standby system with automatic changeover in case of any fatal failure in the active system.

22. The system must have a corrective and preventive maintenance contract or periodical service level agreement (SLA) for its operational life which include but not limited to the following;

i. Cleaning the equipment ii. Repairing or replacing faulty equipment iii. Fitness for purpose checks iv. Maintaining camera positions and focus v. Upgrading the system software vi. Equipment warranties vii. Maintenance logs and audit report.

a. Indoor Color Network Fixed Dome

1. The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager, 380,000 [659(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a minimum illumination of 0.19 lux with Sensitivity UP Mode ON (8X) and 1.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF.

2. The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings. 3. The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall

feature mask setting and level adjust capability. 4. The camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment for two

specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures between 2200°K ~ 6000°K and manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000°K ~ 10,000°K.

5. The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.

6. The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 20 characters. 7. The Camera's zoom lens shall have a ¼" format and a focal length of 2.8 to

10mm.





8. The zoom lens shall provide digital zoom (3X) for a total maximum magnification of 10.8X. The aperture throughout this range shall vary from a minimum of f/1.3 at the wide angle setting.

9. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas and level adjustment capability.

10. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory. 11. The power source shall be IEEE802.3af compliant (4.2W) or 12VDC @ 350mA

or 24VAC @ 4.2W 12. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2

Video Compression. 13. The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through

a 3.5mm mini jack. 14. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the

following specifications. a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)

15. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions. 16. The camera shall have a built in web server so that access to the IP video stream

can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera. The web browser shall include the ability to electronically zoom the picture at 1x, 1.5x, 2x, 2.5x and 3x.

17. Up to 3 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user, when connected to the Camera without any additional software required.

18. The camera shall have built in Audio input and output jacks and be capable of transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or equivalent ADPCM standard.

19. The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a 1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD Memory Card

20. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps or unlimited.

21. The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.

22. Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, NTP and SNMP.

b. Indoor PTZ Color Network Camera

1. A semi-flush-mounted digital signal processing (DSP) Super Dynamic III color CCD camera. The camera shall incorporate a 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager with Super Dynamic III, 380,000 [768(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each pixel. The camera shall display S/N ratio of 52dB with Super Dynamic III ON, shutter speed OFF.





2. The unitized camera/dome assembly shall be a self-contained unit that incorporates an integral color camera, pan-and-tilt motor, zoom lens and receiver/driver.

3. The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" interline transfer CCD with 768(H) x 494(V) pixels with a micro-lens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a minimum illumination of 0.02 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode ON (32X) at lens F number 1.4 and 0.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF, lens F number 1.4, a minimum illumination of 0.0013 lux in black and white mode with Sensitivity Up Mode ON (32X), 0.04 lux in black & white mode with Sensitivity Mode OFF at lens F number 1.4

4. The camera shall use a pixel based dual speed CCD charged with long and short charges, creating both standard shutter speeds and fast shutter speeds simultaneously, on a single image field.

5. The camera shall automatically apply each exposure pattern to bright and normal areas on a pixel by pixel basis. The camera shall feature a digital signal processor for image processing of both long and short signals, for a wide dynamic range of up to 128 times over standard CCTV cameras.

6. The camera shall feature an image hold capability for retaining images during preset acquisition phase.


feature mask setting and level adjust capability. 9. The unitized camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment

for two specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures between 2700°K ~ 6000°K and Sodium Vapor and other Nighttime illumination through Daylight with color temperatures between 2000°K ~ 6000°K. In addition, manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000°K ~ 10,000°K.

10. The camera shall be equipped with a built-in digital motion detector with mask setting and level adjustment.


12. The camera shall be equipped with image stabilization capable of electronically stabilizing the image should the camera mounting become subject to mechanical vibration.

13. The unitized surveillance device shall feature an electronic shutter adjustable from 1/60 to 1/100 second.

14. The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 16 characters. 15. The camera unit shall include 8 privacy zones that mask areas dynamically with

gray or mosaic; the zones shall change size automatically with camera lens focal length and camera pan/tilt position. The privacy zone shall feature a supervisor override function.

16. The Camera's zoom lens shall have a ¼" format and a focal length of 3.8 to 114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that shall allow manual override if the need arises.

17. The camera shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens position.

18. The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360° endless panning with a tilt range of -5 to +185°.





19. The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized camera units shall not be acceptable.

20. The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of approximately 400° per second.

21. The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine pan control of 0.065° to 120°/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting

22. The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset positions. 23. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per

scene and level adjustment capability. 24. The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a

single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2 lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous tracking mode.

25. The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset positions in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort mode).

26. The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.

27. Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position accuracy

28. The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may rotate 360° endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.

29. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory. 30. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2


BNC connector for local adjustment 32. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the

following specifications. a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)

33. Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.

34. CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slip-ring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode process

35. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions. 36. The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video

stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.

37. Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user, when connected to the Model WV-NS950 Camera without any additional software required.

38. The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet





connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or equivalent ADPCM standard.


40. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps or frame priority mode (4096kbps/unlimited).



43. The power source shall be 220-240VAC, 50Hz at 16W

c. PTZ Vandal-Proof Network Camera

1. 26x day/night camera 2. In low-light conditions, Legend‟s camera automatically switches from color to

monochrome mode. 3. A 26x optical and 12x digital give you total zoom up to 312x. 4. Prone to vibration such as light poles and parking garages. 5. Closed-loop position system 6. Closed-loop system program presets accuracy of ±0.015º 7. Spherical privacy masking 8. Built-in coax and UTP video connections 9. 32 macros; 16 steps per macro; linkable 10. 16 shadow tours; 20 minutes total duration 11. 127 presets with title and individual camera settings 12. Auto return:1 to 60 minutes; any preset, tour, macro, auto pan 13. Continuous zoom adjusted pan/tilt 14. Electronic image flip 15. 120 programmable areas per dome, each with title 16. 24 total privacy masks; 8 displayed simultaneous; with spherical privacy masking 17. 8 built-in alarm inputs 18. 2 relay outputs Environmental Operating temperature, without heater/blower:32

to 122°F (0 to 50°C) 19. Operating temperature, with heater/blower:-40 to 122°F (-40 to 50°C) 20. Resolution:470 TVLNTSC; 460 TVLPAL 21. Synchronization: Internal/line lock 22. Lens:F=3.5 mm (wide)to 91 mm(tele); F1.6 toF3.8 23. Angle of view (H): 42.0°(wide)to 1.6° (tele) 24. Sensitivity:2.0 lux at 1/60 sec NTSC or 1/50 sec PAL; 0.14 lux at 1/4 secNTSC or

1/3 sec PAL 25. Sensitivity, ICR-on:0.7 lux at 1/60 sec NTSC or 1/50 sec PAL; 0.05 lux at1/4 sec

NTSC or 1/3 sec PAL 26. Electronic shutter speed:1/1 to 1/10,000 sec, 14 steps, NTSC; 1/1 to1/10,000

sec, 14 steps, PAL 27. Video output:1.0 Vp-p





D. Outdoor PTZ Color Network Camera

1. The camera shall incorporate a 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager with Super

Dynamic III, 380,000 [768(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each pixel. The camera shall display S/N ratio of 52dB with Super Dynamic III ON, shutter speed OFF.

2. The integrated housing shall have a polycarbonate lens, cast aluminum body and use tamper resistant hardware. The housing shall have a built in sunshield. The housing shall be weatherproof to IP66.The unitized camera/dome assembly shall be a self-contained unit that incorporates an integral color camera, pan-and-tilt motor, zoom lens and receiver/driver.

3. The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" interline transfer CCD with 768(H) x 494(V) pixels with a micro-lens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a minimum illumination of 0.02 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode ON (32X) at lens F number 1.4 and 0.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF, lens F number 1.4, a minimum illumination of 0.0013 lux in black and white mode with Sensitivity Up Mode ON (32X), 0.04 lux in black & white mode with Sensitivity Mode OFF at lens F number 1.4

4. The camera shall use a pixel based dual speed CCD charged with long and short charges, creating both standard shutter speeds and fast shutter speeds simultaneously, on a single image field.

5. The camera shall automatically apply each exposure pattern to bright and normal areas on a pixel by pixel basis. The camera shall feature a digital signal processor for image processing of both long and short signals, for a wide dynamic range of up to 128 times over standard CCTV cameras.

6. The camera shall feature an image hold capability for retaining images during preset acquisition phase.


feature mask setting and level adjust capability. 9. The unitized camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment

for two specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures between 2700°K ~ 6000°K and Sodium Vapor and other Nighttime illumination through Daylight with color temperatures between 2000°K ~ 6000°K. In addition, manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000°K ~ 10,000°K.

10. The camera shall be equipped with a built-in digital motion detector with mask setting and level adjustment.


12. The camera shall be equipped with image stabilization capable of electronically stabilizing the image should the camera mounting become subject to mechanical vibration.

13. The unitized surveillance device shall feature an electronic shutter adjustable from 1/60 to 1/10,000 second.

14. The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 16 characters. 15. The camera unit shall include 8 privacy zones that mask areas dynamically with

gray or mosaic; the zones shall change size automatically with camera lens focal length and camera pan/tilt position. The privacy zone shall feature a supervisor override function.





16. The Camera's zoom lens shall have a ¼" format and a focal length of 3.8 to 114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that shall allow manual override if the need arises.

17. The zoom lens shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens position.

18. The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360° endless panning with a tilt range of -5 to +185°.

19. The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized camera units shall not be acceptable.

20. The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of approximately 400° per second.

21. The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine pan control of 0.065° to 120°/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting.

22. The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset positions. 23. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per

scene and level adjustment capability. 24. The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a

single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2 lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous tracking mode.

25. The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset positions in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort mode).

26. The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.

27. Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position accuracy

28. The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may rotate 360° endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.

29. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory. 30. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2


BNC connector for local adjustment. 32. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the

following specifications.

a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)

33. Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture

characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.





34. CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slip-ring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode process

35. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions. 36. The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video

stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.

37. Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user, when connected to the Model WV-NW960 Camera without any additional software required.

38. The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or equivalent ADPCM standard.


40. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to 64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps or frame priority mode (4096kbps/unlimited).



43. The power source shall be 220V to 240V AC, 50 Hz at 90W (WV-NW960, Heater ON), or 24V AC, 50 Hz at 85W

E. Network Video Recording

1. The recorder shall be capable of connecting up to 64 network cameras without extra license fees and their images can be recorded simultaneously.

2. The cameras shall be equipped with a 1000GB hot plug HDD and 8 additional hot plug HDD slots. It shall allow up to 9TB of HDD storage to be installed in the main unit. The recorder shall have the capability of expansion up to 54TB by adding five optional Hard Disk Extension Units, each with 9 HDD slots.

3. The recorder shall have Intelligent VMD search function that allow motions in a

specified area in the recorded images of the compatible i-Pro cameras* to be quickly searched.

4. The recorder shall be appliance based with an embedded real-time operating system and shall not be based on a Microsoft Windows OS. The OS must reside completely within the hardware and not be installed on the hard disk drives. Installed disk drives must be dedicated to recording video.

5. The recorder shall have MPEG-4 and JPEG multi format capabilities. 6. The recorder shall provide Various Recording Mode: Manual, Schedule, Event

(Pre/Post), Emergency, and External Timer. It shall have the capabilities to control: Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Brightness and Preset Positions. It shall be able to search using: Time & Date, Event Type and Camera number.

7. The recorder shall have eight recording programs including individual recording





mode for each camera, and 6 time schedules per day. 8. The recorder shall have up to 36 audio capabilities and can be recorded and

played back at G.726 (ADPCM) 32 kbps. 9. The recorder shall have various alarm sources to include 32x Terminal inputs,

64x Camera alarm. The alarm actions shall include Alarm recording, E-mail notification, Alarm message, Camera positioning, FTP image transfer, Terminal output, alarm protocol output, Buzzer and LED

10. The recorder shall have 2x built-in network interfaces (10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T) for camera recording and client access.

11. Quick IP Setup for i-Pro network cameras through Easy Setup Utility Tool 12. The recorder shall have the capabilities to transfer recorded images to FTP

server upon alarm and/or live image periodically. Images recorded in the SD memory card in the i-Pro network cameras can be transferred to the recorder automatically even when the recorder is in recording status

13. The recorder shall have User/Host authentication, 4 programmable user levels, 16 user priorities and User-Camera View/Control partitioning setup for sophisticated user management. It shall be capable of up to 32 user registrations.

14. The recorder shall have Alteration detection and recorded data encryption for data security.

15. The recorder shall have RAID5/6 redundant recording for data security. The RAID6 feature allows the recorder to recover from a two-disk failure without any loss of data (minimum four HDDs are required). With hot plug support, drives can be replaced without any downtime, allowing 24/7 operations. It shall have Disk partitioning to include Normal, Event, Pre-Event and Copy for flexible record management

16. The recorder shall be viewable from any properly connected PC using Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later

17. The recorder shall provide for user authentication and support different user privileges based on logon ID. From the client the user should (with proper authentication) be able to do the following:

a. Setup camera b. Define live viewing, recording rates and quality settings. c. Define recording programs and schedules. d. View live video in either single or quad views. e. Search and playback recorded video. f. Download selected recorded video. g. Control connected PTZ cameras

18. The recorder shall provide for optional viewer software that is capable of viewing multiple cameras from multiple recorders on a single screen and provide the following features:

19. Software shall be able to display live video from any camera on any connected recorder.

20. Software shall be able to display 1, 2x2, 3x3 or 4x4 multiplexed video. 21. Software shall show registered recorders on the network as icons in a drop down

menu. Cameras will be shown as icons on the same menu, indented under the attached recorder.

22. Software shall enable user to assign any video from any recorder into any window on the multiplexed display

23. Software shall permit the registration of up to 32 user registration and passwords and provide up to 5 different levels of user privileges.

24. Software shall permit the remote operation of properly configured Pan, Tilt, Zoom





cameras subject to the user privilege level. 25. Software shall provide search capabilities for attached recorders and allow

search by Event, Mark or Motion. It must apply these search criteria across multiple recorders.

26. Software shall permit the playback of up to 16 simultaneous video files. 27. Software must be able to run on an IBM-PC/AT compatible computer with the

following minimum specifications: a. Windows XP Home SP2/ XP Professional SP2/ Vista Ultimate b. Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later c. Intel Core2Duo 2.66GHz Processor d. 1024 x768 16 Bit Graphics Card with Video Monitor e. 2Gbytes or more of RAM f. 64Mbytes or more of VRAM g. 10/100 Ethernet Network Card h. Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later i. Mouse, Keyboard

Monitor

LCD Display 21"/42” TFT Resolution 1280 x 1024 SXGA Colour 16.7 M Contrast Ratio 500 : 1 Effective Display area 337.92 x 270.34 mm Input Signal Video (loop-thru) , S-Video (Loop-thru) and VGA VGA Signal Analogue VGA / 15 Pin-D-Sub connector Audio 1x Phono (loop-thru) 1 Watt max

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. General

The Contractor shall supply, install and test the IP access control system specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The access control system shall be able to control all secured area and main entrance to insure restrictive entry. The Access Control system should manage CCTV & AS ( Alarm System) equipments.

B. System Description The purpose of the access control system is to monitor the access points to the main entrances of staff areas shown on the drawings for 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

The required equipment shall operate as described below:





System Terminology & Abbreviation A. Hardware Components

MCP Main Control Panel DGP Data Gathering Panel RAS Remote Arming Station 4DC Intelligent Four Door Controller 4LC Intelligent Four Lift Controller IBC Intelligent Bank Controller TML Time Lock DGP SDC Single Door Controller Wiegand Interface Converts Wiegand protocol to RS485 LED Light Emitting Diode LCD Liquid Crystal Display EOL End of Line resistor B. Communications PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency CMS Central Monitoring Station RS485 Common Interface standard RS232 Common Interface standard MI bus Multiple Interface bus for communication devices LAN Local Area Network C. Alarm Monitoring Area A separate partition of the system Input or Zone EOL Supervised alarm device or contact. Output Dry Contact relay or 50mA open collector transistor Armed The area(s) is/are set and an intruder will activate an alarm Disarmed The area(s) is/are unset and can be accessed Alarm Input has been activated or there is a system alarm Open A condition where an input is in alarm state Closed A condition where an input is in normal state Inhibit(ed) A condition where an input is disabled Uninhibit(ed) A condition where an input is back in normal mode after being inhibited D. Access Control

DOTL Door Open Too Long FD Forced Door (Door opened without card read, PIN or RTE) Dual Custody Two users required to perform a function or access a door Card/PIN The reader requires both a PIN and a card for access RTE Request To Exit a door or area Void A card is disabled





Valid A card is enabled Proximity Technology where a card is presented in proximity without contact Wiegand Standard output protocol for access control devices

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. The system shall be an IP intelligent security platform that unites intrusion and

access control with smart card operations and remote communications. All of its functions shall work together from a single control panel. The system shall be configured using modular components to provide complete flexibility in features and capabilities. The system shall work with existing equipment and wiring, even interfacing with existing Wiegand-based card reader systems.

2. The system shall provide for the following features:

Use a single card action to lock/unlock doors, arm/disarm alarms and control other operations.

Select who goes where and when, with flexible access control.

Issue ID cards and assign user privileges individually or by groups of employees.

Assign alarm inputs to specific areas or groups of areas.

Virtually eliminate false alarms with all-in-one security control. Users shall no longer be required to remember to disarm a security system after unlocking a door.

Manage your security operations on-site or from remote locations.

SECURITY HARDWARE – MAIN CONTROL PANEL (MCP)

General Overview

Operating Voltage and Current The Main Control Panel shall contain an on-board switched mode power supply with battery charger and obtain power from a 230V 50Hz/23VAC 2.0A transformer.

Physical Enclosure Parameters The enclosure shall be steel fabricated and powder coated beige. Two enclosures are available: Large: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (475w) x (460h) x (160d). Standard: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (315w) x (445h) x (88d).





Inputs

A. Alarm Inputs. The Main Control Panel shall monitor up to sixteen (16) EOL supervised inputs with expansion capabilities for up to two hundred and fifty six (256) Inputs via DGPs. The option of two or four state Input monitoring may be selected. Three EOL resistance values (4.7kΩ, 10kΩ and 2.2kΩ) shall be available.

Outputs Main Control Panel itself shall feature the following outputs:

1. One (1) supervised external siren output 2. One (1) internal siren output 3. One (1) flash/strobe output 4. One (1) programmable relay (12 VDC – 2A) 5. Four (4) programmable Open Collector outputs 6. One (1) switched 12 VDC outputs (to reset latching sensors)

Output Expansion Relay boards and Open Collector boards provide up to two hundred and fifty five (255) programmable outputs per MCP. The relays should have a minimum rating of 12 volts – 50mA, and relays on the Intelligent 4 door/elevator controller shall use relays rated at 12 volts – 10 Amps. All relay should be Form C.

Remote Arming Stations (RAS) The Main Control Panel shall support up to sixteen (16) RAS on the RS485 data bus. At least one LCD RAS shall be connected to each MCP for programming, control and display of system status and events. In addition, various forms of card readers and/or PIN keypads or combinations of both may fill each additional RAS position.

Data Gathering Panels (DGP) 1. The Main Control Panel shall support up to fifteen (15) DGPs on the RS485 data

bus. DGPs provide the ability to expand the number of EOLR supervised inputs 2. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be two hundred and fifty six (256)

per MCP. 3. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be one hundred and twenty eight

(128) per MCP. 4. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be sixty four (64) per MCP. 5. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be thirty two (32) per MCP. 6. Intelligent Door Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four

(4) door access controller (4DC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to forty eight (48) “intelligent” doors in addition to the sixteen (16) doors supported by the MCP. Intelligent features shall include:





a. Users shall be stored locally on each door controller. b. Door groups shall be stored locally on each door controller. c. Time zones shall be stored locally on each door controller. d. Door Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all door

controllers connected to a control panel. e. The ability to use a card plus PIN f. The number of users per region shall be controlled. g. Incorporate door interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports. h. Provide door shunting until the door is closed. i. Provide a door open too long alarm. j. Ability to require the two-card rule.

Intelligent Lift Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four (4) lift access controller (4LC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to sixty four (48) floors per Lift. Intelligent features shall include:

a. Users shall be stored locally on each lift controller b. Floor groups shall be stored locally on each lift controller. c. Time zones shall be stored locally on each lift controller. d. Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all lift controllers

connected to a control panel. e. The ability to use a card plus PIN f. The number of users per region shall be controlled. g. Incorporate lift interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports. h. Ability to require the two-card rule. i. Users shall be allowed to only access allowed floors j. Users shall be stored locally on each Bank controller k. Door groups shall be stored locally on each bank controller l. Time zones shall be stored locally on each bank controller. m. Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all bank controllers

connected to a control panel. n. The ability to use a card plus PIN o. Ability to require the two-card rule.

Outputs DGPs, excluding Wireless DGPs shall have sixteen (16) outputs, available through Relay cards or open collector cards. Intelligent Addressable DGPs shall have up to thirty two (32) outputs available through IADS Output devices. Intelligent Controllers shall have four (4) relays for switching door locks. All DGPs with built-in power supply shall have a siren output.





Data Bus Communications

All devices on the RS485 data bus shall be polled continuously to ensure correct operation. Should any of the bus devices fail to respond to a series of polls from the Main Control Panel, a trouble alarm shall be generated on the system specifying the off-line device details. The alarm shall be notified on LCD display, keypad trouble LED and be reported to a Central Station.\ The system shall operate in real time mode and distribute processing activity to the intelligent controllers. It shall also be capable of communicating to all remote devices using an integrated fiber optic module.

SYSTEM MONITORING

General Overview The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting all the alarm, access and system events to a Host PC running a Management Software.

Local Host PC It shall be possible to have a permanent direct connection between the Main Control Panel and the Host PC using an optional Computer and Printer interface installed onto the MCP. Connection over IP shall be provided by an optional IP interface A 10-digit password is required to allow initial connection. The number of connection attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.

Temporary Remote PC It shall also be possible to have a temporary remote connection between the Main Control Panel and a PC via leased line, PSTN, ISDN or GSM using the built-in or an optional plug-on digital dialler. 1. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing installers or service

providers to dial into the system from a PC running the Management Software. There shall be two ways of dealing with a remote connection request;

An authorized user shall clear the incoming call via a LCD RAS.

The Main Control Panel shall call back the originator of the call on a pre-programmed phone number. In both cases, a 10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed ) to 255.)

An authorized user shall be capable to initiate a connection to a remote PC running the Management software either by calling a pre-programmed phone number or by entering a new phone number through a LCD RAS.





2. Regardless of the type of connection, it shall be possible to programme the system in such a way that any change to the system database is impossible if any area is armed.

Permanent Remote PC It shall be possible to have a permanent remote connection between the Main Control Panel and a PC via the optional Computer and Printer port and an optional IP interface. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing local operators and/or remote operators to connect to the system from a PC running the Management Software. A 10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255. 1. Multiple Control Panels The Host PC and its Management Software shall be capable of monitoring up to sixty four (64) Control Panels simultaneously. It shall be possible to have any combination of direct and remote connections between the Host PC and the sixty four (64) Control Panels. If dial-up is required, the PC shall support the required number of modems.

ALARM REPORTING

General overview The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting alarm and specified events to commercial Central Monitoring Stations. These would be events such as:

a. Input(s) in alarm or in fault condition b. Input(s) inhibited (report immediately or when system armed) c. Areas armed or disarmed d. Areas armed or disarmed out of normal hours e. RAS, DGP, 4DC or SDC off line, de-polled, inhibited or in fault condition f. Controllers with AC fail, low battery, fuse fail, tamper, siren fail or CPU restart g. RAS with duress code entered h. Dead-man alarm i. System test started, over, incomplete or completed j. Service technician on-site or off-site k. Remote Log-in and log-out attempts l. Program mode entered and exited m. Time or Date Changed o SIA and XSIA Event Codes n. Contact ID Event Codes o FSK 200 baud Event Codes o. VdS Event Codes A total of four Central Station shall be available, each

having a primary and backup number.





Main Control Panel Event Storage The Main Control Panel shall be capable of holding 255 reporting events within the buffer.

1. PSTN Connection A PSTN connection to a CMS shall be done using the built-in digital dialer. The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the PSTN line and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails. PSTN shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.

2. ISDN-B or ISDN-B/D Connection. An ISDN-B or ISDN-D channel connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the ISDN line and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.

3. ISDN-B or ISDN-D shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.

GSM Connection A GSM connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the GSM line and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails. GSM shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.

IP Connection An IP connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional add-on IP Interface (in addition to an RS232 Computer Interface) . The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the IP Connection and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the connection is not capable of communicating to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails. IP shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.





Reporting Formats and Logic a. Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting events and alarms using a

variety of formats such as SIA (large or small), XSIA (large or small), Contact ID (large or small), FSK 200 baud, VdS 2465 (large or small), X.25 ENAI or Voice Reporting (with or without acknowledge)

b. The Main Control Panel shall support up to four CMS, with each CMS having two

phone numbers. This gives eight possible connections through which an event can be reported. It shall be possible to programme different formats including Voice Reporting, to report via each CMS. Each CMS can be used to report via any medium (PSTN, ISDN, GSM or IP), including for backup purposes. The Main Control Panel shall support Multiple as well as Dual Central Stations Reporting.

Multiple Central Stations Reporting is where an event will be market as reported once it has been successfully sent to any of the CMS programmed 7. Dual Central Stations Reporting is where an event must successfully report to all the CMS, programmed as Dual Reporting, before it is marked as reported and removed from the queue.

8. Voice Reporting Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of playing back pre-recorded voices messages through optional module(s) connected on the MI expansion bus. It shall be possible to connect two (2) Voice Reporting modules per MCP and there shall be a minimum of eight (8) Messages per module; the leader message, the address message and six alarm messages. If a second module is installed, all eight messages for the second module will be alarm messages. The total recording time per module shall be thirty five (35) seconds. Voice messages shall be programmed to report on the occurrence of specific reporting codes. Several reporting codes may have the same voice message programmed. Reporting codes 1-11 are general alarms (BA, FA, TA…), while reporting codes 12-21 are zone specific, that is, you can link a reporting code to specific zones. This means that any zone activation or event happening in the MCP shall be able to trigger a voice message.

REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS FACILITY

General Overview The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall upload the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility shall be in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values like the input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the RS485 data





bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a remote location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.

Checked Parameters The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;

a. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel. b. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel and

the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute. c. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries. d. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line. e. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line. f. Identify any input on soak test. g. Identify any inhibited input. h. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances (Ohms). i. Check anti-mask of motion detectors. j. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last six

(6) hours before arming. k. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the MCP). The diagnostic facility shall also be able – upon specific request - to activate the sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA “RX” test message to the Central Monitoring Station.

Standard Memory As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following numbers of system parameters; a. 50 Individual Users. b. 74 Alarm Groups c. 10 Door Group d. 10 Floor Groups e. 250 Alarm event buffer f. 10 Access event buffer g. 24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods. h. 64 Holidays. i. 365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities

Intelligent Controller Note The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUM‟s (read below), the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory configuration.





Software IUM When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits or checksums included in the card data.

Expanded 1MB memory An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel to increase the following system numbers; a. 11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM mode

enabled) b. 2000 Individual Users with both Card & PIN code (with Soft IUM mode enabled)

4MB IUM memory An optional 4 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to the following functions: a. 17,873 Individual Users. b. Each User may be assigned both a Card & programmable PIN code

8MB IUM memory An optional 8 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to the following functions:

a. 65,535 Individual Users.

DATA BUS COMMUNICATIONS

General Data Bus Parameters The Main Control Panel shall communicate with all remote devices by using a data bus. This network shall use RS485 data bus multi-drop protocol at a data rate of 4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration. A 470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the impedance. 1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device, whether

a RAS, DGP or Intelligent controller shall be no more than 1.5Km on approved cable.





2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2 pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a common point.

3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all

POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall be able to display numerically all errors per device.

Fibre Optic Capability The Main Control Panel, or any other devices, such as RAS units, DGPs or intelligent controllers, shall have the capability of communicating on a Fibre Optic bus using RS485/Fibre Optic converters. The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.

Leased Line Modems When data bus device distances in excess of 1.5Km are required, or a different media is utilized, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of communicating with remote devices via Leased Line modems. Interfaces may be used to convert the RS485 data bus to an RS232 protocol and vice versa.

Area Operation/Control

For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following: 1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes. 2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers. 3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed

independently (area link). 4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s 5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s 6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as „Access

Granted‟, „Region Counting‟ and different Badging techniques. 7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system event 8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event 9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit 0. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open 11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open 12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition 13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time zone





14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed 15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open 16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited 17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm 18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time 19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time 20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning) 21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode

System Area Reporting Local The status of every area shall be shown clearly on the RAS. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of displaying the status of individual areas on card readers, LED RAS units as well as third party equipment such as consoles and mimic panels etc, by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and monitored by the Host PC.


General Overview The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall upload the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility shall be in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values like the input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the RS485 data bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a remote location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.


Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.

Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.

Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.

Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.

Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.

Identify any input on soak test.

Identify any inhibited input.

Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances (Ohms).

Check anti-mask of motion detectors.

Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last six (6) hours before arming.

Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the MCP).





The diagnostic facility shall also be able – upon specific request - to activate the sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA “RX” test message to the Central Monitoring Station.

Standard Memory As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following numbers of system parameters;

50 Individual Users.

74 Alarm Groups

10 Door Group

10 Floor Groups

250 Alarm event buffer

10 Access event buffer

24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.

64 Holidays.

365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities

Intelligent Controller Note

The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUM‟s (read below), the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory configuration.

Software IUM

When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits or checksums included in the card data.

Expanded 1MB memory An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel to increase the following system numbers:

a. 11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM mode



General Data Bus Parameters The Main Control Panel shall communicate with all remote devices by using a data bus. This network shall use RS485 data bus multi-drop protocol at a data rate of





4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration. A 470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the impedance. 1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device, whether


2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2

pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a common point.

3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall be able to display numerically all errors per device.




For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:

1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes 2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers 3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed

independently (area link). 4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s 5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s 6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as

„Access Granted‟, „Region Counting‟ and different Badging techniques.





7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system event

8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event 9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit 10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open 11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open 12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition 13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time

zone 14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed 15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open 16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited 17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm 18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time 19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time 20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning) 21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode


Biometric Reader

Keypad finger biometric reader The biometric key pad reader should integrate easily into access control systems. The fingerprint must be enrolled and stored on contactless smart card or directly on the reader and this can be done through the software included with the reader or through an Administrator Mode accessible through the keypad and display. Once a fingerprint is enrolled, authentication may be performed any number of times. Authentication may be initiated either through the keypad (if a template is stored directly on the reader) or by presenting a smart card to the reader. After authentication, the smart card biometric shall send a Wiegand string to the Access Control System or other host equipment for appropriate action.

Fingerprint Template Capacity The unit shall support an unlimited number of users since the fingerprint template file is stored on the smart card itself rather than on the reader‟s local memory. A maximum of two fingerprint templates may be stored per contactless smart card. If templates are stored on the reader‟s local memory, whereby the verification is initiated by providing an ID number via keypad entry, the unit shall store up to 3550 fingerprint templates.





Supported Cards The Unit shall support the following contactless smart cards: HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 2-Application Area cards HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 16-Application Area cards Honeywell Access Systems 16kbits (2kBytes) OmniSmart cards

Memory The reader shall utilize non-volatile flash memory to store all templates and data configurations and shall therefore not lose any templates or configuration information if the reader is powered down. The SiteKey shall be stored within the internal memory of the reader and shall be encrypted and stored on the smart card itself. For security purposes, the SiteKey shall not be stored within the Admin software or PC, and may NOT be retrieved by the reader.

Admin Management Software The Software supports Windows 98/NT4.0/ME/2000/XP. IT Manages a network of biometric readers Secure smart cards with a SiteKey. Configure biometric smart card reader security settings Read/Write the fingerprint template information to a smart card Enroll new user fingerprint templates Edit existing user fingerprint templates Delete user fingerprint templates Distribute the user templates from the reader or PC to other readers in the installation Adjust the parameters (communications, biometrics, Wiegand, line trigger, etc.) of an individual reader or all readers connected on a network Configure the operation of the biometric top LED Create user access, holiday, and biometric schedules Download the reader transaction log Upload alternate menu prompts (i.e., Arabic menu prompt) Perform firmware upgrades

Other Supported Formats The Unit shall support the following Pre-Defined Wiegand formats:

a. Standard 26-bit b. Apollo 44-bit c. Northern 34-bit d. Northern 34-bit (no parity) e. Andover 37-bit* f. Generic 64-bit* g. Ademco 34-bit h. HID Corporate 1000 35-bit i. HID 37-bit j. Wiegand 4002 40-bit* k. Generic 34-bit*





Custom Pre-Defined Formats The reader shall support the use of a Custom Wiegand Format.

Pass-Thru Formats The reader shall support a Pass-Thru mode. In this mode, critical information about the format is provided to the biometric unit, which shall allow the reader to correctly generate the card ID required to send to the Access Control System. To support your proprietary Wiegand format in a Pass-Thru mode.

Smart Card

Features:

a. 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity.

b. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication, encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities.

c. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure HID access control application area.

d. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte) or 16k bit (2k Byte) configurations. e. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal

transfer printers. f. Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.

All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:

a. Available in two application area configuration only. b. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other

application area for user customization. c. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications. d. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control

installation. All 16k bit (2k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:

a. Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates. b. Available in a two or sixteen application area configuration. c. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the

HID standard access control application, and support future growth. d. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.





Smart Card Reader

Features Security 64-bit authentication keys are extremely secure. All RF data transmission between the card and reader should be encrypted, using a secure algorithm.

Typical Maximum Read Range 2.5-4.5” (6.3-11.4 cm) with smart Card

Indoor/Outdoor Design Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh environments, provides reliable performance and resistance to vandalism. Permanent magnet built into housing facilitates tamper alarm when used with a magnetic reed switch.

Parking Reader

Specifications Operating frequency Europe: 2.400 – 2.482 GHz US: 2.438 – 2.457 GHz Housing with ABS cover Protection IP65 [approx. NEMA4x] Detection range Up to 10 meters [33 ft] , 2 TO 3 m for the proposing system Range check Acoustic by built-in beeper Operating temperature -30…+60°C [-22…+140°F] Object speed UP to 200 km/h [125 mph] at appropriate distance Power Europe: 230 VAC +10%, 100 mA, 50-60 Hz / 22…30 VDC, max 1A US: 22..30 VDC, max. 1A Power consumption <25VA (on AC), <20 Watt (on DC) Frequency offset 138 channels [US 32 channels] channel spacing 600 kHz to avoid interference, to be used when TRANSIT readers are installed in close vicinity of each other Polarisation Circular (LHC) Input 1 dry contact or TTL Relay output 1 relay output (NO, common, NC), 24 VDC 2A, 120 VAC 1A Output Barcode 39, Wiegand 26-bit, Wiegand 32-bit, Wiegand 37-bit, FF56 and Omron ISO 7811/2 Antenna connection Optional 1 external inductive antenna connection Antenna output 120 kHz





Interfaces RS232, RS422, 20mA CL, Profibus DP, Multidrop and TCP/IP Communication protocols CR/LF, DC2/DC4, TCP/IP, Profibus DP and various OEM protocols (for more information see firmware manuals) Mounting : Wall mounting set included Pole mounting set and weather proof protection hood optional available

Certifications European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC, EN50081-1, EN50082-1 and EN50082-2. ETS0908

Barrier 3.0 Mt. Maximum arm length or two nos. for more width entry and exit , opeing time approximately 3 seconds 2mm thickness A 1 quality steel – cabinet Need to fix in 20cm in concrete A Microprocessor controlled electronics, A high torque continuous two way operation AC motor is utilized in the barrier.

Door Locks

Holding force 550kg

Voltage DC12v

Power 12v/240mA Necessary L&Z Brackets need to provided for the access doors. Emergency exit should be provide at all the exits

Walk Through Metal Detectors

Metal detectors shall have the following features and conform to the specified performance approvals and certifications.

1. FEATURES

a. Pin-Point targets on the left/right/center from head to toe using LED

indicators on both columns. b. Multiple zones can be independently adjusted from base sensitivity level.





c. Multiple target pinpointing with 33 distinct detection zones. d. Eye level pacing lights using international symbols for wait ( ) and proceed

( ). e. Count number of patrons, number of alarms, and calculate an alarm

percentage. f. Simple to use touchpad controls using LCD displays and LED indicators. g. Physical key lock and software access levels. h. Physical key locked overhead cabinets housing all cables, connectors, and

circuit boards. i. Multiple units able to operate in close proximity. j. Multiple discrimination programs to meet all application requirements

including TSA EMD. k. Ability to alter multiple coil combinations through program adjustments. l. Manufactured by ISO 9001 Certified company.

2. PERFORMANCE

a. Meets or exceeds all international regulation performance requirements,

including: 1. TSA EMD – Transportation Security Administration Enhanced Metal

Detection System. 2. FAA – Federal Aviation Administration. 3. CE Approved. 4. CSA Approved. 5. CB Certified. 6. Safe for Medical Implants, Pregnant Women, and all Magnetic Media.

b. Multi-Dimensional Coil Design able to detect guns, knives, and other flat and rod shaped weapons.

c. Field Uniformity providing equal detection capabilities for floor level screening.

d. External Interference Cancellation using Digital Signal Processing technology (DSP).

e. Target Detection is independent of pass-through speed.

3. OPTIONS

a. Networking capabilities for local connections, across LAN/WAN, or Internet. b. Battery Back up capability for inadvertent power loss c. Portable wheel system for frequent relocation d. Capability to fasten to all types of floors without damage

Test on Site

1. The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment and labor for the in site testing of heads and sensors of all types.

2. A set of shorting plugs with connectors shall be supplied for checking

the wiring to sensor and automatic station sockets.





3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply all necessary test

bench equipment for checking and calibration of all items of the system.

All full tanks must be as per Woqod specification and the contractor shall obtain approval from Woqod before any installation for generator full tank, full network & fill point location and size.

a. Build Quality

The complete power generation system, including engine, alternator and control panel shall be supplied by same manufacturer and the authorized dealer who has been regularly engaged in the supply and support of complete diesel generator power system products. All components shall be designed to achieve optimum components and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated the design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated, assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacturer does not waive any requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be individually and separately listed as part of compliance statement.

b. Responsibility

The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary system supplier. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total system.

c. Sub-Assembly & Packaging

Generator set mounted sub-assemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake system, exhaust outlet fittings, and the generator set mounted controls shall be designed, built, and assembled as a complete unit by the engine - generator manufacturer.

d. Production Tests

The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be made available when requested and shall also be included in the O&M Manual.

e. Drawings

All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and switch gear must conform to a common and approved format.





f. Submittals

Submittals for approval shall be made in accordance with CSI Division 1. Submittals shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including switchgear.

2. Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data

sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant component design and performance data.

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. General

The Contractor shall supply, install and test the IP access control system specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The access control system shall be able to control all secured area and main entrance to insure restrictive entry. The Access Control system should manage CCTV & AS ( Alarm System) equipments.

B. System Description The purpose of the access control system is to monitor the access points to the main entrances of staff areas shown on the drawings for 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

The required equipment shall operate as described below:

System Terminology & Abbreviation C. Hardware Components

MCP Main Control Panel DGP Data Gathering Panel RAS Remote Arming Station 4DC Intelligent Four Door Controller 4LC Intelligent Four Lift Controller IBC Intelligent Bank Controller TML Time Lock DGP SDC Single Door Controller Wiegand Interface Converts Wiegand protocol to RS485 LED Light Emitting Diode LCD Liquid Crystal Display EOL End of Line resistor D. Communications PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network





ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency CMS Central Monitoring Station RS485 Common Interface standard RS232 Common Interface standard MI bus Multiple Interface bus for communication devices LAN Local Area Network C. Alarm Monitoring Area A separate partition of the system Input or Zone EOL Supervised alarm device or contact. Output Dry Contact relay or 50mA open collector transistor Armed The area(s) is/are set and an intruder will activate an alarm Disarmed The area(s) is/are unset and can be accessed Alarm Input has been activated or there is a system alarm Open A condition where an input is in alarm state Closed A condition where an input is in normal state Inhibit(ed) A condition where an input is disabled Uninhibit(ed) A condition where an input is back in normal mode after being inhibited D. Access Control

DOTL Door Open Too Long FD Forced Door (Door opened without card read, PIN or RTE) Dual Custody Two users required to perform a function or access a door Card/PIN The reader requires both a PIN and a card for access RTE Request To Exit a door or area Void A card is disabled Valid A card is enabled Proximity Technology where a card is presented in proximity without contact Wiegand Standard output protocol for access control devices

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. The system shall be an IP intelligent security platform that unites intrusion and

access control with smart card operations and remote communications. All of its functions shall work together from a single control panel. The system shall be configured using modular components to provide complete flexibility in features and capabilities. The system shall work with existing equipment and wiring, even interfacing with existing Wiegand-based card reader systems.

2. The system shall provide for the following features:

a. Use a single card action to lock/unlock doors, arm/disarm alarms and control other operations.

b. Select who goes where and when, with flexible access control.





c. Issue ID cards and assign user privileges individually or by groups of employees.

d. Assign alarm inputs to specific areas or groups of areas. e. Virtually eliminate false alarms with all-in-one security control. Users shall no

longer be required to remember to disarm a security system after unlocking a door.

f. Manage your security operations on-site or from remote locations.

SECURITY HARDWARE – MAIN CONTROL PANEL (MCP)

General Overview

Operating Voltage and Current The Main Control Panel shall contain an on-board switched mode power supply with battery charger and obtain power from a 230V 50Hz/23VAC 2.0A transformer.

Physical Enclosure Parameters The enclosure shall be steel fabricated and powder coated beige. Two enclosures are available: Large: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (475w) x (460h) x (160d). Standard: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (315w) x (445h) x (88d).

Inputs

A. Alarm Inputs. The Main Control Panel shall monitor up to sixteen (16) EOL supervised inputs with expansion capabilities for up to two hundred and fifty six (256) Inputs via DGPs. The option of two or four state Input monitoring may be selected. Three EOL resistance values (4.7kΩ, 10kΩ and 2.2kΩ) shall be available.

Outputs Main Control Panel itself shall feature the following outputs:

a. One (1) supervised external siren output b. One (1) internal siren output c. One (1) flash/strobe output d. One (1) programmable relay (12 VDC – 2A) e. Four (4) programmable Open Collector outputs f. One (1) switched 12 VDC outputs (to reset latching sensors)





Output Expansion Relay boards and Open Collector boards provide up to two hundred and fifty five (255) programmable outputs per MCP. The relays should have a minimum rating of 12 volts – 50mA, and relays on the Intelligent 4 door/elevator controller shall use relays rated at 12 volts – 10 Amps. All relay should be Form C.

Remote Arming Stations (RAS) The Main Control Panel shall support up to sixteen (16) RAS on the RS485 data bus. At least one LCD RAS shall be connected to each MCP for programming, control and display of system status and events. In addition, various forms of card readers and/or PIN keypads or combinations of both may fill each additional RAS position.

Data Gathering Panels (DGP) 1. The Main Control Panel shall support up to fifteen (15) DGPs on the RS485 data

bus. DGPs provide the ability to expand the number of EOLR supervised inputs 2. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be two hundred and fifty six (256)

per MCP. 3. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be one hundred and twenty eight

(128) per MCP. 4. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be sixty four (64) per MCP. 5. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be thirty two (32) per MCP. 6. Intelligent Door Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four

(4) door access controller (4DC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to forty eight (48) “intelligent” doors in addition to the sixteen (16) doors supported by the MCP. Intelligent features shall include:

a. Users shall be stored locally on each door controller. b. Door groups shall be stored locally on each door controller. c. Time zones shall be stored locally on each door controller. d. Door Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all door

controllers connected to a control panel. e. The ability to use a card plus PIN f. The number of users per region shall be controlled. g. Incorporate door interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports. h. Provide door shunting until the door is closed. i. Provide a door open too long alarm. j. Ability to require the two-card rule.

Intelligent Lift Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four (4) lift access controller (4LC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to sixty four (48) floors per Lift. Intelligent features shall include:

a. Users shall be stored locally on each lift controller b. Floor groups shall be stored locally on each lift controller. c. Time zones shall be stored locally on each lift controller.





d. Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all lift controllers connected to a control panel.

e. The ability to use a card plus PIN f. The number of users per region shall be controlled. g. Incorporate lift interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports. h. Ability to require the two-card rule. i. Users shall be allowed to only access allowed floors j. Users shall be stored locally on each Bank controller k. Door groups shall be stored locally on each bank controller l. Time zones shall be stored locally on each bank controller. m. Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all bank controllers

connected to a control panel. n. The ability to use a card plus PIN o. Ability to require the two-card rule.

Outputs

DGPs, excluding Wireless DGPs shall have sixteen (16) outputs, available through Relay cards or open collector cards. Intelligent Addressable DGPs shall have up to thirty two (32) outputs available through IADS Output devices. Intelligent Controllers shall have four (4) relays for switching door locks. All DGPs with built-in power supply shall have a siren output.

Data Bus Communications

All devices on the RS485 data bus shall be polled continuously to ensure correct operation. Should any of the bus devices fail to respond to a series of polls from the Main Control Panel, a trouble alarm shall be generated on the system specifying the off-line device details. The alarm shall be notified on LCD display, keypad trouble LED and be reported to a Central Station.\ The system shall operate in real time mode and distribute processing activity to the intelligent controllers. It shall also be capable of communicating to all remote devices using an integrated fiber optic module.

SYSTEM MONITORING

General Overview The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting all the alarm, access and system events to a Host PC running a Management Software.





Local Host PC It shall be possible to have a permanent direct connection between the Main Control Panel and the Host PC using an optional Computer and Printer interface installed onto the MCP. Connection over IP shall be provided by an optional IP interface A 10-digit password is required to allow initial connection. The number of connection attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.

Temporary Remote PC It shall also be possible to have a temporary remote connection between the Main Control Panel and a PC via leased line, PSTN, ISDN or GSM using the built-in or an optional plug-on digital dialler. 1. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing installers or service

providers to dial into the system from a PC running the Management Software. There shall be two ways of dealing with a remote connection request; a. An authorized user shall clear the incoming call via a LCD RAS. b. The Main Control Panel shall call back the originator of the call on a pre-

programmed phone number. In both cases, a 10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed ) to 255.)

An authorized user shall be capable to initiate a connection to a remote PC running the Management software either by calling a pre-programmed phone number or by entering a new phone number through a LCD RAS.

2. Regardless of the type of connection, it shall be possible to programme the

system in such a way that any change to the system database is impossible if any area is armed.

Permanent Remote PC It shall be possible to have a permanent remote connection between the Main Control Panel and a PC via the optional Computer and Printer port and an optional IP interface. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing local operators and/or remote operators to connect to the system from a PC running the Management Software. A 10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.

Multiple Control Panels The Host PC and its Management Software shall be capable of monitoring up to sixty four (64) Control Panels simultaneously. It shall be possible to have any





combination of direct and remote connections between the Host PC and the sixty four (64) Control Panels. If dial-up is required, the PC shall support the required number of modems.

ALARM REPORTING

General overview The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting alarm and specified events to commercial Central Monitoring Stations. These would be events such as:

a. Input(s) in alarm or in fault condition b. Input(s) inhibited (report immediately or when system armed) c. Areas armed or disarmed d. Areas armed or disarmed out of normal hours e. RAS, DGP, 4DC or SDC off line, de-polled, inhibited or in fault condition f. Controllers with AC fail, low battery, fuse fail, tamper, siren fail or CPU

restart g. RAS with duress code entered h. Dead-man alarm i. System test started, over, incomplete or completed j. Service technician on-site or off-site k. Remote Log-in and log-out attempts l. Program mode entered and exited m. Time or Date Changed o SIA and XSIA Event Codes n. Contact ID Event Codes o FSK 200 baud Event Codes o. VdS Event Codes A total of four Central Station shall be available, each

having a primary and backup number.

Main Control Panel Event Storage The Main Control Panel shall be capable of holding 255 reporting events within the buffer.

1. PSTN Connection A PSTN connection to a CMS shall be done using the built-in digital dialer. The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the PSTN line and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails. PSTN shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.

4. ISDN-B or ISDN-B/D Connection. An ISDN-B or ISDN-D channel connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control





Panel shall monitor the status of the ISDN line and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.

5. ISDN-B or ISDN-D shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.

GSM Connection A GSM connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the GSM line and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails. GSM shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station.

IP Connection An IP connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional add-on IP Interface (in addition to an RS232 Computer Interface) . The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the IP Connection and display “Report Fail” on all LCD RAS units if the connection is not capable of communicating to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails. IP shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central Station. Reporting Formats and Logic a. Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting events and alarms using a

variety of formats such as SIA (large or small), XSIA (large or small), Contact ID (large or small), FSK 200 baud, VdS 2465 (large or small), X.25 ENAI or Voice Reporting (with or without acknowledge)

b. The Main Control Panel shall support up to four CMS, with each CMS having two

phone numbers. This gives eight possible connections through which an event can be reported. It shall be possible to programme different formats including Voice Reporting, to report via each CMS. Each CMS can be used to report via any medium (PSTN, ISDN, GSM or IP), including for backup purposes. The Main Control Panel shall support Multiple as well as Dual Central Stations Reporting.

Multiple Central Stations Reporting is where an event will be market as reported once it has been successfully sent to any of the CMS programmed





7. Dual Central Stations Reporting is where an event must successfully report to all the CMS, programmed as Dual Reporting, before it is marked as reported and removed from the queue.

8. Voice Reporting Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of playing back pre-recorded voices messages through optional module(s) connected on the MI expansion bus. It shall be possible to connect two (2) Voice Reporting modules per MCP and there shall be a minimum of eight (8) Messages per module; the leader message, the address message and six alarm messages. If a second module is installed, all eight messages for the second module will be alarm messages. The total recording time per module shall be thirty five (35) seconds. Voice messages shall be programmed to report on the occurrence of specific reporting codes. Several reporting codes may have the same voice message programmed. Reporting codes 1-11 are general alarms (BA, FA, TA…), while reporting codes 12-21 are zone specific, that is, you can link a reporting code to specific zones. This means that any zone activation or event happening in the MCP shall be able to trigger a voice message.




a. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel. b. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel

and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute. c. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries. d. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line. e. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line. f. Identify any input on soak test. g. Identify any inhibited input. h. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances

(Ohms). i. Check anti-mask of motion detectors.





j. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last six (6) hours before arming.

k. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the MCP).


Standard memory As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following numbers of system parameters;

a. 50 Individual Users. b. 74 Alarm Groups c. 10 Door Group d. 10 Floor Groups e. 250 Alarm event buffer f. 10 Access event buffer g. 24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods. h. 64 Holidays. i. 365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities

Intelligent Controller Note The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUM‟s (read below), the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory configuration.

Software IUM When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits or checksums included in the card data.

Expanded 1MB memory An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel to increase the following system numbers; a. 11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM mode






4MB IUM memory An optional 4 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to the following functions: a. 17,873 Individual Users. b. Each User may be assigned both a Card & programmable PIN code

8MB IUM memory An optional 8 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to the following functions:

a. 65,535 Individual Users.






3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all

POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall be able to display numerically all errors per device.

Fibre Optic Capability The Main Control Panel, or any other devices, such as RAS units, DGPs or intelligent controllers, shall have the capability of communicating on a Fibre Optic bus using RS485/Fibre Optic converters.





The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.




1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes. 2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers. 3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed


„Access Granted‟, „Region Counting‟ and different Badging techniques. 7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system

event 8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event 9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit 10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open 11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open 12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition 13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time

zone 14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed 15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open 16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited 17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm 18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time 19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time 20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning) 21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode

System Area Reporting Local The status of every area shall be shown clearly on the RAS. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of displaying the status of individual areas on card readers, LED RAS units as well as third party equipment such as consoles and mimic panels etc,





by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and monitored by the Host PC.




1. Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel. 2. Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel

and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute. 3. Check that the system log is still accepting new entries. 4. Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line. 5. Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line. 6. Identify any input on soak test. 7. Identify any inhibited input. 8. Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances

(Ohms). 9. Check anti-mask of motion detectors. 10. Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last

six (6) hours before arming. 11. Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the

MCP).


Standard Memory As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following numbers of system parameters;

1. 50 Individual Users. 2. 74 Alarm Groups 3. 10 Door Group 4. 10 Floor Groups 5. 250 Alarm event buffer 6. 10 Access event buffer





7. 24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods. 8. 64 Holidays. 9. 365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities

Intelligent Controller Note

The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUM‟s (read below), the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory configuration.

Software IUM

When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits or checksums included in the card data.

Expanded 1MB memory An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel to increase the following system numbers;

1. 11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM mode

enabled) 2. 2000 Individual Users with both Card & PIN code (with Soft IUM mode enabled)










3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall be able to display numerically all errors per device.





1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes 2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers 3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed


„Access Granted‟, „Region Counting‟ and different Badging techniques. 7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system

event 8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event 9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit 10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open 11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open 12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition 13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time

zone 14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed 15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open 16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited 17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm 18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time 19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time





20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning) 21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode


Biometric Reader

Keypad finger biometric reader The biometric key pad reader should integrate easily into access control systems. The fingerprint must be enrolled and stored on contactless smart card or directly on the reader and this can be done through the software included with the reader or through an Administrator Mode accessible through the keypad and display. Once a fingerprint is enrolled, authentication may be performed any number of times. Authentication may be initiated either through the keypad (if a template is stored directly on the reader) or by presenting a smart card to the reader. After authentication, the smart card biometric shall send a Wiegand string to the Access Control System or other host equipment for appropriate action.

Fingerprint Template Capacity The unit shall support an unlimited number of users since the fingerprint template file is stored on the smart card itself rather than on the reader‟s local memory. A maximum of two fingerprint templates may be stored per contactless smart card. If templates are stored on the reader‟s local memory, whereby the verification is initiated by providing an ID number via keypad entry, the unit shall store up to 3550 fingerprint templates.

Supported Cards The Unit shall support the following contactless smart cards: HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 2-Application Area cards HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 16-Application Area cards Honeywell Access Systems 16kbits (2kBytes) OmniSmart cards

Memory The reader shall utilize non-volatile flash memory to store all templates and data configurations and shall therefore not lose any templates or configuration information if the reader is powered down.





The SiteKey shall be stored within the internal memory of the reader and shall be encrypted and stored on the smart card itself. For security purposes, the SiteKey shall not be stored within the Admin software or PC, and may NOT be retrieved by the reader.

Admin Management Software The Software supports Windows 98/NT4.0/ME/2000/XP. IT Manages a network of biometric readers Secure smart cards with a SiteKey. Configure biometric smart card reader security settings Read/Write the fingerprint template information to a smart card Enroll new user fingerprint templates Edit existing user fingerprint templates Delete user fingerprint templates Distribute the user templates from the reader or PC to other readers in the installation Adjust the parameters (communications, biometrics, Wiegand, line trigger, etc.) of an individual reader or all readers connected on a network Configure the operation of the biometric top LED Create user access, holiday, and biometric schedules Download the reader transaction log Upload alternate menu prompts (i.e., Arabic menu prompt) Perform firmware upgrades

Other Supported Formats The Unit shall support the following Pre-Defined Wiegand formats:

a. Standard 26-bit b. Apollo 44-bit c. Northern 34-bit d. Northern 34-bit (no parity) e. Andover 37-bit* f. Generic 64-bit* g. Ademco 34-bit h. HID Corporate 1000 35-bit i. HID 37-bit j. Wiegand 4002 40-bit* k. Generic 34-bit*

Custom Pre-Defined Formats The reader shall support the use of a Custom Wiegand Format.

Pass-Thru Formats The reader shall support a Pass-Thru mode. In this mode, critical information about the format is provided to the biometric unit, which shall allow the reader to correctly generate the card ID required to send to the Access Control System. To support your proprietary Wiegand format in a Pass-Thru mode.





Smart Card

Features:

a. 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity.

b. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication, encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities.

c. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure HID access control application area.

d. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte) or 16k bit (2k Byte) configurations. e. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal

transfer printers. f. Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.

All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:

a. Available in two application area configuration only. b. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other

application area for user customization. c. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications. d. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control

installation. All 16k bit (2k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:

a. Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates. b. Available in a two or sixteen application area configuration. c. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the

HID standard access control application, and support future growth. d. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.

Smart Card Reader

Features Security 64-bit authentication keys are extremely secure. All RF data transmission between the card and reader should be encrypted, using a secure algorithm.

Typical Maximum Read Range 2.5-4.5” (6.3-11.4 cm) with smart Card





Indoor/Outdoor Design Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh environments, provides reliable performance and resistance to vandalism. Permanent magnet built into housing facilitates tamper alarm when used with a magnetic reed switch.

Parking Reader

Specifications Operating frequency Europe: 2.400 – 2.482 GHz US: 2.438 – 2.457 GHz Housing with ABS cover Protection IP65 [approx. NEMA4x] Detection range Up to 10 meters [33 ft] , 2 TO 3 m for the proposing system Range check Acoustic by built-in beeper Operating temperature -30…+60°C [-22…+140°F] Object speed UP to 200 km/h [125 mph] at appropriate distance Power Europe: 230 VAC +10%, 100 mA, 50-60 Hz / 22…30 VDC, max 1A US: 22..30 VDC, max. 1A Power consumption <25VA (on AC), <20 Watt (on DC) Frequency offset 138 channels [US 32 channels] channel spacing 600 kHz to avoid interference, to be used when TRANSIT readers are installed in close vicinity of each other Polarisation Circular (LHC) Input 1 dry contact or TTL Relay output 1 relay output (NO, common, NC), 24 VDC 2A, 120 VAC 1A Output Barcode 39, Wiegand 26-bit, Wiegand 32-bit, Wiegand 37-bit, FF56 and Omron ISO 7811/2 Antenna connection Optional 1 external inductive antenna connection Antenna output 120 kHz Interfaces RS232, RS422, 20mA CL, Profibus DP, Multidrop and TCP/IP Communication protocols CR/LF, DC2/DC4, TCP/IP, Profibus DP and various OEM protocols (for more information see firmware manuals) Mounting : Wall mounting set included Pole mounting set and weather proof protection hood optional available

Certifications European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC, EN50081-1, EN50082-1 and EN50082-2. ETS0908





Barrier 3.0 Mt. Maximum arm length or two nos. for more width entry and exit , opeing time approximately 3 seconds 2mm thickness A 1 quality steel – cabinet Need to fix in 20cm in concrete A Microprocessor controlled electronics, A high torque continuous two way operation AC motor is utilized in the barrier.

Door Locks

Holding force 550kg

Voltage DC12v

Power 12v/240mA Necessary L&Z Brackets need to provided for the access doors. Emergency exit should be provide at all the exits

Walk Through Metal Detectors

Metal detectors shall have the following features and conform to the specified performance approvals and certifications.

1. FEATURES

a. Pin-Point targets on the left/right/center from head to toe using LED

indicators on both columns. b. Multiple zones can be independently adjusted from base sensitivity level. c. Multiple target pinpointing with 33 distinct detection zones. d. Eye level pacing lights using international symbols for wait ( ) and proceed

( ). e. Count number of patrons, number of alarms, and calculate an alarm

percentage. f. Simple to use touchpad controls using LCD displays and LED indicators. g. Physical key lock and software access levels. h. Physical key locked overhead cabinets housing all cables, connectors, and

circuit boards. i. Multiple units able to operate in close proximity. j. Multiple discrimination programs to meet all application requirements

including TSA EMD. k. Ability to alter multiple coil combinations through program adjustments. l. Manufactured by ISO 9001 Certified company.





2. PERFORMANCE

a. Meets or exceeds all international regulation performance requirements,

including: 1. TSA EMD – Transportation Security Administration Enhanced Metal

Detection System. 2. FAA – Federal Aviation Administration. 3. CE Approved. 4. CSA Approved. 5. CB Certified. 6. Safe for Medical Implants, Pregnant Women, and all Magnetic Media.

b. Multi-Dimensional Coil Design able to detect guns, knives, and other flat and rod shaped weapons.

c. Field Uniformity providing equal detection capabilities for floor level screening.

d. External Interference Cancellation using Digital Signal Processing technology (DSP).

e. Target Detection is independent of pass-through speed.

3. OPTIONS

1. Networking capabilities for local connections, across LAN/WAN, or Internet. 2. Battery Back up capability for inadvertent power loss 3. Portable wheel system for frequent relocation 4. Capability to fasten to all types of floors without damage

Test on Site

1. The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment and labor for the in site testing of heads and sensors of all types.

2. A set of shorting plugs with connectors shall be supplied for checking

the wiring to sensor and automatic station sockets.

3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply all necessary test bench equipment for checking and calibration of all items of the system.

21.2.24 STANDBY DIESEL ALTERNATOR SET

a. General

Provide all labour, materials, and equipment to furnish, install, and place in operation the power generation system in accordance with the contract documents and manufacturer's drawings and installation instructions. These specifications also describe requirements for the design, fabrication, and testing of the power system. The installation of the power generation system shall include the following:





1. Engine-driven generator set. 2. Control system. 3. Cooling system. 4. Fuel supply and storage system. 5. Generator set accessories. 6. Mounting system. 7. System control and switchgear.

b. Related Works

Refer to the following Tender Specification sections for related mechanical and electrical considerations.

c. System Description

Generator sets shall be of the Prime Power rating for standby application and these ratings shall be as indicated upon the drawings. Prime Power rating is defined as 10% overload for 1 hour duration in any 12 hours period of continuous operation at full-load.

d. System Loads

The diesel generator set(s) shall be sized to accept a minimum of 50% the full-load rating upon starting and the voltage transient shall remain within 10% of nominal output voltage.

e. System Function

The generator set(s) shall include the all the necessary controls and equipment to automatically control the optimum generator set operation. After starting, the unit(s) shall automatically attain rated speed and voltage, and accept the rated load. The engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output voltage regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator. Facilities for the manual adjustment of the generator speed and voltage shall also be provided.

f. Daily Fuel Tank and Fuel Lift Pump A daily fuel tank with sufficient fuel capacity for at least 8 hours duty on full load shall be provided, in a suitable location in the room. A dial type fuel gauge, fuel filter inlet and outlet connections, drain plug and all feed and return fuel pipes shall be fitted to the tank complete with hose for filling purposes. An electrical or manual fuel lift pump shall be supplied and installed near the daily fuel tank to lift fuel automatically or manually from the bulk storage tank with





capacity at least 48 hours duty on full load to the daily storage tank. Necessary float switches to operate lift pump shall be provided. All full tanks must be as per Woqood specification and the contractor shall obtain approval from Woqood before any installation for generator full tank, full network & fill point location and size.

g. Performance

The power generating system shall meet the performance criteria that follow:

1. Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated generator set kW / kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all engine-mounted auxiliary and external loads such as radiator fans etc.

2. Conditions - The rating shall be based on ISO 3046/1 standard conditions of

100 kPa and 27oC (29.53 in Hg, 81F); BS 5514, DIN 6271, SAE J1349 and

API 7B-11C also apply.

3. Fuel - Diesel engines shall be able to deliver rated power when operating on Type 2 diesel fuel having 35

o API (16C, 60F) specific gravity.

4. Fuel Consumption - Diesel fuel rates shall be based on fuel having a low

heating value (LHV) of 42,780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29oC

(85oF) and weight 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs. / U.S. gal).

5. Start Time & Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage

and frequency, and be capable of accepting full-load within 10 seconds when properly equipped and maintained.

6. Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO 8528

requirements.

7. Power Delivery - Prime rating with 10% overload capability for a duration of 1 hour in any 12 hour period of operation at the rated full-load.

8. Frequency - 50 Hz

9. Voltage – Phase to phase = 415 V & phase to neutral = 240 V.

10. Allowable maximum Voltage Dip - upon the application of 50% of full-load

power rating – Within 10%.

11. Average Power Factor - 0.80 lag.

12. Steady State Speed Tolerance - +/- 0.50 %.





h. Build Quality

The complete power generation system, including engine, alternator and control panel shall be supplied by same manufacturer and the authorized dealer who has been regularly engaged in the supply and support of complete diesel generator power system products. All components shall be designed to achieve optimum components and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated the design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated, assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacturer does not waive any requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be individually and separately listed as part of compliance statement.

i. Responsibility

The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary system supplier. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total system.

j. Sub-Assembly & Packaging

Generator set mounted sub-assemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake system, exhaust outlet fittings, and the generator set mounted controls shall be designed, built, and assembled as a complete unit by the engine - generator manufacturer.

k. Production Tests

The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be made available when requested and shall also be included in the O&M Manual.

l. Drawings

All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and switch gear must conform to a common and approved format.

m. Submittals

Submittals for approval shall be made in accordance with CSI Division 1. Submittals shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including switchgear.





2. Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant component design and performance data.

Engine:

Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle

Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders

Engine lubricating oil capacity

Engine coolant capacity without radiator

Engine coolant capacity with radiator

Coolant pump external resistance (maximum)

Coolant pump flow at maximum resistance

Alternator:

Model

Frame

Insulation class

Number of leads

Weight, total

Weight, rotor

Airflow

Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for - 50% / 75% / 100% load.

Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D).

Time constants, armature short circuit (TA).

Reactance, sub transient - direct axis (XD).

Reactance, transient - saturated (XD).

Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD).

Reactance, negative sequence (X2).

Reactance, zero sequence (X0).

Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical.

Decrement curve.

Radiator:

Model

Type

Fan drive ratio

Coolant capacity, radiator.

Coolant capacity, radiator & engine.

Weight both, dry & wet. System:

Dimensions - length x width x height. Weight, both dry & wet.

Performance - Based on SAE J1349 standard conditions of 100 kPa (29.61 in Hg) and 25

oC (77F); also at conditions of ISO 3046/1, DIN

6271 and BS 5514. Fuel rates are based on ISO 3046 and on fuel oil





of 35o API (16

oC or 60

oF) gravity, having a LHV of 42780 kJ/kg

(18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29oC-(85

oF) and weighing 838.9 g/l

(7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).

Power rating at 0.8 power factor.

kVA rating.

Fuel consumption at standard conditions for: o 50 % load. o 75 % load. o 100% load.

Combustion air inlet flow rate.

Exhaust gas, flow rate.

Stack temperature.

Exhaust system backpressure (maximum).

Heat rejection to: o coolant o after cooler o exhaust o atmosphere from engine o atmosphere from generator

Auxiliary Equipment

Specification or data sheets, including switchgear, transfer switch, vibration isolators, and day tank.

Drawings – General arrangements & dimensions drawings showing overall generator set measurements, mounting location, and interconnect points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling & drain lines.

Wiring Diagrams

Wiring diagrams, schematics & control panel outline drawings published by the manufacturer in Joint Industrial Council (JIC) format for controls & switchgear showing interconnected points and logic diagrams for use by contractor & owner.

Warranty Statements

Warranty verification published by the manufacturer.

Service

Location & description of supplier's parts & service facility including parts inventory and number of qualified generator set service personnel.





n. Service and Warranty Qualifications

The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can provide factory-trained servicemen, the required stock of replacement parts, technical assistance, and warranty administration. The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall have a local parts and service facility, preferably near to the jobsite. The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall be capable of administering the manufacturer and dealer's warranty for all components supplied by the selling dealer (who may or may not be the same as the servicing dealer). The manufacturer's and dealer's warranty shall in no event be for a period of less than one year from date of hand-over to the Client. The generator set supplier shall have factory trained service representatives and all the tooling necessary to install, test, maintain, and repair all provided equipment. The generator set supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to maintain over the counter availability of at least 90% of the component parts. The generator set supplier shall provide a scheduled oil sampling service to monitor the engine condition on an ongoing and regular basis. The oil samples shall be analyzed at the generator set supplier's facility by factory trained personnel.

o. Component Requirements

The engine shall be stationary, Jacket water after cooler, 1500 RPM, four cycle design with DRY exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United States, Western Europe or in Japan. It shall not be manufactured with any Class I ozone depleting substances (ODS) as defined by Federal Register Vol 5, No. 86. The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure gauge, lubricating oil cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump and temperature gauge, service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing when applicable. The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is integral with the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The system shall incorporate full flow filtration with bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of filter clogging. The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle. Systems where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are not acceptable. Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the underside or inside of the crown and piston pin.





The filter shall incorporate a self-lubricating, free rotating seal and have a nonmetallic core sufficiently rigid to minimize movement or shifting of the filtration media. The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel filter, transfer pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. The transfer pump shall deliver fuel under low pressure to individual injection pumps - one for each cylinder. The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously controlled by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by signals from the engine governor. The pumps shall be of a variable displacement type to alter the volume of fuel delivered to the spray nozzles according to load demand. The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray pattern for efficient combustion.

In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a primary fuel filter between the fuel tank and transfer pump to screen large contaminants.

A fuel/water separator shall protect the fuel system from water damage.

A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding air from the system. Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed to isolate vibration.

A Free floor standing tank with capacity for 8-hour full-load operation shall be provided. The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections; float switches, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact. A manual shutoff valve on the fuel line to the engine and a tank drain valve shall also be included.

The engine governor shall be Electronic type and transient load response within commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances. It will be selected, installed, and tested by the generator set manufacturer to meet step load starting kVA requirement specified within this document. The engine control shall be of Electronic Programmable type. The control will monitor all significant engine parameters, The engine control shall be configured to avoid interruption of power whenever possible. Engine Control system shall be provided with a programmable relay to activate in case the load exceeds predefined level to shut down a non-essential load. It shall display real time and historical data to allow user to optimize operation and provide accurate service information in the event of a malfunction. Information shall be accessible through a data link for remote monitoring, or through an RS 232 port. A data link failure shall not cause an interruption of engine operation. The engine Jacket water-cooling system shall be a closed circuit design with provision for filling, expansion and de-aeration. The cooling pump shall be driven by the engine. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect external cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved.





Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be sized to cool the engine continuously while operating at full rated load and at site conditions. It shall be a folded core design consisting of individually replaceable core assemblies sealed between the top and bottom tank and which can be replaced individually at the job site. The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the engine. Air shall be drawn from the engine side and exhausted through the radiator core.

The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element requiring replacement no more frequently than 500 operating hours or once each year. If external ducting is required, maximum restriction to the combustion air inlet shall be 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O) with airflow of 932 cfm. Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine exhaust gases and direct - connected to a compressor supplying engine combustion air. The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases quickly and silently with minimum restriction. System including silencer shall be designed for minimum restriction, and in no case shall backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O). Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth being transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to accommodate thermal growth. Support dampers and springs shall be included where necessary to isolate vibration. Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water traps installed at the lowest point. Exhaust stacks shall be extended to avoid nuisance fumes and odors, and outlets cut at 45 to minimize noise. Exhaust piping shall be insulated and clad with aluminium to limit the surface temperature within 65

oC.

The exhaust silencer shall be at minimum of the Residential grade (25 dBA) quality to provide extreme noise attenuation for environments with low background noise.

An exhaust thimble shall be installed at the point where the exhaust pipe penetrates the building. The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor(s), starter relay, and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against butt engagement. Batteries shall be maintenance free, lead acid types mounted near the starting motor. A corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be located to avoid spillage from servicing of fuel and oil filters. Required cables will be furnished and sized to satisfy circuit requirements. The system shall be capable of starting a properly equipped engine within 10 seconds at ambient temperatures greater than 22

oC (70

oF).

Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by the generator set manufacturer. They shall be a heavy-duty NiCad type with thru-partition connectors, and housed in a hard rubber or polypropylene case with provision for venting.





Batteries shall be located as close to the starting motor as practical, away from spark sources, in a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and maintenance. Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. The alternator(s) shall be Prime rated for Standby Application 415 V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, 0.8 1500 rpm. The alternator(s) shall be capable of withstanding a three-phase load of 300% rated current for 10 seconds, and sustaining 150% of continuous load current for 2 minutes with field set for normal rated load excitation. It shall exhibit less than 5% waveform deviation at no load. Alternator to be suitable for Motor Starting duty of 50% of Generator set rating and maximum 10% voltage dip.

Alternator to be driven by a synchronous driver. Alternator is to be hot, equivalent to the stabilized temperature band between the alternator's 75% and 100% and 110 % of the nominal rated output of one hour continuous load rating. Alternator efficiencies shall be calculated according to IEC 34-2 Section 4, with all I2R losses corrected to 115

oC.

As a minimum the alternator shall be designed, manufactured to meet following specification.

1. Rating - 415V, 3 phase, 50Hz, 0.8 pf. 2. Insulation Class - Class H. 3. Number of Poles – 4. 4. Excitation -Permanent Magnetic

The revolving field coils shall be precision wet layer wound with epoxy-based material applied to each layer of magnet wire. Alternator pitch shall optimize efficiency and minimize total harmonic distortion. The field shall be prototyped tested for two hours at 150% of rated speed at 70

oC, and production tested at 125%

of rated speed. It shall be dynamically balanced to 0.5 mil peak-to-peak. The alternator shall be of class IP 22 designed to operate in a sheltered drip-proof environment. Alternator(s) shall be equipped with 240 V ac single-phase space heaters to minimize condensation while the alternator set is idle. The heaters shall be capable of easily mounting in the assembled alternator. The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting of a three-phase armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage spikes. The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive excitation current from a pilot exciter mounted on the rotor shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of





rated current for ten seconds during a fault condition. Voltage regulator shall be Digital Programmable type. As installed, the voltage regulator shall meet the applicable sections of the following standards:

1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall maintain generator output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full-load. The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS in three phases of alternator output voltage, or operating in single phase sensing mode. The voltage regulator shall include a VAr / Pf control feature as standard. The regulator shall provide an adjustable dual slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and frequency response for site conditions. The voltage regulator shall include standard the capability to provide generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and reactive differential compensation. The voltage regulator shall communicate with the Generator Control Panel via a J1939 communication network with generator voltage adjustments made via the controller keypad. Additionally, the controller shall allow system parameter setup and monitoring, and provide fault alarm and shutdown information through the controller. A PC-based user interface shall be available to allow viewing and modifying operating parameters in a windows compatible environment.

The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the engine-generator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed and built by the engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection, maintain alignment, and minimize resonant linear vibration. The base mounting frame shall be original diesel generator set manufacturer‟s design. Linear vibration isolators shall be provided for installation below the Generator set skid. Fuel storage facilities shall conform to the requirements of Qatar Petroleum Company Specification and other relevant local regulations. The bulk fuel store shall be a steel tank with a capacity of 1 day full-load operation. It shall be in accordance with local code requirements. The tank shall be equipped with the necessary openings including fill, vent, sounding, gauges, suction and return openings set within a 600 mm x 600 mm manhole. Submittals - Shop drawings shall be submitted showing all dimensions, supports and connections. The tank shall be buried below grade in accordance with the drawings provided by the Structural Engineers.





The daily service fuel storage shall be separate from the diesel generator set and located within the Generator Room as shown upon the drawings. All the necessary fuel transfer pumps & pipe work to transfer fuel from the bulk storage tank to the daily service tank and then to the diesel generator set shall be provided by the Contractor. The tanks shall incorporate pipe connections, fuel transfer pump, float switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contacts wired to an indicating light on the generator set control cubicle. A manual shut-off valve on the engine supply line and a drain valve shall be included. The controls, protection and monitoring systems necessary for the generator set and its operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. All sub-system components, interfaces and logic shall be compatible with the engine-mounted devices.

Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall provide all operating, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and regulator controls via SAE J1939. The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following environmental conditions:

1. Ambient temperature - –40°C to +70°C Operating Range. 2. 95% humidity non-condensing at 30°C to 60°C. 3. IP22 protection. 4. 4. 5% salt spray 48 hours, +38°C, 36.8V system voltage. 5. Sinusoidal vibration 4.3G's RMS, 24-1000Hz. 6. Electromagnetic Capability (89/336/EEC, 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC,

93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2). 7. Shock: withstand 15G.

Functionality shall be integral to the control panel as follows:

1. The controls shall include a minimum 64 x 240 pixel, 28mm x 100mm, white backlit graphical display with text based alarm / event descriptions.

2. The controls shall include as minimum a 3-line data display. 3. Audible horn for alarm and shut-down with horn silence switch. 4. Standard ISO labeling. 5. Multiple language capability. 6. Remote start / stop controls. 7. Local run/off/auto controls integral to system microprocessor. 8. Cool down timer. 9. Speed adjustment. 10. Lamps test. 11. Push button emergency stop button. 12. Voltage adjustment. 13. Voltage regulator V/Hz slope – adjustable. 14. Password protected system programming.

The controls shall provide digital read outs for the engine and generator and the readings shall be indicated in either metric or imperial units based upon selection.





The indications shall be as follows:

Engine

1. Engine oil pressure. 2. Engine oil temperature. 3. Engine coolant temperature. 4. Engine RPM. 5. Battery volts. 6. Engine hours run. 7. Engine crank attempt counter. 8. Engine successful start counter. 9. Service maintenance interval count down. 10. Real time clock. 11. Oil filter differential pressure. 12. Fuel temperature. 13. Fuel pressure. 14. Fuel filter differential pressure. 15. Fuel consumption rate. 16. Total fuel consumed. 17. Engine intake manifold temperature. 18. Engine intake manifold pressure. 19. Engine crankcase pressure. 20. Air filter differential pressure. 21. Boost pressure. 22. Oil filter differential pressure. 23. Engine exhaust stack temperature (if using optional RTD/TC Module).

Generator

1. Generator ac volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and Average). 2. Generator ac current (Average and Per Phase). 3. Generator ac Frequency. 4. Generator kW (Total & Per Phase). 5. Generator kVA (Total & Per Phase). 6. Generator kVAr (Total & Per Phase). 7. Power Factor (Average & Per Phase). 8. Total kW-hr. 9. Total kVAR-hr. 10. % kW. 11. % kVA. 12. % kVAR. 13. Generator stator winding temperature.

Voltage Regulation

1. Excitation voltage. 2. Excitation current.





The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent automatic shut-down for the specified conditions. All alarms and shut-downs shall be assigned a time, date, and engine hours run tag that to be stored by the control panel for both the first and last occurrences. The alarm monitoring and shut-downs shall include the following:

Engine Alarm / Shut-down 1. Low oil pressure alarm / shut-down. 2. High coolant temperature alarm / shut-down. 3. Loss of coolant shut-down. 4. Over speed shut-down. 5. Over crank shut-down. 6. High intake manifold temperature alarm / shut-down. 7. High exhaust manifold temperature alarm / shut-down. 8. High crankcase pressure alarm / shut-down. 9. High air inlet temperature alarm / shut-down. 10. Emergency stop actuation shut-down. 11. Low coolant temperature alarm. 12. Low battery voltage alarm. 13. High battery voltage alarm. 14. Control switch not in auto position alarm. 15. Battery charger failure alarm.

Generator Alarm / Shut-down

1. Generator over voltage. 2. Generator under voltage. 3. Generator over frequency. 4. Generator under frequency. 5. Generator reverse power. 6. Generator over current.

Voltage Regulator Alarm / Shut-down

1. Loss of excitation alarm / shut-down. 2. Instantaneous over excitation alarm / shut-down. 3. Timed over excitation alarm / shut-down. 4. Rotating diode failure. 5. Loss of sensing. 6. Loss of PMG.

The Controller shall include the ability to accept 18 programmable digital input signals. The signals may be programmed for either high or low activation using programmable normally open or normally closed contacts. The control shall include the ability to operate 14 programmable relay output signals, which shall integral to the controller. The output relays shall be rated for 2A @ 30 V





DC and consist of 6 “Form A” (Normally Open) contacts and 2 “Form C” (Normally Open & Normally Closed) contacts.

The control shall include the ability to operate 2 discrete outputs, integral to the controller, which are capable of sinking up to 300 mA.

All engine, voltage regulator, control panel and accessory units shall be accessible through a single electronic service tool. The following maintenance functionality shall be integral to the generator set control:

1. Engine run hours display. 2. Service maintenance interval (running hours or calendar days). 3. Engine crank attempt counter. 4. Engine successful starts counter. 5. 20 events are stored in control panel memory 6. Programmable cycle timer that starts and runs the generator for a

predetermined time. The timer shall use 14 user-programmable sequences that are repeated in a 7-day cycle. Each sequence shall have the following programmable set points:

a. Day of week. b. Time of day to start. c. Duration of cycle.

The controls shall include Modbus RTU communications as standard via RS-485 half duplex with configurable baud rates from 2.4k to 57.6k.

Monitoring Software shall also be provided with the functionality that follows:

1. Provide access to all date and events on generator set communications network.

2. Provide remote control capability for the generator set. 3. Ability to monitor up to 12 generator sets. 4. Ability to communicate via Modbus RTU or remote modem.

The Contractor shall also provide a local control panel mounted annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:

1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set controls. 2. The local annunciator shall include a lamp test push button, alarm horn and

alarm acknowledgment push button. 3. Individual lamp indications for protection and diagnostics as follows:

a. Over crank. b. Low coolant temperature. c. High coolant temperature warning. d. High coolant temperature shut-down. e. Low oil pressure warning. f. Low oil pressure shut-down. g. Over speed. h. Low coolant level.





i. EPS supplying load. j. Control switch not in auto. k. High battery voltage. l. Low battery voltage. m. Battery charger AC failure. n. Emergency stop. o. Spare. p. Spare.

The Contractor shall provide a remote annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:

1. The annunciator shall provide remote indications of all the points listed above and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent alarms will sound the horn.

2. Ability to be located up to 250 m from the generator set

An 18 A battery charger shall be provided to accept a 240V volt ac single phase input and the output shall be 24 volt DC. The ac input and DC output shall be protected by fuses and incorporate current limiting circuitry to avoid the need for a crank disconnect relay. An ac voltage power switch shall be mounted on the face of the charger and shielded from accidental switching. The charger shall include an AC ammeter and voltmeter, failure / malfunction alarm for ac failure and DC level low voltage and be housed in an enclosure suitable for wall mounting. The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define acceptable procedures and practices of inspecting, installing, and testing the generator set and associated equipment. A pre-delivery inspection must be performed by the system manufacturers' local dealer at the dealer's facility to insure no damage occurred in transit and all the diesel generator set components, controls, and switchgear are included as specified here-in. Prior to delivery and acceptance, the generator set shall be tested to show it is free of any defects and will start automatically and carry full-load. This testing shall be performed at the facility of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer. The testing shall be done on dry type, resistive load banks capable of definite and precise incremental loading. Salt water brine tanks or load banks requiring water as a source of cooling will not be allowed. Load bank testing shall be done in the presence of the owner's engineer or his appointed representative. Testing shall be for a minimum of four hours under full-load. The bidder shall furnish all consumables necessary for testing. Any defects, which become evident during the test shall be corrected by the bidder at his own expense prior to shipment to the jobsite. Delivery shall be made to the project construction site by the system manufacturer's authorized dealer.





The installation shall be performed in accordance with shop drawings, specifications, and the manufacturer's instructions. The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational compliance by a representative of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer. The engine lubricating oil and antifreeze, as recommended by the system manufacturer, shall be provided by the generator set dealer. If different manufacturers furnish switchgear and generator sets, technical representatives of both manufacturers' authorized dealers shall verify the installation meets requirements. Any deficiencies shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor. The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the Contractor during start-up, systems check, adjusting, and any site testing required after the installation is complete.

Following installation, the tests shall be performed by the system manufacturer's local dealer representative(s) in the presence of the owner's engineer or designated appointee all as follows:

Pre-Start Checks:

1. Oil level. 2. Water level. 3. Day tank fuel level. 4. Battery connection and charge condition. 5. Air start supply pressure (if so equipped). 6. Engine to control interconnects. 7. Engine generator intake / exhaust obstructions. 8. Engine room ventilation obstructions. 9. Removal of all packing materials.

Operational Tests:

1. Load test performed with resistive load bank – 25% / 15 minutes. 2. Load test performed with resistive load bank – 50% / 30 minutes. 3. Load test performed with resistive load bank – 75% / 30 minutes. 4. Load test performed with resistive load bank – 100% / 240 minutes. 5. Load test performed with resistive load bank – 110% / 60 minutes.

For the duration of each load test the engine and generator parameters shall be recorded at 15 minute intervals as follows:

1. Date / Time. 2. KW, Voltage & Amperage (3 phase), frequency. 3. Fuel pressure, oil pressure and water temperature. 4. Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet. 5. Generator Winding & Bearing Temperature. 6. Ambient temperature





The correct operation of controls, engine shutdown, and safety devices shall also be demonstrated and recorded as witnessed and verified. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the necessary resistive load banks to test the diesel generator set for all the prescribed load tests at no additional cost to the contract. Should these tests indicate that the equipment does not meet the specified performance requirements, then the cost of all corrective measures and re-testing shall be borne by the manufacturer's representative.

The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation for the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include both classroom and hands-on instruction. Topics covered shall include controls operation, schematics, wiring diagrams, meters, indicators, warning lights, shutdown system and routine maintenance.

p. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish six hard and soft copies of each of the manuals and books listed below for each unit provided under this contract:

1. Operating Instructions - with description and illustration of all switchgear

controls and indicators and engine and generator controls.

2. Parts Books - which illustrate and list all assemblies, subassemblies and components, except standard fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.).

3. Preventative Maintenance Instructions - on the complete system that cover daily, weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual maintenance requirements and include a complete lubrication chart.

4. Routine Test Instructions - for all electronic and electrical circuits and for the main AC generator.

5. Troubleshooting Flowcharts - covering the complete generator set showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy.

6. Recommended Spare Part Lists - showing all consumables anticipated to be required during routine maintenance and test.

7. Wiring Diagrams & Schematics - showing function of all electrical components.

All manuals and books described above shall be contained in rigid plastic pouches.





q. Information

The Contractor shall furnish certified performance data and curves as a part of his proposal and a description of his quality control program. The Manufacturer shall ascertain that his equipment withstands the starting kW and kVA requirements of the connected loads as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall furnish an outline drawing showing principal dimensions, space requirements and the location of the connections to the equipment quoted, mainly for starting, cooling, fuel and lubricating systems plus the ventilation requirements. The Contractor shall provide a basic tool kit, engine maintenance handbook, spare parts manual and generating set instruction handbook. The Contractor shall itemize all sight flow indications, temperature sensing devices, and pressure gauges and indications which will be furnished for local indication of the critical items as recommended. If these indicators are provided as standard with the equipment, it shall be so indicated. The Contractor shall furnish comprehensive information and catalogues along with schematic and detailed diagrams showing all equipment furnished and shall include the control system and shall clearly describe the operation, manufacturing and types of all instruments and control items. All literature and catalogues shall be in English.

r. Safety Considerations

All external electrical and mechanical connections shall be with flexible end connections to allow free movement of the diesel generator set on resilient mountings. All exposed rotating parts shall be fully guarded to prevent contact by personnel. Guards shall comply with BS 5304, and shall be removable for maintenance purposes. A permanently fixed warning notice with 6 mm white lettering on a red background shall be fixed to the set in a prominent position. The warning shall be as follows: "THE GENERATING SET IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING"

s. Manufacturers

The diesel generator set manufacturer shall preferably also be the manufacturer of either the alternator and shall be responsible for the assembly. The diesel generator set manufacturer shall have a reliable local representative of good repute, keeping adequate stocks of spare parts and providing efficient after sales services.





The Contractor shall submit for approval shop drawings for the diesel generator set including all necessary civil work details, such as trenches, concrete bases, etc., generator starting characteristics and manufacturers approval for the generator's correct selection as to connected load, de-rating factors, etc., wiring diagrams and description of operation. A copy of these shop drawings shall also be sent to the local power authorities for approval (if needed). Any modifications to the drawings required by the Engineer or the Local Power Authorities to allow the equipment to comply with the codes, standards and specifications called for here-in shall be carried out with no extra cost to the contract.

t. Spare Parts

The Contractor shall at the time of tender furnish a comprehensive priced list of recommended spare parts for 2 years and 5 years service. (over and above the one year defect liability period achieving a total of 3 years and 5 years of extended operating maintenance). The Client / Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject the same either in full or in part and the contractor shall supply the spare parts as per the final approved list, at the time of handing over/ taking over of the Project. Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels, clearly designating the contents and the particular of equipment for which they are intended. The Contractor shall securely store and protect the spare parts until the completion of the works and deliver the same to the Client's stores.

u. Applicable Standards

1. General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines - BS 4999. 2. Fuel oils for non-marine use – BS 2869. 3. Code of Practice for the Safety of machinery. 4. Radio Frequency Interference suppression – BS EN 55014 & BS 1597. 5. Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines Performance - BS 5514.

a. Fuel Oil Consumption - BS 5514 Part 1:1987. b. Speed Governing - BS 5514 Part 4:1984. c. Torsional Vibrations - BS 5514 Part 5:1984. d. Over speed Protection - BS 5514 Part 6:1992.





v. Automatic Transfer Switch

Automatic transfer switches complete with all accessories shall be provided as indicated upon the drawings. They shall be rated for continuous operation at the prevailing ambient temperature. They shall be rated for all classes of load both inductive and resistive. They shall be able to close on an in-rush current up to and including 10 times the continuous rating of the switch and be capable of enduring 6000 cycles of operation at the rated current and a rate of 6 cycles per minute without failure. The automatic transfer switch shall be interlocked to positively prevent the load from being simultaneously energized by normal and emergency power. ATS‟s shall comprise a set of two mechanically and electrically interlocked motorized air circuit breakers if current for rating in excess of 630 A. For ratings of 630 A and below then two electrically and mechanically AC3 duty contactors may be utilized instead.

Voltage sensors and time-delay relays of 5 minutes or less shall be of the solid state, plug-in type devices. The control relays shall be modular dust protected, plug-in devices. These control accessories shall mount on a dead-front, swing-out control accessory panel to avoid shock hazard while adjusting control functions, but will swing- out exposing the wiring to facilitate servicing. A controls disconnect plug shall be provided to de-energize the control circuits when the panel is in the open, swing-out position. Indicating lamps and meters shall be set in a front mounted meter panel to be visible without the opening covers.

Control accessories shall be provided for the following:

1. Monitor each un-grounded line with calibrated dial adjustable voltage, solid

state sensors to sense a decrease of voltage below a set point, or a loss of voltage on any phase of the normal power source. Voltage sensors shall be temperature compensated for 2% maximum deviation over the temperature

range - 25F (-32C) to 175 F (+ 79C). 2. Signal the engine of the generator sets to start in the event of a power

interruption (or as selected by ATS). A solid-state time-delay (adjustable from 0.5 to 10 seconds) relay shall provide this signal to avoid nuisance start-ups on momentary voltage dips or power outages.

3. Transfer the load to the diesel generator set after it reaches the correct

voltage and frequency. A solid-state time-delay (adjustable form 0.5 to 10 seconds) shall also delay this transfer to allow the engine-generator to stabilize.

4. Automatic return of the load to the mains supply after normal power

restoration. A time-delay (adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes) shall delay this transfer to avoid connection to an unstable mains supply.

5. Automatic transfer of the load from diesel alternator set to normal mains source in the event the diesel generator set output fails and the mains supply is available.





6. A signal for the engine of the diesel generator set to stop after the load is transferred to the mains supply. A solid-state time-delay on stop (adjustable from 0.5 to 5 minutes) shall permit the engine to run unloaded to cool down before shutdown (or as selected by ATS).

7. Provide a switch to select “with load” or “without load” to test or exercise as

follows:

a. “Without Load” the generating set runs unloaded. b. “With Load” the automatic transfer switch transfers load to generating

set, after a time-delay, the same as it would for a normal source interruption.

8. Provide a device to electrically disconnect the control section from the

transfer switch for maintenance and service during normal operation.

Indicating meters and lamps shall be front mounted for easy reference without the need to open covers. Meter and lamp combinations shall be provided as follows:

1. Green (normal) and red (emergency) lamps to indicate which source is

supplying power to the load. 2. AC Voltmeter to measure generator output voltage. 3. Frequency meter with pointer indicator and run-time meter to monitor the

electric generating set

The bypass / isolation switch shall be provided to comply with the requirements of standards applicable to the type of emergency and stand-by power system plus the applicable safety codes. The switch shall be a manual operation type arranged to select and connect either the source of power directly to the load, isolating the transfer switch from the load plus both the power sources. The switch shall include the features that follow:

1. A means to lock the switch in the position that isolates the transfer switch, with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks shall prevent transfer switch operation except for testing or maintenance.

2. Draw-out arrangement for the transfer switch, provides physical separation from live parts for testing and maintenance operations.

3. Current voltage, Closing, and short Withstand ratings: Equal or greater than that of the associated ATS, with the same phase arrangement and number of poles.

4. The contact temperatures of the switch shall not exceed those of ATS contacts when they are carrying the rated load.





5. Operability: Constructed so that the load bypass and transfer switch isolation

can be performed by a single person in no more than two operations in 15 seconds or less.

6. Legend: A manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs giving clear and detailed operating instructions.

7. Maintainability: Fabricate the switch to allow easy and convenient removal of major components from the front without removal of other parts or the main power conductors and terminations.

21.2.25 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

a. General

The Contractor shall provide Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems as shown upon the drawings. The UPS units shall be of a high efficiency type with low noise (acoustic) output. The Contractor shall ensure the capacity, voltage, performance and the output wave form are compatible with the connected equipment and shall submit his offer subject to the approval of the Consultant. Each UPS shall consist of two parallel-connected units in an active redundancy configuration. The arrangement shall compose mainly of a rectifier-charger, inverter, battery racks, batteries, electro-mechanical and static by pass, rectifier by pass, digital monitoring and alarm system, remote control and signaling cabinet and filters and wave shapers to suit the equipment. The batteries shall have the capacity to run the full connected load for at least 30 minutes. The storage batteries shall be installed on special racks and within cabinets as shown on drawings. The UPS and Rectifier shall have the following specification.

b. Rectifier

1. Three phase input voltage: 415/240V, 50 Hz.

2. Voltage Tolerance: 10 %.

3. Frequency Deviation: 5 %.

4. Output Voltage Fluctuation: 1 %. 5. Efficiency at Rated Load: 96 - 98 %.

c. Inverter

1. Three phase input voltage: 415/240V, 50 Hz.

2. Voltage Tolerances: Fixed load steady state: 0.5 % from no Load to full-load.





3. Dynamic output voltage regulation: +10 % - 8 % with a load variation of 50%.

4. Recovery time of the steady: < 20 ms for ^ U 1 %.

5. Steady State value: < 40 ms for ^ U 0.5 %. 6. Output Frequency: 50 Hz, tolerance +/- 0.5 % no matter what the load variation.

7. Phase Displacement: 3% (^ P 30 %). 8. Harmonic Content: < 4 %.

d. Efficiency

The efficiency of the whole system at full-load shall not be less than 20%.

e. Batteries

1. The battery system shall consist of gas recombination, valve regulated, lead acid cells, compliant with IEC 60896 Parts 21 and 22. Flame retardant batteries shall be provided.

2. For each UPS system the battery system shall consist of a minimum of 2 parallel strings of multiple cells. Each individual parallel string shall have its own dedicated means of electrical protection. The batteries shall be configured so that in the event of a battery malfunction the affected string is automatically isolated from the system thereby ensuring battery autonomy is retained.

3. Battery racks shall be floor mounted with RAW Bolt fixings into concrete structure.

4. Battery racks and shall be earthed directly back to Mains Earth Facility.

5. Battery system / racks shall be provided with Battery MCCB‟s of adequate size and type, which shall be suitably located within the battery room such that it is accessible from the door opening at a height where climbing aids are not needed. The battery MCCB‟s shall be labelled as to their purpose.

6. Batteries shall have a 10 year life and shall be provided such that the system shall be capable of providing its full autonomy at full load at that time.

7. A fully discharged battery system shall be capable of being recharged to 80% of the UPS output capacity within a maximum period of 10 times the normal total discharge time period, and to 90% of the UPS output capacity within a maximum period of 4 hours.

f. Visual Indications

The visual indications shall be provided for the following:

1. Rectifier “ON”. 2. Rectifier “Fault”. 3. Battery Operation.





4. Inverter “Fault”. 5. Static Switch Locked. 6. Acoustic Alarm. 7. Stop Imminent. 8. Inverter “ON”. 9. Inverter “OFF”. 10. Inverter “In Use”. 11. General Alarm Cancel. 12. Load “OFF”. 13. Rectifier Output Voltage - Display. 14. Rectifier Output Current - Ditto. 15. Inverter Output Voltages - Ditto. 16. Inverter Output Currents - Ditto. 17. Inverter Mains Failure. 18. Rectifier Temperature. 19. Inverter Temperature. 20. Transformer Temperature. 21. Static Switch Temperature. 22. Absence of Mains By- Pass. 23. Mains Frequency Outside Tolerances. 24. By-pass Lock. 25. Inverter / Mains Supply Out of Phase. 26. Switch to Mains by Static Switch. 27. Transfer to Mains Supply by Static Switch. 28. Overload.

g. Warranties

The Contractor shall guarantee the UPS and its installation for 24 months during which period the Contractor shall maintain and repair any defects due to either manufacture, or workmanship, at no extra cost to owner.

h. Standards

The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance program. In particular, the main equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by appropriate tests such as:

1. Incoming components inspection. 2. Discrete sub-assembly testing and complete functional checks on the final

product.

The UPS unit shall undergo an on-load burn-in before leaving the factory. Final inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier‟s quality inspection department. The UPS shall comply with the standards that follow:

1. Safety: EN 50091-1





2. Design / Manufacturing: ISO 9001 3. EMC: EN 50091-2

All the above specifications and standards shall be certified, for each proposed UPS, by an independent approved laboratory.

21.2.26 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

a. Earthing

Earthing shall fully comply with the KAHRAMAA Regulations and BS 7430:1998. The MV panels connected from the transformers shall have an earth bar of minimum

cross-sectional area of 300 mm2 run the full length of the panels. Removable neutral

to earth test links shall be provided in the MV Panels which shall be of a minimum cross sectional area of 300 mm

2.

The earth bar in the MV Panels shall be connected to the earth provided by

KAHRAMAA or with independent earth station specially provided for this as shown upon the drawings.

In the case of multi-core armoured cables then the steel wire armour shall be bonded

to earth at all terminations. However, the armour shall not be utilized as the circuit protective conductor but instead a separate single core pvc insulated stranded copper earthing cable shall be run alongside and used for this purpose. The size of this conductor shall not be less than half the csa of the associated phase conductors.

The outer copper sheath of mineral insulated copper clad cables may be used as the

earth conductor and all cables shall have a PVC over sheath. This type of cable shall never be buried direct in the ground but instead drawn into PVC or MDPE ducting.

In case of wiring within steel trunkings and conduits, a separate circuit protective

conductor for every circuit shall be provided and shall have the same csa as the associated phase conductors.

For ring main circuits, the earth conductor shall also be wiring as a complete the ring.

Where a means of earthing has not been provided by KAHRAMAA, the consumer's earthing terminal shall be connected by the earthing lead to an effective earth electrode or electrodes, such as copper strip or rod, which shall be buried in the ground at a position as near as practicable to the consumer's earthing terminal. Each electrode shall be driven to a depth such that it penetrates the summer water table by a minimum of 2 metres.

Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in a pit

measuring a minimum of 300 mm x 300 mm. The connection shall be either welded or clamped. The pit shall be filled with sand and a removable cover placed on each pit.





b. Bonding

Where metal work other than current carrying conductors may be liable to become charged with electricity in such a manner as to create a danger, (if damage to the insulation of a conductor should occur in any apparatus / cable) then precautionary measures shall be enacted as follows:

i. The metal work shall be effectively and securely bonded to earth in such a

manner as will ensure an immediate electrical discharge to earth that will trip the circuit breaker concerned and clear the fault. Also the voltage upon the metalwork with respect to earth must not exceed 50 V and the circuit breaker must trip within 5 seconds for fixed equipment and within 0.4 second for all circuits that supply portable equipment.

In situations that may normally be wet or damp, where electrical apparatus is present

and might give rise to danger and where there are substantial exposed metallic parts of other services (such as gas and water pipes, sinks and baths), the earth continuity conductor of the electrical installation shall be effectively connected, electrically and mechanically to all such metal parts and to any exposed metal work of the electrical apparatus.

A separate green / yellow stripe PVC insulated copper bonding lead shall be

connected from the earthing terminal of the water heater and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides of the pump.

Where water pumps are installed a bonding lead shall be taken from the earthing

terminal of the local isolator and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides of the pump.

The size of bonding lead shall be the same as the earth continuity conductor of the

circuit subject to a minimum size of 4.0 mm2.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

General The Lightning Protection shall be carried out in accordance with B.S. 62305:2006.

Air Terminations The type and location of the air terminations shall be as indicated in the drawings;

where indicated, metal framed or metal clad roofs or all of an air termination shall be bonded across joints between constituent parts. The bonding may be carried out by the specialist roofing contractor but where this is not the case the bonds shall be made as indicated; no drilling of roofing or coping shall be done without the approval of the consultant.





Metalwork of structure, ductwork pipes, cowling, air-conditioning equipments, plant handrails and similar components of the building that are exposed at or above the roof level shall be bonded to the nearest air termination.

Signal, SMATV aerial is mounted on the structure it shall be bonded to the nearest

air termination.

Down Conductors The type and location of the of the down conductors shall be as indicated in the

drawings. Conductors connecting between a test clamp on the outside of a building and an earth electrode, and conductors interconnecting pipe electrodes, shall be sheathed; but conductors interconnecting copper electrodes may be left bare. Conductors in other locations shall be sheathed. Sheaths shall be of PVC extruded, shrunk on or similarly applied; the colour shall be approved by the consultant.

Where the profile of the building consists of an overhang or re-entrant loop to be

formed in a down conductor the consultant shall be informed. Metalwork, including pipe work, ductwork and armoured cables, adjacent to down

conductors shall be bonded to them unless the distance between them provides adequate isolation.

Where reinforcement bars of the concrete structure forms the down conductors,

welding of the reinforcement shall be carried out by the building contractor. The electrical continuity of the welded reinforcing bars shall be tested prior and after each pour of concrete is completed.

Connection from the down conductors formed by reinforcement steel or the building

contractor shall make concrete clad steel frames. They shall comprise stainless steel tape of not less than 25 x 3 mm, welded on to the steelwork. To determine and coordinate the length of the tail to be left for subsequent connection.

Joints

Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum. All contact surfaces shall be

thoroughly cleaned and coated with an anti-corrosive electrical jointing compound suitable for the conductor material. For bi-metallic joints a separate abrasive shall be used to clean the metal surfaces.

Joints between conductors of same Metal, other than at test points, shall be made by

thermal welding process or by riveting and sweating. Overlap of conductors shall not be less than 100mm.

Where an aluminium conductor is joined to a copper conductor, one of the following

methods shall be used :

a. Bi-metal connector formed by friction welding of high purity copper and aluminium.





b. The copper conductor shall be completely sheathed for at least 100 mm of its

length with metal strip electrically compatible and aluminium, and then clamped to the aluminium conductor.

Bi-metal joints shall not be made at test points nor between the test point and earth

electrode. A test clamp shall be provided for each down conductor, it shall be located 1.2 meter

above the finished ground level unless otherwise indicated. Test clamps shall be of cast gunmetal.

Bonding connections to other metal parts of the building shall be electrolytically

compatible with those metal parts. Screws and rivets shall be phosphor bronze or naval brass or high tensile manganese brass for copper conductors.

Joint connections shall be protected by a coating which will form a seal and exclude

moisture in all weather conditions. At connections to earth electrodes the coating shall cover all exposed conductors and, in case of earth pipes, the top surface of the flanges. The Protective coatings shall be of waterproof, inert, tenacious materials and of one of the following forms:

1. Solvent cutback thixotrodic corrosion preventative forming a film of resilient

matt petroleum wax. 2. A fast drying durable rubberized sprayed coating. 3. A heat shrink clear sheathing.

Conductors Earthing conductors, main earthing bars and main bonding conductors shall be of

the type, size and conductor materials as detailed in the drawings or approved by the consultant.

Tapes shall comply with B.S. 1432 where used to interconnect copper electrodes.

The tape may be bare, but for interconnecting pipe electrodes and for all other purposes the tape shall have an extruded PVC sheath.

Main earthing bars shall comply with B.S. 1433 and shall be bare.

Cables shall comply with B.S. 6004, Table 1, without sheath, unless specified

otherwise.

Earth Electrodes The type and number of earth electrodes shall be as indicated in the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, earth rods shall be 15mm normal diameter extensible

copper clad high tensile steel rods connected together. Copper cladding shall be molecularly bonded to the steel and shall be not less than 0.25mm thick. Driving





heads shall be of high tensile steel. Screwed joints shall connect rods by one of the following methods.

Threads shall be roll-formed with a minimum thickness of 0.05 mm copper in the roots of the thread; couplers shall be of high strength silicon aluminium bronze alloy and threads shall be counter bored at the ends so that the couplers completely enclose the threads on the rods. The ends of the rods shall be internally threaded; couplers shall comprise a copper ferrule with the phosphor bronze coupler screw; a corrosion inhibiting paste shall be applied to the threads on rods and couplers.

Pipe electrodes shall be flanged pipe complying with B.S. 2035 or B.S 4622, 150mm

bore and 3000 mm long. Pipe to B.S 2035 shall be shot blasted to remove the scale and rust.

Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape shall be to B.S. 1432, of the size,

length depth below ground level and layout as indicted in the drawings.

Fixing The consultant‟s approval of the tape clips, saddles and holdfasts used shall be

obtained before the work is started. The maximum spacings of fixings shall not exceed 600mm. No fixing shall be made into joints in masonry.

Saddles and holdfasts shall be of the following materials:

1. For copper conductors, gunmetal, aluminium -- Silicon bronze or naval

brass. 2. For aluminium conductors -- aluminium and aluminium alloy or Stainless

steel. Clips either shall be of metal as above or of outdoor grade polycarbonate or

polypropylene with snap-on lids which can not be inadvertently removed. Clips and saddles shall have rounded edges and countersunk screws. Brass components shall not be used.

For general areas inside the building screws and nuts shall be of cadmium

electroplated steel or stainless steel; outside the building, in plant rooms or other locations they shall be of stainless steel.

No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shall be carried out without the approval of the consultant. Drilling and cutting of the outside fabric of the building shall be carried out only after the consultant has given approval.

Inspection Pits Unless otherwise indicated, connection between an earth conductor and its

associated earth electrode system shall be in an enclosure.





Lightweight Inspection pit rated to 5000kg shall be manufactured from high

performance polymer, UV stabilized, chemically resistant and with lockable lid. Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in an inspection pit measuring 300 x 300 mm and the connections shall be either welded or clamped. Waterproof earth electrode seal shall be used with suitably sized compression rings and seals. Installation of the earth pit shall be properly co-coordinated with the specialist manufacturer to satisfy the project requirement. Integral earth bar shall be used. The enclosure shall be flush with finished floor level.

Installation

Backfills immediately surrounding electrodes shall have, low specific resistivity and good water retention properties and it shall be well compacted and watered.

Where earth electrodes are to be installed through the base slabs of a building,

electrode seals shall be provided. As indicated, either the rods shall be driven and the seals fitted before the concrete is poured or the seals handed over to the building contractor for him to incorporate them in the slab and the rods driven at a later date. Harmful ingress of water shall be avoided when driving the rods.

Pipe electrodes shall be installed with the flange at the top, in 500 mm diameter

bored boles. Electrodes shall be installed vertically in an excavated hole, with a minimum depth of 2000mm below ground level; and 10 ohms ground resistivity.

21.2.27 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

The Contractor shall provide a complete lighting control system as shown upon the drawings. The system shall allow for the automatic and scheduled ON-OFF control of lighting installations as indicated upon the drawings.

The extra low voltage programmable lighting control System shall be designed and developed in accordance with European installation bus technology to cover building control requirements such as lighting control (On/Off and dimming), and load management based on one or more applications such as motion, presence, time, daylight & brightness, manual switches, …etc. A two-wire bus cable shall link in parallel all sensors (low voltage push button switches, brightness sensors, motion sensors, timers, etc.) and actuators (on/off controllers.) to each other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened & shielded with solid conductors and shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the bus devices. Separate power supply to any of the sensors and actuators shall not be acceptable. The bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a linear, star or tree structure similar to the power mains. Systems requiring fixed wiring configurations shall not be acceptable. The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The programming shall be implemented via a PC or notebook computer located anywhere in the system and having access level passwords. Programming via local





system switches or with no password security shall not be acceptable. Any device in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC location without having to manipulate the device locally.

Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable physical address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other device via software programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual device will respond to only those group addresses for which they are programmed to do so. There shall be an EEPROM storing the physical address, group addresses & other software parameters for every device, thus making it intelligent. No centralized processors or centralized memory storage devices shall be permitted.

It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior to dispatch of the material to site. The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices. Two consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as network filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In the event of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device shall be affected and all other devices shall continue to operate as normal. Any system with routers / couplers that require separate power supply shall not be acceptable.

The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in back-up power to compensate short voltage interruptions of up to 200 ms. This back-up power shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on or off or as it is) in the event of power failure.

The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring and display an alarm LED in the event of faults in the wiring. Each of the devices shall have a built-in push button along with a LED. The LED shall lit in the event the push button is pressed and if there is power to the device, thus depicting that the device is communicating in the system. In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure each of the system devices (switching modules and dimming controllers…etc.) shall be programmed to attain a fail safe position (controlled circuits to become “On”, “Off” or “As it is, Last status”) All devices in the system should conform to CE standards and should be manufactured in accordance with the EMC guidelines and the low voltage guidelines. The Lighting control System shall be interfaced with the Building Management System so as to monitor and control the required circuits from the BMS workstation. The programmable lighting and control system shall consist of two levels of control as follows:

1. Lighting Control PC based graphics software for time based control and

manual override by the operator. The software shall consist of graphics based overview of the entire building, floors and going up to the individual





rooms. It shall have the necessary timer modules to control the circuits in the form of various groups. It shall be possible to pre-program the time channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. The lighting control PC shall be located as shown upon the drawings.

2. In the event the PC is not operational or is switched Off, a second level of

standalone operation shall continue without the need for intervention via local controller modules capable of being programmed with switching times locally without the need to connect a PC. A 100-channel controller capable of being programmed with multiple time schedules / lighting scenarios shall be provided for the lighting and control system.

There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for each lighting circuits distribution board. The LCP shall house the system devices and the related control equipment depending on the number of circuits to be controlled. This is necessary to ensure the power wiring between the DB‟s and the control modules inside the LCPs is kept to a minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65 polycarbonate enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment.

All lighting shall be controlled such that unnecessary lights shall be automatically switched “OFF” based on occupancy as mentioned below. Also lights redundant due to sufficient daylight shall be switched “OFF” based on light sensors and time schedules.

The lighting main circulation areas shall be switched ON/OFF based on occupancy-movement. Wall mounted Motion detectors shall be strategically located within the circulation areas so as to provide the necessary coverage. Lights shall be switched „Off‟ during the day to reduce consumption when no movement is detected. During evening as per pre-programmed times, alternate circuits or as decided at the time of commissioning shall remain „On‟ while the others shall continue to be controlled based on movement. The movement sensors shall have a built-in lux sensor with an adjustable set point so as not to switch „On‟ circuits even after detecting movement due to sufficient natural light. There shall also be an adjustable „Off‟ delay on the movement sensor from 1 sec to 16 min. to ensure that circuits are not switched „Off‟ immediately. Further, the movement sensors shall incorporate an “On-Auto-Off” switch for maintenance and local override purposes. A Controller device consisting of at least 50 timer channels (groups) in the form of lighting scenarios shall control circuits (such as switching lighting on/off, etc.) on a particular network group (line) to have local standalone operation. It shall be possible to send signals from one controller channel in one network to circuits in another network if programmed to do so. This is to ensure that all timer channels are available for control of all circuits in the system. Each controller shall be capable of being programmed locally with timer programs for any of the 100 channels combined together, without the need to connect a PC. Each of the channels shall have a manual operation function to over-ride the channel to „On‟ or „Off‟ irrespective of the time programs. The controller shall have a built-in EEPROM to ensure that the timer programs and control groups are retained even in the event of power failure. This controller device shall be in addition to the BMS PC based software time schedules to ensure uninterrupted stand-alone operation of the system at all times.





External Lighting circuits shall be switched On/Off based on available daylight. A light sensitive switch capable of switching up to three lighting groups, where each individual channel has a separate switching set point shall be used. The brightness range of the set points shall be adjustable from 100 to 2000 Lux as agreed with the consultant/client at the time of commissioning.

Lighting control modules for ON/OFF switching shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of either four (4) or eight (8) individually programmable integral relays (contactors) and comprise of the following:

1. Each of these contactors shall be rated for 16 A, AC1 switching duty together

with an in-rush current carrying capacity of 50 A suitable for switching loads with high switch-on peaks. The contactors should also have a capacitive load rating of at least 200 microfarads.

2. The output states of each of these contactors shall be displayed on the front.

The contactors shall have latching contacts (latch closed) with manual operation (override) possible even without power to the system and without having to remove the cover of the control module.

3. In the event of either a power, controls bus, control module failure, each of the

contactors shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position („On‟, „Off‟ or last status).

4. The control modules shall be capable of being programmed with different

applications to suit site requirements for e.g. staircase lighting function that switches „Off‟ the relays after a preprogrammed time from the time it has switched „On‟. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall apply irrespective of the signal from which it is controlled.

5. Each of the contactors shall be capable of being programmed with its own

„On‟ and „Off‟ delays that shall be applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are controlled.

6. The control modules shall receive an operational power supply from the

controls bus cable without the need for any other power supply. It shall not operate on any 220/240 V AC supply to avoid possible fire hazards.

7. Each of the control modules shall an individual address and shall be capable of being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters without the need to access the module locally.

The Occupancy Sensors

Occupancy sensors Passive Infrared (PIR) are passive designed to detect the movement of heat-emitting bodies. They are installed to monitor areas where there are no physical obstruction to block the sensor‟s field of view. The sensor detects the motion as a change in infrared background and responds by switching on area lights.





After the field of view is unoccupied for user- defined delayed – off time, the sensor will automatically turn off the lights. PIR sensors use a semiconductor detector to sense the movement of infrared emitted from the human body. They require an unobstructed line-of-sight for accurate detection. Locate PIR sensors with a clear line-of-view of area to be covered. Place the sensor perpendicular to likely movement as a person is most easily detected when crossing the boundary between one Fresnel lens element and another.

Minimum Features

1. 360º Ceiling Mount PIR Detector 2. Range: Maximum 20m x 15m ellipse and adjustable to less ranges 3. PIR activation indicator 4. Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity 5. Manual delayed off-time setting of 30 second to 30 minutes 6. Non-volatile memory preserves all automatic and manual setting during power

outages. 7. Ambient light override prevents light from turning on when there is ample

natural light. 8. Color to be match ID ceiling color 9. CUL/US Certified 10. Meet ASHRAE standard 90.1requirement. 11. Backed by a five year warranty

21.2.28 MASTER ANTENNA AND SATELLITE RECEPTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions (General requirements), apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation master antenna television system in the building in accordance with Drawings and specifications.

B. The system shall consist of a complete installation including Aerials, aerial

mounting, head end equipment, dishes, multi switches splitters, coaxial Cables, tap offs, outlets, and all necessary accessories required for complete installation.





1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer‟s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of master antenna and satellite reception system of types, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

DIN/VDE, IEC.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer‟s data and installation instructions for the master antenna television system

B. Shop Drawings : Submit dimensional layout on architectural background

drawings.

C. Riser diagram: Submit riser diagram for the master antenna and satellite reception system indicating type of different components in the system and also the calculations of the signal level at each outlet.

D. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with

this specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner different from that described and specified, a full description of the deviation shall be provided.

1.5 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer‟s and dealer‟s standard warranties for a period of not less than one year from date of initial start-up and Engineer acceptance of the system and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTRODUCTION

A. The contractors shall provide, install, test and commission master antenna and satellite reception system utilizing the multi-switch technology to distribute the IF signals from 3 satellite dishes in addition to RF signal from VHF/UHF antenna.

B. The Contractor shall show evidence of having successfully completed at least

three similar projects of a comparable quality and magnitude.





C. The contractor shall show evidence that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate maintenance of the installed system.

D. After the system is installed the contractor shall furnish a complete set of

operating instructions, technical information and system drawings necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.

The drawings shall include signal levels throughout the system as they were on the acceptance date of the system.

E. The contractor shall provide and install, all the required cable and wiring for the

systems specified. He shall pull cable into conduit and boxes, install all system equipment and make all necessary connections. He shall also make necessary tests and adjustments and put the entire systems in satisfactory operation.

F. The contractor shall investigate the electrical power standards of the local area

and the specific premises in which the equipment is to be installed. All equipment shall be compatible with the local power supply, voltage and frequency.

G. All major items of equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer, where

practicable, to ensure a uniform quality and compatible styling and appearance. H. The system shall be rated and capable of continuous twenty-four (24) hour

operation. I. TV sockets shall be provided from the same manufacturer of lighting switches and

sockets, TV socket shall support the SAT. Frequency.

2.2 STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. The master antenna television system installed shall comply with all applicable, International standards and code of practice and Qatari Standards.

B. It is the contractor‟s responsibility to ensure compatibility of systems with

domestic television and radio equipment available in Qatar. C. The master antenna television system shall be designed and installed by

competent personnel specializing in this type of work. Installation shall be carried out to the highest standards of workmanship.

2.3 SYSTEM CRITERIA

A. The contractor shall supply the master antenna television system for satellite reception television, for the distribution to outlet points as shown on the drawings.

B. The system shall be based on the multi switching technology. C. The Contractor shall install the dish farm on the building roof.





D. Each TV/outlet shall have IF&RF socket. E. Wiring shall be carried out using the appropriate size of super low loss coaxial

cables. Coaxial cables shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.

F. The contractor shall install master antenna television system outlets as indicated

on the drawings. G. The contractor shall provide and install all power supplies necessary for the

correct operation of the system. H. Subjective evaluation of the picture quality on a standard television receiver /

satellite receiver connected to any outlet in the system shall be utilized. No visible components of cross channels inter-modulation, ghosting, or beat interference shall appear when the receiver is tuned to each and every distribution signal.

I. Objective proof of the capability of the system to meet the performance

specifications in this section will be required of the contractor during the acceptance tests. The contractor shall furnish all test equipment for these tests.

2.4 MASTER AERIAL T.V

A. Aerials suitable for receiving terrestrial broadcast shall be installed on the roof of the building, with special amplifiers and/or filters. The aerial array would be of the best quality and optimum type for the highest possible standard of reception.

B. The aerial shall be fitted to a mast mounted on the roof of the building. C. All materials used in the fabrication of the aerials and their mountings shall be

protected against corrosion by heavy anodic coating, hot galvanizing or corrosion resistant compound.

D. Aerials shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy with positive locking of all

elements in position. Square boom constructed is preferred. E. Nuts, bolts, locking washers etc. shall be of such material or so treated that no

galvanic action can take place. F. All aerials shall be supplied with a completely weather proof cased transformer to

provide the standard impedance of the system (75 ohm) and weather proof glands with strain relieving properties shall be provided for the coaxial outlet cable.

G. The feeders connecting the aerials to the multi-switch shall be of the highest

quality, the optimum type for the particular installation, and must be installed in accordance with the current issue of international standard code of practice.

H. All radio-frequency levels in this section are to be construed as referred to one

microvolt across 75 ohms.





I. One standard radio-frequency distribution impedance shall be used in the system. This shall be 75 ohms and no other impedance shall be used without the express permission of the Engineer.

J. The signal as measured at each or any correctly terminated outlet shall be

between + 50 dB to + 60 dB for IF frequencies and between + 68 dB to 85 dB for RF frequencies.

K. Color performance on 625-line PAL system shall be at least to normal

commercial standards, in particular the following shall be observed.

Chrominance signal phase : IQ cross view less than 10%.

Dependent level phase : 3 degrees.

Luminance/chrominance ratio : 2 dB. L. The entire installation shall be designed for minimum voltage standing wave ratio

and the return loss shall be not less than 20 dB at any point of the system. M. Isolation between any two outlets shall be at least 22 dB. N. The system shall be such that the short circuiting or open circuiting of any outlet

socket shall not significantly affect signals at other outlets. O. Spurious radiation shall be within the limits laid down by international regulations. P. The system shall be capable of continuous operation in an ambient temperature

of 45 degrees Celsius and with voltage variations of 10% from the nominal 240 V, 50 Hz. LV supply.

Q. MATV system risers shall all be of the super low loss 75 ohms, cu-core coaxial

type (attenuation at 800 MHz not exceeding 8 dB/100 Mt.), run inside the mast and securely clamped against vibration and whipping. Where run through roof or side walls the appropriate tubing with U-shaped-ending shall be used to prevent ingress of moisture and sealing shall be ensured at the outer extremity only by use of appropriate sealing compound.

2.5 LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

A. Each aerial shall have its own integral spark gap and together with its co-axial down-lead and the mast be bonded to a down-lead of at least 25x3mm. mm cross section, terminating in a main earth.

2.6 MAST OF SATELLITE DISH

The mast constructed of galvanized steel with a minimum diameter of 4 inches (10 cm). The satellite dishes mast shall be protected against lightning damage by grounding to the nearest approved system.





The satellite dish shall be grounded a common grounding points. The mast shall be adequately supported on the reinforced concrete pad to withstand wind and other environmental conditions, prevalent at this location. All satellite dishes down-lead cables shall be fully shielded 75 Ohm coaxial type. All cable fittings to the dish shall be covered with weather sealing devices and sealed with silicone compound.

2.7 SATELLITE DISHES AND EQUIPMENT

Four fixed parabolic dishes. The dishes shall be of the symmetrical parabolic type and 2.4 m diameter. The components specification shall be as follow:

a. Frequency range : 10.95 - 12.75 GHz. b. Gain : not less than 44 dB

c. Half power beam width : not greater than 1 d. Material : Aluminum.

2.8 FEED SYSTEM To fulfill the requirements of DIN/VDE 0855 part 12.

a. Completely mounted on the reflector. b. Power supply through down lead. c. Frequency range : 10.95-12.75 GHz. d. Gain : not less than 47 dB. e. Output impedance : 75 ohm. f. Polarization decoupling : 40 dB (min.)

The feed system shall comprise a band pass filter for suppression of out band distributing signals according to DIN/VDE 0855, part 12.

2.9. Distribution System A. Multi Switch Unit

1. The building master antenna television system shall utilize Cascadeable multi-switches (Active / Passive) with 16 SAT. Inputs, one RF Input and 8 subscriber Outputs, at the end of each riser section, Standalone (not cascadable) Multi-switch shall be used, Standalone Multi-switch shall have 16 SAT. Inputs, one RF Input and 16 subscriber Outputs

The contractor shall add in his offer all needed amplifiers to obtain RF signal strength 68-85 dB and IF signal strength 50-60dB at each outlet.





B. Tap off units

1. Tap-off units shall have 75 Ohm back matched units. Isolation and insertion loss shall be chosen for each location to enable the total system performance specification to be met.

2. Tap-off isolation network shall be directional coupler hybrid design. The

contractor shall adjust the head end to provide frequency tilt to compensate for the frequency discriminative characteristics of the system cable.

C. Riser and Horizontal coaxial cables

1. The system riser coaxial cable shall be 75 Ohm impedance with an attenuation of 8 dB/100 meters ( at 800 MHz ). It shall be sweep tested by the manufacturer and certification shall be available on request.

2. Acceptable Cable constructions are as follows:

i. Center conductor :Solid copper or copper clad.

ii. Dielectric insulation : Solid of foam polyethylene.

iii. Shield :100% coverage with aluminized mylar

or polyester foil plus copper or aluminum wire braid. (wire braid only shield will not be acceptable).

iv. Jacket :Polyvinyl chloride.

3. For horizontal coaxial cables, the attenuation shall be 12db/100m (at 800

MHz). These cables shall be used to connect between the TV outlets and nearest multi switch unit.

2.17 TESTS ON SITE

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide test equipment so that tests can be carried on site and in the presence of the consultant in order to ascertain that the installation meets all the specified performance criteria.

B. The following tests shall be carried out using a pattern generator with facilities for

all aspects of video and audio performance including:

1. Color Performance. 2. Ghosting. 3. Resolution. 4. Synchronization performance, and any other measurements that

Engineer may which to perform. 5. System Performance. 6. System Recording.





The generator shall provide crystal controlled carries at all channel frequencies in bands I and III modulated with 1000 Hz. audio and appropriate video signal. Output shall be variable between at least + 20 dB and +100 dB. The raw video and audio signals shall also be available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which master antenna and satellite

reception systems are to be installed and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install master antenna television system equipments, including associated control devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized code of practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B.

C. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure

enclosures are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.

D. Provide equipment earthing connections for the master antenna and satellite

reception systems units as required.

21.2.29 GRID-TIED SOLAR PV SYSTEM

The Solar PV system shall be supplied, installed and commissioned by a specialist

contractor. The application shall be grid-tied load sharing. The PV Cells shall be grouped parallel to Single Source Modules (SSM) with maximum 10-18 Cells per SSM to generate voltage below 600V D.C. The Contractor shall supply a suitable PV cell mounting structure with PV Cells facing south with an angle of 30 degrees.

The SSMs shall be then fed in to the Solar Combiner boxes, which shall be

connected to the Grid-Tied Solar Inverter. The Inverter shall convert the generated DC power to AC and fed to the MV Panel.





A. PV Cell

Electrical Characteristics PV Element Type : TYP1 Dimensions : 1500 x 1000 x 13.52 mm Cells : 24 Poly Cells (156 x 156 mm) Cell Distance : 60 mm width and 10 mm length Edge Distance : Top 35.5 mm; bottom 35.5mm; left 135.5 mm;

right 135.5 mm - 6mm heatstrength, glass lowiron - Interlayer: PVB film - Cell net - interlayer: PVB film - 6mm heat-strengthened glass - 13.52 mm glass thickness Nominal Power : 98.72 Wp (+/- 5%) Short Circuit Current : 8.05 A Nominal Current : 7.53 A Open Circuit Voltage : 15.48 V Nominal Voltage : 13.13 V Temp Coeff Voltage (Uoc) : -0.34 %/K Temp Coeff Current : 0.06 %/K Temp Coeff Power : -0.43 %/K Weight : 29.138 kg

B. Grid-Tied Solar Inverter

The Grid-tied Solar inverter shall synchronize its frequency with that of the grid using a local oscillator and limit the voltage to no higher than the grid voltage. Grid-tied Solar inverter shall have close to unity power factor, in turn having its output voltage and current are perfectly lined up, and its phase angle shall be within 1 degree of the AC power grid. The inverter shall be complete with an on board computer which will sense the current AC grid waveform, and output a voltage to correspond with the grid. The Inverter shall be designed to shut off immediately after grid supply failure to avoid blackout. The Cooling system of the inverter shall be forced convection cooling. The Inverter shall be with standard user display LCD screen 4-lines, with 20 character keypad. The inverter shall have integral disconnection for both AC and DC sides with following protection mechanisms.

a. AC over / under voltage b. AC over / under frequency c. over temperature d. AC and DC over current e. DC over voltage





Technical Specifications





21.2.30 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

a. General

The contractor shall fully test and commission the whole of the electrical installation

in accordance with the KAHRAMAA & IEE regulations and the requirements of this specification.

The testing activities shall be recorded in detail and the results submitted to the Consultant. The contractor shall then demonstrate that the installations are properly commissioned, that they operate in the correct manner and are capable of functioning to accomplish the design intention as outlined herein.

b. Site Tests

Site testing of all systems and components comprising the works shall be carried out in the presence and to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant after the contractor has first satisfied himself that the installation is functioning properly.

The contractor shall provide all certified instruments, equipment, plant, labour and materials necessary for conducting specified site tests and shall be responsible for and prepared to demonstrate the accuracy of all the test instruments supplied by him.

The contractor shall give the Consultant, notice in writing when any portion of the electrical installation is complete. Should the Consultant or his representative not attend within 7 days of receipt of such written notice, the contractor may proceed with the test, however duplicate certified copies of the results obtained shall be forwarded the Consultant.

All electrical installations, plant and equipment tests shall fully satisfy the

requirements of KAHRAMAA and those laid down in the IEE regulations.

The contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all safety devices

etc., as required by KAHRAMAA. Once the contractor has satisfied himself that the

installation complies with KAHRAMAA requirements, he shall arrange for

KAHRAMAA to conduct their own test prior to handing over. Observations shall be made of the operation and performance of the installation and subsequent readjustments shall be made as necessary.

Records of commissioning and testing shall be kept and when the contractor has satisfied himself that the installation is functioning correctly, the results shall be comprehensively reported in a bound copy to the Consultant.

c. Maintenance and Servicing

The contractor shall be held responsible and shall replace any defective part of all and every part of the works for the period of the guarantee from the date of the acceptance test carried out by the Consultant.





The contractor shall also be held liable for any cost of dismantling or erection and making good of any works, which may have to be undertaken in order to replace defective parts.

d. Electrical Tests

As a minimum the contractor shall carry out the tests that follow:

1. All alarm, control and protective circuits shall be tested for correct operation.

2. All lighting circuits shall be energized and checked to ensure that they are all

operational. 3. All single pole switches shall be checked to ensure correct polarity and that

the live conductor has been connected. Neutrals must not pass through any switch

4. All motors, plant and any electrical equipment connected with mechanical

services shall be checked to ensure that they run freely in the correct direction of rotation and that they run without undue noise or vibration.

5. A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the

earth continuity conductor) of every ring circuit and all readings shall be tabulated.

6. Insulation resistance tests shall be made before completing an installation or major alteration to an existing installation if permanently connected to the supply. For these tests, large installations may be divided into groups. A D.C test voltage of not less than twice the normal voltage of the supply (R.M.S. value of a A.C supply) shall be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance provided that for tests on low voltage circuits, the test voltage need not exceed 500 v. D.C. When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches (including if practicable, the main switch) closed and except where earthed concentric wiring is installed the insulation resistance for whole installation shall not be less than 1 mega ohm. When measured between all the conductors connected to any one pole or phase of the supply and in turn all conductors connected to each other pole or phase of the supply, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 1 mega ohm. Wherever practicable, so that all parts of the wiring may be tested, all lamps shall be removed and all current using apparatus shall be disconnected and all local switches controlling lamps or apparatus shall be closed; where the removal of lamps and/or the disconnection of current using apparatus is impracticable, the local switches controlling such lamps and/or apparatus shall be open. This test is not applicable to earthed concentric wiring system. Where apparatus is disconnected for the tests, the insulation resistance between the case or framework and all live parts of each item of fixed apparatus shall be measured separately and shall comply with the requirements given in the appropriate British Standard for the apparatus. If there is no appropriate British Standard, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega ohm.





7. A verification of polarity shall be made to ensure that all fuses and single pole control devices are connected in the phase conductor only. The centre contact of Edison type screw lamp holders is connected to the phase conductor and outer metal threaded part is connected to neutral conductor. Wiring to plugs and socket outlets should be such that they are connected with phase conductor on right when inspected from front. A proprietary type of polarity testing device shall be used for the tests. The complete installation shall be tested to ensure that all main switch gear is connected to give the correct phase rotation.

8. The contractor or others responsible for the work shall test the effectiveness of the earthing of each completed installation by means of an earth fault loop impedance test. This test shall be carried out by using earth fault loop impedance test instrument.

e. Commissioning

The contractor shall carry out the following:

1. Set all units and apparatus to work.

2. Adjust and set up all automatic controls, regulating devices, measure and adjust any plant under his responsibility, duties and ratings and performance of all components for all items installed separately and integrated into the installation as a whole.

3. Record in detail each step and stage of commissioning and test results, reporting the test stages until the tests are satisfactory.

4. The contractor shall carry out insulation, continuity, earth loop impedance, switching and sequencing, direction of rotation and all other tests required under the IEE regulations.

5. Should the test carried out fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment is correctly installed and / or functioning correctly, then the Consultant shall decide whether such failure is due to negligence upon the contractor's part (including in this context as defined all his sub-contractors and suppliers) in which case, the contractor shall carry out all remedial works entirely at his own expense.

6. After remedial works have been completed the Contractor shall again report to the Consultant for further tests to be carried out. The Consultant's decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory result shall be final.

7. The completed installation or parts thereof shall be subjected to acceptance

tests as instructed by KAHRAMAA or the Consultants before being connected to the Supply. Tests shall be includes as follows:

a. Tests as prescribed in the KAHRAMAA regulations.





b. Tests in accordance with British Standards and Codes of Practice contained therein.

c. Insulation resistance. d. Earth continuity. e. Continuity resistance of conductors and sheathing of each section and

the whole installation. f. Full-load tests as required by the Consultant. g. Current injection tests of all over-current devices and residual current

operated circuit breakers etc.

These tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Consultant and the Contractor shall give 7 days written notice of intentions to carry out any of the tests.

21.2.31 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

The contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical completion of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by the contractor.

If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to do so by another agency at the contractor's entire risk and expense without prejudice to any rights of the Client.

21.2.32 SPARES

The Contractor shall include manufacturer's spares for 2 years running, further to the Warranty period, in addition to the spare parts mentioned in the QCS. These shall be provided in this contract. Prior to order, the Contractor shall prepare in triplicate a submittal listing all spares for each item/equipment, clearly detailing manufacturer's name, address telephone and telex numbers and spare part reference number, together with component cost. The submittal shall be passed to the Engineer for approval and only upon receipt of approval in writing from the Engineer may the final order be placed. Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturers provide a warranty for providing spares up to a period of 10 years for all the equipment supplied on this project. The recommendation of 2 years (spare) shall be provided by the respective approved manufacturer through the authorized local agent and to be delivered to central stores. The spares shall include but not limited to the following system:

a. Transformers b. M.V. Panels c. Sub main Boards & Distribution Boards d. Fire Alarm System e. Central battery system





f. AV System g. CCTV and access control System h. SMATV i. Lighting control System j. UPS

21.2.33 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING HIGHTS

1. Lighting Switches : 1250 mm. AFFL 2. 20 A DP switch for water heater and : 1250 mm. AFFL water cooler 3. Mirror light : To match with the mirror 4. 13 A socket outlet, computer terminal, : 450 mm AFFL or socket, television outlet 250 mm. above (unless otherwise mentioned) worktop in kitchen and Pantries 5. Cooker control unit : 1600 mm AFFL 6. Cooker low level connection outlet : 450 mm AFFL 7. Telephone outlet : 450 mm AFFL 8. Wall mounting telephone : 1350 mm AFFL 9. Thermostats : 1700 mm AFFL 10. Fire alarm indicator panel : 1500 mm AFFL 11. Fire alarm bell : 2200 mm AFFL 12. Manual call station : 1250 mm AFFL







1. MV Panel BIN GHALIB - QATAR

(MERLIN GERIN) FRANCE QATAR SWITCHGEAR QATAR

(ABB) EUROPE QATAR GERMAN SWITCHGEAR CO. QATAR

(SIEMENS). GERMANY

2. Sub-Main Switch Boards MERLIN GERIN FRANCE & ABB EUROPE Distribution Boards SIEMENS GEMANY

3. Fuse Switches, Switch Fuses ABB STROMBERG EUROPE

Isolators SCAME ITALY MEM UK SACOMEC FRANCE

4. Cables DUCAB UAE OMAN CABLE OMAN DOHA CABLES QATAR

5. MICC Cables PYROTENAX BICC CANDA AEI UK

WREXHAM UK

6. Fire Rated Cable PRISMIAN UK PIRELLI CABLE UK FIRECELL UK

7. Cable Tray DAVIS UK SWIFT UK BARTON UK

8. Cable Trunking SWIFT UK BARTON UK BURN TUBES UK

9. G.I. Conduits and Fittings BARTON UK ALLIED USA

COMAT UAE

10. PVC Conduits and Fittings COMAT UAE DECODUCT UAE

MARSHALL TUFFLEX UK QNPF QATAR

11. Flexible Fire Cable FP 200 GOLD ITALY

PIRELLI ITALY





FIRECELL U.K

12. Wiring Accessories MK UK LEGRAND FRANCE

MEM UK SCAME ITALY (CONTRACTOR MUST OBTAIN FINAL APPROVAL FROM THE CLIENT)

13. Fire Alarm System SIEMENS CERBERUS USA SIMPLEX USA EDWARD CANADA CANADA HOCHIKI AMERICA USA NOTIFIER USA

14. Central Battery CEAG USA INOTEC UK VENTILUX UK

15. Earthing W.J. FURSE UK

AN WALLIS UK ERICO GERMANY

16. Securities, Access Control VICON USA

CCTV VIDEOTRONIX PHILIPS G.E USA

BAXALL UK AMERICAN DYNAMIC DEDICATED MICRO PELCO USA

SENDIAN TECHNOLOGY & INTEGRATED

SECURITY SYSTEM (STIS) (Client

Nominated Vendor)

17. UPS MERLIN GERIN FRANCE SAFT SWEDEN ALPHATEC CANADA CHLORIDE ITALY

18. Lighting Control System ABB ITALY & Occupancy Sensors LEVITON USA

MERTEN GERMANY

19. Flexible Conduit COMAT UAE BURN TUBES UK BARTON UK

20. Emergency/Exit Lights CEAG USA

CROMPTON UK RP TECHNIK GERMANY

PHILIPS HOLLAND





25. SMATV WISI GERMANY

GRUNDIG GERMANY TELEVES USA

26. Power Factor Capacitor ABB EUROPE SIEMENS GERMANY SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC FRANCE

27. Contractor, Relays and Starter ABB EUROPE

SIEMENS GERMANY MERLIN GERIN FRANCE

28. Structured Cabling System NORDEX USA LEVITON USA ALCATEL FRANCE PANDUIT USA

29. Lighting Fixture REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWING NO. E-A1-GD09 (Internal and External)

30. Generator Set CATERPILLAR USA CUMMINS/ONAN UK KOHLER USA

31. Bus bar SIEMENS GERMANY GE USA BARDUCT UK

32. Distribution Transformer ABB GERMANY

SIEMENS GERMANY TRANSFO FRANCE

(FINAL APPROVAL IS SUBJECT TO KHARAMAA APPROVAL)

33. Evacuation System ATEIS FRANCE SONY JAPAN

CRESTRON AUSTRALIA 34. Cable Label HELUKABEL USA

PARTEX UK INOTEC UK

35. Telecommunication Active NORDEX USA

Components LEVITON USA ALCATEL FRANCE CISCO U.S.A

36. Weather Proof Enclosures MEM USA LEGTAND FRANCE MK UK

37. Electrical Digital Meter LEVITON USA





ABB EUROPE SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC EUROPE

38. P.V Cells SHARP JAPAN

MITSUBISHI JAPAN SANYO GERMANY

SECTION – 22

AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION




AEB-740-08 -REV.0 S-22-1/101 AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION

SL. NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

22.1.00 COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATIONS 22.1.01 General Conditions of Contract 22.1.02 Work by Others 22.1.03 Major Equipment and Local Representation 22.1.04 Codes and Standards for Works 22.1.05 Data to be Supplied with Tender 22.1.06 Drawings, Submittals, Instructions, Manual Etc 22.1.07 General Requirements 22.1.08 Tests at Site 22.1.09 Commissioning by Specialists 22.1.10 Practical Completion Certificate 22.1.11 Guarantee and Maintenance Period

22.2.00 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 22.2.01 Description and Brief Scope of Work 22.2.02 Basis of Design 22.2.03 Interlock with Fire Alarm System 22.2.04 Inter –Discipline Coordination 22.2.05 Split A/C Units 22.2.06 Chilled Water Pumping System 22.2.07 Pressurization Package 22.2.08 Plate Heat Exchanger 22.2.09 Treated Fresh Air Handling Units 22.2.10 Fan Coil Units 22.2.11 Vibration Isolators





22.2.12 Sheet Metal Work 22.2.13 Dampers 22.2.14 Fresh Air Intake 22.2.15 Filters 22.2.16 Flexible Connections 22.2.17 Flexible Duct 22.2.18 Sound Attenuators 22.2.19 Air Terminals 22.2.20 Fans 22.2.21 Pipework , Valves and Fittings 22.2.22 Insulation 22.2.23 Chilled Water Treatment 22.2.24 Painting and Finishing 22.2.25 Identification/Colour Coding 22.2.26 Civil Works / Builders Work 22.2.27 Test Holes 22.2.28 Instruments and Gauges 22.2.29 Electrical Works and Control System 22.2.30 Spare Parts and Special Tools 22.2.31 Warranty 22.2.32 Schedule of Technical Data 22.2.33 Commissioning Sheets 22.2.34 Schedule and Explanatory Notes 22.2.35 List of Approved Manufacturers





22.1.00 COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATIONS

22.1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The work under this section of the specification shall include the supply, delivery to

site, installation, testing and commissioning and setting to work the Air conditioning and Ventilation systems on shell and core basis for the Sendian Tower office building, Lusail Area, Doha, Qatar.

The contractor shall provide all the materials, labour, cartage, plant and appliances

necessary for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the work and all other minor and incidental works necessary for the system.

The specification and the drawings are intended to indicate the nature and over all

scope of the project. Any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or among contract documents, or any doubts as to their meaning should be called to the attention of the Consultants by the works contractor at the time of submitting his tender.

The contractor shall visit the site and ascertain by himself the nature and scope of

the works, prior to tendering. It is important that the contractor fully familiarizes himself about dismantling work – if any - in connection with carrying out his work.

The Contractor is responsible for the installation of a complete system of correct

capacity and shall guarantee the efficient and optimum performance of the system as a whole. Contractor shall guarantee for the efficient performance of various equipment which shall not be less than the specified ratings when working under the operating conditions for the respective items as given in the specifications.

It is mandatory to have performance testing under simulated conditions at the

factory of prospective suppliers of airside equipment, pumps etc. prior to shipment. Anything, not specifically mentioned, but necessary for the fulfillment of the guarantee and requirements called for in the contract or necessary for the proper operation of the installations is to be provided by the works contractor without any additional cost.

The works contractor shall guarantee holding a full set of spare-parts for all of the

equipment he intends to supply and install, for a minimum period of two years. In addition, the contractor shall include for the supply of the said spares which shall be delivered before the issue of the practical completion certificate.

Entire works shall be carried out as a single contract. All items of works even if not

listed in the Bill of Quantities but covered in the specifications or in the drawings are deemed to be included in Contractors price. The contractor shall submit the lump sum price for the whole woks with a breakdown for individual headings as per the Bill of Quantities. No variation claims shall be entertained.

The contractor shall not without the consent in writing of the Engineer assign or sublet his contract or any substantial part thereof other than for raw materials or minor details. Consent for subletting shall not relieve the contractor from any obligation, duty or responsibility under the contract.





The contractor shall comply with all bye-laws and regulations of local and other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works and shall be responsible for the payment of all fees and other charges and the giving and receiving of all necessary notices. Works shall be carried out in conformity with the specifications and in coordination with the architectural / structural / other services requirements /constraints.

The contractor shall submit within seven days from the date of acceptance of the

tender, detailed schedules showing the programme and order in which the contractor proposes to carry out the works with dates and estimated completion time for various parts of the work in the form of bar-chart based on “the critical path method”. Such schedules shall be approved by the Consultant before starting of the work and shall be binding on the contractor.

Routine tests for various items of equipment shall be performed at the contractor‟s

works, prior to shipment and test certificates shall be furnished. Contractor shall inform and permit Engineer to be present during these tests. Contractor shall bear all the expenses thereof.

The contractor shall operate, test and adjust all air conditioning, ventilation and

exhaust system units, fans, pumps, motors, all air handling units ,fan coil units, plate heat exchangers etc. provided in connection with this installation and shall make all necessary adjustments and corrections thereof including the adjustment of all regulators, valves, dampers etc for the purpose achieving the design flow through all ducts and to each and every outlet and inlet & through all piping and equipment.

If the completed plant or any portion thereof before it is taken over or during the

guarantee and defects liability period be found defective or fails to fulfill the intent of this specification, the contractor shall on receipt of notice from the Consultant forthwith make the defective plant good. Should he fail to do so within a time considered reasonable by the Consultant, the owner may reject and replace at the risk and expense of the contractor the whole or any portion of the plant which is defective or fails to fulfill the requirements of the contract.

The contractor appointed for A/C works shall have the valid Grade „A‟ license from

KAHRAMAA (formerly QGEWC) or Credentials to that equal up to the discernment of Consultant. A copy of the license shall be submitted to the Consultant. The contractor shall also submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the A/C Engineer, A/C Foreman and A/C Technicians to be employed on the project along with their KAHRAMAA license copies, and obtain approval from the Consultant.

Inclusion in the list of approved manufacturers do not absolve the supplier/contractor of his obligations to fulfill the detailed specifications in accordance with contract documents.

Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders

submitted by the contractor who resorts to canvassing is liable to be rejected.

The Contractor is responsible for the safe storage, protection and safety of his equipment and materials at site. All materials and equipment must be stored and protected properly so as to prevent damage, corrosion, deterioration or dirt penetration. Manufacturer‟s recommendations shall be strictly followed regarding





storage. All duct and pipe outlets must be adequately closed to prevent dust and dirt penetration during the course of erection.

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications shall mean: Specification : The specification annexed to or issued with these Conditions of Contract

Contract : The agreement between the Contractor and Owner to be entered into under these conditions and shall include these conditions of contract, specifications, schedules, correspondence, letter of intent of the Owner and any subsequent amendment mutually agreed upon.

Site : The place or places at which the plant is to be delivered or work to be done by the Contractor and shall include where applicable the lands and buildings upon or in which the works are to be executed and shall also include the place or places at which fabrication and other work will be carried out by the contractor. Plant, Equipment, Stores The plant and materials to be provided and Works and Work or Works to be done by the contractor under the contract

Test on Completion Tests as are prescribed by the

specification or as per International standards as applicable, to be carried out before the plant is taken over by the owner. In case, tests are not possible due to climatic conditions at the time of completion, the contractor shall be bound to carry out tests at any time subsequent to the date of completion, but before the end of defects liability period.

22.1.02 WORK BY OTHERS All builder‟s works related to equipment foundations, wall openings for ducting,

piping etc, final flashing and water proofing of roof openings, Access panels in false ceilings for operation / maintenance, Door undercuts, Openings in doors for door grilles shall be provided by the main Civil contractor.





A/C contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other Contractors as necessary. Particular attention is drawn to the following:

a. Co-ordination with M/s MARAFEQ for Chilled water supply tie-up b. Co-ordination with LUSAIL Authority. c. Co-ordination with Electrical for Power Supply d. Co-ordination with Hydraulics for drain locations and water supply. e. Coordination with Fire services for fire shutdown, sprinkler etc.

The division of work between the A/C contractor and the Electrical contractor shall

be as specified elsewhere under clause “ ELECTRICAL WORKS & CONTROL SYSTEM “.

22.1.03 MAJOR EQUIPMENT AND LOCAL REPRESENTATION

The make, model and type of all equipment, materials and accessories proposed to

be used in the project are subject to prior approval of the Engineer.

All these equipment and other materials must have an established Local Qatari Agent who shall have complete after-sales service & maintenance facility and also holds adequate spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer

22.1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS FOR WORKS

Unless otherwise specified, all equipment are to comply with the relevant British and American codes of practice as listed below. However, the KAHRAMAA latest regulations and requirements of Qatar Construction Specification (QCS) shall take prominence over all other regulations. 1. ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air

Conditioning Engineers. 2. IHVE : The Institute of Heating and Ventilation Engineers, UK

3. ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers 4. AMCA : Air Movement and Control Association, USA 5. ARI : Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, USA 6. ASTM : American Society of Testing Materials 7. AWS : American Welding Society, USA 8. DW 144 : Specification for sheet metal duct work

9. SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors‟ National Association, USA





10. NFPA : National Fire Protection Association, USA 11. QCS : Qatar Construction Specification

12. : MARAFEQ / LUSAIL Authority requirements

13 AABC : Associated Air Balance Council, USA 14. HI : Hydraulic Institute, USA 15. NEBB : National Environmental Balancing Bureau, USA 16. CIBSE : Chartered institute of Building Services Engineers, UK

The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air conditioning installation. A competent Engineer must be in regular attendance throughout the whole contract. The whole of the installation shall be executed in conformity with the specification, internationally accepted codes of practice and the current KAHRAMAA/QCS regulations.

22.1.05 DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER

i. Technical data of all equipment proposed, performance curves, ii. Selection data sheet etc.as applicable. iii. Exclusions and deviations from specification. iv. Guarantee particulars. v. List of spare parts required for 2 years maintenance and special tools vi. Engineering catalogues in Originals.

22.1.06 DRAWINGS, SUBMITTALS, INSTRUCTIONS, MANUAL ETC.

General All drawings and material submissions, other information and samples must be supplied to the Consultant as laid in the specifications or as instructed by the Consultant.

Shop Drawings to be Prepared by the Contractor The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed shop drawings for all equipment or distribution services described herein. Such drawings shall indicate: i. All civil works, openings, bases, position of sleeves etc. ii. The physical dimensions of the equipment.





iii. The sizes of foundation base wherever required. iv. Location of center bolts to base. v. Position of motors, controls, air duct connections etc. vi. Detailed wiring diagram of all electrical systems. vii. Piping isometric diagram viii. Any other drawing found necessary or requested by the Consultant for co-

ordination of works. The work described on any shop drawing submitted shall be properly checked by the Contractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance space and proper co-ordination.

Equipment layout is to be detailed on drawings showing the exact method of installing and clearly illustrating components to be used in making all connections. All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted in the form of three sets of blue prints to the Consultant for approval, who in turn, after making his comments will return two sets of the same to the Contractor for necessary revisions if any. Thereafter the Contractor shall submit five sets of blue prints for the Consultant's final approval. Once the drawings are finally approved, the contractor shall submit in reproducible copy negative for Consultant's signature and the same shall be kept on site for execution. It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all grilles, diffusers, equipment, pipes, ducts, light fittings, false ceiling layout and other Electrical and Mechanical services to allow a completely symmetrical and co ordinated installation. It is also the responsibility of the contractor to co ordinate with (main) Civil contractor. A comprehensive Work programme shall be prepared for such co-ordination and shall be strictly adhered to at all stages of work.

As Built Drawings The Contractor shall supply to the Consultant a set of 'As-Built' drawings showing the works 'As-Built' together with any other information necessary for operation and maintenance. Four copies of each such drawing shall be supplied. In addition, two sets of copy negatives for each drawing and a CD-ROM with all the drawings shall be handed over to the client. Material Submittals On award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide a list of the items for which they propose to furnish submittals. All submissions shall be made within 15 days of the award of the contract or earlier as directed by the Consultant.





The Contractor shall furnish submittals in triplicate or as required for all the equipment and materials to the Consultant. Wherever recommended/approved makes have been specified, the contractor shall comply with the requirements of the specification. If it is necessary to offer any alternate or substitute material, the contractor may do so, but clearly substantiating the necessity for the change, cost comparisons, technical equivalence or superiority of the proposed substitute etc for the scrutiny of the Consultant.

The following information should at least be covered while furnishing the submittals: i. Reference number of the specification clause and BOQ. ii. A comparison of the salient points of the equipment/material offered vis-a-vis

specified like capacity, size, model no. etc. iii. A confirmation that the item offered complies fully to the specifications, drawings

and the application in question. Deviations, if any, shall be clearly spelt out and reasons shall be given for the changes proposed.

iv. Complete technical literature for the particular item. In case only general

catalogues are available, the particular item/features offered should be stated clearly on a separate sheet and also marked on the catalogues. Points not applicable should be struck-off.

v. Confirmation that equipment/material proposed can be housed within the space

available. vi. General requirement drawings. vii. Samples, wherever required by the Consultant. The approval of a submittal shall not absolve the Contractor of their responsibility to provide equipment's/materials/services conforming to the Specifications, Bill of Quantities and the application in question. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and proper performance of a complete functional system even though some items may not have been specifically stated in the contract documents. Waivers for deletion/deviation from the Specification, Tender drawings, Bill of Quantities etc., must be requested by the Contractor in writing, stating categorically the change compared to the contract (specified vis-a-vis proposed). The same shall be considered 'waived' only if written specific approval is obtained from the Consultant. The approval of a submittal, any implicit reference or verbal instructions shall not be treated as a waiver. Waivers shall also be subject to reduction in cost and/or time, conditional or unconditional as decided by the Consultant.





Material Status Report

A material status report shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted every two weeks or earlier as directed by the Consultant. The report shall indicate the following: i. Description of the material/equipment ii. Name of the manufacturer/supplier iii. Submittals Number iv. Date of submission of submittal v. Date of approval of submittal vi. Order number/date and L.C reference, if any vii. Delivery period and expected time of arrival on site viii. Actual required-at-site date viii. Remarks, if any

Samples of Materials The Contractor shall submit at no extra cost or charge and with no recourse to any claim for extra time, samples of materials as required by the Consultant for his approval. Time required for arranging the sample shall be considered by the Contractor. Engineer shall and approve the sample and the submittal with reasonable promptness. Samples shall remain at site till the final Handing over.

OPERATION AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS The Contractor shall make provision for the supply of Three (3) copies of the Instruction Manuals before issue of Practical Completion Certificate. This manual shall include the following items: i. Complete list of all items of equipment, controls and accessories as actually

supplied, including serial nos. & all name plate details. ii. A set of 'As-Built' drawings showing equipment layout, foundation details, ducting

layout and details, electrical wiring & drain piping.

The drawings shall show plans and sections necessary to show all required information correctly.

iii. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagram and installation drawings

relevant only to the particular item of air-conditioning and ventilation equipment concerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable.

iv. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment. v. Operational description of the air conditioning plant including starting, stopping





and seasonal shut-down. vi. Preventive maintenance routine at monthly, quarterly, half yearly and yearly

intervals and maintenance procedures for all plant and equipment. The O & M instructions shall be in English.

CD-Rom containing all above information shall also be submitted.

22.1.07 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Quality of Equipment and Materials All equipment and materials shall be brand new, of a quality accepted by the Consultant and presenting no dent, damage or breakage during transportation or installation. All equipment and materials shall be from the latest product range of the manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer.

Protection During Storage and Installation All metal parts shall be protected on site from rust, corrosion and dirt by properly storing, packing and covering. All rusted parts of metal, subject to the Consultant's approval, shall be cleaned of corrosion products and given two coats of anti-rust paint before installation. All moving/rotating/live parts of any equipment shall be suitably protected for personnel safety and to avoid injuries.

Paint, Tags and Nameplates All steel works in connection with supports for ductwork etc., exposed to the elements are to be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint of grey or as approved by the Consultant.

All exposed metal surfaces of refrigeration and electrical apparatus, motors, guards, un-insulated ductwork, ductwork brackets, hangers etc., must be painted with one coat of under-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to approved colour.

All equipment such as heat exchangers, pumps, AHUs, FCUs, fans, electrical

panels, starters, isolators etc shall be fitted with external labels made from approved materials. A sample shall be approved by the Consultant.

Scaffoldings / Lifting facilities Scaffoldings as necessary for the installation of ducting, piping, insulation etc shall





be provided by the A/C contractor. All such scaffoldings shall be approved by the Consultant.

Hoisting / lifting facilities to mount the equipment at their final position shall be the

responsibility of the A/C contractor in co-ordination with the Main Contractor Safety issues shall be given top priority.

22.1.08 TESTS AT SITE

General

The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, one month prior to the date of commencement of the tests, three (3) copies of the complete test procedures to be used. The procedures, method of calculation etc., shall be approved by the Consultant before any test is carried out. Three (3) copies of the test results shall be furnished to the Consultant for his approval. The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carryout tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or a complete system if the Consultant requests such a test, for determining specified or guaranteed data as given in the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled in by the Contractor. Commissioning and balancing of the HVAC systems, networks and equipment must be carried out by AABC / NEBB certified independent agency. Any damage resulting from the test shall be repaired and/or damaged material replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In the event of any repair or adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommended after the adjustments or repairs have been completed. The test shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control. All testing, balancing and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the provision of the applicable 'ASHRAE' standards.

Ductwork All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air

quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.

Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC / NEBB certified independent agency.

Equipment All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted

and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet on the drawings.

Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation, functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system during tests.





If air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the sheaves or the available horse-power, the Consultant shall be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system.

Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed

to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

Water Systems After thorough cleaning of water piping and completion of water treatment, the

stabilizing chemicals shall be added. The final water analysis report shall be approved by the consultant.

All equipment such as chillers, pumps, air handling units, fan coil unit etc. main

chilled water headers and branches shall be tested for water flow rate.

All the flow control devices shall be adjusted and the design water flow rate shall be established in all piping, branches and across all equipment

The total water flow rate shall be within + 5% of design The terminal water flow shall be within + 5% of design

Commissioning and balancing of the HVAC systems , networks and equipments must be carried out by AABC/NEBB certified independent agency.

Electrical Equipment All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of

power as mentioned below:

i. Wire and cable tests. ii. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits and

equipment using a 500 volt megger. The megger reading shall not be less than one mega ohm.

iii. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed half

(1/2)ohm. iv. Phasing out and phase rotation tests. v. Operating tests on all protective relays, starters, circuit breakers etc., to prove

their correct operation before energizing the main equipment.

Fire Alarm System Contractor shall liaise with fire alarm contractor and ensure that correct fire alarm relay is activated and the equipment function correctly.





With the plant on initiative fire mode change over for each zone and verify the sequence of events. Repeat the exercise with the plant OFF. Test all fire dampers / smoke dampers to ensure that they close fully with fans operating.

Test on Completion After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of the plant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are met or approximated. The ventilation trial shall take place at any reasonable time subject to the approval of the Consultant. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one (31) consecutive days during which time the whole of the plant shall operate continuously without readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Consultant

During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air handling unit. Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Consultant. The complete performance test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement of the above said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Consultant. As soon as all tests prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the opinion of the Consultant, a formal Letter of Completion shall be drawn up in three (3) copies and signed by the Consultant.

22.1.09 COMMISSIONING BY SPECIALISTS

Commissioning and balancing of the HVAC systems, networks and equipment must be carried out by AABC/ NEBB certified independent agency.

Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC / NEBB certified independent agency.

Wherever necessary, it is the responsibility of the contractor to arrange and provide all requirements for the specialists to assist him/them in the pre-commissioning activities, start up and commissioning activities for Energy transfer Station, Stair case/smoke stop lobby pressurization system, Basement car park ventilation system and any other equipment / systems

22.1.10 PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

On satisfactory acceptance of Completion tests, the Contractor shall deliver the Operation and Maintenance Manuals along with 'As built' drawings to the Client. The Practical Completion certificate will be issued by the Consultant only after obtaining





the “Operation and Maintenance Manuals” and “As Built” Drawings. Recommendation for release or the release of practical completion certificate would not absolve the contractor of his responsibility to provide an installation complete in all respects and in satisfactory working order. If, at any time of the contract, any item is discovered to be short supplied or not in working order, the contractor shall be liable to make good the same to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

22.1.11 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE PERIOD

All equipment, accessories and the complete system and works shall be guaranteed

for 400 days of un-interrupted operation, against all manufacturing defects and installation defects.

For those equipment with longer guarantee/warranty period, such as compressors of

split A/C units, same shall be passed on as back-to-back basis. The guarantee shall start from the date the Letter of Practical Completion is issued. During the Guarantee period the Contractor shall provide free maintenance and

service for all equipment and the systems installed. The Contractor shall replace or repair all defective parts at no cost to the Client.

In addition, regular visits of specialist maintenance personnel as required by the

equipment supplier shall be provided. During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment and apparatus fulfill the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all fans, pumps, refrigeration and air-conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to adjust all dampers, thermostats and controls and shall provide the Consultant with a complete log and report indicating air quantities, fan speed, power consumption, temperature, sound level etc.

Maintenance and Final Handing Over Test During the last month of the 400 days Maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Consultant that all equipment and systems are operating according to the capacities and the manner set down in the specifications. The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor until all plant & equipment has been tested to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant.





22.2.00 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

22.2.01 DESCRIPTION AND BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK

A/C System

The air conditioning scheme is based on chilled water supplied by district cooling system of M/s MARAFEQ. The Energy transfer station (ETS) with flow meter and other controls, valves etc will be installed and commissioned by the contractor. Chilled water is made available in the secondary side of the ETS. AC system comprising of ETS mentioned above, circulation pumps, pressure breaker, treated fresh air handling units, fan coil units, network of ducting, piping, fittings and valves is provided for the whole building. For some of the areas stand alone dedicated split A/C systems have been provided.

Fan coil units are provided for air conditioning in the landlord‟s areas.

Filtered and treated fresh air shall be supplied to the FCU.

Ventilation and Exhaust System Basement car park shall be ventilated using impulse ventilation technology. All toilets ,kitchen and pantries shall be provided with exhaust ventilation system as per schedule given in the drawings.

Staircase Pressurizaton System

Both the staircases and smoke stop lobby are protected with pressurization systems, which will be energized during fire situations, through the fire alarm control panel.

22.2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN

The broad design parameters for the Air conditioning and Ventilation system shall be as follows:

a. Outdoor design conditions (Summer) 46

0 C DB & 30

0 C WB

(Winter ) 100 C DB & 90% RH

b. Indoor design conditions : 23

0C +/-1

0C, RH < 60 %

c. LIGHTING LOAD : 11 Watts/sq.m

SMALL POWER LOAD : 15 Watts/sq.m

d. Occupancy : Assumed 7m2/person in the offices





Assumed 5m2/Person in the retail area e. Exhaust rates as per ASHRAE 62.1

f. Fresh Air Rate

Ventilation rate is considered 15 % more than the exhaust of each zone for positive pressurization.

g. Glazing: 6MM CARDINAL ADVANCED+ 16mm Air Space +6mm Clear glazing

U factor = 1.3 watts /sq.m/C Shading coefficient = 0.32

h. Rating for continuous service and local ambient conditions

The outside air temperature may occasionally rise to 52

0 C All apparatus shall be

rated for continuous service, Twenty Four hours a day, year round throughout its normal rated life except for necessary routine maintenance. The contractor shall offer equipment, which is capable of operating at the ambient temp. of 52

0 C without

any failure.

22.2.03 INTERLOCK WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

All starting devices shall be interlocked and shall be shut off upon signaling from Fire Alarm Control Panel.( addressable )

22.2.04 INTER – DISCIPLINE CO-ORDINATION

Apart from full time co-ordination with the main contractor, following co-ordinations with other disciplines shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor:

a. Co-ordination with MARAFEQ b. Co-ordination with Electrical for Power Supply c. Co-ordination with Hydraulics for drain locations and water supply. d. Coordination with Fire services for fire shutdown, sprinkler etc. e. Cordination with Interior designer f. Coordination with specialist services . g. Coordination with LUSAIL authority.

22.2.05 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

General

The unit shall comprise of a wall mounted /ceiling suspended indoor unit and an air-cooled outdoor unit for application with R-407 c refrigerant.





Indoor Unit

i. The refrigerant circuit shall have one-shot couplings for liquid and gas inlets, a capillary tube, a strainer and an evaporator coil.

ii. The evaporator coils shall be the multi-pass cross-finned tube type, equipped with

aluminium plate fins, mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes. The fins shall be spaced at not more than 16 fins per 25.4 mm. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.

iii. The unit must be provided with anti-vibration mountings external to the unit. iv. Coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec. v. The evaporator fan shall be forward curved, centrifugal type, statically and

dynamically balanced and directly driven by the motor. The fan motor shall be permanently lubricated.

vi. The evaporator fan must be selected to operate quietly with no overloading of the

motor. vii. The cabinet shall be constructed of finished steel, baked resin paint for a bottom

and top panel. Re-inforced plastic for side panels and front grilles are acceptable as per manufacturer‟s standard. The cabinet interior shall be fully insulated thermally and acoustically and shall be guaranteed to prevent sweating in the highly humid design conditions.

viii. The air filter shall be easily removable and shall be washable type. The thickness

shall be as recommended and supplied by the manufacturer. ix. Evaporator motor shall be easily removable for maintenance. x. Drain pan shall be factory provided, metallic, treated for corrosion resistance and

fully insulated at the bottom. The drain from the drain pan shall be connected to the unit drain pipe.

Outdoor Unit i. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, piped internally, pre-wired and shall

be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 52 deg. C. ii. The refrigerant circuit shall be composed of a gas inlet, one shot coupling, a

condenser coil and a liquid outlet one shot coupling. iii. The condenser coil shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned type, equipped with

aluminium plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.

iv. The condenser fan shall be propeller type in all aluminum construction or FRP as

per manufacturer‟s standard, statically and dynamically balanced and the fan shall





be directly driven by the motor for up flow or horizontal air discharge. The motor shall be permanently lubricated and shall be protected form water invasion.

v. The unit shall contain a hermetic multi-cylinder reciprocating compressor from the

same manufacturer. The compressor shall be direct in-line type and equipped with vibration proof rubber. The hermetic compressor shall be welded shell type and spring suspended internally. The compressor shall be protected against a breakdown by the mercury over current relay, pressure switch and an in-built internal thermostat.

vi. The cabinet shall be constructed of steel, finished with baked synthetic resin paint.

The fan guard wire net shall be mounted on top or side of the unit.

The units shall incorporate the following accessories.

a. Suction –liquid heat exchanger b. Inlet strainer c. Electric crank case heater d. Refrigerant filter dryer e. Sight Glass f. Suction and discharge shut off valves g. Changing, relief and purging valves h. Gauge connections i. Spring mounts for compressor

Unit Control The indoor unit shall be equipped with an operation switch, fan speed selector switch and a thermostat mounted on the remote control switch. The operation switch shall have the function of OFF-FAN-COOL. The control switch shall be wired type or remote type as approved by the Consultant or as shown in the drawing. The operation control shall conform to manual starting, automatic continuous operation whenever the thermostat requires and protection devices allow. The unit shall be restarted by resetting the operation switch if any one of the protection devices trips. The controls shall include high-low pressure switches, oil pressure protection switches and thermal overload cut-out

Protection Devices The magnetic switch box incorporated in the outdoor or indoor unit shall contain magnetic contactor for all motors, including condenser fan motor, over current relays, auxiliary relays and other safety devices as per manufacturer‟s standard.

Operation Sequence

A rotary type switch on the remote control box manually selects the ventilating or





cooling operation. When the operation switch is set at 'FAN' the evaporator fan is started. When the operation switch is set at 'COOL' and all electrical protective devices are satisfied, the thermostat in the remote control box controls the compressor operation.

22.2.06 CHILLED WATER PUMPING SYSTEM

Variable speed secondary pumping system shall be employed for this project. Contractor‟s submittals shall include the following:

1. System summary sheet 2. Sequence of operation 3. Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances location and size of

each field connection. 4. Power and control wiring diagrams 5. System profile analysis including variable speed pump curve and system curve.

The analysis shall also include pump, motor and VFD efficiencies, job specific load profile, staging points, horsepower and kilowatt/hour consumption.

6. Pump data sheets

a. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals not be accepted.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An

assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a manufacturer. The manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility for the complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful operation all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.

B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design

and construction of variable speed pumping systems.

C. All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to VFD output and it shall test inputs, outputs and program execution specific to this application.

D. The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards

Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at the time of submittal.

E. Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriter‟s Laboratories as a manufacturer of

packaged pumping systems.





F. Contractor shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged pumping systems. If no deviations are noted, the supplier or contract shall be bound by these specifications.

Secondary Chilled Water Pumps

Pumps shall be centrifugal, end suction type. Pumps shall be base mounted, directly connected to their motor through flexible couplings.

Pump casings shall be cast iron with bronze or stainless steel impeller, stainless steel shaft, mechanical seal, flexible coupling and cast iron base. Pump impellers and rotating assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory

Pumps shall be selected to operate at the point of maximum efficiency and shall not be selected under any circumstances at the end of its curve.

Each pump shall be fitted with the following components:

i. 100 mm. diameter suction and discharge pressure gauges, siphons and cocks. ii. Flexible connections on inlet and outlet iii. Check valve on outlet. iv. Isolating gate valve on inlet and outlet. v. Strainer on inlet. vi. Vibration isolators below pump bases

The Contractor is expected to cross check the pressure head requirements in conjunction with the water side equipment selected by him and submit the necessary calculations to the Engineer for approval. Pump shall be selected at its maximum efficiency point. A pump will not be approved if selected to operate near the end of its curve.

Approved Makes of Motors (Countries of Origin):

a. Siemens (Germany) b. ABB (Finland) c. Emerson (USA)

Variable Frequency Drive Individual variable frequency drive with individual manual bypass ( star delta ) shall





be provided for each secondary/ tertiary pump.

1. The variable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type; microprocessor controlled design, and shall be capable of operating in voltage ranges of 380 to 460V AC, three-phase, at frequencies of 48 to 63 Hz.

2. The VFD, including all factory-installed options, shall have UL approval.

3. VFD shall be mounted within an enclosure protected to IP54 as minimum, ventilated for installation as a floor-mounted unit. Drive shall be equipped with an input disconnect switch, and fuses to protect against ground faults.

4. A manual bypass option shall be available to enable the operator to select normal or manual bypass of the drive. The bypass includes two contactors. One contactor is the bypass contactor that connects the motor directly to the incoming power line in the event that the drive is out of service. The other is the drive output contactor that disconnects the drive from the motor when the motor is operating in the bypass mode. The drive output contactor and the bypass contactor are electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent "back feeding."

5. VFD shall utilize a full wave rectifier to convert three-phase AC to a fixed DC voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.98 regardless of speed or load. VFDs employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.

6. Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter section to convert fixed DC voltage to a three-phase, adjustable frequency, AC output.

7. The output switching frequency shall be selectable at 4 or 8 kHz.

8. An internal line reactor (3% impedance) shall be provided to lower harmonic distortion of the power line and to increase the fundamental power factor.

9. The VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 1000m above sea level without derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 40 degrees C. VFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% non-condensing humidity.

10. The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via an alphanumeric display: a. Output Frequency b. Output Voltage c. Motor Current d. Kilowatts per hour e. Fault identification with text f. RPM

11. All VFDs and controllers shall be furnished by the pump vendor for unit responsibility for successful system operation.

Approved Makes of VFD (countries of origin):

1. Siemens (Germany)





2. ABB (Finland) 3. Danfoss (France)

Differential Pressure Transmitter Furnish field mounted differential pressure transmitters as required for measuring differential pressure and transmitting an isolated linear 4 to 20 mA dc output for use in a standard two-wire 24 V dc system. The unit shall be accurate to +/- 0.25% of full span and shall have an adjustable span limit applicable for the system pressure, and shall withstand over ranges upto a static pressure of 2000 psi with negligible change in output. It shall have a corrosion resistant steel body with ¼‟‟ NPT process connections. Unit shall be protected against radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight (NEMA type 4) electrical enclosure with 1/2 “ NPT conduit connection. Contractor shall also include for the supply and installation of interlinking cable between differential pressure transmitter and pump controller.

PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER (BY DISTRICT COOLING COMPANY-M/s

MARAFEQ)

The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of Underwriter‟s laboratory, Inc (UL) The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC regulations pertaining to Class A computing devices. The controller shall be specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications. The variable speed pump controller shall function to a proven program that safeguard against damaging hydraulic conditions including:

a. Motor Overload b. Pump Flow Surges c. Hunting

End of Curve Protection: The pump logic controller through a factory pre-programmed algorithm shall be capable of protecting the pumps from hydraulic damage due to operation beyond their published end-of-curve. This feature requires an optional flow meter for activation. The pump logic controller shall be capable of staging and destaging pumps based on an efficiency optimisation program to provide the lowest kw draw. This optimisation program requires an optional flow meter, kw meter and system differential pressure sensor for activation. The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting discrete analog inputs from zone sensor/transmitters. Analog input resolution shall be 12 bit minimum, and the controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 100 milli seconds. Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not acceptable. All sensors/transmitter inputs shall be individually wired to the pump logic controller for continuous scan and comparison function. All analog inputs shall be provided with





current limit circuitry to provide short circuit protection and safeguard against incorrect wiring of sensors. The pump logic controller will select analog input signal that deviates the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional integral derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be user-adjustable over an infinite range. The scan and compare rate that selects the command set point and process variable signal shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum performance. Each sensor shall be scanned at least once every 100 milli seconds. The pump controller shall be capable of controlling pumps in parallel. The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be displayed in plain English. The following features shall be provided:

a. Multi-fault memory and recall b. On-screen help functions c. Soft-touch membrane keypad switches d. LED pilot lights and switches.

The variable speed pumping system shall be provided with a user-friendly operator interface complete with membrane switches and numeric keypad. Display shall be no less than four lines with each line capable of displaying up to twenty characters. The human interface panel shall display the following values:

a. Flow in GPM (requires optional flow meter) b. Pump On/Off status c. Pump % Speed d. Individual Alarm Conditions e. Troubleshooting Diagnostics f. User-adjustable parameters such as alternation, PID, setpoints etc.

A data-logging feature shall be provided as a function of the pump logic controller. The Alarm log shall include last 20 alarms with date/time stamp. The pump data log shall display individual pump run timers and pump cycle counters. A system data log will indicate operation mode, system cycles and panel power cycles, each with date/time stamp. A signal log shall be provided to display the maximum and minimum values with date/time stamps for each process variable and flow, when optional flow meter is provided. The signal log shall also be capable of displaying the cumulative value of kilowatt-hours for each pump and of system minimum and maximum flow along with individual counter reset capability. The logic controller shall incorporate a Flash Memory for saving and reloading customized settings. These field determined values shall be permanently retained in Flash memory for automatic reloading of the site specific setup values in the event of data corruption due to external disturbances. The Controller shall also employ a sensor setup copy feature. The pump controller shall be capable of communicating with the Building Automation System (BAS) by both hard-wired and serial communications. The following





communication features shall be provided to BAS in „hardwired‟ FORM VIA 4-20 ma analog signals and digital outputs:

a. Remote system start/stop (dry contact supplied by BAS) b. Failure of any system component ( relay output from pump controller) c. Process variable ( 4-20 ma analog output supplied by pump controller ) d. VFD speed ( 0-10 VDC analog output supplied by pump controller) e. Optional: Pump On/Off status ( relay output supplied by pump controller)

The following communication features shall be provided to the Building Automation System via an RS 485 port (optional hardware required) utilizing BACnet class ll MSTP

TM protocol:

a. All sensor process variables b. Individual zone set points c. Individual pump failure d. Individual pump On/Off status e. Individual VFD On/Off status f. VFD speed g. Individual VFD failure h. Individual sensor failure

22.2.07 PRESSURISATION PACKAGE

The chilled water system shall be a closed pressurized system incorporating a combined pressurization and automatic water make-up unit as indicated on the drawings.

The pressurization unit shall be an integrated unit, factory assembled and tested.

The pressurization unit shall incorporate a break tank, two make-up pumps (one running, one standby), twin expansion vessels, associated pipe work and valves and controls. The expansion vessels shall be of the pre-pressurized diaphragm type manufactured to BS 4814 and shall be subjected to a test pressure of 750 kPa.

The twin expansion vessels shall each have a capacity as specified with a maximum working pressure not exceeding 150 kPa.

The controls shall include the following:

i. Automatic pump change-over upon failure of duty pump indicated by pump failure light.

ii. Manual pump selector switch. iii. Duty pump run light iv. Hours run indicators for pumps v. Low pressure visible and audible alarm





22.2.08 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Gasketed Plate Heat Exchangers and associated valves in the ETS room

shall be provided by the contractor.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Compliance Statement with specifications

1. Submit full compliance to project specification as detailed below

B. Product Data: Manufacturer‟s specification and technical data including

performance, construction and fabrication:

1. Submit product data for each heat exchanger. Furnish all necessary references for each specification complied as per product specification.

2. Submit materials certificates for each heat exchanger 3. Submit sample pressure test certificate for offered model complying to

PED

C. Shop Drawing: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes,

general construction, component connections, lifting methods, installation procedure.

D. Certification 1. Submit ISO 9001 Certificate

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.0 PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS

2.1 Design Requirements

2.1.1 Application : Chilled Water Cooling

2.1.2 Type : Counter current and parallel flow only. 2.1.3 Performance Requirements





Units shall be sized to meet design conditions as specified in the schedule. In addition, units shall be sized with allowance for 10% extension for future addition of plates

2.1.4 Working Pressure / Temperature : 10 bar/ 35 deg C or as per schedule 2.1.5 Test Pressure : 1.3 times the design pressure

2.1.6 The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit.

2.1.7 The units shall withstand the maximum 10bar on either hot or cold side with the opposite side at 0 bar or as per schedule.

2.1.8 Units to be factory tested in accordance with PED code. Manufacturer to comply with

PED and mention compliance of the same on all data sheets.

2.1.9 Provide metal nameplate with the following details

a. Manufacturer‟s name b. Type of Unit c. Serial No. d. Year of manufacture e. Fluid group f. Inlet / Outlet connections g. Volume h. Design Pressure i. Design temperature j. Test Pressure k. Test Pressure date

2.1.10 Provide factory sealed rigid reinforced covers for openings before and during

shipment from factory to job site.

2.2 Materials

2.2.1 Plates

a) One piece pressed type stainless steel AISI 316 plate, 0.5 mm thick and with 2B finish and tapered gasket groove.

b) The plates shall not have holes for sealing of gasket c) Each plate to have herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with

nominal pressure losses. d) The pressing depth of one plate should not exceed 2.5mm. e) Design of plates to strictly follow countercurrent and parallel flow principle. f) Design to allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal of

the plate on either side. g) Design shall prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of the

unit





h) Each plate should strictly have a built in five point alignment system to accurately locate the plates in the frame assembly to prevent lateral plate movement under pressure.

i) Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent bending hangers on the plate.

j) The maximum length of the plate should not exceed 2500mm. k) Plates to be specifically manufactured in order to obtain design delta T.

2.2.2 Gasket

a) One piece, molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBR) Clip / Clip AD / Tape ON gasket. b) Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause

leak to outside of unit. c) The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip / Clip AD / Tape On method. d) The gaskets should not be used for locking of the plates before tightening.

2.2.3 Frame

a) The frame assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame assembly

b) The frame shall be carbon steel construction coated with two part blue paint. c) The minimum thickness of the frame plate and pressure plate shall be as

mentioned in the schedule. d) The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of

movement without additional rigging or handling equipment. e) Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight. f) Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum high

width hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load. g) Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes. h) Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads i) Connections to be studded port design. j) The minimum thickness of the frame and pressure plates shall be as mentioned

in the schedule.

2.3 Accessories

2.3.1 Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat

exchanger 2.3.2 Provide factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation cover for each heat

exchanger. The insulation cover shall be designed for easy removal and replacement to facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.

2.3.3 Provide stainless steel suitcase type latches to facilitate assembly and disassembly

of the insulation pieces.





2.3.4 The insulation panel shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3/4h exterior plating, 60mm polyurethane foam insulation, 0.05mm Aluminum foil inside layer and 20mm Armaflex lining at the bolt holes.

2.4 Manufacturers

2.4.1 Subject to full compliance of the project specification.

2.4.2 Manufacturer to confirm location in Middle East of fully established service center

with reconditioning and regasketing facility. The manufacturer shall confirm 24 hours service availability to attend faults at project site by factory-trained engineer.

2.4.3 References of service jobs carried out in the Middle East to be provided by the

supplier detailing the list of client served.

2.4.4 Manufacturer to confirm that all the units manufactured are as per PED code. 2.4.5 Manufacturer to confirm to pressing of own plates. Manufacturer should confirm

minimum three presses in the factory for pressing of plates

2.4.6 Supplier to furnish references for a minimum of three installation in Middle East for similar operating temperatures and pressure. The installation should be in operation for at least two years from the date of commissioning.

2.4.7 The manufacturer to confirm availability locally in the Middle East of all essential spare parts for the plate heat exchanger proposed.

2.4.8 The supplier to confirm presence of manufacturer‟s factory trained and qualified

service engineer to assist in installation and carry out commissioning at site.

22.2.09 BASE MOUNTED TREATED FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH RECOVERY HEAT

UNIT

General The roof mounted TFAHU shall be modular in construction and shall have sections and capacity as per the schedule. The Sizes and connections of the units shall be selected to fit into the spaces available without affecting the architectural integrity of the building. Manufacturers of the TFAHU shall have ISO 9001 certification and EUROVENT certification.

Casing The unit casing shall be of double skinned panels. Casing shall be assembled with self supporting modular panels with an integrated base frame made of aluminium and section along upper sides of units. Sheet metal thickness shall be 1.0 mm. for the inner skin and 1.0 mm. for the outer skin and made from zinc coated steel





sheets. Outside of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 mm. for additional protection. Inside and outside of the panel wall shall be completely smooth. Overall heat transmittance shall not exceed k = 0.59 w/m²k. All casing panels shall be insulated by fibre glass layer of 50 mm. thickness,48 Kg/cu.m density. The sound absorption through the panel shall be Rw = 42 db (weighted sound reduction factor). Panel shall be assembled with special rivets. The inspection side of the coil section panels shall be assembled with bolts and nuts for easy removal of coils. Panel air tightness shall be as per industry standards. Air handling units shall be selected to achieve the required NC level in the air conditioned space.

The base frame of the unit shall be made from hot dipped galvanized U-profile. Service doors shall be provided with special gaskets and locking device. Access doors 400 mm. and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening. Sealant between panels shall be an anti fungicide sealant material. AHU manufacturer shall ensure that panel construction shall be without any thermal bridges and shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of the panels. Roof mounted TFAHU shall be of weather proof construction.

Fan Section Fan shall be double inlet double width aerofoil backward curved centrifugal type. The blades shall be made of galvanized steel. Centrifugal fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory as complete fan assembly. (Fan wheel, shaft motor, drive and belts). Fans and shaft shall operate well below their critical speeds. If any out of balance is apparent on the site, the Engineer reserves the right to request new factory supplied units to be provided until satisfactory balance is demonstrated. Fan bearing shall be lubricated type with extended Lube lines to terminate outside the fan section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 100,000 hours of operation. TFAHU fan and motor drive shall be oversized by at least 20% and shall be fitted with adjustable belt tension arrangement. The air-handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor and drive assembly on rubber isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air-handling unit casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer. Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanized steel base frame with an easily adjustable motor slide rail. Motors shall be totally enclosed, foot mounted, fan cooled IP54 with class F insulation.





Coil Section Cooling coils shall be of cartridge type mounted on Aluminium slide rails for easy resolvability. The number of fins shall be fixed at 12FPI to optimize performance requirements. Coil casing shall be 1.5 mm thick galvanized steel with drain holes on the bottom channels to ensure condensate drainage. Coil tubes shall be heavy gauge copper mechanically expanded into aluminium plate fins. All joints shall be silver brazed. Coils shall be designed to utilize the full available unit cross section area and mounted on slide rail to allow for easy removal when required. Coils shall be proof tested at 26 bar (375 psig) and leak tested at 17 bar (250 psig). Coil performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Cooling coil shall be provided with corrosion protective coating and guaranteed for min.5 years from the date of completion. Drain pans shall be stainless steel either integrated in the insulated base or placed under the coil within the coil section; drain pans shall be sloped and shall have drain connection to the service side.

Heat Recovery Unit Section Heat recovery unit shall be of plate heat exchanger at very high separation the streams of supplied and exhaust air and made of crosswise aluminium plats which separated stream of supply and exhaust air flow , the heat exchanger shall provided with counter /rotated air by bass damper to make it possible to divert air out side the heat exchanger when the heat recovery not enabled . Drift eliminator shall be supplied at inlet and outlet of the heat exchanger. The heat exchanger efficiency not less than 65%. The heat exchanger tightness not less than 99%.

Filter Section 50 mm. thick aluminium frame permanent washable filter made of many layer of coffered metal mesh ( aluminium ) flat filter having average filtration efficiency 70%, recommended filter replacement Δp = 200 pa , filter class B acc. EN 1886.

TFAHUs shall have an additional bag filter section. Bag filter media shall have

minimum dust spot efficiency of 55% as determined by opacimetric method.

Heat Pipe Coil Section

TFAHU shall be equipped with dehumidifier Heat Pipes, to pre-cool the fresh air and re-heat the supply air in a wrap around configuration around the main cooling coil. The pre-cool section shall be located immediately before the cooling coil and the re-heat section immediately after. Both the sections shall be integral to the equipment





cabinet and shall be installed at the AHU factory. The interconnecting piping between the heat pipe sections shall have necessary slope to claim the refrigerant back through gravity and it shall be located at the opposite side from chilled water / DX connections and enclosed within a rigid frame. The Heat Pipe shall be constructed of Copper tubes with continuous plate type fins, carried within rigid framework. The tubes shall be of solid drawn Copper, shall provide enhanced heat transfer and permanently expanded into the fin collars to form a rigid continuous contact under all operating conditions. Wall thickness shall be a minimum of 0.35 mm. The tube pattern shall be staggered equilateral design, and the number of rows shall be selected to provide the required performance. The fin surface shall be of Aluminium of thickness 0.15 mm and shall be designed to produce maximum heat transfer efficiency for heat pipe applications. Fin density shall be as specified to provide the required performance.

The tube endplates, side plates and other associated framework elements shall be in 1.6 mm thick Galvanized sheet steel.

The Heat pipe shall be individually pre-charged with Heat Transfer fluid (R-22 / R-134 a), hermetically sealed and tested. The heat transfer fluid shall be classified as safety group A1 in BSR / ASHRAE Std. 15-1989 R.

The Heat Pipe unit shall provide maximum possible pre-cool and re-heat capacity as can be achieved and the same shall be guaranteed. The number of rows and fins spacing shall be selected at the design ambient conditions to achieve the most optimum performance of heat pipe throughout the year. Performance shall be verifiable to ENV 1216 and shall be evaluated and certified by independent authority. Installation: The dimension of AHU shall have provision for inclusion of the horseshoe unit interconnecting pipe work section around the cooling coil and there shall be no air bypass within the cabinet, with proper sealing to make good installation. All AHUs shall have 32mm thick multi layer neoprene pads ( provided that the internal fan has its own factory mounted vibration isolation springs). If fans are not supplied with spring isolators, then the whole unit shall be installed on spring vibration isolators of at least 1” deflection .See elsewhere for details.

22.2.10 FAN COIL UNITS

General

The Chilled Water fan coil unit shall be of size / type suitable for installation in the space provided and have district cooling compatibility and capacity as indicated in





the fan coil unit schedule. Special attention is drawn to the low noise requirements of the units. The unit shall comply with the following specification.

Description

The fan coil unit shall be completely factory built and assembled and shall be installed at high level as indicated on the drawings. The cabinet shall be fabricated of continuous galvanized steel and finished in dried enamel. The panels shall be easily removable and shall be insulated with ¾” thick sprayed polyurethane foam or 1” thick fibre glass insulation with neoprene coating. The base of the cabinet shall also be galvanized steel. All the panels shall be provided with gaskets in order to avoid any air leakage from the sides. Fans shall be forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced and mounted on a steel shaft. Fans shall have permanently lubricated, self aligning ball bearings. Fan wheel and housing are to be of galvanized steel.

The motor shall be of the totally enclosed type for protection against dust and external particles suitable for operation on 240V, single phase, 50Hz, A.C. supply. The motor shall be fitted with life lubricated bearings having three speed and complete with thermal overload protection. All units shall be provided with OFF-HI-MED-LOW fan speed switch (remote) and air vent. The cooling coils shall be staggered tube type constructed of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins and shall be factory tested at 125psig air pressure. The coils shall be suitable for the duty requirements as specified in the schedule and shall be minimum 3 rows deep. The coil face velocity shall not exceed 2.5m/sec. The cooling coils shall be completely drainable type. The drain pan shall be fabricated of stainless steel insulated with closed cell insulation and sealed with mastic for maximum protection against corrosion and sweating. The back side of the panel shall have a filter frame with bottom filter access. The filter shall be washable type having thickness as recommended by the manufacturer.

All Fan coil units shall be manufactured and selected basing on 8.9 C temperature difference on the water side. Any modification to the air quantities and consequently on the duct work sizes shall be accounted for in the contractor tender price

22.2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

All plant and supports shall be isolated from the building structure and the supports isolated from other items of equipment in such a manner that noise and vibration are not transmitted through the structure.

The spring mounts shall consist of cast metal telescopic housings with resilient





inserts as guides between the top and bottom housings. The mounts shall incorporate built-in leveling arrangement. The bottom plate of the mount shall be fitted with 6 mm. thick synthetic rubber pad to reduce transmission of high frequency noise and vibrations. The metal casing and the springs shall be powder coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall be color coded to facilitate identification. Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over inertia blocks made out of reinforced concrete or concrete-filled welded steel framework. The weight of the inertia block shall be at least 1.5 times the total working weight of the pump sets. The inertia blocks shall be mounted over cased spring mounts, as described above, with minimum 25 mm. deflection. Protruding steel lugs/brackets or recesses shall be provided in the inertia base to facilitate installation of spring mounts. Roof mounted air handling units shall have anti-vibration mountings in the following form: Multi-layer rubber pads with square grid convolutions on both sides, spaced with steel shims and of a thickness to suit the points of uniform loading of the plant item, but of a minimum thickness of 32 mm. spaced not more than 750 to 1000 mm apart. Fan-coil units and inline fans shall be provided with spring type anti-vibration hangers having steel frame and helical compression type springs with minimum 25mm deflection. The springs shall be located within synthetic rubber cups to reduce transmission of high frequency noise and vibrations. The rubber cup shall be complete with embedded load distribution steel plate and with projection bush to prevent metal to metal contact. The metal frame and the springs shall be powder coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall be colour coded to facilitate identification. roof mounted centrifugal and axial fans shall be installed on cased spring mounts as described above with minimum 25mm. deflection. The mounts shall be installed under the combined fan-motor frame. All piping connected to isolated equipment and pipes within mechanical rooms shall be suspended from spring type anti-vibration hangers as described above for at least first three points of support on all sides of the equipment. Pipes running at low level shall be mounted on cased spring mounts. The spring hangers and mounts used for supporting pipes shall have minimum 25 mm deflection. Structural columns or vertical steel pipes used as supports for water pipes shall have extended base plates that rest on rubber pads of adequate load bearing capacity. Suitable rubber grommets shall be provided to avoid contact between the base plates and the fixing bolts. The ratings of anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall suit the load distribution data furnished by the equipment manufacturer with adequate margin of safety for weights of water and accessories/fittings connected to the equipment. The vibration isolators shall be installed in accordance with the maker‟s recommendations. The Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that the performance of isolators is suitable for the machinery to be installed. All anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall be subject





to the Engineer‟s approval.

22.2.12 SHEET METAL WORK

DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

i) General

Low velocity ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with specification DW142 issued by the HVCA/ASHRAE Standards except where specified hereunder to the contrary.

The Works Contractor shall supply and install all the ductwork, sheet metal, supports, dampers, grilles, diffusers and auxiliaries, as required to complete the various ventilation and air conditioning system. The installation shall be as shown on the Drawings, but the Works Contractor must include for checking site dimension. All supply, return and exhaust air ducts, support members and fittings shall be constructed from new high quality galvanized mild steel sheet and shall conform to the requirements of HVCA, including ASHRAE Standards.

All ductwork shall be manufactured and erected by ductwork specialists and shall be installed to run parallel with the building structure and provide a neat arrangement. The ductwork shall be true in section and continuous with air-tight joints, presenting a smooth surface on the inside and neatly finished on the outside. Internal roughness or obstruction to air flow, and sharp edges or corners on the outside of ducts. Fittings or supports will not be accepted.

Variations in direction and in the shape of ductwork shall be effected with easy changes to the airflow. The slope of either a change in shape, a contraction or an expansion shall not exceed 22.5 degrees on any side. All square bends shall be fitted with turnings vanes of proprietary manufacture.

Flanged duct joints shall be used for all circular ducts of diameters 600 mm or greater, and all rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than 800mm.

All duct joints shall be made air-tight incorporating pop-riveted seams, approved sealants, gaskets and finished tapes. All excess sealant must be removed before tape is applied. Rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than 400mm shall be externally stiffened all around the duct.

Ductwork test holes shall be provided at air handling units (positioned in a straight section of duct near to the fan discharge) and in all main branch ducts with two or more terminals served from the branch. Test holes shall be 25 mm diameter, suitably strengthened and fitted with an effective removable seal.





Open ends of ducts shall be covered during erection with plastic sheeting to prevent ingress of dust and rubbish.

Where damage (or rusting) has occurred on galvanized ductwork, the affected section shall be made good by preparing, cleaning and painting with two coats of zinc rich paint and an approved finishing paint. Where damage, in the Engineer‟s opinion, cannot be made good, then a new section of ductwork shall be provided at no cost to the contract. All ductwork supports and hangers shall be painted with two coats of zinc rich paint. The steelwork supports at roof level shall be provided by the Works Contractor and shall be painted with two coats of black bitu mastic paint.

All ductwork supports and hangers shall be of the angle iron and drop rod type or other approved suspension systems: 1. Neoprene/compressible rubber strip or timber spacers shall be inserted between

the ducts and supports to reduce the transmission on noise and vibration and to provide a thermal break.

2. Vertical drop rods or angle support members shall be positioned as close to the

edge of the duct as possible, but not touching it. The supports shall be outside any insulation, vapor sealing or other finish.

3. Additional supports shall be provided adjacent to dampers, grilles, diffusers, or

other similar equipment so as to prevent duct distortion.

4. Maximum support center shall be 2.4m for any horizontal or vertical ducts and 1.2m for large horizontal ducts whose cross section area exceeds 3 sq.m. On no accounts shall angles, used for ductwork stiffening, or joints be used as part of the supports.

5. No ceilings, light fittings or any other equipment shall be supported from the

ductwork or the ductwork supports.

ii) Materials

This specification shall apply to ductwork and fittings made from hot dip galvanized sheet or coil to BS 2989 Grade Z2 Coating type C. Should this material not be available the following alternative are acceptable: 1. Hot dip galvanized sheet or coil to BS 2989 Grade Z2 or Z3 with iron-zinc alloy

coating type IZ.100 or IZ.180 or equal.

2. Cold rolled sheet or coil to BS 1449, Grade CR4 having a zinc coating applied by electric plating. (Coating thickness 2.5 microns or equal).





iii) Construction

a) General

The constructional requirements for rectangular ductwork have been established following independent tests, the limits of use being related to the characteristics of rolled steel angle longitudinal beams, cross joints and stiffeners described in this Specification.

b) Sheet thickness

Minimum sheet thickness is 0.6mm. The sheet thickness for various dimensions shall confirm to DW 142.

c) Longitudinal Seams

Sealant shall be used with all longitudinal seams irrespective of the pressure class. The sealant must be included in the seam during manufacture or be applied as an edge sealant. All joints are to be neatly Pop-riveted or spot-welded. No folded seams will be allowed.

CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS

Duct connections to grilles and diffusers shall be detailed to manufacturer‟s requirements, and where flexible connections are used, the cross sectional area of the duct is to be maintained throughout the length of the flexible connections.

All connections to air handling units and sound attenuators if any shall be made with mating flanges to suit the plant items as delivered to site, and shall be made air-tight with suitable gaskets and washers such that they may readily be removed.

Flexible connections shall be fitted to the suction and discharge of all fans and air handling equipment.

i) General Constructional Requirements The minimum metal thickness shall be 0.6 mm. In all cases the larger dimensions and/or pressure classification shall determine the sheet thickness and stiffening.

ii) Stiffeners

The flat side of fittings shall be stiffened in accordance with the construction. On the flat sides of bends, stiffeners shall be arranged in a radial pattern, with the spacing measured along the center line of the bend.





iii) Splitters

Splitters shall be attached to the duct by bolts or mechanically closed rivets at 100 mm maximum spacing.

iv) Turning Vanes

Square bends shall be fitted with turning vanes, which shall be securely attached at each end either to the duct or to internal runners, and the runners fastened to the duct by mechanically closed rivets or bolts at 150 mm maximum spacing.

For single skin vanes, the maximum length between support shall be 615 mm and for double skin vanes the maximum length between supports shall be 1250mm.

v) Twin Bends Turning vanes in twin bends in which the width of the straight section and branch differ shall be set so that the leading and the trailing edges of the turning vanes are parallel to the duct vanes.

vi) Branches A branch should be taken off a straight section of duct, not off a taper. Connection of branch to duct shall be cleats, rivets or bolts, and sealant shall be used between ducts and branch.

vii) Expansion and Contraction

Where these are required, an expansion shall be made upstream of a branch connection and a connection downstream of a branch connection. The slope of either an expansion or a contraction should not exceed 22.5% on any side. Where this angle is not practicable, the slope may be increased, providing that splitters are positioned to bisect the angle between any side and the center line of the duct.

viii) Access Panels and Doors

a) Access panels or doors shall be provided in supply, return and exhaust air

ductwork, false ceiling and builders‟ work shafts, as required to facilitate the routine inspection, maintenance, cleaning and adjustment of air conditioning and ventilation equipment.

b) Access panels and doors shall be air-tight when closed, with compressible

rubber gaskets around the entire perimeter, and shall generally be of the hinged type.

c) Where space limitation preclude the use of hinges, access doors shall be fixed

with a minimum of four heavy window type latches.





d) For insulated ducts, all access doors shall be of double panel insulated construction, with the insulation thickness matching that of the surrounding ducts. For un insulated ducts, access doors may be of single panel construction. All duct access doors shall be mounted in their own separate frames.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

i) General

DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Ductwork shall be supported by means of mild steel angle section with spacing between supports not exceeding 2.4 M and projecting 100 mm on either sides to allow for proper insulation.

Width of Duct Supporting

bottom angle

iron

Alternative

flat iron

hanger

Rod Hanger

(Galvanised)

Bolt

UPto 107 cms 30x30x3 cms 25x3 mm 6 mm 6 mm 108 - 108 cms 40x40x4 cms 30x4 mm 8 mm 8 mm 139 cms and above

50x50x5 cms 30x3 mm 10 mm 10mm

Pre galvanized duct support arrangement shall be preferred. As an alternative, all supports and angles shall be painted with one coat of zinc chromate paint prior to erection and a further two coats of grey paint on exposed metal parts after erection. Ductwork supports shall preferably be positioned close to dampers, diffusers and all similar equipment. Ductwork supports shall in general conform to HVCA/DW/144 or SMACNA standards. Galvanized angles/channels supports shall be preferred. Reinforcing angles shall be fixed to the ducts by means of bolted joints. 25 mm angles : 6 mm diameter bolts at 10 cm centers. 28 mm angles : 8 mm diameter bolts at 10 cm centers.

Threaded rods hangers shall be electro-zinc coated.

With a proprietary device, it shall be the responsibility of the Works. Contractor to ensure that the device meets the requirements, with sufficient margin of overload and that it is installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.





ii) Horizontal Ductwork

a) The choice of the lower support shall be dictated by the actual duct section. b) Duct shall be supported by means of U channels and angle profiles. Ducts

supported on the roof shall be rigidly supported by means of concrete piers or plinth laid on the waterproof complex.

c) All structural support profiles and plates shall be hot dip galvanized 50 microns

minimum to BS 729, plus an approved anti-rust grey paint suitable for exposed atmospheric conditions.

iii) Vertical Ducts

a) The design of support for vertical ducts is dictated by site conditions, and they

are often located to coincide with the individual floor slabs. b) Vertical ducts should be supported from the stiffening angle of the angle frame,

or by separate supporting angles fixed on the duct. c) Air duct passing through roof shall be suitably weatherproofed.

iv) Heavy Loadings

Where heavy equipment is to be applied to the ductwork, supports shall be designed to suit the conditions.

PROTECTIVE FINISHES

i) Metal Spraying

Zinc or aluminum spraying shall be to BS 2569 Part 1 (1964) and used only for remedial works.

ii) Paints

a) Surface preparation and Paint application

Surface preparation of the metal and paint application shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer‟s recommendations.

b) Making Good Welding Damage

Galvanizing or other metallic zinc finish damaged by welding shall be suitably cleaned and painted with two coat of zinc-rich or aluminum paint.





c) Ducts made from Galvanized Sheet or Coil

Ducts made from conventional sheet or coil, do not require further protection when located inside a buildings. When located outside the building, one coat of each primer or one coat of calcium plumbate primer shall be applied together with a suitable finishing coat.

d) Supporting Members

Supporting members made of hot dip galvanized steel 50 microns to BS 729

e) External Equipment etc.

All external equipment, ductwork, support frames and brackets are to be finished with one undercoat and one top coat.

STRUCTURAL PENETRATION AND WATERPROOFING All duct penetrations of walls, floor and roofs shall be provided with sleeves of length equal to the full thickness of the structure. In concrete walls or slabs, the sleeves shall be galvanized steel of minimum thickness 1.0 mm. In block walls, the openings larger than a hollow block shall be supported by a lintel

Each sleeve shall be sized to allow a 12 mm clearance around the duct and any

required insulation/finish. It shall be built into the structure using mortar. Subsequently the gap between the duct/insulation and sleeve shall be sealed with mastic.

All ducts passing through a roof construction shall be suitably weatherproofed.

CONNECTIONS TO BUILDER’S WORK All joints between mating flanges, companion rings and wooden frames shall be fitted with sealing gaskets. Where ductwork is connected to outside louvers, the bottom inside portion of the ductwork should be sloped to drain outside. The inside surfaces of the duct shall also be treated for external exposure for a distance equal to the height of the louver connection, or to the nearest plant item.

22.2.13 DAMPERS

a) Volume Control Dampers Volumes control dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch supply or return air duct connection whether or not indicated on the drawings for the proper volume control and balancing of the system.





The dampers shall have sturdy corrosion resistant construction. All dampers shall have multi-leaf double skin, aerofoil section, opposed action blades. Individual blades should not exceed 1200 mm. in length or 175 mm. in width. Double skin blades shall be made out of 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet with seamed edges. Dampers frames shall be galvanized made out of steel sheet. The thickness shall be 18 G for max duct width of 900 mm. & 16 G for duct sizes of width exceeding 900 mm. Blade ends shall be gasketed to minimize air leakage.

Damper quadrants shall be of cast metal construction, marked OPEN and SHUT in raised letters. Single blade dampers with single skin blade section may be used for damper sizes upto 300x150 mm. Single skin blades shall be fabricated from 18 gauge galvanized steel sheet. The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear airflow area equal to the duct size shall be maintained within the damper frame. Maximum clearance between the blades and the frame shall be limited to 3 mm. Indication of damper blade position shall be provided.

b) Splitter Dampers At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk, an adjustment, splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted two gauge heavier than the duct, with operating rod and locking quadrant. These deflecting dampers shall be permanently set and locked in position after completion of the installation and adjustment with length extending through the duct to externally mounted bearing plates.

c) Non Return Dampers Non return dampers shall be manufactured similar to duct dampers but shall incorporate additionally, felt rubber or neoprene strips on long edges of blades to ensure positive shut off and quiet closure. Dampers on fresh air inlets shall be similar edged to prevent ingress of dust and sand particles.

d) Fire Dampers Fire dampers with fusible links shall be fixed in ducts at all floor crossings, wall crossings of kitchen and crossings of fire rated walls, irrespective of it being shown on the drawings or not. Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type. The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon themselves and be stacked at one end of the damper outside the air stream. The dampers shall be arranged for vertical or horizontal operation as detailed on the drawings.





The damper fusible links shall be rated at 1650C.

The dampers shall be leakage rated class 1 according to UL 555S or equivalent standards and fire rated for 2 hours resistance. Both the curtain and fusible link shall be accessible for servicing through air tight inspection doors placed up or down stream wherever possible. Each access door shall be of a minimum size of 250x250 mm. or full duct width on ducts of less than 450 mm. For larger ducts, the access door shall be minimum of 450 X 450 size, unless otherwise stated. The sheet thickness shall be at least equal to the duct thickness. Ducting dampers and casings are to be manufactured in strict compliance with BS 476 Part 10 and appropriate fire and other statutory regulations for fire damper specifications where such exist. Any necessary fixing frameworks shall be supplied and fitted as recommended by the manufacturer, by the Contractor.

22.2.14 FRESH AIR INTAKE

The fresh air intake shall be fitted with external louvers, sand trap louvers, opposed blade volume control damper, aluminium insect wire mesh and bird screen and filter as indicated on the drawings.

Filter media thickness shall not be less than 45 mm and shall be washable metallic filter. Louvers shall be with extruded aluminium frame and with aluminium blades of not less than 2mm thick. Louvers shall have powder coated finish as approved by Architect. Sand louvers shall have double deflection sand passage with separation efficiency of not less than 80% on 20-200 micron test dust and 50% on 1-70 micron test dust. Sand louvers shall be of aluminium sections with 2mm thick casing and 1.6mm thick blades. The base of the louver shall have self-emptying sand holes. Where exposed to view, Sand louver shall have powder coated finish as per Architect approval.

22.2.15 FILTERS

General

1. Filters shall operate to at least the efficiencies specified elsewhere and not less

than 75% average synthetic dust weight or resistance in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52-68.

2. Filters shall be complete with holding frames sufficiently robust to ensure that no





distortion occurs in operation. 3. Filters shall be installed with edge seals which shall prevent air by passing the

filters. The seal shall remain effective even though the cells are periodically removed and refitted..

4. Filters shall be arranged so that there is easy access for cleaning and/or removal.

5. A differential pressure gauge of the dial type or incline manometer type shall be provided for each filter bank and shall be fixed in such a position outside the AHU system that it is accessible and easily read. The gauge shall be marked to show maximum differential indicating a filter change requirement.

6. Filters shall also have a differential pressure switch installed when the system is to be monitored by a BMS system. The differential switch shall be calibrated to operate indicating a filter change requirement.

7. The air velocity through filters shall be such that the clean resistance as indicated is not exceeded and that the filter fabric is not carried over into the system.

Dry Replacement Media Type Filter

1. The filter shall be of the flat panel type continued in galvanized steel front or side

removal frame. 2. Each cell shall comprise a pad of glass fibre or synthetic fabric filter media, 50

mm thick and retained within a rigid frame. 3. The filters shall have an efficiency of not less than 92 % based on test specified

in BS 2831 with test dust No. 2. 4. The maximum face velocity shall be 2.5 m/s. 5. The initial pressure drop shall not exceed 70 Pa. 6. Sufficient spare cells shall be provided to replace all of the filter bank.

Bag Filters

1. The filter shall comprise of one or more 600 x 600 mm filter bag modules fitted

into a purpose made galvanized steel side or front withdrawal frame. 2. Each module shall comprise a minimum of four separate bags bonded or clipped

into a galvanized steel header. 3. The bags shall have a minimum length of 600 mm. 4. The medium shall be of a fine multi-layer type with high mechanical strength. 5. The maximum initial resistance shall not exceed 100 Pa. 6. Fitters of this type shall have an efficiently of not less than 99.6 % based on the

tests specified in BS 2831 with test dust No. 2. 7. One complete set of spare bags shall be supplied.

Temporary Air Filters

Prior to commissioning and testing the plants, the Contractor shall supply and install temporary fresh air inlet filters of the throwaway type. Once the system is clean as approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove and replace them with





permanent air filters.

22.2.16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flame proof flexible shall be fitted on all intake and discharge connections of fans and air conditioning units for preventing the transmission of vibration through the ducts to occupied spaces.

Flexible connections shall also be provided where ductwork passes across building expansion joints.

Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated fabric and shall also be impervious to moisture. Connections shall fit closely and be secured in airtight fashion to connections to ductwork, fans and apparatus.

The material shall have a penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested in accordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible and without strain or distortion. The fabric in flexible connections shall be 150 mm minimum and 250 mm maximum in width.

22.2.17 FLEXIBLE DUCT

1. Flexible ductwork shall be manufactured with a two ply aluminium inner core, surrounded by 25 mm thickness of 24 kg/m3 density fibre glass, all wrapped in a reinforced aluminium outer jacket. The overall K-factor shall be less than 0.23 Btu. /hr. deg. Ft. Ductwork shall meet the standards of NFPA 90A, and be UL listed or to meet BS 476 and BS 413.

2. Flexible ducts installed in an externally insulated duct system shall be factory insulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 25 mm thick and a density not less than 24 kg/m3, and covered with an acceptable vapour seal.

3. Flexible ducts installed in internally (acoustic) insulated duct system, shall be factory insulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 20 mm thick and a density not less than 24kg/m3, faced on air side with PVC coated glass cloth having an open area not more than 25%, and on room side with material specified above.

4. Flexible duct installation shall be in accordance with manufacture‟s instruction. Joints between factory insulated flexible ducts and field insulated ductwork shall be sealed and taped under this section.

5. Flexible ducts shall be supported at their mid sections if length exceeds 500mm





22.2.18 SOUND ATTENUATION

SOUND ATTENUATORS

The supply and return air ductworks shall be attenuated to limit the noise level to the values specified in the design criteria. The method of fabrication and supporting ducts should be such as to avoid generation of noise because of air movements or drumming of sheet metal.

The silencers shall be provided in the supply air ducts as shown on tender drawings. The silencers shall be constructed and tested according to BS 4718 for dynamic insertion loss, self generated noise and aerodynamic performance.

The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal for inspection. Externally, the silencers shall be insulated in the same manner as the adjoining air ducting. The contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with respect to the characteristics and the duct system to ensure the proper selection of silencers.

ACOUSTIC LINER

Acoustic liner for duct work of fan coil units shall be made up of black, strong, durable, dimensionally stable woven glass fabric with zero fiber migration of 25 mm thickness and 48 kg /m3 density ,having NRC=1,up to a length of 3.0 meter from the face of the unit.

22.2.19 AIR TERMINALS

General The air terminals shall comply with all requirements of QCS.

Ceiling Diffusers Air terminals shall be tested and rated as per ADC test codes and ASHRAE standard. Ceiling diffusers shall be of square neck pattern, with a removable core assembly, suitable for a quiet draftless air distribution. Diffusers shall be of extruded aluminium construction and of arctic white baked epoxy powder coat finish as standard. However, the finish shall be subject to the final approval of architect / owner. All diffusers shall have precisely mitered corners mechanically fastened for tight, invisible joints. All supply air directional diffusers shall have an integral opposed blade volume damper to permit equal return distribution of air over the entire face of the diffuser. It shall be possible to adjust the volume damper from below, without having to remove the core or any other part of the diffuser.





Opposed blade volume dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Frames are 18 GA and the blades of 24 GA material. Return air diffuser OBD shall be painted black. All supply air terminals shall be complete with compressible rubber gaskets at the flanges to prevent air leakage.

Linear Diffusers Linear diffusers shall consist of extruded aluminium outer frames, removable snap-in inner assemblies and where ceiling mounting frames are called for, they shall be of extruded aluminium. Where sectional adjoining continuous units are installed, outer frames and/or ceiling mounting frames shall be supplied with concealed alignment strips between sections. Outer frame styles, for either surface or flush to ceiling mounting, shall be furnished to suit the type of ceiling construction. Concealed brackets, accessible by removal of inner assemblies and inner vanes, shall be provided for mounting the outer frames to ceiling mounting frames or the plenum ducts without any visible mounting screws. Each diffuser slot shall have a snap-in, pattern and flow control assembly consisting of a fixed deflecting vane and two adjustable air-flow control vanes accessible from face of diffusers. By adjustment of one or both flow control vanes, it shall be possible to obtain a horizontal, or vertical, discharge air pattern, or to blank-off inactive sections. Horizontal pattern of air-flow may be changed 180 deg. regardless of diffuser mounting orientation, simply by adjusting the flow control vanes. The physical appearance of the face of the diffuser shall not be changed regardless of air pattern or flow control adjustment. Equalizing deflectors of snap-on type, may be supplied for field installation, for lateral control of air pattern at 90 deg. to the axis of continuous runs of units, or for spread pattern control of single units, as required. They shall be adjustable from diffuser face by removal of inner assembly. Volume control dampers for system balancing shall be installed, as required by the sheet metal contractor in the branch supply ducts to plenum. Air terminals shall be tested and rated as per ADC test codes and ASHRAE standard.

Grilles and Registers

Air terminals shall be tested and rated as per ADC test codes and ASHRAE standard. Air grillers of approved make, type and model shall be with sizes as indicated on the drawings. They hall be of extruded aluminium construction with sponge rubber gasket behind the frames and nylon bushings at the blades connection to the frame. The Engineer prior to ordering must approve a sample of all air devices. In view of the interior finishes, the architect/engineer shall approve the colour of all the air devices.





Supply and return air registers shall have individually adjustable horizontal front blades, vertical rear blades and shall be equipped with opposed blade dampers Exhaust air registers shall be single defection fixed horizontal blades and be equipped with opposed blade volume control damper.

Outside air louvers shall be equipped with insect screen.

Door Grilles

Door grilles shall be of the inverted B-Blades type not permitting vision through the grille blades not more than 12mm apart. Minimum free area shall be at least 60%. Louver shall be of the adjustable width double frame type with a frame each side of the door. Door grilles shall be fitted where indicated on the Drawings. Door grilles shall be with extruded Aluminium frame and Aluminium blades.

22.2.20 FANS

22.2.20.1 WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS

Extract fan shall be of the propeller type suitable for wall mounting .

The fan construction shall be of moulded plastic, unobtrusive with flush inner and outer grille . Motors shall be of the shaded pole induction type enclosed in a aluminium alloy case and protected by a thermal overload cutout.

The motor bearings shall be self alignment sealed for life type .

The fans shall be provided with a solenoid operated backdraught shutters . the solenoid shall open and close the backdraught damper silently as the fan is switched ON or OFF.

22.2.20.2 QUIET ROOF MOUNTED /INLINE TWIN FANS

The fan unit shall comprise of a duplicate fan assembly complete with motors and drives mounted on a heavy duty unit base plate by anti-vibration mountings. The fans shall be direct driven with double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers running on two life-long lubricated bearings. The fan unit shall be fitted with automatic shutters to prevent air re circulation through standby fan and blow back when not in use.

The fan unit electric motor shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5000 and be of the shaded pole or capacitor start and run type suitable for an electrical supply of 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz and capable of operating in ambient conditions as described earlier.





The fan unit shall have air operated flow switches fitted, arranged to change over to the standby fan in the event of the selected fan failing and also to provide a fault signal.

The fan unit shall be pre wired with switches and isolators to a single terminal box on the casing. The unit casing shall be constructed from aluminium alloy with centrally positioned inlet spigot and access panel to allow ease of service.

Twin fans shall be acoustically lined and suitable for mounting on roof /inline ,and auto change-over panels with duty sharing feature shall be provided at an accessible location. Flange safety vibration isolators are oversized to accommodate the added heat and weight. Unit has heat baffle to reduce motor compartment temp. Unit shall have dual belt and pulley system. All fans shall bear AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.

22.2.20.3 CIRCULAR INLINE AXIAL FAN (Single Speed )

Circular axial flow fan shall be inline as specified in the schedule of equipment. Vane axial fans shall be belt driven, Arrangement 9, with the motor attached to the exterior of the fan housing on an adjustable base. Fan housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge steel with prepunched flanges at both ends. A minimum of seven heavy gauge straightening vanes shall be welded to the fan housing downstream from the rotor. Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearing. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life (L-10) of 40,000 hours at maximum operating speed and horsepower for each construction level. Rotor blades and hub shall be heat treated cast aluminum alloy A356-T6 with blade bases and hub sockets precision machined. Blades shall be attached to the hub with steel studs and self-locking nuts. Hub shall be positively secured with a steel taper lock bushing keyed to the fan shaft. Rotor blade pitch shall be manually adjustable within horsepower limitations. A blade tip angle scale shall be machined into the base of the master blade and indexed to the hub. All blades shall be adjustable to align with the master blade pitch setting. Fans with a sound trap required shall meet the additional requirements: Construction shall be double walled with two inches of sound absorbing material between the walls. The inner wall shall be constructed of perforated steel. Air performance ratings shall be equal to equivalent size fans with a single wall housing. Each assembled fan shall be test run at the factory at the specified fan RPM and vibration signatures shall be taken on each bearing in the horizontal, vertical, and axial direction. The





maximum allowable fan vibration shall be 0.079 in./sec peak velocity, filter-in reading as measured at the fan RPM. Axial flow fans shall be of fire resistant construction rated at 300

0C for 2 hours.

The fans shall be complete with spring type anti vibration mounting, mounting brackets, matching flange, high temp flexible connector etc.

22.2.20.4 CIRCULAR AXIAL FLOW FAN ( RUN & STAND BY TYPE)

Roof mounted axial fan shall be belt driven with fabricated airfoil propellers. Fan housing shall be constructed of continuously welded aluminum to assure no air leakage. Fan incorporates a universal mounting system to allow for field transitions from horizontal base mount, horizontal ceiling hung, vertical base mount, or vertical ceiling hung configurations. The housing, bearing support, and motor base shall be constructed of structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings. All structural steel parts shall be coated with Permatector, an electrostatically applied thermosetting polyester urethane. Minimum dry film thickness to be 1.5 mils. Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearing. Bearings shall be cast iron pillow block, grease lubricated, and self-aligning. Bearings shall be Air Handling quality tested for reduced swivel torque, bore size, noise, and vibration. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life (L-10) of 80,000 hours in horizontal applications or (L- 10) of 40,000 hours in vertical applications at maximum operating speed and horsepower for each construction level. Propeller construction shall be fabricated airfoil design and made out of painted steel, aluminum, or stainless steel. Blade gussets shall be die formed and welded to blade stem. Propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. * For high temperature applications, insert the appropriate specification here. High temperature specifications are shown below. 1. HT Option I - 200 °F - 400 °F: Fan shall be capable of operating continuously at a

temperature between 200 °F and 400 °F. 2. HT Option II - 500 °F for a minimum of 4 hours: Fan shall meet the requirements

of IRI for operation at 500 °F for a minimum of 4 hours in an emergency situation.

3. HT Option III - 1,000 °F for a minimum of 1 hour: Fan shall meet the requirements for the SBCCI "Standard Fire Prevention Code" for operation at 1,000 °F for a minimum of 1 hour in an emergency situation.

4. HT Option IV - UL listed "Power Ventilator for Smoke Control Systems: Includes construction to meet IRI and SBCCI "Standard Fire Prevention Code” requirements.

All emergency service fans shall be rated at 300

0C for 2 hours.





22.2.20.5 UNDER GROUND CAR PARK VENTILATION

The detailed design, supply, testing and commissioning of underground carpark ventilation shall be carried out by specialist.

1. Air Flow Rates

The air flow rate is in accordance with current building regulations in force, i.e. Building regulations approved document F and as specified in the schedule of drawings.

2. System Operation

Under “Normal” ventilation conditions and to comply with regulations „F‟ air will be drawn into the car park from the ramp complemented by a supply fan and pushed around the area and towards the extract point where 2 No. main fans would be located. Under “Normal “ Conditions, one main extract fan will operate at low speed, thus providing 3 air changes per hour; CO levels will be monitored continually. On detection of CO levels rising beyond 30ppm, the impulse fans will operate at low speed in the affected area to mix and dilute the CO gases for extract via the main fans. Should the CO level continue to rise to 40PPM, both main fans will operate at low speed to give 6 air changes per hour. The use of CO monitoring equipment will assist with achieving building regulation part 12 for energy efficiency. On detection of smoke, and to comply with document „B‟ two main extract fans will increase to high speed and will provide an air change rate of 12 per hour due to the distribution and selective operation of the impulse fans smoke will be guided towards the main extract point.

3. Fan Ratings All fans are rated to withstand a temperature of 300º C for a period of at least 2 hrs.

4. Equipment Overview

Scope shall include the supply fan, main extract fans, impulse fans,grills / dampers, suction / discharge ducting, supply of electrical panel, CO detection system, smoke detection system, engineering, commissioning, cabling etc.

a. Main Extract Fans b. Impluse Fans c. Extract Grilles & dampers d. Electrical Panel Switch Board (Inclusive of all required Controls in the

system) e. CO detection system detectors & panel f. Multi Criteria Smoke Detectors and fire panel g. Detailed System Design





h. Commissioning Fan system, electrical panels, CO and Smoke detection system

i. Custom made CFD analysis.

22.2.21 PIPEWORK, VALVES AND FITTINGS

General

Each part of the system of piping shall be complete in all details and provided with all control valves and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation. The tender drawings indicate generally the sizes of all main piping but the right is reserved to modify the runs of piping to accommodate conditions during construction. In case grooved piping system is used for the installation, the layout, accessories, supports & their locations etc shall be submitted for review and approval. All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and paralleled or at right angles to structural members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom. Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or windows and shall be generally arranged so that it is least 2.5 cm. from the finished wall face. Sufficient space is to be allowed for accessibility, servicing and proper insulation works. Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls or slabs. Pipes shall be pitched for proper circulation and drainage.

Run outs shall be graded in such a manner as to prevent air traps being formed within them when the mains expand or contract. Automatic or open vents are to be provided at high points, piped to suitable drains or terminating over expansion tanks wherever possible.

All drain piping shall pitch down in the director of flow. All low points of the system must be fitted with drain valves to allow the complete draining of the system. Bottom of all risers must have dirt pockets of the size of riser and at least 15 cms. long with a drain valve fitted.

All water piping to equipment and valves shall be connected with grooved couplings or flanges or unions for dismantling and removal. All piping shall reamed after cutting to remove all burrs. All reduction in sizes of piping in the direction of downward pitch shall be installed with eccentric fittings to maintain a level top. Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending pipes will not normally be allowed, except that bending of back steel pipes 50 mm. nominal diameter and smaller shall be permitted, where space conditions allow for a bending radius of at least 10 times the diameter of the pipe. A hydraulic pipe bender shall be used to bend all pipes. Bends showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformations will not be acceptable. Cutting and shutting of bends will not be permitted.





Piping shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets or extend beyond footing lines, as determined by the drawings. In placing pipes through sleeves, near walls, partitions or in chases, care must be taken to provide sufficient space for pipe covering. Where pipes are held in vices, as and when screwing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe surface is not damaged. Any pipe work so damaged shall not be fitted. All pipes stored on site shall be kept clear of the ground and where possible stored under cover. Pipes corroded beyond normal „stock-rust‟ condition shall not be used. Special care should be taken to prevent dirt and foreign material entering open ends of pipes during erection. A valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipe will not be considered satisfactory to prevent entry of foreign matter. Screwed iron caps, plugs, or plastic covers shall be used to seal pipe ends. Wood, rag paper or other makeshift plugs will not be permitted. Before connecting up to return mains, the system of piping must be blown and flushed out. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned. Before connecting up to return mains, the system of piping must be blown and flushed out. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned. Liberal allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe by means of changes in the direction or by the inclusion of expansion joints in the piping system.

Chilled Water Pipes Chilled water pipes shall be black seamless as per ASTM-A53 SCH 40. Piping Screwed or grooved fittings shall be used for 50 mm. pipes and smaller. Welding or grooved fittings shall be used for 65 mm. pipes and larger. Branch welds will not be permitted. Screwed fittings shall be black malleable iron and shall PN 20 rated. Welding fittings shall be steel medium duty compatible with the piping. Wherever small bore chilled water piping is required (as near fan coil units) type K copper piping as per BS2871 with cast bronze non de –zincifiable fittings can be used subject to specify approval from Engineer. All joints shall be brazed. Compression fittings will not be permitted. Sufficient number of unions shall be provided near the coils and valves for easy dismantling. Where grooved joint piping system is utilized, grooved couplings may be accepted in lieu of unions. Welding Where shown on the drawings or specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and flanges shall be used. Care shall be taken to ensure that welding metal or flux does not project into the bore of the pipe. All welds shall be of good clean metal, free from slag and porosity, of even thickness and contour, well fused with the parent metal, hammered on





completion and finished smooth. The Engineer reserves the right to have cut for examination 2% of all welds made. The Contractor shall remake the joints at no extra charge. All welded joints (except pipe welded end to end) shall be made by use of forged one piece, welding flanges, caps, elbows, branch outlets and tees of approved make. All such fittings etc. shall be of a type, which maintains full wall thickness at all points, ample radius, fillets and proper levels or shoulders at ends. All joint welding may be by the electric arc or acetylene process. Wherever welded piping connections to equipment, valves or other units needing maintenance, servicing or requiring possible removal, the connecting joints shall be by means of unions or flanges. Pressure rating of the flanges shall match the pressure rating of the flanges on the equipment to which the pipe connects.

Grooved Joints Where shown on drawings, specified, or directed, grooved joints and couplings shall be used. Grooved joint piping system may be used in lieu of flanged or welded piping systems for pipe sizes 2 ½ inches and larger. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Grooved joint fittings shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A395 and A536; forged steel conforming to ASTM A234, or fabricated from carbon steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A53, with grooved ends in conformance with AWWA C606. Grooved joint couplings shall consist of ductile iron housings, conforming to ASTM A395 and A536, complete with pressure responsive synthetic rubber gasket (Grade to suit the intended service). Rigid Type: Coupling housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment connections. Three couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 150/300 flanged components.





Valves for Chilled Water System In addition to valves, cocks and strainers etc., shown on all drawings, the contractor shall include for the installation of sufficient valves, cocks and strainers to enable the system to operate to the satisfaction of the engineer. No asbestos containing materials shall be employed in any valve.

Valves shall bear the BSI Kite mark or equivalent denoting Quality System, accreditation and compliance with British Standards and where no Kite mark scheme exists, valves shall be manufactured under an approved BS5750 Quality System.

All castings shall be clean close-grained metal free from rough projections. Unless otherwise specified valves of 50mm nominal bore and under shall have female ends screwed to BS 21 and valves 65mm nominal bore and over shall have flanged ends.

Special care must be exercised in the installation of screwed valves to avoid straining their bodies, and preventing the gate or seat from closing tight. The wrench shall always be applied to the side being attached to the pipe. When attaching pipe to a valve already in place, a second wrench shall be used to hold the valve while the pipe is being tightened. A pipe shall not be screwed so far into a valve as to damage the seat.

Flanged valves shall have matching flanges manufactured in accordance with BS4504. Composite flanges to BS4504 should be used when butterfly or other 'inside bolt circle' valves are installed in copper pipe work systems.

All flanged valves (all services) shall be epoxy coated both internally and externally in order to prevent corrosion and pitting, valves shall be suitable for the fluid carried and the temperatures, test and working pressures of the system in which they are installed. All grooved valves shall have grooved ends in conformance with ANSI / AWWA C606. All grooved valves shall be coated with Poly Phenylene Sulfide (PPS) or equivalent rust inhibitive enamel. Valves shall be suitable for the fluid carried, working and test pressures / temperatures of the system. All valves, which contain copper alloy, shall be of gunmetal or capable of withstanding dezincification.

Isolating Valve

For sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze gate valve to BS5154 PN20 Series B. Valves shall be complete with position indicator and locking device, asbestos free gland packing, with non-rising stem, threaded bonnet, one piece wedge and taper thread. For sizes 65mm and above:





1. It shall be cast iron (to BS1452) gate valve to BS5150 PN16. Valves shall be

complete with locking device and open shut indicator, rising stem, outside screw, zinc free bronze trim, wedge facing ring and body seat ring shall be of gunmetal, flanged to BS4504 PN20.

2. Ductile iron (to ASTM A395 and A536) butterfly valve with grooved ends. Valves shall be complete with lever lock handle or gear operator with position indicator. Disk shall be elastomer encapsulated ductile iron, with integrally cast stem, Stainless steel upper bearing and lower turn-on.

Manual Commissioning Sets-Balancing Valves

For the purpose of balancing water distribution systems accurately (5%), the following commissioning valves must be installed as indicated in the drawings. Commissioning sets (balancing valves) shall comprise of a metering station and a close coupled double regulating valve and shall be installed with a minimum of 5 diameters uninterrupted upstream length of straight pipe. Valves shall be as following: Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze commissioning set, comprising of

a. bronze metering station, to BS7350 PN20 Series B or Brass metering station and must be fitted with double sealing feature test points

b. bronze double regulating valve, to BS7350PN20 series B. Lock shield type,

Micrometer style indicator, rising DZR stem, screwed bonnet, Parabolic and slotted DZR regulating disk with ends connections to BS21 Tr (ISO 7) except ½" size which shall be parallel.

Sizes 65mm and above, shall be cast iron commissioning set, comprising of

a. Stainless steel metering station to BS7350 with extension pieces to mount test points

b. Cast iron double regulating valve to BS7350 PN16, inside screw, non-rising

stem and locking device, ductile iron bonnet, and fitted with EPDM coated regulating disk, double regulating device and indicator, back seating feature. Valve shall also be flanged to BS4504 PN16. Valves shall be Kite marked.

Strainers

Strainers, in addition to where shown on drawings shall be fitted prior to all major items of plant including all pumps, air handling units, control valves, etc.

Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) "Y" type strainer PN20 Series B, with perforated stainless steel screen 0.75mm diameter holes for 'fine' straining and 22.6% free flow area per the square cm. of element area.





Strainer shall be with screwed cap and shall be fitted with gland cock (hose union type) for blow down connection and shall also have drilled and tapped bosses on each side of the body fitted with 2 test points and 2 plugged points. Ends shall be threaded to BS21 (ISO R7).

Sizes 65mm and above shall be cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) or Ductile iron (ASTM A395 and A536) "Y" type strainer to PN20 Series B with perforated stainless steel screen 1.6mm diameter holes for 'fine' straining and at least 34% free flow area per square cm. of element area. Strainers shall be with bolted cover and fitted with gland cock (hose union type) for blow down connection and shall have drilled and tapped bosses on each side of the body fitted with 2 test points and 2 plugged points, grooved or flanged to BS4504 PN20.

Non-Return Valves

Non-return valves shall be fitted where plant must operate on an automatic changeover basis or where flow reversals can occur.

Sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze (BS1400 LG2) check valve to BS5154 PN20. horizontal swing pattern with threaded cover, nitrile disk, and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipe (with vertical flow upwards). end threaded internal BS21 (ISO 7). Bronze double check valves shall be installed to prevent contamination of water caused by back siphonage, back flow and cross connection in supplies such as those to hose taps, cisterns, stand pipes, showers and basins.

Sizes 65mm and above shall be:

1. Flanged: cast iron (BS1452 Gr 220) check valves with lever and air cushion to BS5153 PN20, of the horizontal swing pattern with bolted cover, outside lever and air cushion, zinc-free bronze trim and rubber faced disk and flanged to BS4504 PN20 and shall be suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical pipelines.

2. Grooved

a. Ductile iron (STM A395 and A536) check valves, horizontal or vertical,

spring-assisted, stainless steel trim, aluminium bronze or elastomer encapsulated ductile iron desk, with grooved ends.

b. Cast iron (ASTM A126) check valves with lever and air cushion, of the

horizontal swing pattern with coupled cover, outside lever and air cushion, bronze seat ring (ASTM B584) with optional elastomer seat ring. Valve shall be suitable for horizontal installation or vertical installation with upward flow.

Drain/Gland Cocks





Drain cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants. Drain cocks shall be of the hose union pattern gland cock in bronze (BS1400 LG2).WRc approved, asbestos free gland packing and shall be threaded to BS21 complete with captive cap. The plugs shall have square head with a slot to indicated plug position.

Flow Measurement

For the purpose of the flow and temperature measurement and the proportional balancing of water distribution system, the contractor shall provide a digital (microprocessor) flow measurement test set and shall be suitable for portable or bench mounted use.

Screwed Joints on Steel Piping

Screwed joints shall be clean threaded, pulled up tightly and made with approved joining compound and long strand hemp. After joints have been formed, all surplus hemp shall be cut away and the joints wiped clean. Where pipes are galvanized, care shall be taken to ensure that threads are carefully cut so that the number of exposed threads is minimized. Flanged Joints All flanged joints shall be flush and truly aligned and made with approved brass corrugated rings or compressed asbestos in compositions. Flanges for connection to welded pipe shall be „slip-on‟ or „welding-neck‟ standard steel type, made as called for in the schedules. Flanges or unions shall be provided on straight runs at not greater than 22 m. intervals. Unions Unions are required on pipe sizes 50 mm. and under. Unions shall be ground taper joint type, good for 200 psi working pressure and shall be PN20 rated. In case grooved joint couplings are used, unions may not be required. Direct connection between pipes of dissimilar materials must be avoided to minimize chances of galvanic corrosion. Dielectric unions or waterways should be used for connection between steel and copper pipes.

Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be fitted in straight lengths of pipe at distances not exceeding 18 meters unless otherwise approved by the Consultant. All flexible couplings and expansion joints must be selected so that the working pressure including the gravity head of riser pipe, temperature and movement encountered will not be more than 75% of that allowable for the joint selected. One side of the joints must have all piping and/or adjacent equipment adequately anchored. The other side must be supported, aligned and guided so as to allow free movement without imposing unnecessary stresses on the joints.





Expansion joints shall have integral duck flanges. They shall have individual solid steel ring reinforced with a carcass of highest-grade woven cotton or acceptable synthetic fiber. Joints shall be constructed to pipe line size and to meet working pressure conditions, face measurements etc., as designated. They shall be of an arch type construction with the number of arches (corrugations) dependent on projected movement. All joints must be finish-coated with eypalon paint to prevent ozone attach. Split back or retaining rings shall be furnished. Joints size 2” and below shall have threaded malleable iron unions on both sides. All joints shall be suitable for minimum test pressure of one and a half times the working pressure or 150m of water, whichever is higher. Flexible connections shall be provided to AHUs, FCUs, pumps etc. in order to prevent transmission of vibration to pipe work. Grooved end expansion joints shall be the telescoping type consisting of a series of grooved end pipe nipples joined in tandem. Grooved joint flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment connections. Three couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source.

Automatic Air Vents (AAV) At all high points in the supply / return piping system an automatic air vent shall be fitted. Air vents shall be of the float type with bronze body and SS float. The size and working pressure shall be as per the schedule. Bleed off from the Automatic air vents shall be connected to the nearest drain. A separate isolating valve shall be installed below the AAV for maintenance purpose.

Air Cocks and Bottles Air bottles shall be formed from 1.5 m. length of pipe one size larger than the pipe being vented. A 15-mm. pipe fitted with 15 mm. needle valve shall be welded into top and taken to low level. These items shall be fitted so that they are not concealed and are readily accessible. Where equipment is cased, vents shall be extended so that they can be operated from the outside of the casing. Pipe Supports, Hangers and Anchors All supports and hangers for steel piping shall be ferrous and zinc coated. Supports for copper pipes shall be non-ferrous and chromium plated, wherever specified. Brackets or supports shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other fittings requiring maintenance. All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at centers as detailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single support, the spacing shall be of a shorter interval. All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unless





otherwise indicated, pipe hangers for steel piping shall be spaced as follows: 20 to 32 mm. - Not over 2.4 m. apart - 10 mm. rods 40 to 100 mm. - Not over 3.0 m. apart - 12 mm. rods Over 100 mm. - Not over 4.0 m. apart - 16 mm. rods Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are removed. All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc., necessary for fastening of hangers shall be furnished by the Contractor. All hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be supported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted. Details of hangers and supports to be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fitting. All hangers shall be provided with lock nuts and have provision for vertical adjustment of pipes. Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trapeze type hangers of steel construction as specified elsewhere. Sliding assembly systems shall be used wherever thermal or expansion movements are expected. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by hangers consisting of malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type hangers or roller hangers or sliding assembly where specified.

Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes shall be used for pipes supported from the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy wrought iron or steel clamps securely bolted on the piping with the end extension bearings on the building construction. Contractor shall submit calculations for pipe load as well as proposed anchor points. Piping shall be anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design. Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have treated hardwood or plastic inserts of approved make or high-density insulation capable of withstanding the compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal-to-metal contact. All pipe supports hangers and anchors etc., are to be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint of grey colour or as approved by the Engineer.

Pipe Sleeves All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have sleeves having an internal diameter at least 25 mm. larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of the insulation for insulated services. All the building expansion joints shall also be





provided with pipe sleeves. The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipe sleeves around them shall be projected minimum 50 mm. on either sides of the wall, floor and roof slab. Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel set flush with finished wall surfaces. Flashing Sleeves Flashing sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through water proof membranes. Flashing sleeves details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but generally, they shall be provided with an integral flange set into the membrane. The associated pipes shall have flange and shield which shall extend beyond the insert and be sealed with approved mastic.

Testing of Chilled Water Pipework 1. The Works Contractor shall carry out hydraulic and performance tests,

under actual conditions, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer before any thermal insulation is applied.

2. The whole chilled water pipework system shall be hydraulically tested to a pressure equivalent to one and a half times the maximum working pressure or one and a half times the standing pressure, whichever is higher. All flexible/ expansion joints shall be restrained to prevent axial stretch and all control subject to damage shall be isolated at the time of the pressure test. The indicated pressure shall be maintained for 4 hours without further application of pressure and without visible leakage or a drop in the indicated pressure.

3. When a section of pipework is complete and ready for testing, it shall be plugged and then slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to escape and avoiding all shock or water hammer. The Works Contractor shall make arrangements for all water used in the test to be properly drained away.

4. Pipework which fails under test, due to pressure loss or visible leakage, shall be relieved of pressure and all faulty joints or other defects made good.

5. Remedial work and test shall be repeated until the systems are tested successfully. If in the opinion of the Engineer, damage has been caused during the remedial work, or faulty materials have been used, the section under test will be condemned. The installation shall then be removed, cleared from site, replaced with new materials and re-tested as specified.

6. The General Works Contractor shall provide the water and electricity supplies necessary for testing purposes.

Refrigerant Pipework and Fittings

Refrigerant pipework shall be refrigerant quality copper tube to BS 2871 Table 2 (Material C106), fully annealed and internally degreased and cleaned, with capillary





fittings. Piping shall be supported to prevent strains or distortion in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are removed. All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have UPVC sleeves of an internal diameter at least 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of the insulation for insulated services. All building expansion joints shall also be provided with pipe sleeves.

The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and pipe sleeves through them shall be projected minimum 50 mm on either side of the walls, floor and roof slab.

Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of U. P. V. C. set flush with finished wall surfaces.

Joints in copper pipe shall be flanged, flared (up to 19.05 mm O. D. only) or brazed (with or without capillary fittings). Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the HVCA Code of Practice – Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and Sheet.

Screwed joints shall not be accepted in refrigerant pipes except on the equipment accessories. In such cases the threads shall either be of taper form and used in conjunction with PTFE tape or an anaerobic sealant, or of parallel form associated with machined joint faces and a suitable joint.

Copper pipework shall be used as feed piping for all pressure gauge or similar fittings.

Compression fittings shall not be accepted on refrigerant pipework.

Refrigerant pipework shall not be arranged for running compressors in parallel (i.e. with common suction and/or discharge in pipes). The use of a number of compressors each having an independent refrigerant circuit in a common evaporator shall be permitted provided pressure tests between adjacent refrigerant circuits in the evaporator are carried out during manufacture. The pipework shall be designed so that oil in the refrigerant leaving the compressor (and passing any oil separator fitted) shall be carried through the system and back to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity unloading.

Pipework shall be firmly supported and secured to minimise vibration. Vibration eliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge pipes to minimize transmission of vibration or noise.

All refrigerant equipment shall have a strength and leakage pressure test after manufacture in accordance with the Table below :





Refrigerant High Side Test Pressure Low Side Test Pressure

kPa kPa R407c 3000 1700 A pressure test equal to the low test pressure quoted in the table of equipment test pressures shall be applied to the refrigerant system after all piping has been fitted. This test shall be in addition to the pressure test on each unit at completion of the manufacture.

Provision shall be made for the supply of up to 3 sets of pressure test sheets for each machine and system. It shall be the Works Contractor‟s responsibility to ensure the sheet content and presentation is acceptable to the Engineer.

PIPE SUPPORTS

i. All refrigerant piping shall be supported to prevent deflection, buckling and

vibration. ii. Piping shall be supported at all changes in direction and at intervals of not more

than 1.2 metres on straight runs. Pipe supports & clamps shall be subject to approval of the Consultant.

iii. Pipework on roofs and floors shall be supported on off-set clamps, floor or rikker

stands. The pipe support stands shall be bolted to the concrete slab or steel members.

iv. Vertical pipework shall be supported on wall brackets with 'U' bolts or clamps. v. Suspended pipework shall be supported with trapeze hangers with rods

suspended from inserts. vi. Condensate drain pipe supports shall be capable of vertical adjustment after

installation of piping. vii. All pipework passing through the walls, floors and roof slabs shall be provided

with pipe sleeves of adequate size to allow the passage of insulation. The gap shall be sealed with intumescent sealants.

Condensate Drain Piping

Condensate drains shall be provided in copper pipes to BS 2871 Part 1 Table „X‟ above ground, uPVC class E to BS 3505 for vertical drops in the walls or below ground shall be adequately supported along their length. All condensate drains shall be fitted with 75mm deep trap with dirt pocket and removable plug provided and extended to the nearest drains/soakaways as shown in the drawings. Removable plugs shall be provided at every change in direction to allow rodding access.





All drain pipes shall be pressure tested at 6.0meter of water before applying insulation or covering the pipes. Drain test plugs with expandable rubber seal shall be used for the purpose of testing.

22.2.22 INSULATION

Scope

The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labour, materials, accessories and equipment necessary for the insulation of all air conditioning systems and mechanical equipment. Said work shall be completed in strict accordance with the insulation section of the specification.

General

All insulation shall be applied in a workman like manner by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall be applied to clean and dry surfaces after tests and approvals required by this specification have been completed. On cold surfaces where a vapour barrier must be maintained, insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapour seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapour sealed to prevent condensation. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation.

All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings or sleeves, except where firestop or firesafing materials are required. Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapour sealed as required.

Surface Burning Characteristics

All insulation shall have surface burning characteristic ratings as tested by ASTM E-84, UL 723 or NFPA 255 not exceeding;

a. Flame Spread 25 b. Smoke Developed 50

Composite shall include insulation, jacketing and adhesive used to secure jacketing or facing. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement, tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above.





Cold Piping Insulation

Cold piping shall include chilled water piping, refrigerant suction and condensate drain piping.

General

i. Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in accordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework prior to the witnessing of the pipework pressure test by the Engineer and authorized in writing by the Engineer giving clear instructions for further insulation to be applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of insulation applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the Works Contractor shall allow for the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and equipment for inspection by the Engineer. If the insulation proves to be of the thickness specified then the cut section shall be made good and the whole installation completed. Should any cut section show a deficiency in thickness, further section shall be cut at the direction of the Engineer for inspection. If a deficiency in thickness, further sections shall be cut at the direction of the Engineer for inspection. If a deficiency in thickness or any other defects are found, the Works Contractor shall remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the Engineer directs and then shall supply, deliver and apply new insulation complying with Specification and restore it to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This work shall be carried out by the Works Contractor at his own expense.

ii. Thermal insulation shall be applied to all pumps, valves, strainers, non-return

valves, draincockes, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points. Insulation of these components in the pipework system up to and including 50 mm. diameter pipework shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suit and of the same size as the line pipework. Components within the pipework system 65 mm. diameter and above, as well as all flanged components upto 50 diameter, shall have purpose made boxes applied. Each valve, strainer and NRV boxes shall be made using 0.67 mm. aluminium sheet with 50 mm. fibreglass insulation fastened to the inside of the valve box with approved adhesive. Each valve box shall be hinged along one side with a minimum of three fastening clips on the other side. Samples of boxes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and approved received in writing prior to installation.

iii. No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings, vertical or horizontal

builder‟s work shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.

iv. All fibre glass section insulation shall have a density of not less than 96 kilogrammes/m3 and a thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.037 w/m

0 C.

All pipework insulation shall be applied to the pipework using proprietary brand adhesive approved by the Engineer.

Pipework Exposed to Weather

Thermal insulation shall be 50 mm. thick for sizes up to 150mm and shall be 75 mm





for bigger pipes and shall be aluminium foil faced preformed sectional glass fibre and shall be applied to all pipework, valves, flanges and fittings in accordance with this Specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each joint shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide aluminium foil adhesive tape and the whole covered in 60z heavy duty glass cloth and all joints lapped and sealed with approved vapour seal. Vapour seal, first coat, shall be applied by dipping the cloth into the vapour seal prior to applying to the pipework insulation. The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied with brush. Finally, the installation shall be finished with a system of 0.67 mm. thickness aluminium smooth polished sheet cladding, cut and formed into sections to suit the extreme outside dimensions of the insulated work for straight runs. Each length of aluminium cladding shall have a “snap-lock” fixing.

Cladding sections shall be finally arranged with the longitudinal seams turned away from the normal working area. Bends, tapers, tees, other fittings, valves and pump bodies shall be encased in specially pressed or otherwise formed aluminium single sections. Circular bends over 200 mm. outside diameter may be encased in a maximum of 3 No. equal segmental pressed or formed sections.

Pipework within the Building

i) Thermal insulation shall be 50 mm. thick for sizes up to 150mm and shall be 75 mm for bigger pipes with aluminium foil faced preformed sectional glass fibre and shall be applied to all pipework, flanges and fittings in accordance with this specification in a neat and workmanlike fashion. Each section shall be secured to the pipework by applying an approved adhesive of high quality to the surfaces of both pipework and insulation section. The sections shall be fixed in place immediately. Note that the adhesive shall also applied to the edges of the fiberglass section.

ii) All joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide aluminium adhesive tape. The insulation shall then be covered with high quality canvas of 200 gm/sq.m. quality, sealed with an approved vapour seal.

iii) The canvas shall be soaked in an approved weather proofing compound and wrapped carefully around the insulation to provide a smooth surface free from wrinkles and gaps. There should be a minimum 50 mm. overlap at transverse and longitudinal canvas joints. iv) The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied after the first coat has dried.

v) When the pipework insulation is exposed to view within the building, the insulation shall be finished with one coat of rubberized paint of a colour approved by the Engineer.

Refrigerant pipework

Refrigerant pipework shall be insulated in accordance with KAHRAMAA requirements. Manufacturer‟s recommendations shall likewise be considered. The insulated pipework shall be additionally wrapped with 200gm/sqm. quality glass cloth





and painted with two coats of approved weather proofing compound and finally provided with 0.63mm aluminium cladding for outdoor piping.

Condensate drain piping Condensate drains within the building and on the roof shall be insulated with 10mm thick rubber foam and weather proofed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All exposed pipes external to the building shall be painted with two coats of paint matching with the building color.

Vapour Seal and Adhesives

i. The vapour seal material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant and have anti-rodent and anti-fungal properties. Bitumen based products shall not be used.

ii. The vapour seal material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to

use.

Duct Work Insulation

Conditioned air, for the purpose of this specification, shall consist of air that is cooled. Both supply and return duct work as well as outside air intake ductwork shall be insulated.

General

i. Thermal insulation to ductwork shall be carried out neatly and to a high grade quality by skilled workers experienced in the trade, and strictly in accordance with following specification.

ii. No thermal insulation shall be applied on any ductwork prior to inspection by the

Engineer and a site inspection report signed by the Engineer authorizing the application of thermal insulation. As and when necessary, joints must be left uncovered until tests are carried out successfully.

iii. No insulation shall be enclosed in false ceilings, vertical or horizontal builder‟s

work shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.

iv. Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any building shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, be classified non-combustible. Thermal insulating materials used within any building shall be free from substances which in the event of a fire would generate appreciable quantities of smoke, noxious or toxic fumes.

v. All openings in roof slabs and walls for passing ducts shall be sealed and/or

weatherproofed suitably. Sleeves shall be provided where ducts pass through





masonry walls or partitions.

vi. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, then treated with an approved corrosion inhibitor before insulation is applied. Note that the inhibitor coating would not be required for galvanized surfaces.

vii. Insulation shall be applied to all ductwork, volume control dampers, silencers,

mixing boxes, fans, cooler casings and other items of equipment contained within the Specification detailed below.

viii. The Works Contractor shall allow for the cost of sampling in-place insulation

from ductwork or plants, for inspection by the Engineer. Any sample found not in accordance with the approved material should be replaced at the Works Contractor‟s expenses.

ix. All fiberglass rigid slabs shall have a density of not less than 48 kg/m3 and a

thermal conductivity not greater than 0.037 W/M2°K.

x. Where specifically stated, insulation shall be additionally secured using screwed thread type plastic hangers glued to the ductwork at 500 mm. centres. The insulation shall be restrained by push-on circular plastic discs terminated below the external surface of the insulation after which any projecting threads shall be cut level with the insulation. Ends and edges of sheets shall be lapped sufficiently and sealed where insulated duct enters or leaves the building.

xi. Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proofed against rotting,

mould and fungal growth and attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects be suitable for continuous use through the range of operating temperatures and within the environment indicated.

Ductwork Within the Building

i. All ductwork within air conditioned zones shall be insulated using 25 mm. rigid fibreglass slabs covered with reinforced aluminium foil. Panels shall be secured to the ductwork by applying an approved high quality adhesive to the surfaces of both the ductwork and insulation panel. Fiberglass matts shall be used for circular ducts instead of fiberglass slabs. Insulation shall also have 25 mm. wide galvanized b ands secured at 600 mm. center for circular ducts.

ii. All insulation joints shall be sealed using 75 mm. wide minimum aluminium tape.

The insulation shall then be covered with high quality canvas of 200 gm/sq. m. quality and sealed with an approved vapour seal .

iii. The canvas shall be soaked in an approved weather proofing compound and

wrapped carefully to provide a smooth surface, free from wrinkles and gaps. There should be a minimum 50 mm. overlap at transverse and longitudinal canvas joints. The second coat of vapour seal shall be applied after drying of the first coat.

iv. All supply and return ductwork running in unconditioned space shall be insulated





using 50 mm. foil backed rigid fiberglass panels.

v. Exhaust duct traversing conditioned space shall be insulated using 50 mm. foil backed rigid fibre glass panels.

Ductwork Outside the Building

All rectangular supply and return air ductwork external to the building shall be insulated using 50 mm. foil backed rigid fiberglass panels secured to the ductwork using an approved adhesive and 75 mm. wide minimum aluminium foil tape to cover the joints. Fiberglass matts shall be used for circular ducts. On ducts with dimensions larger above 600 mm. insulation shall have plastic clips riveted to the ducts on the underside only. Insulation shall also have 25 mm. wide galvanized bands secured at 600 mm center for circular ducts. The whole installation shall be securely wrapped in 200 gm/m2 glass cloth, all joints lapped and sealed with adhesive. Two coats of approved vapour seal shall be applied ensuring first class penetration into the glass cloth. Finally the installation shall be finished with 0.9 mm. thick aluminium smooth polished sheet cladding. Each length of the cladding shall have snap lock fixing.

Vapour Seal and Adhesive

i. The material shall be fire resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant, and have anti-rodent and anti-fungal properties.

ii. Bitumen based products shall not be used.

iii. The material must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to use.

ALUMINIUM CLADDING All exposed to sight duct work & pipe work shall be covered with 0.9 mm thick aluminium cladding.

22.2.23 CHILLED WATER TREATMENT

Water treatment shall be provided to prevent corrosion, fungal growth, scaling and discoloration. Chemical dosing / water treatment shall be carried out by a specialist engaged in this activity.

A chemical dosing pot complete with all accessories shall be fitted on the chilled water circuit to add corrosion inhibitor chemicals to the system at the time of commissioning and periodically during operation. The pot shall be fabricated out of M.S. sheet suitable for 125 psig working pressure. The pot shall be complete with chemical feed valve, non-return valve, drain valve, water-in and out valves and air cock.





The Contractor shall add the first charge of chemical to the system and supply additional chemical adequate for the operation during Warranty period. Testing chemicals/instruments shall be included in the scope of supply.

The dosing pot and all connected pipes and fittings shall be insulated in the same manner as the chilled water pipes.

Details of treatment system offered and technical literature shall be included with the offer.

22.2.24 PAINTING AND FINISHING

All steel work in connection with pipe supports exposed to the elements are to be painted with two coats of a rust preventive paint approved by the Engineer, preferably zinc rich primer, followed by one undercoat and one topcoat.

All exposed metal surfaces of air conditioning and electrical apparatus, motors, guards, pipework, hangers etc. must be galvanized and painted with one coat of under-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to a colour approved by the Engineer.

After completion of the installation, the entire work shall be checked for finish and appearance. Any portion of work found damaged, unpainted or not finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer shall be rectified.

22.2.25 IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING

All insulated and non-insulated pipework and ductwork shall be identified by colour codes/safety indicated and basic colour identification bands to BS 1710 (1984).

The safety colour and code indication bands shall be 100 mm. wide between two basic colour identification bands each of length 150 mm. The identification shall be at centres of not more than 6 meters and adjacent to all valves, items of plant, changes in direction and both sides where the pipework passes through walls, floors, etc. and all service access points.

Pipe and ductwork sizes, content flow and return (F & R) indication and direction of flow arrows in black shall be applied on the basic colour identification band as detailed in Tables 1, 2 and Appendix „D‟ of BS 1710 (1984).

The safety colour, contents, code and colour identification bands shall be applied by means of self adhesive coloured or printed tape. Flow and return (F& R) and direction of flow arrows shall be in black with letter 25 mm. high on 50 mm. wide white self adhesive tape applied in a continuous band around the pipe insulation.

Pipe contents shall be in black lettering 25 mm. on 50 mm. wide clear self adhesive





labels.

The materials employed shall be as for pipework identification, i.e. self adhesive plastic.

All the lettering and wording shall be in English.

Where the pipework/ductwork contents constitute a hazard, a symbol as given in BS 1710 (1984) should be added to the type colour.

The hazard information shall be given as briefly as possible, using commonly accepted forms such as a number indicating which floor of the building.

Where the identification of the space is by room number this must be agreed with the user who otherwise may have numbered the rooms differently.

22.2.26 CIVIL WORKS / BUILDER’S WORK

The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where pipes, conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof slabs as measured in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall provide cross-over bridges as shown on the drawings. Bridges details shall be agreed with the Architect and Engineer.

Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

22.2.27 TEST HOLES Test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the ducts and shall be of 22 mm. dia. Each test hole shall be fitted with an Instrument Test Port having galvanized cast metal body, expandable rubber sealing element and metal wing nut for operation. Test port base shall be seated on soft rubber gasket and riveted to the duct wall. The wing nut shall extend outside the finished insulation so that the duct interior can be accessed without disturbing the insulation. Rubber plugs or stick-on seals shall not be used for closing test holes. The number of test holes shall be as per recommendation of DW144. Test holes shall be provided at the following locations:

1. At fans (in the straight section of duct near to fan outlet) 2. At main supply and return ducts of air handling units/cooling coils 3. At main branches after regulating dampers 4. At any other position as per Engineer‟s requirements





22.2.28 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES

Stem Type Thermometers Range : 20

0 to 120

0 F

Size : 9” long Location : At inlet and outlet of chillers and air handling units Type : Mercury in glass

Thermometer Well

Location At inlet and outlet of chillers, air handling units and fan

coil units. Purpose To accommodate stem type thermometers Construction Brass body with Plastic cap to prevent ingress of

dirt

Water Pressure Gauges Size 4” in diameter Components Pig tail and vent cock Location Inlet and outlet of all pumps and chillers, to be selected in a way to ensure needle position at mid-range during operation of the equipment

Range 0 to 100 psi, unless otherwise advised by the Engineer

22.2.29 ELECTRICAL WORKS AND CONTROL SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL WORKS

General

All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical specifications and shall conform to the regulations of KAHRAMAA. All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or frequency vary within the following tolerances:

i. Voltage - + 6% ii. Frequency - + 0.3%

All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolonged operation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition to the atmosphere where they are installed to operate. Allowance for the local high ambient temperature shall be made by reducing the permitted rise of temperature above





ambient or by de-rating the capacity and ratings.

Electrical Motors All motors shall be designed to suit the maximum temperature of air passing over the motors and the additional temperature rise caused by exposure to the sun. The type of winding insulation shall, however, be not less than Class „B‟. The motors for exhaust fans shall have the insulation suitable to operate on 50

0 C. ambient

temperature. All motors smaller than 0.50 kW shall be designed to operate on single phase. All motors 0.75 kW and above shall be designed to operate on three phase. All motors shall be wound for 240 volts, single phase, or 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, A.C. system. Any motors brought to site not complying with above mentioned voltage and insulation requirements shall not be accepted. All motors shall comply with IEC 34/1, 72/1 & 2, BS 3979, BS 4999/5000, and shall be of reputed make.

Electrical Wiring The Electrical Contractor will carry out all power cabling up to and including isolators or up to the control panels in plant rooms, pump room, roof and other mechanical rooms as indicated on the drawings. The electric supply shall be terminated into the main incomer of the control panel, isolator etc. It is the A.C. Contractor‟s responsibility to provide the control panels as necessary for his equipment and continue the connections from the control panel/isolator up to all the air conditioning and ventilation units. Wherever group-control is envisaged as for basement car park exhaust fans, the Electrical contractor will provide power up to the group control panel and thereon to the individual isolators. All control cabling, wiring, conduiting, terminations etc is the responsibility of AC contractor. The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical equipment/controls associated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation works. A.C. Contractor‟s scope of works shall include but not be limited to the following: Power cabling from isolator to FCU, pressurization unit, packaged AC units, outdoor AC units, fans etc, from AHU control panel to AHUs, from pump control panel to pumps, etc. complete with cable tray, conduit, supports etc (For continuity, refer electrical drawings and specifications). Power cabling complete with cable tray, conduit etc from the controller of twin fans to the actual fan units. In case the fan unit is supplied with integral isolator as a standard accessory, the same shall also be provided by the A.C. Contractor. These isolators shall be weather proof to IP 55.





All control wiring, conduits, cables, cable trays etc., for the air conditioning equipment, controls, sequence regulation panel and remote emergency push button stations etc. All HVAC control components such as flow switches, pressure switches, temperature/humidity sensors, thermostats etc., are to be wired to control panel and other associated components using armored cable on galvanized cable rack/tray. Specification for cables, cable trays, conduits, isolators etc shall conform to electrical specifications. Starters All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L./Star Delta starters having the following facilities:

1. To disconnect the supply in the event of power failure or voltage drop. 2. To protect the motor from overload in each phase. 3. Start/stop push button. 4. ON/OFF/TRIP indicating lamp. 5. Single phase preventer

All three-phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase as well asunder voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts.

Earthing All motors and starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all metal parts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass of the earth.

Testing All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for loose connections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition, functional checks shall be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and sequencing is in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification. The Engineer shall be given 7 days written notice of such tests so that he may attend if he so desires. With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 Kv for one minute, across the following points:

1. Phase to phase 2. Phase to neutral 3. Phase to earth 4. Neutral to earth

Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the





Engineer within fourteen days of the test.

Approval of Workmanship Standards The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer who shall carry out periodic inspection of completed work and work in progress. Any work not to the Engineer‟s satisfaction during such inspection shall be replaced to a standard satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the contract for the subsequent inspection.

Tags and Colour Coding All equipment shall be properly identified by means of permanent tags. All components shall be labeled in the control panel as per the approved drawings. All wires shall be color coded in accordance with the Electrical regulations of the KAHRAMAA. Labeling system shall be agreed with the Engineer.

Wiring Regulations All installation shall comply with the Electrical regulations of KAHRAMAA.

CONTROL SYSTEM The air conditioning installation shall be capable of complete automatic operation. Necessary operational and safety controls shall be provided for pumps, air handling units, FCUs, split AC units etc. Low voltage control system shall be preferred. The location of controls should permit easy access for calibration, adjustment and maintenance. Selector switches shall be provided for manual / automatic operation of A.C. plants. The A.C. Control Panel, Sequence Regulator Panel, Starter Panel etc. are to be located as indicated on the Electrical drawings and shall be suitable for operation at 50

0 C. ambient condition.

The contractor shall submit the control schematic diagrams indicating the signal line from all the control functions in sequential order, control wiring diagram and power wiring from control panel as a whole to the Engineer for his approval.

Chilled Water Pump Control Panels

The contractor shall supply and install the chilled water control panel to IP 55, wall mounted, front accessible made out of folded zinc coated steel sheet painted with two coats of approved stoved enamel paint, cubicle type with hinged door and control panel interlocking type main isolator. The panel shall comprise of but not limited to the following:





a. Main isolator with door interlock, fuses and busbar. b. Three Nos. indicating lamps for main supply – RED/YELLOW/BLUE c. Fuse switches, MCB‟s for power distribution and miscellaneous supplies. d. Star/Delta starters for pumps. e. Start / Stop Push buttons complete with thermal over load, magnetic short

circuit & single phase preventing devices and indication lamps – ON/OFF/TRIP for each starter – RED/GREEN/AMBER.

f. Selector switch so that any set of the pumps can be selected for operation at a time.

g. Supply to the packaged pressurization unit control panel. h. Terminal for outgoing cables and control wiring. i. Spare terminals. j. Start/Stop/Trip status to BMS. k. Trip alarm

The Air conditioning Contractor is to co-ordinate with the Electrical Contractor for the sizes of starters, cable sizes, protection fuses etc. Programmable logic controller specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications from reputed manufacturers shall be supplied. The features shall be approved by the Consultant. The adjustable frequency drive shall be microprocessor controlled type from reputed manufacturer. The features shall be approved by the Consultant. Each AFD shall be provided with bypass facility consisting of main power disconnect, interlocks, over load relay etc shall be included. A drive – off – bypass switch shall also provided in the AFD enclosure.

TFAHU Control Panels (each TFAHU) The Contractor shall supply and install the TFAHU control panel to IP 55, wall mounted, front accessible made out of folded zinc coated steel sheet painted with two coats of approved stove enamel paint. The panel shall comprise of but not limited to the following:

a. Main isolator with door interlock, fuses and busbars. b. Main power ON – RED indication c. DOL/Star delta starter for AHU with START/STOP buttons complete with

thermal overload, magnetic short circuit and single phase protecting devices.

d. ON/OFF/TRIP for each starter – RED/GREEN/AMBER e. Supply to modulating valves of TFAHU through HRC fuses or MCB. f. Step down transformer for controls and motorized damper (240 V to 24

V). g. Terminal for incoming and outgoing feeders. h. Controls for indication as detailed elsewhere. i. Control wiring terminal. j. Spare terminal. k. Start/Stop/Trip status to BMS





l. Trip Alarm

The Air conditioning Contractor is to co-ordinate with the Electrical Contractor for the sizes of starters, cable sizes, protection fuses etc.

Air Handling Unit Controls

i. A motorized tthree way modulating type divertor valve, shall be installed in the chilled water return line adjacent to the farther TFAHU as indicated on the drawings.

ii. The divertor control valve shall regulate flow of chilled water in response to

signals from DDC controller via sensor as shown on the drawing. iii. Starting and stopping of treated fresh air handling units shall be carried out from

the starter installed in the TFAHU electrical control panel as indicated on the tender drawings or from remote via DDC controller in the respective areas. Means of local isolation shall be provided to conform to I.E.E. regulations, latest edition.

iv. The setpoints shall be suitable to be adjusted by means of the portable

operator‟s terminal/BMS. The operator terminal shall be connected to the service socket in each panel or to the bus adapter of operator terminal in a remote place. The temperature values shall be readable from the operator terminal as well.

Fan Coil Unit Controls

i. A motorised two-way modulating type divertor valve shall be installed in the water return line from each fan coil unit.

ii. The divertor control valve shall regulate flow of chilled water in response to

signals from modulating thermostat mounted in the conditioned space. iii. OFF-HI-MED-LOW switch for operation of FCU shall be installed in the

conditioned space.

Basement Car Park Ventilation Fans Main extract fans and the set of jet fans will be controlled by a factory provided control panel. All the fans shall be two speed types.

Interlock with Fire alarm system All starting devices shall be interlocked and shall be shut off on receiving signal from Fire alarm system. A comprehensive schematic diagram shall be submitted for Consultant‟s approval.





Control Valves All chilled water control valves shall be 2 way modulating as necessary to achieve the design conditions ,unless otherwise stated. The valves and actuators shall be sized by the controls specialist for the specified duties and shall have a close-off rating properly related to the water system concerned. All valves shall be factory rated to withstand the specified test pressure of the system. Valves 50 mm. and smaller shall be bronze screwed type and valves 65 mm. to 150 mm. shall be cast iron flanged. Valves shall have stainless steel stems and a spring loaded teflon packing. 3 way valves shall be provided for remotely located FAHU so as to maintain chilled water circulation.

Temperature Sensors Duct mounted temperature sensors shall have suitable ranges on either sides of set point. Sensors shall be of corrosion resistant construction, suitable for mounting on a vibrating surface. The sensors shall be provided with suitable fixing arrangement. Averaging element sensors shall be provided when the duct area exceed 0.4 m2 or when installed within air handling equipment. Pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be insertion type complete with a stainless steel pocket/immersion tube for pipe entry. For electronic control systems the measuring element shall be either incorporated into a copper capillary for averaging type or enclosed in a stainless steel immersion housing or tubular probe. The accuracy shall be + 0.5

0 C.

All sensors shall be of non-adjustable construction calibrated at the manufacturer‟s works and be provided complete with the manufacturer‟s mounting brackets/flanges etc.

Controllers Controllers shall be of the solid state, „plug-in‟ type and have corrosion resistant construction for high humidity service. Each controller module shall have the facility for calibrated adjustment of all control parameters, i.e. set point, proportional band, integral action, slope etc., on the front plate. All adjustments shall be of the direct reading type and shall be non-interactive, e.g. adjustment of set point shall not affect the proportional band setting. Electronic controllers shall be proportional, proportional-integral, or proportional integral-derivative as specified or implied in the control descriptions. Controllers shall be designed and constructed for equipment room use and shall not





be affected by ambient temperature and humidity. Where dual input controllers are required, the authority of the compensating sensor shall be adjustable only at the end.

22.2.30 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

Spare Parts and Tools The contractor shall remit to the Engineer as part of this Contract any special tool supplied by the manufacturer as standard part of his equipment The contractor shall submit a recommended list of priced spare parts sufficient for two years operations as a separate list. This price should not be added to the Contract amount.

At least 8 (eight) weeks prior to the practical completion, the Contractor shall submit a comprehensive schedule of spare parts and special tools, required for maintenance. State against each item the recommended quantity and unit price.

Spare Air Filters The Air Conditioning contractor shall allow in his contract for supplying a full set of spare filters used throughout the A/C plants and shall deliver them to the Engineer upon completion of his works.

22.2.31 WARRANTY

The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical completion of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor.

All the compressors shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years from the date of practical completion. The Contractor shall also guarantee the performance and efficiency of the plant and equipment as per the specifications for a similar period of 400 days after the practical completion and if the services of Contractor‟s personnel are requisitioned during this period, such shall be made available free of cost to the Client. If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to do so by another agency at the Contractor‟s entire risk and expense without prejudice to any rights of the Client.





22.2.32 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA

The technical schedules listed hereunder must be filled in and signed by the bidder and they must be attached with the offer with complete engineering catalogues for every piece of equipment to enable the Engineer to evaluate each offer. Offers submitted without such information will not be acceptable.

Chilled Water Pumps Reference :………………………………………………………….. Serving :………………………………………………………….. Type :………………………………………………………….. Quantity :………………………………………………………….. Manufacturer :………………………………………………………….. Model Number :………………………………………………………….. Capacity of each, USGPM :………………………………………………………….. Head, feet :………………………………………………………….. Speed, rpm :………………………………………………………….. Power supply :………………………………………………………….. B.H.P. :………………………………………………………….. Motor Type/H.P./Make :………………………………………………………….. Class of Insulation :………………………………………………………….. Nett Weight-each pumpset :………………………………………………………….. Overall dimension of :………………………………………………………….. foundations Components Flexible coupling :………………………………………………………….. C.I. base plate :………………………………………………………….. Rubber isolators :………………………………………………………….. Pressure gauges :………………………………………………………….. Flexible connections :………………………………………………………….. Mechanical seal :…………………………………………………………..





Controls a. Motorised valve Make/Model :………………………………………………………….. Type/Size :………………………………………………………….. Power Supply :………………………………………………………….. Power Consumption :………………………………………………………….. b. Temperature Controls Make/Model :………………………………………………………….. Type :………………………………………………………….. Temperature range :………………………………………………………….. Power supply :…………………………………………………………..

Water Pressurization Unit Flexible coupling :………………………………………………………….. C.I. base plate :………………………………………………………….. Rubber isolators :………………………………………………………….. Pressure gauges :…………………………………………………………..

Air Handling Units Reference :………………………………………………………….. Location :………………………………………………………….. Make/Model :………………………………………………………….. Type :………………………………………………………….. Total cfm :………………………………………………………….. Fresh Air cfm :………………………………………………………….. Casing Construction :………………………………………………………….. Overall Dimension :…………………………………………………………..





Cooling Coil Total Cooling Capacity :…………………………………………………………..

Sensible Cooling :………………………………………………………….. Capacity Coil Face Velocity :………………………………………………………….. Coil rows/deep/fins per inch :………………………………………………………….. Water temperature In/Out :………………………………………………………….. Water Flow, USGPM :………………………………………………………….. Air on Coil, DB/WB

0 F :…………………………………………………………..

Air off Coil, DB/WB

0 F :…………………………………………………………..

Pressure drop through :………………………………………………………….. Coil in W.G. 1/3 Octave band Souind data through :…………………………………………………………. Casing panel Fans Type / Make :………………………………………………………….. Total Static Pressure :………………………………………………………….. B.H.P. :………………………………………………………….. Motor H.P./ Make :………………………………………………………….. Class of Insulation :………………………………………………………….. Miscellaneous Information Type of filters and thickness :………………………………………………………….. Type of Insulation and :………………………………………………………….. density Controls provided :…………………………………………………………..





Filters Fresh Air Filters Make :………………………………………………………….. Type/Model :………………………………………………………….. Frame :………………………………………………………….. Number of Cells :………………………………………………………….. Cell Dimensions :………………………………………………………….. Efficiency Face Velocity (fpm) :………………………………………………………….. Pressure drop inch of :………………………………………………………….. Water

Fan Coil Unit Reference :………………………………………………………….. Make :………………………………………………………….. Type/Model :………………………………………………………….. Location :………………………………………………………….. Sensible Cooling :………………………………………………………….. Capacity (Each) Total Cooling Cap. (Each) :………………………………………………………….. Entering Air Temp. Db/Wb :………………………………………………………….. Air Quantity :………………………………………………………….. Water Temp. Entering Coil :………………………………………………………….. Water Temp. Leaving Coil :………………………………………………………….. No. of rows deep :………………………………………………………….. No. of fins per 25.4mm. :………………………………………………………….. Water Flow rate :………………………………………………………….. Water Pressure drop :…………………………………………………………..





Through coil Power supply :………………………………………………………….. Motor kW / Make :………………………………………………………….. Overall dimensions :………………………………………………………….. Electric Heaters Cap. :………………………………………………………….. Insulation Manufacturer :………………………………………………………….. Type :………………………………………………………….. Density :………………………………………………………….. Finish :…………………………………………………………..

Ventilation/Exhaust Fans Reference :………………………………………………………….. Location :………………………………………………………….. Service :………………………………………………………….. Type :………………………………………………………….. Make :………………………………………………………….. Model :………………………………………………………….. Size :………………………………………………………….. CFM :………………………………………………………….. Static Pressure :………………………………………………………….. Motor Rating / Make :…………………………………………………………..





22.2.33 COMMISIONING SHEETS

COMMISSIONING SHEET OF CHLLED WATER PUMP SET Project : Pump Operating Results : Date : Sheet No. Pump Reference and Make : Pump Model No. : Designed Measured Flow rate : Pump Inlet Pressure : Pump Outlet Pressure : Pump Working Head MTS : Pump RPM : Motor Horse Power : Motor Running Current : Starter Overload Setting : Voltage : Water Temperature : Certified by ………………………..





COMMISSIONING SHEET OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

Project : AHU Precommissioning Checks: Date : Sheet No. of System Reference : Installation Complete : System Clean and Unobstructed : Inspection Covers Fitted : Balancing Dampers Open : Grilles/Diffusers Open : Fire Damper/Automatic Damper Operational : Chilled Water Lines Insulated : Condesate Drain Line Completed With „U‟ trap with Proper level : Air Components Aligned : Pulley Alignment/Belt Tension : Motor/Fan Bearing Lubricated : Filter in Position and Cleaned : Flexible Connections : Starter Overload Adequate for Load : Control Circuit Operational : Permanent Electrical Supply Available: Certified by …………………….





COMMISSIONING SHEET OF AIR HANDLING UNITS (FAN AND COIL)

Project : Results Date : Sheet No. of Location : System/Equip. Ref. : Item Identification Design Measurement Fan Make and Model No. : Fan Type : Motor Pulley Size : Fan RPM : Motor Voltage, Phase, Hz. : Fan Belt Nos., Size : Motor Power :

Motor Full Load Current : Motor Running Current : Starter Type : Starter O.L. Sliting : Air Volume Flow Rate : Fan Static Pressure : Air Temperature : Filter Nos., Size : Motorised Valve Operation : OK/Not OK Thermostat Operation : OK/Not OK Condensate Drainage : OK/Not OK Smoke Detector Operation : OK/Not OK





Filter Operation : OK/Not OK (For automatic filters) Chilled Water In : Temperature

0F

Pressure Psing Chilled Water Out : Temperature

0F

Pressure Psing Air In Temperature :

0F.DB

0F.WB

Air Out Temperature :

0F.DB

0F.WB

Noise level at 1.0m :

Certified by …………………….





COMMISSIONING SHEET OF FAN AND COIL Project : Results Date : Sheet No. of Location : System/Equip. Ref. : Item Identification Design Measurement Fan Make and Model No. : Fan Type : Fan RPM : Motor Voltage, Phase, Hz. : Fan Belt Nos., Size : Motor Power : Motor Full Load Current : Motor Running Current : Starter Type : Starter O.L. Sliting : Air Volume Flow Rate : Fan Static Pressure : Air Temperature : Filter Nos., Size : Motorised Valve Operation : OK/Not OK Thermostat Operation : OK/Not OK Condensate Drainage : OK/Not OK





Filter Operation : OK/Not OK (For Automatic filters) Chilled Water In : Temperature

0F

Pressure Psig Chilled Water Out : Temperature

0F

Pressure Psig Air In Temperature :

0F.DB

0F.WB

Air Out Temperature :

0F.DB

0F.WB

Noise level at 1.0m : Certified by ………………...





SPLIT A/C UNIT

Unit ref :

Manufacturer :

Name plate details :

Compressor

Model # -------------

Serial # ------------- Motor # ------------- Rated amps ------------- Running amps ------------- Suction pressure ------------- Discharge pressure --------------

Oil pressure --------------

Condenser fan motor

Model #

Serial # Make Frame Quantity Volt Kw Rated amps Running amps Condenser air in, c Condenser air out ,c





Indoor fan motor

Model # Serial # Make Frame

Qty. Volt Kw Rated amps Running amps Return air, c Supply air ,c

Other items

Thermostat operation : satisfactory / not satisfactory Condensate drainage : satisfactory / not satisfactory

Recorded space temp ,c / Relative humidity, %

Time Space designation ambient temp( db/wb),c space temp,c/

RH ,%

----------------------------- ------------------------------ ------------ ------------ ------ ----------------------- ----------------------------- ------------ ----------- ------ ----------------------- ------------------------------ ------------ -----------





IDU air filter

make

type

size

qty.

condenser coil anti corrosive coating : satisfactory / not satisfactory

Anti vibration mounting : satisfactory / not satisfactory

Noise level , NC : satisfactory / not satisfactory





EXHAUST FANS

Ref : Type: Make / model : Motor no.1 ,amps Motor no.2, amps Supply voltage Motor no.1 ,rpm

Motor no.2,rpm Blower no.1,rpm Blower no.2,rpm Air volume. L/s Auto change over panel : satisfactory / not satisfactory





DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET Project System Date Sheet No. of Reference Design Vol. Duct Size Duct Area Velocity m

3/s mm m

2 m/s

Velocity Profile (Taken ……………….. Airflow) Units ………………………

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A ______________________________________________________________ B ______________________________________________________________ C______________________________________________________________ D ______________________________________________________________ E ______________________________________________________________ F ______________________________________________________________ G ______________________________________________________________ H ______________________________________________________________ I ______________________________________________________________ J ______________________________________________________________ K ______________________________________________________________ Correction Factor of Meter Total of Velocities Average Velocity Test Volume Design Static Pressure Remarks __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Certified by …………………….





DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET (FRESH AIR) Project System Date Sheet No. of Reference Design Vol. Duct Size Duct Area Velocity m

3/s mm m

2 m/s

Velocity Profile (Taken ……………….. Airflow) Units ………………………

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A ______________________________________________________________ B ______________________________________________________________ C______________________________________________________________ D ______________________________________________________________ E ______________________________________________________________ F ______________________________________________________________ G ______________________________________________________________ H ______________________________________________________________ I ______________________________________________________________ J ______________________________________________________________ K ______________________________________________________________ Correction Factor of Meter Total of Velocities Average Velocity Test Volume Design Static Pressure Remarks __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Certified by …………………….





GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS Project System Reference Date Sheet No.of Terminal Location Design Measured Comments No. Free Area Volume Velocity Volume % of m

2 m

3/s m

2 m

3/s Design

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Correction Factor of Meter __________________________________________________________________ Remarks __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Certified by …………………….





22.2.34 SCHEDULES AND EXPLANATORY NOTES

i. The schedules have been prepared for the purpose of facilitating selection of

equipment and evaluating the tenders. The reference given against each item in the schedules refer to the appropriate reference in the drawings.

ii. Technical details of the equipment offered by the Contractor should be furnished,

as asked for in the technical schedules enclosed. iii. The external static pressure for fans, where given are approximate and the

Contractor will be required to supply equipment to handle the requirements of his installation without extra cost to the contract.

iv. Should the Contractor wish to amplify any information to be provided, this should

be set out on separate sheets and submitted with his tender together with explanatory manufacturer‟s catalogues, curves and selection charts.

v. If the equipment selected by the tenderer should require any special alteration or

addition to the architectural or structural work, he must list the requirements separately.





22.2.35 LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS


General

AC G-HANZS DOHA WLL (Client Nominated Vendor)

1. Chilled Water Pumping System ITT USA PATTERSON USA ARRORA USA 2. Air Handling Units FLAKTWOODS SWEDEN TRANE USA CARRIER USA EUROCLIMA AUSTRIA VTS CLIMA YORK USA 3. Fan Coil Units CARRIER USA YORK USA TRANE USA VTS CLIMA 4. Window A/C Unit / Split A/C Unit CARRIER THAILAND TRANE THAILAND YORK THAILAND 5. Exhaust Fans GREEN HECK USA FLAKT WOODS UK ELTA UK XPELAIR UK ACME USA 6. G.I. Sheets JAPAN SOUTH AFRICA EUROPE 11. Silencers KMC QATAR ATAI KSA SAFID KSA EURO REGISTER UAE 12. Fire Damper ACTION AIR UK ATAI KSA SAFID KSA EURO REGISTER UAE ALDES FRANCE 13. Volume Control Dampers KMC QATAR ATAI KSA





SAFID KSA EURO REGISTER UAE 14. Duct & Pipe Supports GRINELL USA SIKLA GERMANY HELTI GERMANY 15. Valves NEWMAN HATTERSELY UK HOLMES UK CRANE UK 16. Strainers MUELLER STEAM NEWMAN HATTERSELY UK CRANE UK 17. Chilled Water Pipes & Fittings NIPPON STEEL BRITISH STEEL SUMITOMO JAPAN 18. Automatic Air Vent ARMSTRONG FLAMCO SPIRAXSARCO 19. Insultions (Dut & Pipe) AFICO KSA KIMMCO KUWAIT 20. Air Terminales KMC DOHA EUROREGISTER BELGIUM CIACO KUWAIT EURO REGISTER UAE 21. Instruments & Gauges TAYLOR JOHNSON WEISS 22. Vibration Isolators MASON USA AMBERBOOTH USA KINETICS USA 23. Flexible Joints MASON USA HATTERSELY UK KINFLEX 24. Rubber Foam Insulation RUBATEX USA ARMAFLEX UK GULF-O-FLEX UAE SUPERLON USA

25. Duct Flexible Connections DURODYNE USA CONTRACT COMPONENTS LTD. UK 26. Copper Pipes & Fittings YORKSHIRE UK





WEDNESBURY UK MUELLERBRASS USA 27. Flexible Duct ATAI THERMAFLEX SUPAFLEX 28. Adhesive FOSTER USA MIRACLE USA IDENDEN UK 29. Vapour Barriere FOSTER USA MIRACLE USA IDENDEN UK 30. Building Management System ASI-CONTROLS USA SIEMENS HONEYWELL JOHNSON CONTROL 31. Stair Case Pressurization Fans PSB GERMANY

COLT UK NOVENCO UK SYSTEM AIR GERMANY ELTA UK ALDES FRANCE

31. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Boxes EURO REGISTER UAE

ALDES FRANCE TROX UK

32. Heat Exchangers ALFA LAVAL SWEDEN

SECTION – 23

FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION



AEB-740-08-REV.00 S-23-1/45 FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

23.1.00 FIRE FIGHTING GENERAL 23.1.01 Scope of Works 23.1.02 Design Requirements 23.1.03 Hydraulically Designed Sprinkler Systems 23.1.04 Regulatory Agencies 23.1.05 Submittals 23.1.06 Coordination

23.2.00 PRODUCTS 23.2.01 General 23.2.02 Piping Products 23.2.03 Pipe Supports and Sleeves 23.2.04 General Purpose Valves 23.2.05 Landing Valves 23.2.06 Supervisory Devices 23.2.07 System Accessories 23.2.08 Fire Department Connections 23.2.09 Sprinklers and Accessories 23.2.10 Stock of Spare Sprinklers 23.2.11 Cabinets 23.2.12 Zone Control Valves 23.2.13 Locks 23.2.14 Monitored Isolation Valve 23.2.15 Portable Fire Extinguishers 23.2.16 Fire Pumps




23.2.17 NOVEC 1230 Fire Suppression System 23.2.18 Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System

23.3.00 EXECUTION 23.3.01 Preparation 23.3.02 Installation 23.3.03 Field Quality Control 23.3.04 Cleaning and Flushing 23.3.05 Pre-Commissioning Works 23.3.06 Testing

23.3.07 Painting

23.3.08 Labels and Identification 23.3.09 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers




FIRE FIGHTING AND SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS

23.1.00 GENERAL

Work covered under this section includes furnishing of material, labor, and equipment to install fire protection system as indicated on drawings and specified herein. Include incidental work necessary to make fire protection system complete, satisfactory, and ready for operation. A specialist Contractor shall execute the complete scope of work under this contract and the contractor shall be in the approved list of Qatar civil defense. The Scheme and Selection of equipment and components as shown on the drawings are indicative, all the design parameters are to be cross verified and sized accordingly on a need and requirement basis, by the Specialist Contractor assigned and nominated by the Main Contractor to carryout the job. The Profile of the Specialist Contractor need to be submitted to the Consultant – in charge for the project, prior to the nomination by the Main Contractor, and the Consultant‟s Decision will be final and binding on the Main Contractor.

23.1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

The Fire Fighting Services include, but not limited to the following: a) Fire Fighting Pumps b) Hose reel cabinets c) Sprinkler System d) Fire department connections e) Piping products f) Pipe supports g) Pipe sleeves i) General purpose valves j) Standpipe and fire hose valves k) Fire extinguishers l) Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System m) Supervisory devices n) System accessories. It shall be executed as shown on the drawings, and all the equipment and components shall be approved by the Fire Department of State of Qatar and any other statutory bodies as required and confirm to the NFPA Standards.

23.1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

System requirements and pipe sizes shall be determined using hydraulic calculations prepared in accordance with NFPA Standards.




System requirements to comply with applicable NFPA Standards (as referenced by the authority having jurisdiction).

23.1.03 HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNED SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Contractor to prepare and be responsible for final hydraulic calculations including accuracy of water supply information. Total demand including hose streams to be calculated with 90% of the available water supply pressure (i.e.; 10% of the pressure reserved as a safety factor). Methods used and information given on hydraulic calculations to meet requirements of NFPA 13 with following exceptions:

a. Where pipe sizes are indicated on plans, these sizes may exceed minimum code

requirements and shall be sized as indicated. Where pipe routes and/or locations are indicated on plans, locations are suggested for coordination purposes. Other locations/routes are acceptable, coordinate with other trades.

b. Calculations of the most hydraulically remote area shall be based on actual floor area covered and the design density (gpm/sq. ft.) as indicated in NFPA 13. The remote area shall be equal to or larger than the area stated in the design density and shall include all sprinkler heads within that area.

c. Floor area covered by sprinkler shall be determined by using distance between

sprinkler and wall, or half distance between sprinklers, whichever is greater. Distance to be determined in two directions, parallel with branch line and perpendicular to branch line. Multiply longest parallel distance by longest perpendicular distance. Multiply resultant by four to determine area covered by sprinkler.

d. The hydraulic calculations shall be performed using a computer software that

reads the inputs such as pipe sizes, length, etc directly from the drawings and uses Hazen-Williams formula for friction loss calculations.

23.1.04 REGULATORY AGENCIES

Installation shall comply with following: 1. Building and fire safety codes of the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Owner's insurance carrier or Insurance Services Office. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards (as referenced by the

authority having jurisdiction and Owner's insurance carrier). 4. Underwriters‟ Laboratories (UL). 5. Design documents.




23.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General

Comply with Tender Invitation documents. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together.

B. Product Data Manufacturer‟s specifications and technical data including performance, construction, and fabrication. Submit product data for each manufactured component.

C. Shop Drawings Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated. 1. Submit shop drawings for each complete system or assembly of shop-fabricated,

field-fabricated, and manufactured components. 2. Special requirements:

a. Unless otherwise noted, prepare shop drawings in accordance with requirements for "Working Plans" as described in NFPA Standard 13.

b. Certify Shop Drawings by a Professional Engineer registered and currently licensed to practice in the United Arab Emirates.

c. Draw floor plans at 1:100 scale or greater. Submit reproducible copies of all drawings.

d. Cloud and key with date to indicate areas that have been changed on all re-submittals.

e. Calculations for Hydraulically Designed Systems: 1) Calculations are required for hydraulically designed fire protection

systems. 2) Unless otherwise noted, prepare calculations in accordance with

requirements of "Hydraulic Calculations Procedures" as described in NFPA Standard 13.

3) Include calculations with submission of Shop Drawings.

D. Quality Control Field Quality Control submittals as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

a. Document results of test required by authority having jurisdiction, the Owner's insurance carrier, and listed NFPA Standards.




b. Document test results on standard NFPA forms or a form acceptable to the Architect / Engineer.

E. Submittal Sequence 1. First, submit reproducible copies of each shop drawing to Architect/Engineer

along with product data and hydraulic calculations.

a. All submittals are to be complete. b. All shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and product data shall be included

in one submittal. c. Identify all material.

2. Second, submit two sets of the revised shop drawings to the Owner who will forward one copy to their insurance carrier for review.

a. Send a copy of transmittal to Architect/Engineer. b. Make changes to shop drawings after these reviews. c. Circle changes to indicate areas that have been changed.

3. Submit the final shop drawings with approvals from the approved agencies to the Architect/Engineer.

F. Alternative Materials

Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule of Manufacturer‟s. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid reasons, with official written apologies from manufacturers for not being able to supply the requested materials. Only in such cases, the Consultant will consider the alternatives, before the tender is accepted and the Consultant‟s decision will be final regarding the matter. In case the alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance of the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the client‟s convenience, but at the Contractor‟s expenses etc.

23.1.06 COORDINATION

Coordination with Construction Documents: 1. Refer to drawings for smoke and fire ratings of walls and floors. 2. Refer to drawings for exact location and mounting height of cabinets housing fire

department valves and hoses.




3. If shown, sprinklers to be located as noted on architectural and mechanical plans.

4. Architect/Engineer, after reviewing installation, reserves the right to direct the contractor to make minor adjustments in head locations at no additional cost to the Owner.




23.2.00 PRODUCTS

23.2.01 GENERAL

List products by name and manufacturer as listed in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval Guide and conform to requirements contained in Contract Documents. Material and equipment to be new and currently listed or approved. Where more than one of any specific item is required, items to be of same type and manufacturer. Products to be UL listed, and preferred FM approved as well.

23.02.02 PIPING PRODUCTS

General Only pipe and fitting materials listed in this specification shall be acceptable for use. Extra lightweight steel, schedule 10 steel, and associated fittings are not acceptable.

Pipe All above ground pipe works shall be Galvanized ERW to schedule 40: ASTM A53 – Grade B and underground pipes shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Class PE 100 as specified hereunder.

Threaded Fittings

Threaded fittings shall be Malleable iron, Class 150 pound: comply with ANSI

B16.3/B1.14. Pipe Size minimum Working Pressure

¼” through 1” 2000 psi 1 1/4" through 2" 1500 psi 2-1/2" through 3" 1000 psi 4" and 6" 800 psi

Flanges and Flanged Fittings

a. Flanges and Flanged fittings to ASTM/ANSI B 16.5 – 1996 Class 300 . b. Flange gaskets: 1/16 inch thick. c. Bolts and nuts: Bolt length to allow not less than 1/8 inch exposed thread

beyond nut. d. Flange gaskets: comply with ANSI B16.24.




e. Fastener bolts: comply with ANSI B18.2.1. f. Fastener nuts: comply with ANSI B18.2.2.

Grooved Fittings

1. Grooved fittings shall be cast from ductile iron to ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12 in

hot dipped galvanized. 2. Grooved fittings shall be suitable to rolled grooved pipe. 2. Pressure rating of fittings to exceed twice the maximum system working

pressure. 3. Fittings to be of same manufacturer as couplings

23.2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES

Design: Provide in this section in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as referenced by the authority having jurisdiction).

23.2.04 GENERAL PURPOSE VALVES

All valves shall be marked with the manufacturer‟s name and the appropriate British or American standard or shall fully comply with NFPA standards. All valves to be FM approved and/or UL listed.

A. Indicating Control Valve (O S & Y Gate Valve) 1. Rising indicating stem. 2. 1 inch through 2 inches: screwed ends. 3. 2-1/2 inch through 12 inches: flanged ends. O.S & Y gate valves shall be provided to each branch pipe and, at the locations where the flow is required, either fully open or fully closed, as indicated on the tender drawings or as directed by the Engineer in order to isolate that part of the system in the event of leaks and maintenance, which may arise at the time of commissioning and pressure testing. All main sprinkler system isolating valves shall be listed indicating valves and shall be connected with the tamper switches. All valves controlling water supplies to the sprinkler system including floor control valves shall be accessible to the authorized persons during emergency. Gate valves shall be made of cast iron and tested to 300-psi hydraulic pressure. Valves of 50 mm dia and below shall be screwed ends and provided with unions on both sides. Valves more than 50 mm dia shall be with flanged ends. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with NFPA standards.




Valves used as drain valve and valves near jockey pump shall be standard gate valves. All other valves shall be UL listed, FM approved O.S & Y gate valves.

B. Indicating Control Valve (Butterfly Valve) 1. 2 inch through 12 inches: Ductile iron, lug, or wafer type body with stainless steel

stem and gear operator butterfly valve with a supervisory switch.

B. Globe and Ball Valve: Bronze body with screwed ends.

D. Check Valve

Bronze body with screwed ends. 1 inch through 2 inches. Listed check valves shall be provided in discharge line of each pump, fire department connection and at other locations as indicated in the drawing to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of cast iron and shall be UL-listed. Valves shall be swing pattern, metal-to-metal seat and tested to 300-psi hydraulic pressure.

E. Alarm Check Valves This shall be NFPA approved to be constructed and equipped to give clear positive audible alarm at any water flow through the sprinkler system equal to or greater than that from a single automatic sprinkler. It shall be suitable for vertical/ horizontal installations as per as the system requirement or as directed by the engineer and for the variable pressure of water supply. Alarm check valves shall be of flanged, designed to withstand up to working pressure of 300 psi. It shall have cast iron body and a clapper hinge, bronze clapper assembly, pilot valve assembly and other moving parts.

Alarm check valves shall be complete with retarding chamber 2” main drain valve, up stream and downstream pressure gauge cocks, alarm control and test valves, pressure operated alarm switch to actuate a bell, horn, or siren. Water motor and alarm gong shall be located preferably outside the building at a location to engineer‟s approval.

F. Rubber Face Check Valve: Swing type with flanged ends. 2-1/2 inches through 12 inches.

23.2.05 LANDING VALVES

Landing valves shall be of acceptable to the Fire Brigade use inside buildings. This device shall have 65mm inlet diameter bore fitted with 65 mm. instantaneous female




coupling conforming to BS 336 and a blank cap secured by a suitable length of chain. The product should have at least been certified by an independent Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories & Accredited Certification Body such as LPCB approval/ BSI KITE mark approval or UL listed/FM Approved. The valve shall be of brass / Gunmetal construction with approved finish. If the landing valve is UL listed then the outlet coupling must be quick instantaneous with local fire services. The installation of the coupling should be done by an authorized installer. Landing valves shall be installed as indicated inside the cabinet in the drawing at a height above floor level between 750 mm and 1100 mm. The outlet shall be installed to give clearances of not less than 150 mm on both sides and below the valve and not less than 200 mm clearance above the hand wheel.

23.2.06 SUPERVISORY DEVICES

A. Supervisory (Tamper) Switches

Design Requirements: a. Switches to indicate position of control valve. b. Rated for 120 VAC - 24 VDC. c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.

B. Water Flow Switches

1. Paddle type for pipe sizes 1-1/4 inches through 2 inches:

a. Rated for 175 psi working pressure. b. Two sets 120 VAC - 24 VDC form C contacts. c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.

2. Paddle Type: For pipe sizes 2 inches through 8 inches, with 0 - 70 second adjustable pneumatic retard. a. Rated for 175 psi working pressure. b. Two sets 120 VAC - 24 VDC form C contacts. c. Compatible for use with fire alarm system.

23.2.07 SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Test and Drain Connection

1. Manufactured combination test, drain, and sight glass fitting. 2. 175 psi working pressure. 3. 1/4 inch NPT gauge fitting.




B. Pressure Gauges

3-1/2 inch dial marked in 5 pound increments. 1. 1/4 inch NPT. 2. 175 psi working pressure. Pressure gauges shall be provided on the discharge of the pumps and on wet pipe sprinkler system riser as shown on the drawing. Each gauge shall not be less than 100 mm dia in dial size and shall comprise of a corrosion resistant housing with glass window and brass trim. It shall have accuracy within +/-5% of the full-scale deflection when working at 50 degree C. each gauge shall be provided with a gauge cock. The pressure gauges shall be calibrated in psi or bars, or both. Each gauge shall have a range of 0 to 11/2 times the normal working pressure.

C. Automatic Ball Drips: 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT.

D. Insert Sight Glasses: 175 psi working pressure.

E. Downspout Nozzle (express drain outlet)

1. Wall mounted downspout nozzle. 2. Rough bronze finish. 3. Full line size. Terminate at and provide concrete splash block.

23.2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

Breeching Inlet Connection

The inlet breeching shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm flanged outlet and four 65 mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains. A non-return (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The coupling shall comply with BS 336. The inlet connections shall be of suitable type of local fire brigade department. The breaching shall be equipped with a 25 mm drain valve to drain the riser. Valves body shall be made of DI with polished chrome brass Inlet Valves and Brass/Bronze cap and chain.

Breeching Inlet Cabinet

The inlet breeching unit shall be housed in a steel flush box painted by polyester powder coated with wired glass glazed front panel as per BS 5041-5 standard and:

a. Conspicuously indicated by the words: “Wet Riser Inlet, Sprinkler Inlet, or Fire

Water Tank” in block letters on the inner face of the glass, depending on the project type.

b. Fastened only by means of a spring lock, which can also be operated from the inside without the aid of a key after the glass has been broken.

c. Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door cannot be opened and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.




23.2.10 SPRINKLERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General

1. Minimum sprinkler orifice size shall be 1/2 inch. 2. Sprinklers in non-public spaces such as mechanical/electrical equipment, and

storage rooms and sprinklers on exposed piping shall have brass finish unless noted otherwise.

3. Sprinklers and escutcheons in finished areas to have polished brass or white finish or finish as noted on plans.

3. Concealed sprinklers shall be installed with the cover plates with a finish matching with the interiors and to the approval of the architect.

4. Style, size, and temperature rating to be type specifically approved for such use. 5. Thermosensitive glass bulbs to be of all one color for a given temperature

classification. 6. Fusible link sprinkler shall not be acceptable unless the glass bulb sprinkles are

not available for a given application.

B. Upright Sprinklers

1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response. 2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response. 3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response. 4. Installation style: a. Exposed: No escutcheon

C. Pendent Sprinklers

1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response. 2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response. 3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response. 4. Installation style:

a. Exposed: No escutcheon.

D. Vertical Sidewall Sprinklers 1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response. 2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response. 3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response. 4. Normal or extended coverage type is acceptable. 5. Installation style:

a. Exposed: No escutcheon.

E. Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers 1. Thermosensitive glass-bulb or fusible solder/alloy standard response. 2. Thermosensitive glass-bulb quick response.




3. Fusible solder/alloy quick response. 4. Normal or extended coverage type is acceptable. 5. Fixed or field adjustable type is acceptable. 6. Installation style: a. Exposed: No escutcheon

F. Sprinkler Guards: Metal with red finish

G. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet: Wall mounted. Storage capacity of not less than minimum designated by NFPA 13.

H. Sprinkler Wrench: To match style and brand of sprinklers used Sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13. These shall be local Fire officer‟s approved, pendant glass bulb sprinklers rated for 79 degree C. for sprinklers mounted in non air conditioned areas and 68 degree C. for sprinklers mounted in air conditioned areas, and suitable for maximum ambient temperature of 50 degree C. sprinklers shall have k factor of 80 with 15 mm (1/2”) MSPT male inlets. Recessed type of sprinklers shall be installed in the false ceilings in order to make the surroundings decorative. There shall be a 2-piece design of the recessed enclosure and mounting plate allows installation of the sprinklers prior to the installation of the false ceiling. Both sprinklers and escutcheon plates shall have chrome finish. Toilet and pantry areas (AHU Plant room) shall be provided with side wall type sprinklers and shall have chrome finish. Samples to be submitted to the consultant for approval. Side sprinkler head to be installed at plant room of swimming pool.

23.2.11 STOCK OF SPARE SPRINKLERS

A stock of spare sprinklers shall be provided and stored in a cabinet installed at a suitable location in the basement. The number of spare sprinklers is to be in accordance with NFPA 13, 1994, clause no. 2-2.7 or 20 no. special sprinkler wrench shall be provided in the cabinet to be used for the removal and installation of sprinklers.

23.2.12 FIRE CABINETS

Fire Hose and Nozzle

Fire hose shall be of synthetic re-inforced rubber lined, 65 mm diameter and 30 m long equipped with brass chrome plated male coupling for the connection with the




landing valve, and female coupling for the connection 65 mm chrome plated adjustable diffuser nozzle. The fire hose shall be placed in the landing valve cabinet specified above, and shall have minimum working pressure of 15 Bar and bursting pressure of minimum 45 Bar. The Nozzle shall be Jet/Spray/Shut-off type.

Combination Landing Valve and Flat Hose and Nozzle Cabinets 1. Type: Single cabinet, surface or recessed mounted. 2. Cabinet: heavy gauge steel. 3. Door and Trim: Weather resistant, one piece, heavy gauge stainless steel.

a. Solid door labeled "Landing Valve" and "Fire Hose & Nozzle" with vertical black lettering 1-1/2" high.

FIRE HOSE REEL

Fire Hose Reel shall be installed where shown on the drawings.

The Fire Hose shall be automatic swinging recessed type. The Fire Hose Reel shall be installed where shown on the drawings. It shall be automatic swinging recessed type. Hose reels shall be in accordance with EN694 & EN671-1. The hose reel shall have a 30 meters long of 25 mm. internal diameter reinforced non-kickable rubber hose capable of withstanding a working pressure of 12 bars. The hose shall be wound on a fabricated steel drum with circular side plates. The hose reel shall turn on automatically when 1.5 to 1.8 meters of hose is withdrawn from the real/ drum. The hose reel shall be equipped with shut-off valve for connecting with pipework. The hose nozzle shall be chrome plated brass, JET/SPRAY/SHUT/ OFF nozzle, and shall have a 6 mm orifice. For using with Fire Hydrants, a synthetic rubber jacketed flat hose of 2 ½” dia shall be placed in the lower compartment of the cabinet. The flat hose shall have a male female instantaneous coupling to BS 336 suitable to the hydrant outlets. A 2 ½” jet/spray/shut-off Nozzle shall be provided along with the hose. The hose and the nozzle shall be listed and approved by the Qatar Civil Defence.

FIRE HOSE CABINET

The hose reel cabinet shall be either wall-mounted type or recessed type as indicated in the drawing. The cabinet shall be double compartment to accommodate fire hose reel in the upper compartment and other fire equipments including hose rack in the bottom compartment. The cabinet has to be made of minimum 1.2 mm thickness electro-galvanized steel sheet or stainless steel as per design requirement. The door can be different type like wood to steel finish, marble finish, MDF wooden




door, clear glass or wired glass. The stainless steel cabinets shall be polished finish type, the finish shall be decided upon the approval of the architect. The Double fire hose reel cabinet in different locations of the building shall have following specified fire equipments:

a. Automatic Fire Hose Reel b. 6 Kg Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher

23.2.13 ZONE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY

A zone control valve set shall be UL, FM Approved and it is to be provided for each sprinkler system zone as shown in the drawings, and shall comprise:

a. Butterfly valve shall have UL 1091. It shall be fitted with factory installed UL/FM approved tamper switch.

b. Flow alarm switch shall be UL listed and FM approved for the size of the pipe in which it is installed as a paddle type water flow indicator. Shall be fixed after the butterfly valve, on the main supply pipe and before any connection is taken off.

c. Inspector test and drain connections. d. Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures shall be fitted so

arranged that it can be easily removed for testing and checking without shutting down the water supply.

23.2.14 LOCKS

Locks shall be of type suitable for the Qatar Fire Department type key. If a non -brigade key is used on doorways to control valves, pump rooms, etc. a key shall be placed in a box with a brigade lock, adjacent to the door.

23.2.15 MONITORED ISOLATION VALVE

Supply and install monitoring switches on all sprinkler and hydrant system isolation valves, to register an alarm if the valves are moved from the fully open position. The switch, means of actuation and power supply shall be of approved manufacture and function.

23.2.16 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

ABC DRY POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

ABC Dry powder fire extinguishers (Multi purpose) shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN3 for portable extinguishers and shall be operated by means of a lever/squeeze handle operated valve provided with a safety pin which shall avoid inadvertent operation and the valve shall be capable for controlling partial discharge.




The cylinder shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The temperature shall range from -20° to 60° C. The extinguisher must have a plastic base (Only for portable). It must be coated externally by electrostatic polyester powder and oven baked for corrosion resistance. The cylinder shall be made special cold rolled steel sheet with Argon/CO2 automatic welding process and the suction tube shall be made of PVC material. All extinguishers shall carry instructions for operation and maintenance in English and Arabic. The Fire Extinguisher should have at least been certified by an independent Certification Organization from International Testing Laboratories/ Accredited Certification Bodies such as LPCB Approval, BSI KITE mark or UL listed/FM Approved. The capacity of the ABC dry Powder Fire Extinguisher shall be 6 KG and shall have a minimum fire rating of 34 A & 183 B as per BS EN3.

CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Clean agent fire extinguishers which shall contain „Halotron‟ agent and shall be of 15 lbs capacity (approximately 7 Kg) with a A;10-B;C rating. The discharge time shall be 13 seconds and the unit weight shall not be more than 11.75 kg. The „Halotron‟ fire extinguishers shall be UL-Listed and Local Civil Defense Approved. Where the clean agent fire extinguishers are located in electrical rooms they shall be complete with wall mounting brackets. Instructions shall be screen printed on the front door. The „Halotron‟ fire extinguishers shall be UL-listed.

FIRE BLANKETS

Provide fire blankets in Kitchens. Fire blanket shall be good quality with silicon coating provided on both sides. The size shall be 4 Feet x 6 feet. The Fire Blanket shall be LPCB approved as well as QCD approved.

23.2.17 FIRE PUMPS

A. GENERAL

Each system shall be design to insure the maximum pumping capacity even if one of the main pumps fails. The total supplying of all the necessary equipment for the firewater production (including pumps, engines driven, controllers, instrumentation, piping, valves, relief valves,) is included in the Contractor‟s scope of work. The supplying and installation of the day fuel tank of the engines is included in the Contractor‟s scope. The fuel tank (and all the fuel installation) shall be in accordance with NFPA standards. The air supply system of the diesel engines drive (automatic opening, venting panels,) is included in the Contractor‟s scope. The fire pumps, motor, engine and electric pump controllers and diesel pump controllers shall be UL listed or FM approved and suitable for sprinklered fire pumproom. An undertaking to this effect shall be submitted to the supervising engineer. Unit responsibility must be submitted from the manufacturer.




The engine driven fire pumps shall be in accordance with NPFA 20 (curves, starting, protection, etc.) The problem of surge (hammer effect) shall be taken into account in the design. A surge analysis shall be conducted and specific surge pressure control system shall be installed. Over-pressure system shall also be installed. The contractor shall provide fully certified hydraulic calculations for exact sizing of the pumps. The pumps shall be furnished with a full set of bench test certificates proving acceptability for the design points for this installation.

B. FIRE PUMPS

Fire pumps shall be UL or FM approved. Each pump shall have a capacity as shown in pump schedule, adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations. The pumping unit or package shall meet all requirements complying with NFPA 20 The pumps shall also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of not less than 65% of rated pressure. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 140% of the rated pressure at rated capacity.

C. FIRE PUMPS TYPE

Each fire pump shall be of horizontal split case centrifugal single stage or multistage construction, specifically labeled for fire service and capable of providing the required flow and pressure of the entire development. The pump shall be connected to the combined sprinkler/standpipe system. The suction supply for the fire pump shall be from a storage tank at a maximum pressure of 20 kPa and a minimum pressure of 0 kPa. The pump casing shall be cast iron and rated to withstand twice the working pressure.

D. PUMP CONSTRUCTION

The pump construction shall be cast iron casing, Bronze impeller, Stainless Steel shaft and gland packing. Note: The pump shall also deliver not less than 150 % of the rated capacity at a pressure of not less than 65 % of the rated pressure. The shut off pressure shall not exceed 140 % of the rated pressure at rated capacity.

E. PUMP DISCHARGE & HEAD

The fire protection contractor shall select a pump discharge and head to satisfy the fire protection system requirements resulting from the system hydraulic calculations and submit it to engineer‟s approval.




F. FIRE PUMP ACCESSORIES

The Fire and Sprinkler Pumps shall include the following accessories, as required by NFPA standards:

1. Flow Metering Device, shall be of the Venturi type. Pilot and annular devices will not be acceptable- One metering device shall be provided for each pump. or as shown on the drawings. Pipe water back to the storage tank.

2. Discharge tee. 3. Necessary isolating valves with supervisory switches. 4. Air release valve and fittings. 5. Discharge pressure gauge. 6. Main relief valve, pilot operated, enclosed relief valve overflow cone and

discharge tee with elbow (diesel drive only). 7. Main relief valve with discharge pipes to water tank. 8. Pump casing relief valve.

G. ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE

On installations where the Fire Pump is to be operated electrically, the electric motor shall be a horizontal, TEFC, UL listed, wound for 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz (cycle) current The motor shall be of such capacity that 115% of the full-load ampere rating shall not be exceeded at any condition of the pump load for UL Listed fire pump. With an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 deg. C, the motor shall be designed for a temperature rise not exceeding 60 deg. C when carrying fully rated-load continuously, and shall be capable of operating continuously with an overload of 15% without stress or excessive rise in temperature. The locked rotor current shall not exceed the values specified in NFPA Pamphlet No. 20. Bearings shall be anti-friction ball or roller type.

H. CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRIC DRIVE

The Fire Pump motor control shall be UL listed and FM Approved. It shall be completely assembled, wired and tested by the control manufacturer before shipment from factory, and shall be labeled 'Fire Pump Controller". The controller shall be located as practical and within the sight of the motor. The controller shall be so located or protected that it will not be injured by water escaping from the pump or connection. The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic star & delta type. and shall be in NEMA 4 enclosure complete with:

1. Disconnect switch - externally operable, quick-break type. 2. Circuit breaker - time delay type with trips in all phases set for 300% of the

motor full load current-




3. Motor starter, capable of being energized automatically through the pressure switch or manually by means of an externally operable handle. Motor starter shall be of the autotransformer type.

4. Pressure switch, of adjustable type. 5. Running period timer - set to keep motor in operation, when started

automatically, for a minimum period of one minute for each 10 HP motor rating, but not to exceed 7 minutes.

6. Pilot lamp - to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available. 7. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs. 8. Alarm relay - to energize an audible or visible alarm through an independent

source of power to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure. 9. Manual selection station - a two position station shall be provided on the

enclosure marked "Automatic" and Non-automatic". 10. Means shall be provided on the Controller to operate an alarm signal

continuously while the pump is running. 11. Provisions for power supply at 220 V for diesel pump battery chargers. 12. Control equipment shall meet all requirements of NFPA 20 & NFPA72.

I. DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE

Diesel engine shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. The engine shall be of the self-contained open type, mounted on a suitable base with the following minimum plus any others that may be necessary by NFPA-20 and local CD requirements: Dual battery set sized to NFPA -20 requirements with electrolyte shipped in separate containers, rack and cables.

a. Dual battery charger of proper type for batteries used (included in UL Listed / FM Approved controller). Power to battery charger shall be supplied from electric pump control panel. Wiring from control panel to battery chargers shall be by the contractor.

b. Electric starter with suitable generator and voltage regulator. c. Engine water pump. d. Heat exchanger cooling system. e. Water cooled or ceramic blanketed exhaust manifold. f. Lubricating oil pump and filter. g. Fuel injection system. h. Air cleaner. i. Proper instrument panel, complete with engine run warning light, water

temperature gauge, oil pressure gauge, voltmeter, totalizing type tachometer and hour meter.

j. Residential Grade Muffler. k. Cooling water line for the engine heat exchanger assembly. l. Flexible exhaust connectors.

All engine wiring for automatic operation shall terminate in a proper junction box to permit connection to control panel.




J. FUEL SYSTEM

A suitable fuel system for the diesel engine shall be furnished. It must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No.20 and shall include above surface day storage tank, flexible hose connectors, combination vent, flesh arrestor and fill cap.

K. SILENCER (MUFFLER)

The silencer shall be for turbo-charged engines, sized and selected to accommodate the allowable pressure drop of the engine. The silencer shall provide an average attenuation of 20-25 Db (a). The silencer shall be designed by HEAVY DUTY APPLICATIONS, with noise attenuation across the entire audible range of the frequency spectrum 63 through 8000 Hz. The silencer shall consist of a series of chambers connected by non-resonant tubes. The entire silencer shall be manufactured from plate steel and be of a completely welded design. The heavy plate ensure longer silencer life and better resistance to damage. The heavy plate shall prevent shell radiated noise. There shall be no spot welds or press fits used. Silencer inlet and discharge shall be flanged, manufactured from minimum 10mm thick plate and drilled to ANSI 70 kg. Silencers shall be either and in/end out and side in/end out configurations to suit installation. Provide 12mm drain connections. Prior to shipping, the silencers shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated in a high temperature 650ºC aluminum paint.

L. DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE CONTROLLER

Automatic Diesel Drive Engine Control Panel: The automatic engine control panel shall be UL/FM approved for fire pump service and meet the requirements of NFPA20 and shall be in NEMA 4 enclosure. The panel shall be of the floor mounted or wall mounted type, and enclosed in moisture and dust tight housing. A combination manual and automatic type controller with “Manual-Off-Automatic” selector shall be provided and a 240 volt single phase power failure relay or a pressure switch, which will ( when the system pressure drops ) activate all electric circuits to automatically start the engine. Should the engine fail to start after the required cranking cycles, the controller shall disconnect the starting circuit and activate an alarm system using lights and buzzer or bell. “Low oil pressure” and “high jacket-water temperature” shall also be indicated by a suitable alarm system. The engine shall not shut down if either of these conditions occurs during an operating cycle. The engine shall be started automatically by the Controller at least once a week, adjustable, and operate a minimum of 30 minutes (adjustable). An appropriate timing arrangement shall determine the day and hour of this test.




Pressure recorder (7 day drive ) shall be provided within the control panel. Fire Pump Controller shall be a diesel engine type, Controller approved and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for fire pump service, carry the labels of both UL/FM and meet the requirements of the NFPA20. The controller shall incorporate the following:

1. Each charger shall be completely independent of the other charger and

equipped with its own individual power transformer, rated for a maximum continuous charge current of 10A. The charger shall be of solid state electronic design, with semi-conductor type rectifier, and include the following supervisory and safety features :

a. Current limiting in every charging mode b. Over current shut-off c. Automatic selection of bulk or charge by sensing battery voltage d. Trickle charge limited to less than 500MA e. Reverse voltage shut-off f. Dead cell detection g. Over and under voltage alarm

In case of battery failure, the charger shall initiate an alarm and provide a signal to prevent the use of the defective battery during the start attempt cycle.

2. Relays : All relays shall be equipped with manual test buttons, status “ON” –

“OFF” indicators, be of the plug in type and shall meet all voltage and current requirements.

Remote Alarm Circuit: A total of five (5) standard alarm contacts, rated at 10 A, 125 V shall be provided and wired to the field terminal block, to indicate the following engine conditions:

a. SPDT contact : Engine Running b. 1 N/O contact : Contact shall close when main switch in Auto-position c. 1 N/O contact : Contract shall close when main switch is in OFF or

Manual position. d. SPDT contact : Engine trouble. This shall be a common alarm contact

indicating the following conditions. Engine over speed, engine fail to start, low oil pressure, high coolant temperature.

3. Description of Operation: A four positions main switch shall provide selection

of three starting method and one OFF position. OFF position shall shut down engine and alarms under any condition. AUTO position : a water pressure switch mounted inside the controller shall provide the engine start on water pressure drop. The automatic starting circuit shall alternate the two storage batteries after each start attempt. The attempt to start cycle shall consist of six cranks and five rest periods of 15 seconds duration. In the event of one battery failure, the starting cycle shall lock itself to




the remaining battery. In case of engine failure, the controller shall stop any further cranking and energize the ENGINE FAIL TO START alarm. A manual stop pushbutton shall enable engine shut down, but only after all starting causes have returned to normal. The automatic Weekly Exercise cycle shall also be operational in the auto-position. This cycle shall be programmed on the 7 day time clock. A short opening of the water solenoid valve shall create a momentary pressure drop and cause automatic engine start. At the end of the programmed Exercise cycle, engine shall shut down automatically. A manual test switch located on the time clock shall allow for manual test operation of the weekly exercise cycle. The 7 day time clock shall hold its time on A/C power failure and not require resetting. TEST Position : Engine shall start in the same manner as the above exercise cycle start. Turning main switch to Auto or Off position shall shut down engine. MANUAL Position : Start pushbutton “Battery 1” or “Battery 2”, shall override all automatic starting circuits, and allow for direct manual engine start. Safety Shut Down : Engine overspeed condition shall shut down engine without time delay and lock out until manually reset. The controller shall provide the following additional safety features Engine shut down in case of low oil pressure or high coolant temperature during exercise, test or optional AC failure operation only.

M. JOCKEY PUMP

The Jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the pump schedule on the drawings.

Pump shall be constructed as follows: Type : Vertical multi-stage motor driven, Rotation : Counter-clockwise, viewed down Motor : TEFC Motor bracket : Cast type, connecting motor to pump Diffuser cases : Pressure containing, flow directing Impellers : Stainless steel Shaft, l : Stainless steel, Pump discharge : Flanged type Control : Definite purpose type, magnetic starter In NEMA II enclosure, with reset button

Pump controller shall be factory pre-wired and tested. Pressure switch shall sense low pressure in the fire pump system. Set cut-in pressure 5 PSI above main fire pump cut-in pressure. Set cut-out pressure at system pressure. Provide minimum run timer to operate the pump for a minimum of 3 minutes. Across the fine start, H-O-A selector switch.




Control panel to contain a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic motor contractor and thermal overload relays with external reset Enclosure to be wall mounted with hinged door.

The Contractor shall supply and install fire-fighting pumps as shown and detailed on the drawings. The fire pump duty/standby and the Jockey pump, shall be comply with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), Local Building and Fire Department rules and regulations. Fire pumps shall be fully automatic, factory assembled, skid mounted units includes the following features:

a. One duty pump for Sprinkler system, electrically driven b. One Jockey pump, common for the system, electrically driven c. One Stand-by pump, common for both, diesel engine driven d. Galvanized Steel frame e. Galvanized suction and delivery manifolds with flanged connections f. Isolating valves and flexible connection on suction and delivery for each

pump g. Check valves on delivery for each pump h. Strainer on suction for each pump i. Pressure gauges, pressure switches and pressure relief valves j. Automatic control panel k. Fire pump set (Duty / standby) to be electrical driven for hose reel and fire

hydrant Pump construction shall be in cast iron casing, bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft complete with steel base frame / plate. The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type and rated for continuous operation at ambient temperature not less than 50 Deg. C, totally enclosed fan cooled with insulation class F and IP 54-protection level and rated for 415 volt, 3 phase and 50 Hz. The Engine shall be of 4-stroke mechanical injection air-cooled type with automatic speed regulator and flywheel housing. The Engine shall be provided with double battery kit (12 VDC) and charger, complete with exhaust pipe (insulated) and arranged to discharge outside. The Engine shall be manually switched off. The Control Panel shall consist of the following:

1 Starter with Overload protection for each motor. 1 Residual current circuit breaker (for each pump) 1 Set timing relays 1 Hand / off / Auto switch for each pump 1 System Mode selector switch




1 Run and Trip Indication Lamps for each motor 3 Indicating Lamps, “Power On”, “Low Water” and “Phase Failure”. 1 Main Neutral Link 1 Cyclic Controller 1 Pressure switch and adjustable setting for each pump 1 Dry run prevention relay and floats switch in feed tank 1 Set of Volt free contacts for BMS interface 1 Multi attempt relay to allow at least 3 attempts for Engine Starting 1 Earth leakage sensor with hooter, mute push button and Indication lamp.

The construction of the Panel to be to IP 65 level. The “hand” button shall be spring-loaded and shall override all control circuits exception the overload, so that the selected pump can be checked for performance and operation. The pump sets shall operate under the control of pressure switches The control panel design shall ensure:

a) Automatic operation of all pumps under the control of pressure switches and cyclic relay. The duty pump selection switch shall be in “Auto” position.

b) Automatic switch over to stand-by pump in case of failure of the duty pump. c) The hand position of H-O-A switches is only foe testing of pump and shall be

spring-loaded. Alternatively non-latching push button shall be used for starting pump in HAND mode.

d) Dry run protection based on level switch in the feed tank with indication. e) Volt free terminals for remote indications of common fault including low water

level in feed tank, and pump on demand. The fire pump set shall be constructed to local Fire department‟s requirements and a certificate stating this shall be provided with the pumps and shall confirm to NFPA and shall be a single stage horizontal split casing centrifugal type.




23.02.18 NOVEC 1230 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

(WITH DETECTION & CONTROL)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire detection system. B. Control and supervision systems. C. NOVEC 1230 storage and distribution suppression system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. B. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt-welding Fittings. C. ANSI/ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. D. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fittings. E. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. F. ANSI/ASME SEC 8 - Pressure Vessels. G. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. H. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Specifications for Brazing Filler Metal. I. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. J. ANSI/NFPA 2001 – NOVEC 1230 Fire Extinguishing Systems. K. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. L. ANSI/NFPA 72A - Local Protective Signaling Systems. M. ANSI/NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors. N. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type-C Elastic Element. O. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and

Seamless. P. ASTM A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. Q. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.




R. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

S. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. T. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. U. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. V. FS GG-G-76 - Gauges, Pressure and Vacuum, Dial Indicating (for Air,

Steam, Oil, Water, Ammonia, Chloro- fluorohydrocarbon Gases, and Compressed Gases).

W. MIL-M-12218 - X. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. Y. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory. Z. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire and Protection Services. AA. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design, fabrication, and installation: In compliance with requirements and recommendations of ANSI / NFPA 2001.

B. Fire Protection System: Total flooding of hazard area with 7 percent

concentration by volume of FK-5-1-12 - 3M e.a (NOVEC 1230) in max. 10 seconds discharge time, to extinguish fire.

C. System is fixed installation with equipment designed and installed to provide fire-

extinguishing capability for underfloor & occupied area of areas shown and clarified in design drawings.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide sufficient amount of NOVEC 1230 liquid to convert into NOVEC 1230 vapor. Consider the following when computing volume:

1. Volume of hazard area. 2. Specific volume of NOVEC 1230 vapor. 3. Additional quantities of NOVEC 1230 required to compensate for

openings, pipe losses, and nitrogen dilution. 4. Forced ventilation, fan coast downtime and damper actuation time. 5. Mechanical smoke control system. 6. Other special conditions affecting extinguishing efficiency.




B. Locate NOVEC 1230 supply and backup supply in each hazard area. C. Interface system with building fire alarm system, smoke control system &

emergency power off system, etc as per the Code and QCD requirements.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide total flooding of NOVEC 1230 concentration by volume, in maximum 10

seconds discharge time as per NFPA 2001.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: To bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction, Fire

Marshall, Owner's fire insurance underwriter. Indicate detailed layout of system, including piping and location of each component. Include control diagrams, wiring diagrams, and written sequence of operation.

B. Product Data: To bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction, Fire

Marshall, Owner's fire insurance underwriter. Furnish each piece of equipment comprising the system including cylinders, manifolds, control panel, nozzles, detectors, alarm bells or horns, switches, and annunciators.

C. Samples: Submit one sample of each detector, manual pull station, and nozzle. D. Design Data: Submit design calculations bearing stamp of approval of authority

having jurisdiction, Fire Marshall, Owner's fire insurance underwriter. Results shall include calculations that verify system pressures, nozzle flow rate, orifice code numbers, piping pressure losses, component flow data, and pipe sizes.

E. Test Reports: Indicate successful completion of tests. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation of equipment and

system components. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system meets or exceeds specified

requirements and ANSI/NFPA 2001. H. Welders Certification: Submit certificate indicating compliance with

[ANSI/ASME SEC 9] [ANSI/AWS D1.1].

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record exact location of equipment, equipment identification markings,

conduit and piping routing details, and agent storage positions.




1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include electrical schematic written description of system design, drawings

illustrating control logic and equipment locations, and technical brochures describing equipment.

B. Include list of recommended spare parts. C. Include checklists and procedures for emergency situations, trouble shooting

techniques, abort functions, system control panel operation, trouble procedures, and safety requirements.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, ANSI/NFPA 72A, and

ANSI/NFPA 72E; applicable UL, ULC, FM, LPC & ISO standards; and requirements of applicable codes and ordinances.

B. Indicate manufacturer's name and pressure rating on valve body. Indicate

manufacturer, type, and size, part number, orifice code or orifice diameter on discharge nozzles. Markings shall be standard and visible after installation.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9. D. Welders Certification: To ANSI/ASME SEC 9 ANSI/AWS D1.1.

E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.10 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing of products specified in

this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with

minimum ten years documented experience approved by manufacturer, who maintains a UL listed NOVEC 1230 recharging station and is capable of providing replacement charge within 24 hours.

C. Design system using a UL, ULC, LPC or FM approved calculation method under

direct supervision of a Professional Engineer:

1. Experienced in design of this work. 2. Licensed at the place where the Project is located.

1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable ANSI/NFPA 2001 code for system.




B. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/NFPA 72A code for electrical wiring and wiring devices.

C. Provide certification of inspection approval of NOVEC 1230 fire protection system

by authority having jurisdiction.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site B. Accept materials and components on site in shipping containers. Inspect for

damage. C. Deliver and store equipment in shipping containers with labeling in place. Deliver

NOVEC 1230 in approved containers.

1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage for replacement NOVEC 1230

1.14 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Conduct inspections 6 and 12 months from Date of Substantial Completion to

verify proper operation of system and to check agent container weight and pressure. Include a thorough check of controls, detection and alarm systems.

B. Submit documents, certifying satisfactory system conditions. Include

manufacturer's certificate of acceptance of Inspector's qualifications.

1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Submit maintenance materials. B. Provide one complete set of special tools required for servicing and maintaining

equipment . C. Provide one of each type of detector.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Refer to the attached manufacturer‟s list




2.2 PIPE AND PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A106, Schedule 80, black, Seamless.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3 malleable iron class 300 for sizes 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type fittings.

2. Joints: Screwed, ANSI/AWS D1.1 welded, or grooved and shouldered pipe

end couplings.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, L & K hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18 cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder 95-5 Tin Antimony, ANSI/AWS A5.8, BCup silver

braze.

C. Pipe Hangers: ANSI/ASME B31.1, UL or FM approved split clamp up to 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) size, riser clamps over 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) size, adequate to offset discharge thrust.

D. Escutcheons: Chrome plated pressed or stamped brass, one- piece or split

pattern, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) larger than opening. E. Gauges: ASME B40.1, UL 393, UL 404, [FS GG-G-76] [3-1/2 inch (90 mm)]

diameter cast aluminum case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front recalibration adjustment, black figures on white background, 1 percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated both psi and kPa.

2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS

A. Single action control: Molded surface housing fitted with "pull down" lever which locks in position after releasing spring-loaded contact switch.

B. Double action control: Molded surface housing fitted with "push in" tab and "pull

down" lever which locks in position after releasing spring-loaded contact switch. C. Labeling: Locate engraved label adjacent to each manual pull station, indicating

area protected, and that actuation will cause Halon discharge.

2.4 IONIZATION DETECTORS

A. Detector, ANSI/NFPA 72E, UL listed, adjustable sensitivity, operating on

ionization principle, activated by combustion products, plug-in, twist-lock unit easily removed from base.

B. Ionization chambers: Dual, one for fire detection and second for reference,

stabilizing detector for changes in temperature, humidity, and pressure.




C. Amplifier-Switching Circuit and Indicator Lamp: Solid state, two-wire, operating on detector line voltage. On alarm, unit shall lock and be reset at control panel.

D. Adjustment: Manual for normal or high sensitivity, with sensitivity setting visible

and requiring no special tools.

2.5 PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS A. Detector: ANSI/NFPA 72E, UL listed, adjustable sensitivity, with LED light

source and photocell, activated by smoke, plug-in, twist-lock unit easily removed from base.

B. Amplifier-Switching Circuit and Indicator Lamp: Solid state, two-wire operating

on detector line voltage. On alarm, unit shall lock and be reset at control panel. C. Adjustment: Manual for normal or high sensitivity, with sensitivity setting visible

and requiring no special tools.

2.6 DISCHARGE NOZZLES A. Discharge: To provide required rates of discharge and coverage and to

distribute NOVEC 1230 uniformly throughout protected area. B. Construction: One piece chrome plated brass or aluminum nozzle with textured

finish with female pipe thread integral on body. Direct discharge parallel to ceiling.

C. Identification: Permanently mark nozzles to show equivalent single orifice

diameter.

2.7 NOVEC 1230 CYLINDERS A. Cylinders: Standard model and size for ease of replacement and addition.

Design, fabricate, certify, and stamp cylinders in accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 8.

B. Contents: Fill cylinders with required NOVEC 1230. Pressurize with dry nitrogen

to 500 PSIG (3447 KPa) plus or minus 5 percent total pressure at 70 degrees F. C. Identification: Permanent plate, specifying agent, tare and gross weight, pounds

of NOVEC 1230 and pressurization level; installed so plate is visible and readable.

D. Safety Release: Equip cylinders with frangible disc safety device. E. Cylinder Valves: Heavy duty forged brass, incorporating safety release pressure

operated manual control, solenoid discharge valve, and pressure gauge. Provide solenoid pilot valves for each cylinder or bank of cylinders.




F. Manifold: Provide for systems with more than one cylinder, with rack to secure each cylinder and check valves between each cylinder discharge and manifold.

2.8 CONTROL CABINET A. UL or FM approved as alarm and releasing device, with solid state internal

circuitry enclosed in NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 cabinet. B. Provide supervision to ANSI/NFPA 72A, Class (A) of following circuits for wire

break or ground faults:

1. Zone detection loops. 2. Remote manual discharge stations. 3. Suppression system solenoid valves. 4. Power supply and circuit wiring and fuse. 5. Battery interconnecting wires and fuse. 6. Alarm in abort mode.

C. Equip panel with following standard features:

1. Visual and audible annunciation of trouble or alarm signals. 2. Panel reset switch. 3. Trouble alarm silence switch with ring back feature. 4. Cross zone detection. 5. Battery test meter and switch. 6. Manual discharge switch. 7. Deadman abort switch. 8. Programmable timers for pre-discharge and discharge, 0 - 60 second

cycle. 9. Isolated relay contactors for external alarm or equipment and ventilation

shutdown. 10. Relay contactors for general trouble signal. 11. Relay contactor activated by detector zone board in alarm or trouble

mode.

D. Provide sealed led – acid batteries and charger for continuous operation of detection, alarm, actuation and supervision functions for 48 hours. Provide automatic battery switch-over upon failure of primary power supply.

E. Conceal control switches and indicators, with exception of Power On, Master

Trouble, Supervisory Trouble, Circuit 1 Alarm, Circuit 2 Alarm and Release Indicators. Provide the following annunciation.

1. Power On : Green 2. System Trouble : Amber 3. Battery Trouble : Amber 4. Circuit 1 Trouble : Amber 5. Circuit 2 Trouble : Amber 6. Ground Fault : Amber 7. Release trouble : Amber




8. Alarm Circuit 1 : Red 9. Alarm Circuit 2 : Red 10. Agent Release : Red 11. Alarm Silence : Amber 12. Battery Polarity : Amber 13. Abort Trouble : Amber 14. Alarm Output Trouble : Amber 15. Supervisory Trouble :Amber

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Alarm Bells: Low voltage to allow supervision of circuit wiring, of modular design,

with minimum sound level of 88 db at 10 ft (3 meters). B. Alarm Horns: Low voltage to allow supervision of circuit wiring, with minimum

sound level of 90 db at 10 feet (3 meters)

2.10 OPERATING SEQUENCE

A. Actuation of one detector in either zone circuit: 1. Illuminate zone indicator. 2. Energize alarm horn. 3. Shut down air-conditioning system and close dampers. 4. Close doors to area. 5. Signal building fire alarm system.

B. Actuation of second detector on second zone circuit: 1. Illuminate zone indicator. 2. Energize alarm horn. 3. Shut down power to protected equipment. 4. Actuate time delay for up to 60 seconds. 5. Release NOVEC 1230 in to protected area. 6. If abort switch is engaged, delay release. 7. Upon abort switch disengagement release NOVEC 1230 unless system

cleared and reset.

C. Discharge of NOVEC 1230 1. Sounds alarm horns. 2. Operates strobes.

D. Temperature Detection 1. Lower Temperature: Illuminate indicator and energize horn. 2. Higher Temperature: Shut down power to protected equipment.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that spaces are ready to receive work . B. Verify that enclosing walls are continuous above ceilings and below raised floors

to enable required concentration to be built up and maintained for required time to ensure effective fire extinction.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/NFPA 2001 B. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. [Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.]

Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. Blow out pipe before nozzles or discharge devices are installed.

C. Route piping in orderly manner, concealed, plumb and parallel to building

structure, and maintain gradient. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.

D. Securely support piping in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1 with allowance for

NOVEC 1230 thrust forces, and thermal expansion and contraction. E. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.

Roll groove piping only. F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting, in

accordance with Section 15055. H. Identify in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 2001 requirements. Place directional

arrows and system labels wherever piping changes direction and minimum 20 feet (6 meters) on straight runs.

I. Secure cylinders as indicated on Drawings. [Where manifolded, mount and

support by rack as indicated. For each system provide same size cylinders containing equal amounts of liquid.]

J. In rooms with suspended ceiling tiles, clip or retain tiles within 4 foot (1.2 m)

radius of the nozzles to prevent lifting during discharge. K. Install wiring in accordance with Section [16120] & [16180] requirements. L. Make final connections between equipment and system wiring under direct

supervision of factory trained representative of manufacturer.




M. Install engraved plastic instruction plate, detailing emergency procedures, at control panel and at each manual discharge and abort switch location. At control panel identify control logic units, contacts, and major circuits with permanent nameplates.

N. At hazard area walls pack space between pipe, pipe sleeve or surface

penetration with mineral fiber with elastomer calk to depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm). Provide escutcheons where exposed piping passes through walls, floors, and ceilings. Seal pipe penetrations of fire separations.

O. Locate discharge nozzle approximately 6 inches (150 mm) above or below ceiling

and 6 inches (150 mm) below raised floors. Avoid interference with other piping and equipment.

P. Locate remote manual releases at one or more doors to protect area where

indicated. Locate deadman abort switch adjacent. Q. Provide signal to building fire alarm system. Refer to Section 16721. R. Provide interlock with automatic closing door releases. S. Provide interlock with motorized dampers. Refer to Section 15952.

3.3 TESTING A. Provide testing and analysis. B. Test distribution piping and valving, prior to nozzle installation, to 50 psig (340

kPa) air pressure test. Inspect joints using soap water solution or halide torch or lamp. Repair leaks and retest. Maintain test pressure for four hours.

C. Upon completion of installation provide final checkout inspection by factory

trained representative of manufacturer to ascertain proper system operation. Leave system in a fully commissioned and automatic readiness state with circuitry energized and supervised.

D. Test circuits including automatic discharge, manual discharge, equipment shut-

down, alarm devices, and storage container pressure. Test supervision of each circuit.

E. Check each ionization detector with a sensitivity meter, adjust. Record

sensitivity, and include record in test report. F. Submit original copies of tests, indicating that factory trained technical

representatives of the manufacturer have inspected and tested systems and are satisfied with methods of installation, connections and operation.




3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems. B. Provide experienced manufacturer's field engineer to supervise installation and

performance testing of the system.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration.

B. Demonstrate that components except cylinder discharge assembly, are functioning properly and in conjunction with controls system.

C. Submit integrated step-by-step test procedure for approval 30 days prior to start

of demonstration.

1. Arrange meeting prior to demonstration with representatives of the Owner, the Owner's Underwriter, and the installer.

2. Perform visual inspection and overall review of system installed. 3. Place minimum of three UL listed recording analyzers in space. Provide

certification that testing devices have been checked by recognized testing authority within two weeks of date of demonstration.

4. Certify that replacement charge can be provided within 24 hours of

demonstration. D. Discharge system using manual-release switch mounted on control panel. Run

discharge test with compressed nitrogen at 500 PSIG (3447 KPa) NOVEC 1230 After discharge, check cylinders for complete pressure release.

E. After satisfactory completion of discharge test, fill cylinders with amount of

NOVEC 1230 specified in design calculations.

23.02.19 AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

The Aerosol Fire Extinguishing System shall be in accordance with NFPA 2010.

The aerosol extinguishing Agent must not be pressurized and must not be toxic; supportive documentation mandatory. The extinguishing agent must not cause excessive cooling to avoid damage to components and must be suitable for Class A, B, C and F Fire as per EN2 Classification. The extinguishing agent must not be pyrotechnic; supportive documentation mandatory and must be of a stable media, and have no physical and/or chemical changes in temperatures of over 275 deg C. The extinguishing agent must extinguish fire chemically. The extinguishing agent must be environmentally friendly, ecologically friendly, and SNAP Listed (Significant New Alternative Policy) as per EPA; supportive documentation is mandatory. The




atmospheric Life Time should be negligible and the global Warming Potential shall be zero. The ozone depletion potential shall also be zero. The extinguishing agent shall be non-Corrosive for electronic components. The aerosol system shall not use the pressure piping & valves. The extinguishing system must be versatile, and suitable for possible future extension and/or additional room protection. The manufacturer of the aerosol extinguishing system shall be ISO 9001 & ISO 14000 Certified. It should have the International Certification, and should be in accordance with the NFPA Standards and relevant Test Reports shall be produced. It should have approval such as UL/ULC, KIWA, BSI, ANPI, LPC, etc. The submittal shall include Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS, installation reference list for similar applications and for any other relevant installations. The manufacturer should have at least 10 years relevant industry experience. The Certified Life Time of Extinguishing Agent not less than 15 years. The extinguishing agent discharge Time shall be in the range of 5 – 10 sec. The agent shall be suitable for the operating in the ambient temperature range of (minus) -50 C to (plus) 150 deg C and should be Suitable for humidity level of up to 98%.




23.3.00 EXECUTION

23.3.01 PREPARATION

Ensure concrete bases are provided for floor mounted equipment.

23.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Fire Protection System in compliance with applicable NFPA standards (as referenced by the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Pipe and Fittings 1. Acceptable pipe connection methods:

Schedule 40: Cut grooves or threaded. 2. Acceptable pipe size reducers:

a. Reducing fittings. b. Tapered reducers.

3. Companion flanges or reducing grooved couplings are unacceptable. 4. Install piping as follows, unless noted otherwise:

a. Parallel to walls. b. Above suspended ceilings. c. Behind walls.

5. Galvanized pipe and fittings:

a. Use where exposed to corrosive atmospheres in the following locations: Exterior piping.

b. Field paint damaged galvanizing on pipe and fittings.

6. Label piping appropriately.

C. Pipe Supports Install hangers in compliance with Section 15140 and NFPA 13 (as referenced by the authority having jurisdiction). All pipe hangers bolts, nuts, washers and other hardware to be hot dipped galvanized construction for use at the cooling towers. All outdoor piping to be hot dipped galvanized construction with all threads coated to prevent corrosion from outdoor elements.

D. Pipe Sleeves and Seals Install sleeves and seals in compliance with Section 15140.




E. Drains Provide drainage facilities as follows:

a. In accordance with NFPA standards, and as indicated. b. Drain entire system by gravity. c. Drain size not less than 3/4 inch. d. Provide nipple and cap or brass plug for systems or partial systems of 5

gallons or less. e. Provide valve and plug for systems or partial systems of more than 5 gallons.

F. Control Valves 1. Bolt position on lugged butterfly valves to allow removal of downstream piping. 2. Globe or ball valves to be used as shutoff valves for:

a. Water piping systems. b. Drain valves. c. Test valves.

G. Reduced Pressure (Zone Principal) Backflow Preventer

1. Size as indicated on plans. 2. Install where shown and in accordance with manufacturer‟s

recommendations.

H. Standpipe and Fire hose Valves Mount valves minimum 1070 mm and maximum 1525 mm above finished floor elevation.

I. Alarms Install electric alarms as follows:

a. Above fire department Siamese connection or as indicated on plans. b. No less than 2.5 meters above finished grade. c. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics.

J. Supervisory Devices

1. Coordinate with Division 16 for electrical characteristics. 2. Provide supervisor (tamper) switch for each control valve. 3. Provide water flow switch for each wet pipe system and where otherwise

indicated. a. Locate minimum distance recommended from change in flow direction. b. Field adjust for proper flow retard.




K. Combination Test and Drain Connection 1. Locate in accessible location. 2. Pipe express drain discharge as directed on the drawings. 3. Provide pressure gauge at test connection with brass 3-way valve and test plug.

L. Down Spout Nozzle

1. Verify location with architectural elevations. 2. Provide pipe increaser for connection to nozzle when drain line size is less than

available minimum size nozzle outlet.

M. Fire Department Connections 1. Install fire department connections where indicated on plans. 2. Install not less than 1 meter and not more 1.2 meters above adjacent grade.

Verify with architectural elevations.

N. Sprinklers 1. Unless noted otherwise, provide sprinkler types as indicated on drawings. 2. Install sprinklers in fittings after piping is in place. 3. Install exposed sprinklers with frame parallel to branch line. 4. Install sprinkler guards where sprinklers are within 2.2 meters of floor, or when

subject to injury. 5. Line sprinklers up with themselves. 6. Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, deliver spare heads and wrench and

place in spare head cabinet(s).

O. Cabinets Mount cabinets at elevation indicated on architectural drawings.

P. Signs Provide permanent signs to identify:

a. Drains. b. Test connections. c. Shut-off valves. d. Risers supplying hydraulically designed systems. e. Each alarm.

Q. Power Wiring: Furnished and installed under Division 16.




23.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Arrange, conduct, and document all performance and acceptance tests required by the applicable NFPA Standards and the authority having jurisdiction.

1. Give sufficient advance notice of time of test (2 week minimum). 2. Test must be witnessed by:

a. Owner's fire department and maintenance representative. b. Architect/Engineer representative. c. Authorized inspector. d. Owner's insurance representative.

3. Deficiencies to be corrected at no additional cost to owner. 4. Use new pipe and fittings as necessary to correct leaks. 5. Temporary repairs of leaks not acceptable. 6. Repair water damage caused by leaks or test procedures.

B. Conduct tests prior to:

1. Painting. 2. Covering. 3. Concealing in any way.

C. Pressure test control valves as follows:

1. While under full system pressure. 2. Open and close each valve. 3. Demonstrate proper operation to owner.

D. Test drain valves and test valves as follows:

1. Open to full flow for two minutes. 2. Close to test for tightness.

23.3.04 CLEANING AND FLUSHING

Procedure: 1. Clean and flush piping systems and connections in accordance with the

applicable NFPA Standards and the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Connect hoses to outlets and discharge to sewer. 3. Discharge water must be free of rust, stain and discoloration. 4. Remove stains caused by discharge. 5. Replace equipment and materials that cannot be cleaned. 6. Provide hoses and hose connections for this work.

23.3.05 PRE-COMMISSIONING WORKS

Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered stored and maintained in storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves




and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stored in suitable racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weather proofed cover to be supplied by the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components are kept clean and dry. Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests the entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally. All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the flushing out provision shall be made to exclude any item of plant, which could be damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the consultant.

23.3.06 TESTING

All paperwork and the whole installation shall be hydraulic pressure tested to twice the normal working pressure or 16.0 bars whichever is greater. The Pressure shall be maintained for a period of not less than 24 hours, and the drop in pressure recorded, and the drop in pressure shall be within the specified limits and as per the relevance British standards. Any equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure test shall be adequately protected from the system during the tests. All leaks are to be immediately repaired and the installations re-tested until the above requirements are obtained. All the required tests are to be performed before application of the paint and valve adjustments made with the pumps in operation. The Consultant‟s decision will be final and binding the contractor.

23.3.07 PAINTING

All pipe works for the fire fighting services shall be given one coat of rich primer and two coats of “Post office Red” paint after installation and pressure testing.


All items of Fire Protection Services shall be labeled and identified as required, and as per the requirements of the Fire Department.




23.3.09 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURES


1. Hose Reel Cabinets THORN NORSEN UK

MOYNE IRELAND NOHA NORWAY NAFFCO UAE

2. Sprinkler Heads RELIABLE USA TYCO USA GRINNEL USA GLOBE USA

3. Control Valves KIDDE UK GLOBE USA GRINNEL USA VICTAULIC USA

4. Landing Valve ANGUS UK

GIACOMINI ITALY TYCO USA MOYNE IRELAND

5. Fire Extinguisher CHUBB UK NAFFCO UK ANGUS UK MOYNE IRELAND

6. Fire Fighting Pipes SURYA INDIA ECONOSTO EUROPE PACIFIC THAILAND SHILED UK

7. Fire Fighting Fittings CRANE UK (Threaded) SHIELD UK NIPPON JAPAN

ECONOSTO EUROPE

8. Fire Fighting Fittings VICTAULIC USA (Groove Mechanical) GRINNEL USA CENTRAL USA SHIELD UK TYCO USA

9. Support System HELTI GERMANY / USA SIKLA GERMANY/ USA WEICCO INDIA PHD COLOMBIA




10. NOVEC 1230 CHEMETRON USA SEVO USA TYCO USA

11. Fire Blanket NAFFCO UAE MOYNE IRELAND CHUBB USA 12. Fire Pumps ITT USA

AURORA USA PATTERSON USA PEERLESS USA

vol. 3 electrical and mechanical specifications

Documents

materials section

plumbing general

electrical installation

f penthouse

title of specifications

plumbing materials

distribution section

execution section